PremierOne TM

CAD User Guide for

PremierOne Version
4.1

2015 0060190214-A
© 2015 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Copyrights

Copyrights
The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer
programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media.

Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for
copyright computer programs, including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the
copyright computer program. Accordingly, any copyright Motorola computer programs contained in
the Motorola products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner
without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products
shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license
under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the rights that arise by
operation of law in the sale of a product.

Restrictions
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola. It is furnished under a license
agreement and may be used and/or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of the agreement.
Software and documentation are copyright materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by
law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored
in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any
means, without prior written permission of Motorola.

Accuracy
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola
assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from the use
of the information obtained herein. Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products
described herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this
document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any
person of revisions or changes. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the application
or use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent
rights of others.

Trademarks
Motorola, Moto, Motorola Solutions, PremierOne, and the stylized M logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, and Windows Server are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other product or service names are the property
of their respective owners.

Build date: May 6, 2016

2 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Contents

Contents
Copyrights ...............................................................................................................2
List of Tables .........................................................................................................23
Chapter 1: Introduction.........................................................................................25
What Is in This Book .............................................................................................................25
Related Documents...............................................................................................................26
About the Conventions Used in This Guide ..........................................................................27
Keyboard Conventions ..................................................................................................27
Typographic Conventions..............................................................................................28
Notes and Cautions.......................................................................................................28
Searching for Information......................................................................................................28
Displaying Version Information .............................................................................................29
Contacting Technical Support ...............................................................................................29
Using Motorola Solutions Online...........................................................................................30

Chapter 2: Accessing the PremierOne Client .....................................................31

Logging Into PremierOne ......................................................................................................31
Viewing Login Details............................................................................................................36
Logging Out of PremierOne ..................................................................................................37
Changing Your Password .....................................................................................................38
Locking and Unlocking Your Session....................................................................................40
Locking Your Session....................................................................................................40
Unlocking Your Session ................................................................................................40
Transferring Sessions ...........................................................................................................41

Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD ............................................45

Overview of the Workstation .................................................................................................45
Overview of the PremierOne CAD Client Window ................................................................46
Using the PremierOne CAD Client Menus ....................................................................47
The PremierOne CAD Client Menu Reference..................................................... 48
Console Menu Commands ................................................................................... 48
Edit Menu Commands .......................................................................................... 49
Work Area Menu Commands ............................................................................... 49
Utilities Menu Commands..................................................................................... 50
Help Menu Commands......................................................................................... 51
Using the Work Area Tabs ............................................................................................52

Send Feedback 3
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Contents

Issuing Commands for Work Areas ......................................................................53

Using the Primary Work Area ....................................................................................... 54
Working With Window Overlays.................................................................................... 55
Using the Work Assist Area .......................................................................................... 55
Using the Information Panel.......................................................................................... 56
Description of the Information Panel .....................................................................56
Accessing the Information Panel...........................................................................58
Moving the Information Panel ...............................................................................58
Closing or Minimizing the Information Panel.........................................................59
Function Keys and Other Keyboard Shortcuts ..................................................................... 59
General Function Keys and Other Keyboard Shortcuts................................................ 60
Keyboard Shortcuts for Menus ..................................................................................... 64
Keyboard Shortcuts for Fields in the Primary Work Area ............................................. 65
Hot Keys ....................................................................................................................... 65
Keyboard Shortcuts for User-Entered Text................................................................... 66
Keyboard Shortcuts for Moving Between Areas of the PremierOne CAD Client .......... 66
Keyboard Shortcuts for Status Monitors ....................................................................... 67
Keyboard Shortcuts for the Priority Notification Window .............................................. 67
Keyboard Shortcuts for Interfaces ................................................................................ 67
Keyboard Shortcuts for Case Manager in ProQA ......................................................... 68
Using Wildcards in Searches................................................................................................ 68

Chapter 4: Using PremierOne CAD Commands ................................................ 71

Using the Command Line to Open a Form ........................................................................... 71
Understanding Command Line Elements ............................................................................. 73
Command IDs ............................................................................................................... 73
Identifiers ...................................................................................................................... 73
User-Supplied Values ................................................................................................... 73
Command Line Punctuation ................................................................................................. 74
Periods.......................................................................................................................... 74
Semicolons ................................................................................................................... 74
Commas........................................................................................................................ 75
Forward Slashes ........................................................................................................... 75
Whitespace ................................................................................................................... 75
Punctuation in User-Supplied Values ........................................................................... 76
Working with Command Identifier Entry Order ..................................................................... 76
Entering Identifiers in Default Order.............................................................................. 76
Skipping Identifiers ....................................................................................................... 77
Entering Identifiers Out of Default Order....................................................................... 77

4 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Contents

Using Command Line Hints ..................................................................................................78

Submitting Information to PremierOne CAD .........................................................................79
PremierOne CAD Command Reference ...............................................................................79
Trusted Agency Security .......................................................................................................83

Chapter 5: Using Call Control ..............................................................................85

Call States.............................................................................................................................85
Telephony Configurations .....................................................................................................86
Overview of the Call Control Window....................................................................................87
Call Control Menu Bar ...................................................................................................88
Status Area....................................................................................................................88
Caller Information Area .................................................................................................90
Dial Area........................................................................................................................92
Telephony Area .............................................................................................................92
Queue Buttons...................................................................................................... 92
Call Status Bar...................................................................................................... 94
Call Action Buttons ............................................................................................... 94
List Area ........................................................................................................................95
List Area tabs........................................................................................................ 95
General Characteristics of the List Area tabs ....................................................... 98
Text Conversation Window ...........................................................................................98
TDD Conversation Window ...........................................................................................99
Transfer Area ..............................................................................................................100
Call Control Phone Book .............................................................................................101
Managing Call Control Sessions .........................................................................................102
Logging in to Call Control ............................................................................................103
Transferring Call Control Sessions..............................................................................103
Locking Call Control Sessions.....................................................................................104
Logging Out of Call Control .........................................................................................104
Changing the Agent ID........................................................................................................104
Adjusting Conversation and Ringer Volume .......................................................................105
Orphaning Areas in the Call Control Window......................................................................105
Setting the Console Status..................................................................................................105
Viewing ANI/ALI Data..........................................................................................................106
Flagging ALI Records as Incorrect ..............................................................................108
Viewing SMS ALI Data ................................................................................................109
Viewing Conference Information .................................................................................110
Looking up ALI Information .........................................................................................111
Initiating Voice Calls............................................................................................................111

Send Feedback 5
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Contents

Making Outgoing Voice Calls...................................................................................... 112

Calling Numbers Back ................................................................................................ 112
Initiating Outgoing Voice Call to RSPs........................................................................ 113
Initiating Voice Calls on a Ringdown Line................................................................... 113
Initiating Calls to Another Position .............................................................................. 113
Using Hook Flash........................................................................................................ 113
Managing Calls ................................................................................................................... 114
Answering Voice Calls and Initiating Incidents ........................................................... 114
Muting Calls ................................................................................................................ 115
Releasing Calls ........................................................................................................... 116
Holding Calls............................................................................................................... 116
Taking Held Voice Calls off Hold ................................................................................ 117
Parking Calls............................................................................................................... 117
Conferencing Calls...................................................................................................... 118
Conferencing Calls Using a NoHold Conference ................................................118
Conferencing Calls Using a Standard Conference .............................................119
Transferring Calls........................................................................................................ 119
Transferring Calls Using a NoHold Transfer .......................................................119
Transferring Calls Using a Standard Transfer.....................................................120
Transferring Calls Using a Blind Transfer ...........................................................120
Transferring Calls to Service Providers ...................................................................... 120
Replaying Calls ........................................................................................................... 121
Listening to and Joining Calls ..................................................................................... 122
Barging in on Calls...................................................................................................... 123
Using the Call Control Phone Book ............................................................................ 123
Adding Call Notes ....................................................................................................... 124
Viewing Call Notes...................................................................................................... 126
Managing Abandoned Calls........................................................................................ 126
Working With Text Sessions ....................................................................................... 127
Changing the Header for an SMS Call................................................................129
Initiating an Incident for an SMS Call ..................................................................129
Working With TDD Calls ............................................................................................. 130
Changing the Header for a TDD Call ..................................................................132
Initiating an Incident for a TDD Call ....................................................................133
Understanding Associated Calls......................................................................................... 133
Using the Call Control Command (NG) .............................................................................. 135
Function Keys for Call Control ............................................................................................ 136
Viewing Call Details for Voice Calls.................................................................................... 138

6 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Contents

Chapter 6: Controlling Your Session.................................................................141

Agency Definitions ..............................................................................................................141
Clearing Work Areas (CW)..................................................................................................142
Refreshing Your Status Monitor and Map Displays (DS) ....................................................143
Monitoring Areas .................................................................................................................144
Setting Monitored Areas From the Monitor Areas Form..............................................144
Setting Monitored Areas From the Command Line (MA) ............................................146
Modifying Your Signed On Areas (CC) ...............................................................................147
Changing Your Signon Agency (SW)..................................................................................148
Viewing Your Working Agency............................................................................................149
Modifying Coverage Responsibilities From the Command Line (WT) ................................149
Displaying Information for Signed on Resources (WH).......................................................152
Switching Your Console to Online Mode (OL) ....................................................................154

Chapter 7: Using Call Center Commands .........................................................155

Using Agency Plans ............................................................................................................155
Changing Agency Plans From the Activate Plan Form ...............................................156
Changing Agency Plans From the Command Line (AP) .............................................156
Changing or Viewing the Active Shift (AS)..........................................................................157
Changing the Signed On Area Assignments (SC) ..............................................................158
Changing the Console Display Configuration (DC).............................................................159

Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation....................................................161

Understanding the Incident Initiation Process.....................................................................161
Phase One – Receiving Information Regarding an Occurrence .................................161
Phase Two – Gathering Information and Entering it into PremierOne CAD................162
Phase Three – Behind the Scenes Processing...........................................................162
Phase Four – Submitting Information..........................................................................162
Understanding Incident Start and Create Times .................................................................163
Entering Locations in CAD ..................................................................................................163
Entering Locations as Partial or Whole Street Addresses...........................................164
Entering Locations Using Parentheses .......................................................................164
Entering Locations as Street Names Without Street Numbers ...................................165
Entering Locations as Block Ranges...........................................................................166
Entering Locations as Block Ranges from the Command Line ...................................166
Entering Locations as Valid Street Names and Invalid Street Numbers .....................167
Entering Locations as Common Place Names............................................................167
Entering Locations as Intersection Names..................................................................168
Entering Locations as Alias Names.............................................................................168

Send Feedback 7
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Contents

Entering Locations as Latitude and Longitude Coordinates ....................................... 168

Entering Locations as Alarm Numbers ....................................................................... 170
Understanding Address Verification ................................................................................... 171
Verification of UK Addresses .............................................................................................. 172
Understanding Incident Numbers ....................................................................................... 173
Understanding Incident Statuses........................................................................................ 174
Incidents in Multi-Beat Intersections ................................................................................... 175
Selecting Beats in Multi-Beat Intersections.........................................................176
Updating Incident Locations ............................................................................................... 178
Updating a Street Address to an Invalid Location for an Agency................................ 178
Work Assist Area - Address Verification ..................................................................... 179
Work Assist Area - Multiple Beats............................................................................... 180
Related Incident Initiation Forms ........................................................................................ 181
Potential Duplicate Incidents....................................................................................... 182
Work Assist Area - Potential Duplicate Incidents ................................................183
Previous Locations, Persons, and Vehicles................................................................ 183
Work Assist Area - Previous Location, Persons, Vehicles ..................................184
Premise and Hazard Information ................................................................................ 185
Work Assist Area - Premise Hazard Information.................................................186
Incident Query Information.......................................................................................... 187
Work Assist Area - Query Information.................................................................187
ProQA Information ...................................................................................................... 189
Work Assist Area - ProQA Information................................................................189
Attachments ................................................................................................................ 189
Work Assist Area - Attachments ................................................................................. 193
Understanding Incident IRFs .............................................................................................. 194
Understanding Incident Type Filtering and Agency Type Defaults..................................... 194

Chapter 9: Alerts and Notifications................................................................... 197

Understanding Priority Comments and Priority Updates .................................................... 197
Priority Comments ...................................................................................................... 198
Priority Updates .......................................................................................................... 199
Priority Update Notifications........................................................................................ 200
Understanding GPS Device Failure Notifications ............................................................... 202
Understanding Status Monitor Alerts .................................................................................. 203
Understanding BOLO Notifications..................................................................................... 204
Understanding Hot Hit Notifications.................................................................................... 205
Understanding Emergency Alerts ....................................................................................... 206

8 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Contents

Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents ..........................................................................209

Initiating Incidents From the Initiate Incident Form .............................................................209
Using Update On Demand ..........................................................................................216
Setting the Details to Follow Flag................................................................................219
Adding Person Information to an Incident ...................................................................220
Work Assist Area - Persons................................................................................ 223
Adding Vehicle Information to an Incident...................................................................223
Work Assist Area - Vehicles ............................................................................... 227
Scheduling Incidents ...................................................................................................228
Work Assist Area - Scheduled Incidents ............................................................ 229
Stored Vehicle Entry........................................................................................... 229
Initiating an Incident From the Command Line (II) .............................................................230
Using F8 to Issue the Initiate Incident Command........................................................231
Creating Associated Incidents When Creating the Initial Incident.......................................231
Creating Traffic Stops and Field-Initiated Incidents ............................................................234
One-Pass Traffic Stops ...............................................................................................235
Two-Pass Traffic Stops ...............................................................................................235
Creating Traffic Stops or Field-Initiated Incidents From the Field Initiate Form ..........236
Creating Traffic Stops or Field-Initiated Incidents From the Command Line (FI) ........239
Using F7 to Issue the Field Initiate Command ............................................................240
Adding Attachments ....................................................................................................240
Creating Incidents from Query Responses .........................................................................243

Chapter 11: Updating Incidents .........................................................................245

Displaying and Updating Incidents From the Incident Management Form .........................245
Updating Location Information ....................................................................................247
Updating Location Information from the Command Line .................................... 249
Updating Location Information in a Multi-Beat Situation..................................... 249
Related Work Assist Areas – Incident Management Form..........................................249
Work Assist Area – Cmnt Tab ............................................................................ 250
Work Assist Area – Prev Tab ............................................................................. 253
Work Assist Area – Assoc Tab ........................................................................... 254
Work Assist Area – Query Tab ........................................................................... 255
Work Assist Area – Haz Tab .............................................................................. 256
Work Assist Area – Attach Tab........................................................................... 257
Work Assist Area – Dptch Tab ........................................................................... 258
Work Assist Area – Radio Tab ........................................................................... 260
Work Assist Area – Pers Tab ............................................................................. 261

Send Feedback 9
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Contents

Work Assist Area – Veh Tab ...............................................................................262

Using F3 to Issue the Update Incident Command ...................................................... 262
Viewing and Updating Person Information.................................................................. 263
Viewing and Updating Vehicle Information ................................................................. 264
Updating Incidents From the Command Line (IU) .............................................................. 266
Radio Pseudo-Unit Commands .................................................................................. 266
Updating Comments ........................................................................................................... 267
Viewing and Adding Incident Comments From the Incident Management Form........ 267
Adding Incident Comments From the Command Line ................................................ 268
Requesting Contractors ..................................................................................................... 268
Understanding Rotation Frequency ............................................................................ 269
Using Default Contractor Rotations ............................................................................ 269
Requesting Contractors From the Contractor Request Form ..................................... 269
Understanding Action Code Selections...............................................................273
Requesting Contractors From the Command Line (CR)............................................. 274
Updating Contractor Requests.................................................................................... 275
Updating Contractor Requests From the Persons or Vehicles Tab ....................276
Updating Contractor Requests From the Command Line (CU) ..........................278

Chapter 12: Managing Incidents ....................................................................... 281

Managing Incident Timeout Values .................................................................................... 281
Resetting Incident Timeout Values From the Incident Status Monitor ........................ 281
Resetting Incident Timeout Values From the Command Line (RI) ............................ 282
Cloning Incidents ................................................................................................................ 283
Cloning Incidents From the Clone Incident Form........................................................ 283
Cloning Incidents From the Command Line (CI)......................................................... 286
Transferring Incidents ......................................................................................................... 287
Creating Associated Incidents After Incident Initiation (IA)................................................. 287
Disassociating Incidents ..................................................................................................... 288
Disassociating Incidents from the Incident Management Form .................................. 288
Disassociating Incidents From the Command Line (DI).............................................. 289
Creating an Incident Summary List..................................................................................... 290
Creating an Incident Summary List From the Incident Summary Form ...................... 290
Creating an Incident Summary List From the Command Line (IS) ............................. 292
Searching for and Displaying Incidents .............................................................................. 293
Searching for Incidents From the Incident Recall Form.............................................. 293
Work Assist Area – Incident Recall .....................................................................300
Searching for Incidents From the Command Line (IR) ............................................... 300
Viewing Incident History ..................................................................................................... 302

10 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Contents

Viewing Incident History From the Incident Management Form..................................302

Viewing Incident History From the Command Line (IH) ..............................................304
Generating Report Numbers for Incidents (RP) ..................................................................306
Sending Incident Data to Infotrak (IF) .................................................................................307

Chapter 13: Managing Resources......................................................................309

Summary of Unit Management ...........................................................................................309
Understanding Unit IDs .......................................................................................................311
Placing Units On Duty .........................................................................................................312
Placing Units On Duty From the Unit Management Form ...........................................312
Work Assist Area – Assignments Tab Unit Management Form ......................... 316
Placing Units On Duty From the Command Line (ON)................................................316
CAD-to-CAD and On Duty Transactions .....................................................................317
Troubleshooting On Duty Transfer Messages for a Foreign Agency Unit .......... 317
Taking Units Off Duty ..........................................................................................................318
Taking Units Off Duty From the Unit Management Form ............................................319
Taking Units Off Duty From the Command Line (UF) .................................................320
CAD-to-CAD and Off Duty Transactions .....................................................................320
Troubleshooting Off Duty Transfer Messages for a Foreign Agency Unit .......... 320
Updating Unit Status ...........................................................................................................321
Unit Status and Radio Pseudo-Units...........................................................................321
Updating Unit Status From the Unit Management Form .............................................321
Work Assist Area – Status Tab Unit Management Form .................................... 323
Updating Unit Status From the Command Line (US) ..................................................323
Updating Unit Assignments.................................................................................................324
Updating Unit Assignments From the Unit Management Form...................................324
Updating Duty Information From the Unit Assignments Form ............................ 325
Updating Jurisdiction Information From the Unit Assignments Form ................. 327
Updating Personnel Information From the Unit Assignments Form ................... 328
Updating Vehicle Information From the Unit Assignments Form........................ 329
Updating Unit Equipment Information From the Unit Assignments Form ........... 330
Updating Capability Information From the Unit Assignments Form.................... 331
Updating Unit Assignments From the Command Line (UA)........................................333
Temporarily Changing Station Staffing for a Unit ............................................... 333
CAD-to-CAD and Unit Status Updates........................................................................334
Transferring Units................................................................................................................334
Viewing Unit History ............................................................................................................335
Viewing Unit History From the Unit History Search Form ...........................................335
Viewing Unit History From the Command Line (UH)...................................................337

Send Feedback 11
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Contents

Displaying Current Unit Activities........................................................................................ 338

Displaying Unit Current Activities From the Unit Summary Form ............................... 338
Displaying Unit Current Activities From the Command Line (UC) .............................. 340
Displaying Lineup Lists ....................................................................................................... 341
Displaying Lineup Lists From the Lineup List Form .................................................... 341
Displaying Lineup Lists From the Command Line (LL) ............................................... 342
Using Temporary Units ....................................................................................................... 343
Designating Temporary Units ..................................................................................... 343
Assigning Incident Numbers to Temporary Units........................................................ 344
Valid Commands for Temporary Units........................................................................ 344
Transitioning Temporary Units to On Duty Status ...................................................... 345
Using Roll Calls .................................................................................................................. 346
Creating Roll Calls ...................................................................................................... 346
Selecting Units for a Roll Call ..................................................................................... 348
Managing Units in a Roll Call...................................................................................... 351
Scheduling Units in a Roll Call.................................................................................... 354
Temporarily Updating the Next Occurrence of a Roll Call .......................................... 355
Updating the Last Occurrence of a Roll Call............................................................... 357
Modifying Master Roll Calls ........................................................................................ 359
Fixing Transaction Errors in Roll Calls........................................................................ 360
Performing Roll Calls .................................................................................................. 362
Performing Roll Calls From the Roll Call Form ...................................................362
Performing Roll Calls From the Command Line (RC) .........................................362
Using Unit Groups .............................................................................................................. 363
Creating Unit Groups From the Unit Group Form ....................................................... 364
Work Assist Area – Unit Groups .........................................................................365
Creating Unit Groups From the Command Line (UG)................................................. 366
Modifying Unit Groups From the Unit Group Form ..................................................... 367
Modifying Unit Groups From the Command Line (UG)............................................... 368
Resetting a Unit Status Timer (UO) .................................................................................... 368
Resetting a Unit Emergency Indicator (RE)........................................................................ 369
Station Staffing ................................................................................................................... 370
Specialized Station-Staffed Units................................................................................ 371
Station Staffing Definitions......................................................................................... 371
Availability of Station-Staffed Units ............................................................................. 372
Stations With Station-Staffed Units............................................................................. 373
Move Ups and Station-Staffed Units ...................................................................373
Temporarily Staffing Station-Staffed Units ..........................................................373

12 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Contents

Normal and Minimum Staffing Levels..........................................................................373

Station Status Command ...........................................................................................374
Viewing the Staffing Level of a Station From the Station Status Form............... 375
Changing or Viewing the Staffing Level of a Station From the
Command Line (ST) ...................................................................................... 376
How PremierOne Applies Station Staffing Rules ........................................................377
When You Apply Move Ups to Station-Staffed Units.......................................... 377
When You Place Units Into an Unavailable Due to Cross-Staffing Status ......... 377
When You Return Units From Unavailable Due to Cross-Staffing to
Clear From Unavailable Cross-Staffing Status.............................................. 378
Station-Staffed Units and Recommendations .............................................................380
While the Station is at a Normal Staffing Level ................................................. 381
While the Station is at a Minimum Staffing Level ............................................... 382
Station Staffing and the Unit Status Monitor Window..................................................382

Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources..................................................................385

Dispatching Resources to Incidents....................................................................................385
Dispatching Resources to Incidents From the Dispatch Form ....................................385
Dispatching Resources to Incidents From the Command Line (ID) ............................393
Recommending User-Specified Capabilities From the Command Line (RL) ..... 394
Viewing Resources Dispatched to an Incident ............................................................394
Using F9 to Issue the Incident Dispatch Command ....................................................396
Backdating Unit Status Timestamps ...................................................................................396
Backdated Unit Status Timestamps and Unit History..................................................399
Backdated Unit Status Timestamps and Incident History ...........................................400
Backdated Unit Status Timestamps and Incident Dispatch.........................................401
CAD-to-CAD and Dispatching Units....................................................................................403
Understanding Call Stacking...............................................................................................404
Call Stacking Parameters............................................................................................404
Placing an Incident Into a Unit Call Stacking Queue...................................................406
Managing a Unit Call Stacking Queue (CS) ................................................................407
Viewing Stacked Incidents Summary..................................................................................410
Work Assist Area – Stacked Incident Summary..........................................................410
Exchanging Unit Assignments (UX) ....................................................................................411
Understanding Primary Units ..............................................................................................411
Changing the Primary Unit (PU)..................................................................................412
Freeing Units From Incidents ..............................................................................................412
Freeing Units From an Incident Using the Incident Management Summary Form .....413
Freeing Units From an Incident From the Command Line (FR) ..................................413

Send Feedback 13
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Contents

Freeing All Except a Specified Unit From an Incident (RA) ........................................ 414
Changing Standard Recommendations Using the Response Mode Command (RM)........ 415
Resetting the Response Mode to the Default Response ............................................ 415
Reassigning Units With the Move Up Command (MU)....................................................... 416
Foreign Agencies and the Move Up Command .......................................................... 418
Alerts and the Move Up Command............................................................................. 418
Using Pagers With the Move Up Command ............................................................... 419

Chapter 15: Closing and Reopening Incidents ................................................ 421

Understanding Open Incidents ........................................................................................... 421
Disposition Management .................................................................................................... 421
Clearing Units ..................................................................................................................... 422
Clearing Units: Examples............................................................................................ 424
Closing Incidents ................................................................................................................ 425
Closing Incidents From the Incident Management Form ............................................ 426
Closing Incidents From the Command Line (IU)......................................................... 427
Reopening Incidents ........................................................................................................... 428
Reopening an Incident From the Incident Management Summary Form ................... 428
Reopening an Incident From the Command Line (IO) ............................................... 430

Chapter 16: Managing Locations ...................................................................... 431

Determining Location Details.............................................................................................. 431
Determining Location Details From the Location Detail Form .................................... 431
Determining Recommendations From the Location Details Form .............................. 433
Determining Location Detail From the Command Line (LD) ...................................... 435
Working With Premise Hazard Records ............................................................................. 436
Types of Premise/Hazard Records ............................................................................. 436
Searching for Premise/Hazard Records ..................................................................... 439
Creating Premise Hazard Records ............................................................................. 441
Viewing or Editing Premise Hazard Records .............................................................. 443
Deleting Premise/Hazard Records.............................................................................. 444

Chapter 17: Using Status Monitors................................................................... 445

Overview of Types of Status Monitor Coverages ............................................................... 445
Types of Status Monitors .................................................................................................... 446
Displaying Status Monitors ................................................................................................. 447
Incident Status Monitor Excess Records Warning.............................................................. 447
Pending Alert Warning........................................................................................................ 448
GPS Not Reporting Indicators ............................................................................................ 448
Displaying Incident Details From Status Monitors .............................................................. 449

14 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Contents

Displaying Unit Details From Status Monitors.....................................................................449

Displaying a Different Status Monitor Configuration ...........................................................449
Resizing Status Monitors ....................................................................................................450
Bringing All Status Monitors to the Front.............................................................................450
Refreshing Status Monitors.................................................................................................451
Displaying Status Monitor Data in Multiple Columns ..........................................................451
Sorting Information In Status Monitors................................................................................453
Understanding Status Monitor Colors .................................................................................453
Status Monitor Toolbar Overview........................................................................................454
Displaying the Status Monitor Toolbar ........................................................................454
Displaying the Status Monitor Toolbar Command Line ...............................................455
Copying Status Monitor Details From the Status Monitor Toolbar Command Line.....455
Sorting Status Monitor Details From the Status Monitor Toolbar Command Line.......456
Printing Status Monitor Details From the Status Monitor Toolbar
Command Line..................................................................................................456
Switching Status Monitor Displays From the Status Monitor Toolbar Command Line 456
Status Monitor Right-Click Options Overview .....................................................................457
Acknowledging Alerts Using the Status Monitor Right-Click Option............................457
Acknowledging Alerts From the Command Line .........................................................457
Viewing Incident Information Using the Status Monitor Right-Click Option.................458
Selecting Right-Click Commands in Incident Status Monitors ...................................459
Selecting Right-Click Commands in Unit Status Monitors...........................................459
Status Monitor Drag-and-Drop Overview ............................................................................460

Chapter 18: Using Mapping ................................................................................461

Viewing the Map Display (MC)............................................................................................461
Using Command Identifiers With the Map Command (MC) ................................................462
Centering Incidents, Units, and Locations Using the MC command ...........................463
Zooming the Map using the MC Command.................................................................463
Panning the Map Using the MC Command.................................................................464
Following Units on the Map Using the MC Command.................................................464
Performing Location Updates Using the MC Command .............................................464
Overview of the Mapping Display........................................................................................465
Icons for Incidents and Units on the Map ....................................................................468
Icons for Units on Associated Incidents on the Map Display.......................................469
Icons for Persons Out of Vehicle on the Map Display .................................................469
Icons for NG9-1-1 Calls on the Map Display ...............................................................470
Icons for Cell Tower Locations on the Map Display ....................................................471
Icons for Persons Out of Vehicle on the Map Display .................................................472

Send Feedback 15
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Contents

Icons for GPS Reporting Failures on the Map Display ....................................................... 473
Refreshing the Location for Units and Persons Out of Vehicle on the Map Display........... 474
Using Multiple Map Displays............................................................................................... 475
Attaching Map Images to Emails and Incidents.................................................................. 476
Setting the Map Scale Manually ......................................................................................... 477
Zooming In and Out of the Map Display ............................................................................. 478
Rotating the Map Display.................................................................................................... 480
Displaying the Map Grid ..................................................................................................... 480
Panning the Map Display.................................................................................................... 481
Measuring the Distance Between Points on the Map Display ............................................ 482
Viewing Incident Information on the Map Display............................................................... 484
Viewing a Map Location on an Oblique Image Viewer ....................................................... 485
Viewing Multiple Unit and Incident Icons at the Same Location ......................................... 486
Printing the Map Display..................................................................................................... 487
Displaying Non-GPS Units on the Map Display.................................................................. 488
Locating Features on the Map ............................................................................................ 488
Searching for Locations on the Map Display .............................................................. 488
Searching Incidents on the Map Display..................................................................... 491
Locating Units on the Map Display ............................................................................. 493
Locating Persons on the Map Display ........................................................................ 495
Creating Incidents on the Map Display ............................................................................... 497
Finding Directions on the Map Display ............................................................................... 498
Viewing Premise/Hazard Information on the Map Display.................................................. 499
Locating Feature Information on the Map Display .............................................................. 500
Configuring the Display of Map Layers............................................................................... 501
Working With Cameras on the Map Display ....................................................................... 502
Displaying Camera Icons on the Map Display ............................................................ 503
Playing Live Video Streams From the Map Display.................................................... 503
Updating Camera Statuses on the Map Display ......................................................... 504
Working With RTVI ..................................................................................................... 504
Creating Road Closures on the Map Display...................................................................... 505
Displaying Railroad Gates or Bridge Gate Statuses on the Map Display ........................... 510
Displaying Location History on the Map Display................................................................. 511
Creating Location-Based Message Groups and Notifications Using GeoFences .............. 513
Editing or Deleting Geofences .................................................................................... 517

Chapter 19: Using Queries................................................................................. 519

Understanding Records Queries ........................................................................................ 519
Submitting Queries From the Incident Management Screens ............................................ 520

16 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Contents

Understanding Distributed Query Responses.....................................................................521

Submitting Queries From the Queries Form .......................................................................521
Associating Query Submitter and Requester ORIs to Queries ...................................525
Work Assist Area – Templates Tab.............................................................................525
Work Assist Area – Sent Tab ......................................................................................527
Work Assist Area – Drafts Tab ....................................................................................528
Submitting Queries From the Command Line (QY) ............................................................529
Viewing Query Responses .................................................................................................529
Importing Query Responses to Incidents ............................................................................533
Importing Query Responses From the II, IU, or QY Screens ......................................533
Managing Hot Hits.......................................................................................................538
Work Assist Area – Responses Tab............................................................................539
Work Assist Area – Pending Tab ................................................................................540
Work Assist Area – Sent Queries Tab.........................................................................541
Work Assist Area – Trash Tab ....................................................................................542

Chapter 20: Using Toning, Paging, and Tear and Run ....................................543
Sending Tones and Tear and Run Alerts From the TN Form .............................................543
Sending Incident and Unit-Based Alerts From the TN Form .......................................544
Using Two-Tone Alerting.............................................................................................548
Examples of Two-Tone Alerting ......................................................................... 548
Printing Alerts ..............................................................................................................549
Sending Tones and Pages From the Command Line (TN).................................................550
Sending Pages From the Command Line ...................................................................551
Toning a Unit From the Command Line ......................................................................551
Toning an Incident From the Command Line ..............................................................552
Adding Messages and Requesting Printing From the Command Line........................552
Sending Station Events From CAD.....................................................................................552
Sending Station Events From the TN Form ................................................................553
Sending Station Events From the Command Line (TN) ..............................................553

Chapter 21: Using Radios...................................................................................555

Working with Talkgroups.....................................................................................................555
Managing Talkgroups From the Console Talkgroups Form ........................................555
Managing Talkgroups From the Command Line (CT).................................................556
Resetting Unit Emergency Indicators..................................................................................557

Chapter 22: Using Messaging ............................................................................559

Accessing Messaging .........................................................................................................559
Work Assist Area – All Tabs........................................................................................560

Send Feedback 17
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Contents

Watch List Messages.......................................................................................................... 562

Opening Messaging From a Specific Folder ...................................................................... 562
Reading and Replying to Messages ................................................................................... 563
Reading Messages ..................................................................................................... 563
Replying To and Forwarding Messages ..................................................................... 565
Creating and Sending Email and Pager Messages ............................................................ 565
Creating Email Messages ........................................................................................... 566
Sending Messages From the Command Line (SM).................................................... 568
Using the Address Book ............................................................................................. 569
Setting Display and Delivery Options.......................................................................... 570
General Notification Messages........................................................................................... 573
Receiving General Notification Messages ..........................................................573
Sending General Notification Messages .............................................................575
Working With Address Books ............................................................................................. 576
Accessing Address Books From the Messages Form ................................................ 576
Work Assist Area – Books Tab ...........................................................................577
Work Assist Area – Search Tab ..........................................................................579
Accessing Address Books From the Command Line (AB) ......................................... 581
Editing Address Book Entries ..................................................................................... 582
Working with Address Book Entries............................................................................ 585
Adding Entries to an Existing Address Book or Group........................................585
Adding Entries to a New Address Book ..............................................................586
Adding Entries to a New Group...........................................................................587
Sending Messages to Entries .............................................................................587
Showing Entries on a Map ..................................................................................588
Creating Entries ..................................................................................................588
Creating Personal Address Books ......................................................................591
Editing Personal Address Books.........................................................................592
Cloning Address Books.......................................................................................592
Configuring Address Book Settings ....................................................................592
Deleting Entries, Address Books, or Groups.......................................................594
Working With BOLO Messages .......................................................................................... 595
Reading BOLO Messages .......................................................................................... 595
Reading BOLO Messages From the Messaging Form .......................................595
Read BOLO Messages From the Command Line (BR) ......................................596
Sending BOLO Messages .......................................................................................... 597
Updating BOLO Messages ......................................................................................... 599
Closing BOLO Messages............................................................................................ 599

18 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Contents

Working With Notification Messages...................................................................................600

Reading Notification Messages...................................................................................601
Reading Notification Messages from the Messaging Form ................................ 601
Reading Notification Messages From the Command Line (NR)......................... 602
Work Assist Area – Received and Sent Tabs..................................................... 603
Sending Notification Messages ...................................................................................603
Sending Notification Messages From the Messaging Form ............................... 603
Sending Notification Messages From the Command Line (NT) ......................... 608
Sending Predefined Notification Messages.................................................................609
Forwarding Notification Messages ..............................................................................609
Updating Notification Messages..................................................................................609
Searching Notification Messages ................................................................................610
Deleting Notification Messages ...................................................................................611
Managing Messages ...........................................................................................................612
Managing Message Settings .......................................................................................612
Printing Email Messages.............................................................................................613
Deleting Messages......................................................................................................613
Searching Messages for Text......................................................................................614
Searching BOLOS for Text..........................................................................................616
Managing Labels for Messages ..........................................................................................618
Creating Labels for Messages.....................................................................................618
Using Labels for Messages .........................................................................................619
Managing Messaging Folders .............................................................................................620
Creating Message Folders ..........................................................................................620
Using Message Folders...............................................................................................621
Restoring Deleted Messages and Personal Folders ...................................................622
Purging Messages and Personal Folders ...................................................................622
Accessing Ready Reference Information ...........................................................................622
Accessing Ready Reference Information From the Ready Reference Form ..............623
Accessing Ready Reference Information From the Command Line (RR)...................624
Searching for Personnel Skills ....................................................................................625

Chapter 23: Recovering From an Extended Offline Period .............................627

Accessing the Incident Update Tool (IT) .............................................................................627
Creating Incidents in Offline Mode ......................................................................................628
Dispatching Incidents in Offline Mode.................................................................................631
Uploading Saved Files to PremierOne................................................................................632
Browsing Saved Incidents...................................................................................................632
Searching for Saved Incidents ............................................................................................633

Send Feedback 19
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Contents

Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers....................................................... 635

Appendix B: Understanding Address Verification .......................................... 641
Basic Premise Types .......................................................................................................... 641
GIS Data Requirements...................................................................................................... 641
Basic Behavior of Location Fields....................................................................................... 642
Location ...................................................................................................................... 642
City and Subdivision ................................................................................................... 642
Apartment and Building............................................................................................... 643
Location Name............................................................................................................ 643
Description .................................................................................................................. 643
Floor............................................................................................................................ 643
How Street Addresses Are Validated ................................................................................. 643
Validating Addresses By Location and City Only........................................................ 644
How Common Places Are Validated................................................................................... 644
CAD-to-CAD and Address Verification ....................................................................... 645
Two Pass Verification With One Matched Common Place Record.....................645
Zero, or Multiple Matching Common Place Records ..........................................646
Common Place and City With No Address .........................................................646
Address Verification Cascading Options ............................................................................ 646

Appendix C: Using Interfaces............................................................................ 649

Using ProQA and ProQA Paramount ................................................................................. 649
Starting ProQA............................................................................................................ 650
Accessing ProQA........................................................................................................ 650
Initiating Incidents Using ProQA ................................................................................. 650
Managing Incidents That Later Require ProQA .......................................................... 653
Reconfiguring Transmitted Cases to Reflect New Conditions .................................... 653
Placing Cases On Hold............................................................................................... 655
Taking Cases Off Hold................................................................................................ 655
Adding ProQA Case Numbers to Existing Incidents ................................................... 656
Displaying the ProQA Case Manager ......................................................................... 657
Troubleshooting the PremierOne to ProQA Interface......................................................... 658
Using TDD .......................................................................................................................... 659
Using CryWolf..................................................................................................................... 659

Appendix D: Troubleshooting ........................................................................... 661

Using the CAD Error Reporting Tool .................................................................................. 661
Manually Uploading the Error Report ................................................................................. 663
Error Messages .................................................................................................................. 663

20 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Contents

Log In Error Messages ................................................................................................663

Log Out Error Messages .............................................................................................664
Change Password Error Messages.............................................................................665
Transfer Session Error Messages...............................................................................665
Incident Initiation Error Messages ...............................................................................666
Messaging Error Messages.........................................................................................667
Offline Recovery Error Messages ...............................................................................669

Index .....................................................................................................................679

Send Feedback 21
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Contents

22 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
List of Tables

List of Tables
Table 1: Keyboard Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Table 2: Typographic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Table 3: PremierOne CAD Client Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Table 4: Status Indicator Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Table 5: Message Counters Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Table 6: Network and Status Information Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Table 7: General Function Key And Other Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Table 8: Keyboard Shortcuts for Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Table 9: Keyboard Shortcuts for Fields in the Primary Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Table 10: Keyboard Shortcuts for User-Entered Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Table 11: Default Keys for Moving Between Areas of the PremierOne CAD Client . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Table 12: Keyboard Shortcuts for Status Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Table 13: Keyboard Shortcuts for the Priority Notification Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Table 14: Keyboard Shortcuts for Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Table 15: Keyboard Shortcuts for Case Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Table 16: PremierOne CAD Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Table 17: Call States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Table 18: Call Control Window Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Table 19: Call Position State Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Table 20: Methods For Associating Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Table 21: Function Key Actions for Call Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Table 22: Agency Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Table 23: Examples of Street Locations without Street Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Table 24: Example Block Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Table 25: Invalid Street Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Table 26: Latitude and Longitude Coordinates for DMS Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Table 27: Incident Statuses and Status Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Table 28: Default Agency Type Hierarchical Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Table 29: Incident Type Filtering By Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Table 30: Unit Status Provisioning Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Table 31: Action Codes for Contractor Request Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Table 32: Incident Recall Field Descriptions - Agency and General Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Table 33: Incident Recall Field Descriptions - Location Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Table 34: Incident Recall Field Descriptions - Location Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Table 35: Incident Recall Field Descriptions - Person Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Table 36: Incident Recall Field Descriptions - Vehicle Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Table 37: Incident Recall Field Descriptions - License Plate Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Table 38: Incident Recall Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Table 39: Incident History Transaction Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Table 40: Commands Displaying the Unit Management Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Send Feedback 23
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
List of Tables

Table 41: Availability of Station-Staffed Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Table 42: Examples for Exceed Stack and Preempt Parameters for Maximum in
Stacking Queue = 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Table 43: How Dispositions Are Applied To Incidents And Units With The IU Command . . . . . . . 422
Table 44: Clearing Units: Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Table 45: GPS Not Reporting Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Table 46: Map Command Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Table 47: Mapping Display Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Table 48: Gate Status Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Table 49: ORI Query Association Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Table 50: BOLO Search Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Table 51: Default Command Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Table 52: ProQA Case Manager Form Field and Button Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Table 53: Login Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Table 54: Log Out Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Table 55: Change Password Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Table 56: Transfer Session Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Table 57: Incident Initiation Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Table 58: Messaging Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Table 59: Offline Recovery Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

24 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Introduction

Chapter 1

Introduction 1

This guide explains how to initiate and dispatch incidents and manage agency resources and
information using PremierOne. PremierOne is also referred to as CAD in this guide.

What Is in This Book

Chapter 1: Introduction. Describes the contents of the PremierOne User Guide and explains the
conventions used in the guide, how to determine the version number of the software, and how to report
a problem with the software.

Chapter 2: Accessing the PremierOne Client. Describes how to log in to the PremierOne Client, how
to log out, how to change your password, and how to transfer sessions and workload.

Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD. Shows an overview of the PremierOne Client
window and describes the function and shortcut keys.

Chapter 4: Using PremierOne CAD Commands. Describes how to use the command line to open a
form, how to use the command line with identifiers, and provides a PremierOne command reference.

Chapter 5: Using Call Control. Describes how to use NG9-1-1 (requires that your system is configured
for NG-911).

Chapter 6: Controlling Your Session. Describes the PremierOne commands that are specific to your
session, including CW (Clearing Your Work Area), DS (Refreshing Your Status Monitor and Map
Display), CC (Modifying Your Signed On Areas), SW (Changing Your Signon Agency or Agency Type),
WT (Modifying Coverage Responsibilities), WH (Determining Who is Signed On), OL (Switching Your
Console to Online Mode), and SF (Signing Off of PremierOne).

Chapter 7: Using Call Center Commands. Describes the CAD commands that affect the entire call
center, including AP (Changing Agency Plans), RM (Changing Response Modes), and SC (Changing
the Signed On Area Assignments on Any Console).

Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation. Provides an overview of all the aspects of initiating an
incident, including the incident initiation process, incident status, and incident locations; using address
verification; checking for duplicate incidents, premise and hazard information, previous incidents,
persons, and vehicles.

Chapter 9: Alerts and Notifications. Describes priority notifications, priority update notifications, and
alert dialog boxes.

Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents. Describes how to initiate an incident, add person, vehicle, and
property information to incidents, schedule incidents, create traffic stops; create associated incidents;
and add attachments to incidents.

Chapter 11: Updating Incidents. Describes how to update incident information, person information,
and vehicle information s after incident initiation.

Chapter 12: Managing Incidents. Describes how to management incident timeout values, clone
incidents, create associated incidents after incident initiation, disassociate incidents, search for and
display incidents, view incident history, and generate report numbers for incidents.

Send Feedback 25
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 1: Introduction

Chapter 13: Managing Resources. Describes all the aspects of managing units, such as putting a unit
on duty, taking a unit off duty, checking or changing unit status, viewing unit history, and viewing a lineup
list.

Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources. Describes all the aspects of resource dispatching, including
dispatching units to an incident, assigning units to an incident record, moving up units, call stacking,
freeing units from an incident, and updating unit timeout value.

Chapter 15: Closing and Reopening Incidents. Describes all aspects of closing and reopening
incidents, including disposition management and clearing units.

Chapter 16: Managing Locations. Describes how to display locations on the CAD map display, and
search, create, view and edit, and delete premise hazard records.

Chapter 17: Using Status Monitors. Describes the status monitors used in CAD, the common
characteristics of the status monitors, and how each status monitor is used.

Chapter 18: Using Mapping. Describes the map display in PremierOne, including display of the
location and status of incidents and units, and a description of other map features.

Chapter 19: Using Queries. Describes how to create and send queries to local, state, and national
information systems, and how to view the responses those systems send back.

Chapter 20: Using Toning, Paging, and Tear and Run. Describes how to use the TN (Toning)
command to send toning messages.

Chapter 21: Using Radios. Describes how to use radios and commands with the CAD system.

Chapter 22: Using Messaging. Describes how to create, send, and read messages; how to reply to
and forward messages; how to search for messages; and how to manage your messages.

Chapter 23: Recovering From an Extended Offline Period. Describes how to recover from an
extended offline period, including how to access the Incident Update tool, create and dispatch incidents
for offline recovery, upload saved files to PremierOne, browse saved incidents, and find a specific saved
incident.

Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers. Contains explanations of all the PremierOne identifiers.

Appendix B: Understanding Address Verification. Contains a detailed description of address

verification, including basic premise types, GIS data requirements, behavior of the location fields, how
street addresses and common places are verified, and address verification cascading options.

Appendix C: Using Interfaces. Contains explanations of how to use third-party interfaces. These
include ProQA, an application used to gather information during the initiation of medical incidents, and
TDD, Telecommunications Device for the Deaf.

Appendix D: Troubleshooting. Contains a list of possible error messages you may receive and their
causes.

Glossary of Terms. Contains a list of commonly used terms and acronyms and their definitions.

Related Documents
The following are related documents:

• PremierOne CAD Quick Reference Guide

• PremierOne Mobile User Guide

26 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 1: Introduction

• PremierOne Mobile Quick Reference Guide

• PremierOne Provisioning Guide

• PremierOne System Administrator Guide

• PremierOne Records User Guide

About the Conventions Used in This Guide

Several conventions used in this guide: Keyboard conventions, Typographic conventions, and Notes
and Cautions.

Keyboard Conventions
Using the keyboard to carry out commands often involves pressing keys together or in sequence as
shown in the following table.
Table 1: Keyboard Conventions

Convention Description

Shift+F1 (Or any two or more keys joined by a plus sign) Press the Shift key while pressing the
F1 key.

Example: To open online help, press Shift+F1.

Alt+<an Shortcut key on the keyboard for a menu, field, or button depicted by an underlined
underlined letter in the word. Press the Alt key while simultaneously pressing a key represented by
letter> the underlined letter. The underlined letters in field labels results in the cursor jumping to
the specific field. The underlined letter in a menu results in the menu item opening. The
underlined letter in a button results in the same action as if you clicked the button.

Examples:

• To switch focus to the Name field where you can enter the information, press Alt+N.

• To display the Edit menu, press Alt+E in the menu bar.

• To verify a location, press Alt+V (instead of clicking the Verify button).

Send Feedback 27
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 1: Introduction

Typographic Conventions
The following typographic conventions are used throughout this guide:
Table 2: Typographic Conventions

Convention Description

Courier New Information that the user enters is in Courier New font.
Font
Example: Enter BO90001 in the text box.

Information that the system displays is in Courier New font.

Example: The Logout is prohibited at this time error message appears.

Bold Labeled buttons, menu commands, and menu options are in bold.

Example: Click OK to close the dialog box.

<variable> Information the user must substitute appears in italics surrounded by angled brackets.

Example: <agency ID> means the user must supply the appropriate agency
identification.

Notes and Cautions

Throughout this guide, notes and cautions are used to highlight text. Notes indicate information that is of
high importance. Cautions contain information that must be observed or damage to the system could
result.

NOTE:
Notices contain Information listed of high importance. If you do not read the notices, you may not
be able to complete your task.

CAUTION:
Cautions contain information that must be observed or loss of data could result.

Searching for Information

You can use Adobe®Acrobat™ Search to quickly find information in this PDF or in a collection of PDFs.
To help you find information, the following is provided for you on the PremierOne installation CD:

• A file named AcrobatSearch.pdf – This file explains how to use Acrobat Search to find
information. You can also use this link to find instructions for using Acrobat Search:
http://help.adobe.com/en_US/acrobat/X/pro/using/WS58a04a822e3e50102bd615109794195ff‐
7c4b.w.html

• A catalog of PremierOne PDFs – A catalog is a collection of PDF files that may be in one or more
folders that are indexed to provide enhanced search capabilities, much like the process used by
Internet search engines such as Google®.

28 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 1: Introduction

Displaying Version Information

When you contact Technical Support, it is important to know what version of PremierOne CAD you are
using.

To determine the version of PremierOne:

1 From the menu bar, select Help, and then select About PremierOne CAD.

An information box appears showing the version information.

2 To close the dialog box, select Close.

Contacting Technical Support

You can obtain support by phone from Technical Support at 1-800-323-9949. International customers,
call 1-847-576-7300. After you are connected, use the following information to obtain product-specific
support:

• For PremierOne CAD, press 2-6-1

• For PremierOne Mobile, press 2-6-3

• For NetRMS, NetCAD, and Evalis, press 2-6-2

• For Offendertrak, press 2-6-4

• For Infotrak, press 2-6-5

• For CSR 311, press 2-6-6

• For all other products, press 2-6-0

During regular business hours, your call is routed directly to available technical support personnel. After
regular business hours, a 24/7 support engineer is contacted and will immediately return your call. Have
the following information ready:

• Product name and version number

• Description of the problem

• What you were doing when the problem occurred

• Steps you took to try to solve the problem

• Hardware description

• Exact wording of any messages appearing on your screen

Send Feedback 29
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 1: Introduction

Using Motorola Solutions Online

The Motorola Online Web site, http://BusinessOnline.MotorolaSolutions.com, contains the
documentation for Public Safety products. The site includes user guides, system configuration guides,
System Administrator guides, and training course details. You can download any of these documents.

You can also open new service cases, and view and update existing cases. Case history reports are
available to view and download.

You need a user ID and password to enter the site, both of which you can request from the initial page.

30 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Accessing the PremierOne Client

Chapter 2

Accessing the PremierOne Client 2

This chapter describes logging in to PremierOne, logging out of PremierOne, changing your password,
viewing login details, and managing your session and your workload.

Logging Into PremierOne

Before you can log in to PremierOne, your system administrator must set up your personnel record.
Your record includes your user name or ID, your password, and your role. Your system administrator
provides you with this information.

To log in to PremierOne:

1 Do one of the following:

• Double-click the PremierOne Client icon on your desktop.

• From the Start menu, select Programs. Then select Motorola, PremierOne PremierOne
Client, and CAD Client.

Send Feedback 31
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 2: Accessing the PremierOne Client

The Premier One Dispatch dialog box appears.

Figure 1: PremierOne Dispatch Dialog Box

2 From the Environment list, select the database to which you want your information saved.
Examples:
• Production – Use the Production environment to do your day-to-day operations. Information
saved in the Production environment is saved to the production database.

• Training – Use the Training environment only if you are logging in for a training session.
Information saved in the Training environment is saved only to the training database.

Your agency sets the values available in the Environment field. Therefore, the values may be
different than the values described here. The values control the database that is used.

3 From the Agency list, select your agency.

4 In the User ID field, type your user ID.

User names are not case-sensitive. For example, jd004 is the same as JD004 or Jd004.

5 In the Password field, type your password.

NOTE
NOTE:
Passwords are case-sensitive. For example, R1234 is different than r1234.

32 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 2: Accessing the PremierOne Client

6 From the Role field, select your role, such as calltaker, dispatcher, or supervisor.

Your agency sets the values in the Role field. Therefore, the values may be different than described
here.

7 If you have the permissions for all of the roles granted to you by your system administrator, make
sure the Log in with permissions of all allowed roles box is checked.

For example, if you have dispatcher permissions, selecting this box allows you to log in as a calltaker
while maintaining your dispatcher permissions.

8 If you are signing onto a coverage group, select the coverage group from the Coverage Group list.

Coverage groups are sets of geographical areas within one or more agencies. If you do not have a
defined coverage group, skip this step.

The selected coverage group appears in the Preview Selected Monitor Geography area of the
Login window. Click the Expand (+) and Collapse (–) buttons to expand and collapse the list.

9 In the Coverage Areas section, select the agencies that you are monitoring from the Agencies list.
An arrow beside the agency name indicates the agency is selected. You can click any agency to
select (arrow) or deselect (no arrow) that agency. When you are finished selecting agencies, click
anywhere outside of the Agencies list.

Figure 2: Coverage Areas – Select Agency

A tab showing the monitored areas settings for each agency you selected appears below the
Agencies list.

Send Feedback 33
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 2: Accessing the PremierOne Client

10 On the Agency tab in the Coverage Areas section, do one of the following for each agency:

• To add all areas to your monitored areas, select the All Areas check box.
.

Figure 3: Coverage Areas

• If you select All Areas, you are finished selecting areas. If you want to manually select your
areas, continue with the following steps.

• From the Areas list or lists that appear, manually select the areas you want to monitor. An arrow
beside the area name indicates that you selected it. You can click any area to select (arrow) or
deselect (no arrow) that area. When you are done selecting the areas, click outside of the Areas
list.

Figure 4: Coverage Areas – Selected Or Non-selected Areas

The areas you selected display in the Preview Selected Coverage section of the Login window.

34 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 2: Accessing the PremierOne Client

11 Select Log In.

One of the following occurs:

• If your login was successful, the Login Successful dialog box opens, showing your user name
and the expiration date of your password. For information about changing your password, see
Changing Your Password on page 38. Press Enter or click OK to finish logging in. A Loading
Data message temporarily appears.

Figure 5: Login - Successful Dialog Box

• If there are coverage errors, the Login Coverage Errors dialog box appears. Coverage errors can
occur when a user signs on for the first time after a plan was changed. To refresh the plan data,
select Refresh Plans. To continue to sign on with the known coverage errors, select Continue.

Figure 6: Login Coverage Errors Dialog Box

To access another application, such as an FBI database, you may be prompted to log in with your
credentials for those areas. Use the appropriate user name and password to log in, and select Log
In.

Send Feedback 35
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 2: Accessing the PremierOne Client

Viewing Login Details

You can view your login details, including your console ID, working agency, sign in timestamp, and
coverage details.

To view login details:

1 From the Console menu, select Session.

2 Then select Login Details.

The Login Details dialog box displays.

Figure 7: Log In Details Dialog Box

3 When finished, click OK.

36 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 2: Accessing the PremierOne Client

Logging Out of PremierOne

You should log out of PremierOne at the end of each shift and when you leave your console for an
extended time, such as for breaks, meetings, or lunch. Logging out ensures that no one else enters
information that would be traced back to your console.

To log out of PremierOne:

1 Do one of the following:

• From the Console menu, select Session, and then select Log Out.

• Type SF and press F10 or Enter on the command line.

• Press Shift+F4.

If you do not have uncovered areas, the Logout Confirmation dialog box appears. Select Logout.

Figure 8: Log Out Confirmation Dialog Box

Send Feedback 37
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 2: Accessing the PremierOne Client

If you have uncovered areas, the Logout Prohibited dialog box appears. To transfer the
uncovered areas, click Transfer Session. For instructions on transferring your session, see
Transferring Sessions on page 41. To continue logging out, click Continue Logout.

Figure 9: Log Out Confirmation Dialog Box

If you try to log out of CAD after working in an offline session with the Incident Tool, you cannot log
out until you upload all of the incidents in the Incident Tool. You are prompted with a message and
your only option is to select OK. When you select OK, you are returned to the first work area that has
the Incident Tool with unprocessed incidents. For more details on the Incident Tool, see Recovering
From an Extended Offline Period on page 627.

Changing Your Password

You can change your password directly from the Log In to PremierOne dialog box or from within the
PremierOne client.

To change your password:

1 Do one of the following:

• From the Log In to PremierOne dialog box, select Change Password. This link is next to the
Password field. (For information about accessing the Log In to PremierOne dialog box, see
Logging Into PremierOne on page 31.)

• From the PremierOne client Console menu, select Change Password.

• From the Log Out Confirmation dialog box, select Change Password.

38 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 2: Accessing the PremierOne Client

The Change Password dialog box appears.

Figure 10: Change Password Dialog Box

2 From the Agency list, select your agency.

3 In the User ID field, type your user ID.

NOTE
NOTE:
Use the user ID provided to you to change your password. User IDs are case-sensitive.

4 In the Old Password field, type your existing password.

5 In the New Password field, type your new password. To protect your privacy, your new password
appears as a series of asterisks ( ******** ).
NOTE
NOTE:
Your new password may not be or may not contain your user ID, a dictionary word, or a proper
name.

6 In the Verify Password field, retype your new password.

7 Select Change.

If the password change is successful, a confirmation dialog box appears.

8 Click OK.

NOTE:
If you have forgotten your password, a supervisor or administrator can log into provisioning and
unlock your account. The supervisor or admin will then create a temporary password to allow you
access to your account. Per CJIS requirements, if a supervisor or admin unlocks your account,
you will automatically be prompted to change your password.

Send Feedback 39
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 2: Accessing the PremierOne Client

Locking and Unlocking Your Session

Your session starts when you log in to PremierOne and ends when you log out or transfer your session.
If you leave your console, you may want to manually lock your session. If PremierOne does not detect
any activity for a defined time, PremierOne locks your console automatically.

Locking Your Session

If you are leaving your console and have no workload to cover, you may choose to lock your session.
Locking your session ensures that no one else can do anything at your console while logged in as you.

To lock your session:

From the Console menu, select Session, then Lock Session.

PremierOne locks your session and the Session Locked dialog box appears so you can unlock your
session when you are ready.

Unlocking Your Session

Unlock your session when you have locked it or when PremierOne has locked it because of inactivity.

To unlock your session:

1 In the Session Locked dialog box, type your user ID and password.

Figure 11: Session Locked Dialog Box

2 Select Unlock.

The console unlocks.

3 Alternatively, select Transfer Session to transfer your session to another user.

For details, see Transferring Sessions on page 41.

40 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 2: Accessing the PremierOne Client

Transferring Sessions
Several situations may exist when you would want to transfer your session. These situations generally
occur when you leave your console. Some examples are the following:

• At the end of your shift, transfer your session to another calltaker or dispatcher.

• When you take your meal break, transfer your session to another calltaker or dispatcher.

The purpose of transferring a session from one user to another is to allow a user to replace another user
without the need to log off and back on. Transferring also allows continuous coverage for units/incidents
that are being worked/monitored at the workstation where the transfer took place.

The person to whom you are transferring your session should be at your console and be ready to log in.
You do not need to log off to transfer your session to another calltaker or dispatcher.

To stay at your console and remain logged in to PremierOne but have another calltaker or dispatcher to
take over all or most of your work, transfer your workload. For details on workload transfer, see
Modifying Coverage Responsibilities From the Command Line (WT) on page 149.

NOTE:
All users involved in a session transfer must be of the same agency.

Transferring a Call Control session follows the same parameters as transferring a CAD session. You
cannot transfer a Call Control session if your console has one or more active voice calls and/or text
conversations, or for ACD if the console is not in the Not Ready State.

To transfer your session:

1 From the Console menu, select Session, and then select Transfer Session.
NOTE
NOTE:
You can also access transfer your session from the Session Locked dialog box. For details,
see Unlocking Your Session on page 40.

Send Feedback 41
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 2: Accessing the PremierOne Client

One of the following occurs:

• For a regular CAD session, the Transfer Session dialog box appears.

Figure 12: Transfer Session Dialog Box

• For a Call Control session, the dialog box Logout/Transfer Warning dialog box, shown in
Figure 13 on page 42, appears showing the unfinished calls. You can continue if you do not have
any active calls. Select the Transfer Session button to continue.

Figure 13: Logout/Transfer Warning Dialog Box for Call Control Session

2 In the User ID field, the person taking over your session types their user ID.

3 In the Password field, the person taking over your session types their password.

42 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 2: Accessing the PremierOne Client

4 From the Role field, the person taking over your session selects their role.

The person taking over your session then clicks Log In.

The Environment and Coverage Group (or agencies, areas, and so on) fields show how you
signed on.

Send Feedback 43
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 2: Accessing the PremierOne Client

44 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

Chapter 3

Getting Started With PremierOne CAD 3

A communications center uses PremierOne CAD (Computer Aided Dispatch) to track available
resources, information, and hazards, and to dispatch emergency personnel. PremierOne CAD is
referred to as CAD in this system.

Overview of the Workstation

A PremierOne CAD workstation usually has a minimum of two monitors – a work monitor for viewing the
PremierOne CAD application and a status monitor for viewing the status of units and incidents. A third
monitor may display the PremierOne CAD map.

The PremierOne CAD workstation consists of the following equipment:

• Computer running Windows 7 or 8.1 (older consoles may use XP)

The computer transmits the information that you enter to the PremierOne CAD server.

• Work monitor

The work monitor shows the PremierOne CAD work areas where you enter information and submit it
to the server.

• Status monitor

The status monitor displays information for processed incidents and units. A user may have one or
more status monitor windows available at the workstation. PremierOne CAD automatically updates
the information in a status monitor window as changes occur.

• Map window

You may have one or more map windows displaying on the second or third monitor. A map window
displays a geographical map with icons at the locations of incidents or units. Incidents can be
initiated from the map.

• Keyboard

The keyboard is the main source of navigation (moving from field to field on the screen) in the
application. You use the keyboard to perform functions and tasks in PremierOne CAD.

• Mouse (optional)

You can operate PremierOne CAD with or without a mouse. All commands and actions within the
application can be accessed with a mouse. A few functions, such as selecting units from a map,
must be performed with a mouse.

Send Feedback 45
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

Overview of the PremierOne CAD Client Window

The PremierOne CAD Client window consists of a collection of fully integrated windows and
components that can be displayed, positioned, and resized. Depending on the display configuration, the
PremierOne CAD screen may be limited to a single monitor or may reside across several monitors,
allowing you to drag-and-drop components between them.

To ensure consistent user experience, the CAD client workbench window has fixed dimensions. See the
Workbench Size Provisioning setting for the available options.

The PremierOne CAD Client window has nine main areas.

Figure 14: PremierOne CAD Client Window

Menu Bar – The area above the clock. The Menu bar displays the five menus available in the
PremierOne CAD Client: Console, Edit, Work Area, Utilities, and Help.

Command Line – The area located to the right of the menu bar. The command line is where you
type PremierOne CAD commands to open forms for data entry. You can also use the command
line to type commands to complete transactions without using a form.

Status Message Area – The area to the right of the command line. The status message area
displays success and error messages related to your commands and form submissions.

Time and Date – The area located below the menu bar. Your agency configures the format.

Main Tabs – The tabs located to the right of the clock. These tabs are specific to the type of work
object you are working on.

Work Area Tabs – The area on the left side of the window below the time and date. This area
displays tabs for each of the work areas. You can activate a work area by selecting the tab with
the mouse or pressing Alt+tab number.

46 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

Primary Work Area – The area in the middle of the window. The Primary Work Area is where you
do most of your task-related operations, such as initiating incidents and dispatching units.

Work Assist Area – The area on the right side of the window. The Work Assist Area displays
information to assist you in completing your task in the Primary Work Area, such as showing you
hazards at an incident location or showing you previous incidents at that location.

Information Panel – The area on the lower left of the window. The Information Panel provides
you with information about your sign-on environment and displays dynamic message counters
for unread BOLOs, unread messages, unread notifications, unviewed query responses, and
unviewed hot hits.

Using the PremierOne CAD Client Menus

The PremierOne CAD client has five menu options: Console, Edit, Work Area, Utilities, and Help.
Accessing each menu displays a list of commands. The following task describes how to access
commands from the menu bar.

To use the PremierOne CAD Client menus:

1 Select the menu you want by doing one of the following:

• Click a menu with your mouse.

• Press Alt plus the underlined letter of the menu title. The underlined letter is usually, but not
always, the first letter of the menu title, for example, Alt+E for the Edit menu. For the Console
menu, though, press Alt+O.

Figure 15: Menu Hot Keys

NOTE:
If the underlined letters do not initially display, pressing Alt displays the underlines.

The menu you selected opens.

2 Select the menu command you want by doing one of the following:

• Click the menu option with your mouse.

• Press the Shift key and type the first letter of the command to highlight your selection and then
press Enter. If there is more than one menu that begins with the same letter, continue to type the
letter while you press the Alt key until the command you want is highlighted.

Send Feedback 47
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

The PremierOne CAD Client Menu Reference

The following table describes the PremierOne CAD client menus and their associated commands and
options.
Table 3: PremierOne CAD Client Menus

Menu Name Commands

Console Session, Change Password, Settings, Sync Now

For more information, see Console Menu Commands on page 48.

Edit Undo, Redo, Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete, Select All

For more information, see Edit Menu Commands on page 49.

Work Area Submit, Clear Work Area, Attach File, Work Objects

For more information, see Work Area Menu Commands on page 49.

Utilities Activate Plan, Command Line, Information Panel, Mapping, Monitored Areas, Multimedia,
Status Monitors, Switch Working Default, Radio, Q&A, Reports, TDD

For more information, see Utilities Menu Commands on page 50.

Help Online Help, User Guide, Quick Reference Guide, Function Key Help, Create Error Report,
Upload Error Report, About PremierOne CAD

For more information, see Help Menu Commands on page 51.

Console Menu Commands

The Console menu contains commands related to your console or workstation.

• Session – Opens a list of additional commands related to your current login session. Commands
include the following:

Login Details – Shows information about how you logged in to PremierOne CAD. For more
information, see Viewing Login Details on page 36.

Lock Session – Opens the Session Locked dialog box and locks your session so no one else can
work in your session. When you are ready to unlock your session, enter your user ID and password
in the Session Locked dialog box, and then select Unlock. For more information, see Locking and
Unlocking Your Session on page 40.

Transfer Session – Opens the Transfer Session dialog box where you can log out of your session
and let the new user log in, all in a single action. For more information, see Transferring Sessions on
page 41.

Log Out – Opens the Logout Confirmation dialog box where you can log out or change your
password. For more information, see Logging Out of PremierOne on page 37.

Exit – Opens the Logout Confirmation dialog box.

Switch To Online – Opens a dialog box where you can go back to online mode. For more
information, see Switching Your Console to Online Mode (OL) on page 154.

• Change Password – Opens a dialog box where you can change your password. For more
information, see Changing Your Password on page 38.

48 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

• Settings – Opens a dialog box where you can set Messaging options. For details on messaging
settings, see Managing Message Settings on page 612.

• Sync Now – Synchronize the CAD client with the Provisioning server. The CAD client synchronizes
data automatically after 24 hours from the last successful synchronization.

Edit Menu Commands

The Edit menu contains commands related to editing text. For example, the commands in the Edit menu
can affect the contents in the Comments field.

• Undo – Cancels the last action you did. For example, if you deleted a word, you can use the Undo
command immediately following the Delete command to cancel the action.

• Redo – Cancels the Undo command. For example, if you deleted a word and then used the Undo
command to retrieve the word, you can use the Redo command to delete it again.

• Cut – Removes selected text and places it on the clipboard for later use.

• Copy – Copies selected text.

• Paste – Places text that has already been cut or copied to the clipboard at the position of your
cursor.

• Delete – Permanently removes selected text. The text does not go to the clipboard and cannot be
retrieved.

• Select All – Selects all of the text in the field or area where your cursor is located.

Work Area Menu Commands

The Work Area menu contains commands related to the Primary Work Area of the PremierOne CAD
client window.

• Submit – Submits the active work object, such as an Incident Management form. Using the Submit
command is the equivalent to pressing F12.

• Clear Work Area – Removes the work object from the active work area.

CAUTION:
Any data that you have not submitted is lost when you clear the work area.

• Attach File – Opens the Attach file form in the Primary Work Area if you are in a form, such as the
Incident Initiate form, where attaching a file is appropriate.

• Work Objects – Displays a list of the available work objects. Work objects are the various tasks that
can be done within the PremierOne CAD client. You can also access many of the work objects from
the command line. For more information, see the PremierOne CAD Command Reference on
page 79.

The Work Objects command has the following options:

• Incident Initiation – Opens the Incident Initiation form.

• Field Initiate – Opens the Field Initiate form.

• Incident Management – Opens the Incident Management Summary form.

Send Feedback 49
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

• Unit Management – Opens the Unit Management module.

• Roll Call – Opens the Roll Call form.

• Unit Groups– Opens the Unit Groups form.

• Query – Opens the Query form.

• Messaging– Opens Messaging.

• Address Book – Opens Messaging to the Address tab.

• Notifications – Opens Messaging to the Notifications tab.

• BOLO – Opens Messaging to the BOLO tab.

• Alerting – Opens the Toning and Paging form.

• Signed On User List – Opens Messaging to the Address Book tab.

• Premise Hazard – Opens the Premise Hazard form.

• Location Detail – Opens the Location Detail form.

• Incident Summary – Opens the Incident Summary form.

• Incident Recall – Opens the Incident Recall form.

• Scheduled Incidents – Displays a blank Incident Initiation form.

• Lineup List – Opens the Lineup List form.

• Unit History – Opens the Unit History search form with no results in the Work Assist Area.

• Units Summary – Opens the Unit Current Activities form.

• Stacked Incident Summary – Opens the Stacked Incident Summary form.

Utilities Menu Commands

The Utilities menu contains commands for additional utilities that work with your PremierOne CAD client.

• Activate Plan – Opens the Activate Plan dialog box where you can change the current plan for your
agency. For more information, see Changing Agency Plans From the Activate Plan Form on
page 156.

• Command Line – Controls command line hints and syntax error notification.

Select Dynamic Help to turn the hints on the command line on or off. If Dynamic Help is checked,
the hints are turned on. For more information, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

Select Syntax Error Notification to turn the error notification on the command line on or off. If
Syntax Error Notification is checked, the error notification is turned on.

• Information Panel – If the Information panel is closed, displays the Information Panel.

• Mapping – If the Mapping window, is closed, opens the Mapping window.

• Monitored Areas – Views or changes the areas you are currently monitoring. For more information,
see Modifying Your Signed On Areas (CC) on page 147.

50 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

• Multimedia – Contains two commands: Open Player and Open File, which are enabled only when
you are working in the Incident Initiate form or in any of the Incident Management forms, such as
Incident Update, Incident Dispatch, or Incident History. Open Player displays a media player, records
voices, and enables you to view cameras. Open File displays media files, and converts text to
speech. The other commands in Multimedia are reserved for future development.

• Status Monitors – Opens or refreshes your status monitors to your agency configuration.

• Switch Working Default – If you are signed on to more than one agency, opens the Working Agency
dialog box where you can view your working agency.

• Q&A – Opens Q&A (question and answer) (if installed).

• Radio – Opens the Radio window with either the Configure Console MSel tab or Clear Emergency
Notifications selected.

• Reports – Opens a third-party reports product.

• TDD – Opens the Telecommunications Device for the Deaf (TDD) or retrieves a conversation.

Help Menu Commands

The Help menu contains following commands for obtaining assistance, determining the version
information, and creating an error report.

• Online Help – Launches online help where you can use the table of contents, the index, or the
search feature to find help about the PremierOne CAD client.

• User Guide – Launches the PremierOne CAD User Guide in Adobe Acrobat Reader where you can
print a single page, a section, a chapter, or the entire book to help you understand more about the
PremierOne CAD client.

• Quick Reference Guide – Launches the Quick Reference Guide in Microsoft Word where you can
look up all PremierOne CAD commands or print the Quick Reference Guide.

• Function Key Help – Launches the Dispatch Function Key Help reference dialog where you can look
up function keys and shortcut keys and print the reference.

• Create Error Report (Full Version) – Creates an error report with the following files: log, CSV,
database backup, crash dump, and screen shots. Because the crash dump and database files are
large, the time required to upload the entire log report file (the zip file) is longer than the time required
to upload the lite version.

• Create Error Report (Lite Version) – Creates a smaller version of the error report containing the
following files: log, CSV, and screen shots.

• Upload Error Report – Manually uploads the error report to the server; error reports are configured to
upload to the server at a configured interval.

• About PremierOne – Launches the About PremierOne dialog box where you can determine what
version of the PremierOne CAD client you are using.

Send Feedback 51
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

Using the Work Area Tabs

The Work Area tabs display below the time and date and provide access to different work areas.
Depending on your system configuration, you may have up to six available work areas. The tab for the
active work area is white; the tabs for inactive work areas are gray.

Figure 16: Work Area Tabs

To display a work area:

Do one of the following:

• Using the mouse, select the associated tab for the work area.

• Using the keyboard, press the Alt+ the number of the work area displayed on the left side of the
Work Area tab.

Each tab provides a summary description to help identify the work area. The information provided in
the summary may include the work object type or command (for example, Incident Management),
the associated number or ID, and key information, such as the incident type and location. In addition,
an alert status indication notifies you when important data is added or updated.

52 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

Issuing Commands for Work Areas

You can also issue commands for incidents or units in a work area from the command line. To issue a
command, prefix the command identifier with the number corresponding to the desired work area. The
specified work area becomes the active work area. If you prefix the command for a command that
displays outside of the work area or if the command does not have an associated window, the number is
disregarded.

For example, entering 3IU on the command line opens work area three with the IU command. Work
area three would be the active area.

The following table shows the status indicators that can appear to the left of the summaries on the Work
Area tabs. Only one status displays at a time.
Table 4: Status Indicator Icons

Icon Status Indicator Description

Transaction Error Appears when you submit a transaction that either fails or partially fails.
(unviewed)

Transaction Error Appears after you select a work area that has the Transaction Error
(viewed) (unviewed) icon. The Transaction Error (viewed) icon remains until you
perform another transaction from the originating work area (or command
line), clear the work area, or display a different record or work object in the
work area.

Processing Appears as long as the transaction is still processing. When processing is

complete, the icon disappears.

Processing Timeout Appears when you stop working in the Incident Initiate form after a
configured amount of time (for example, by working in another form). The
icon is a reminder that the incident is awaiting processing. Whether this item
displays is a configurable item.

Arrival Timeout Appears if a contractor has not arrived at the incident location when the
timer expires.

Acknowledgment Appears if a contractor has not acknowledged a request when this timer
Timeout expires.

Details to follow Appears when a calltaker has manually set the flag, indicating that
additional information is being entered regarding the incident. The flag is
commonly used to inform the dispatcher that the calltaker is still on the
phone with the caller obtaining additional information. The dispatcher can
then inform the units being dispatched that more information regarding the
incident is being obtained.

Send Feedback 53
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

Using the Primary Work Area

The center of the PremierOne CAD client is called the Primary Work Area. This area is where you enter
most of your information, specify search parameters, and where PremierOne CAD displays detailed
views of incident and unit information.

Many of the Primary Work Areas have tabs along the top of the work area. These tabs help you navigate
through the steps involved in your task. The tabs that display depend on the type of work you are doing.

To display the different tabs in the Primary Work Area:

Select the tab or use the Alt + left or right arrow keys on the keyboard.

Figure 17: PremierOne CAD Client Showing Global Tabs For Incident Initiation

54 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

Working With Window Overlays

In many of the PremierOne CAD forms, you can display the form for other incidents or units on top of the
current form. In this case, the display is shaded blue to indicate that the information is an overlay of the
screen that was displaying. The Work Tab displays two right-facing arrows to indicate that you are
viewing an overlay.

If you have of multiple incidents or units, you can scroll through the incidents using the Up and Down
arrows in the upper right-hand corner of the window or pressing Shift+Alt+Down arrow or Shift+Alt+Up
arrow. You can make updates in the form that displays as an overlay (enter the information and press
F12).

To return to your original work area, select the X above the Work Assist Area or press the Esc key.

Figure 18: Incident Management Form Showing Incident Overlay

Using the Work Assist Area

The area to the right of the Primary Work Area is the Work Assist Area (see Figure 14). The Work Assist
Area displays the results of verifications, inquiries, searches, and duplicate incidents for actions you
conduct in the Primary Work Area. For example, the Work Assist Area might show duplicate incidents at
the location you entered in the Primary Work Area.

For details on the various tabs that appear in the Work Assist Area, see Related Work Assist Areas –
Incident Management Form on page 249.

To display the different tabs in the Work Assist Area:

Select the tab or use the Ctrl + left or right arrow keys on the keyboard.

Send Feedback 55
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

Using the Information Panel

Information about your sign-on environment (such as training or production) displays in the Information
Panel. Dynamic message counters for active or open BOLOs in your Inbox (B), unread messages (M),
open notifications in your Inbox (N), unviewed query responses (Q), and unviewed watches (W) also
display (see Figure 14).

Figure 19: Information Panel Detail

Description of the Information Panel

The left side of the Information Panel shows the number of messages you have for the different types of
messages.

Figure 20: information Panel Showing Message Counters

The following table shows each of the message counters and their definitions.
Table 5: Message Counters Definitions

Message
Definition
Counter

B Active or open BOLOs in your Inbox. For instructions on reading BOLO messages, see
Reading BOLO Messages on page 595.

M Total unread messages on the server side. For instructions on reading messages, see
Reading Messages on page 563.

N Open notifications in your Inbox. For instructions on reading notifications, see Reading
Notification Messages on page 601.

56 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

Table 5: Message Counters Definitions (Cont.)

Message
Definition
Counter

Q Unviewed query responses. For instructions on viewing responses, see Viewing Query
Responses on page 529

W Unviewed watches. A watch is a specific type of query where one or more defined queries are
run a specific number of times during a set time frame. PremierOne sends an alert by email to
defined users when the criteria are met. For details, see Watch List Messages on page 562.

The right side of the Information Panel shows your network status and session information.

Figure 21: Information Panel Showing Network Status And Session Information

The following table shows each of the network status and session information fields and their definitions:
Table 6: Network and Status Information Fields

Field Definition

Netwrk Network: Shows one of the following statuses:

• Connected – You are connected to the server.

• Unavailable – The server connection was lost.

• Available – The server connection was reestablished and is ready for you to transition to the
online mode. For details, see Switching Your Console to Online Mode (OL) on page 154.

Mode Shows whether you are online or offline.

Consl Identifies your console or workstation.

User Shows your user ID.

Role Shows your Role, such as calltaker or dispatcher.

Shift Identifies your current shift.

Envir Identifies the environment you selected when you signed on, such as Production or Training.

ANI/ALI Shows the status of the ANI/ALI connection.

Send Feedback 57
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

Accessing the Information Panel

You can enable/disable the Information Panel to manage space.

To access the Information Panel:

From the Utilities menu, select Information Panel.

If the Information Panel was not visible, the panel opens.

Moving the Information Panel

You can resize and position the Information Panel anywhere within the PremierOne CAD window,
except over the Control Area.

To move the Information Panel:

1 Using the mouse, place your cursor over the title bar of the Information Panel.

Figure 22: Information Panel Showing Title Bar

2 Press the left mouse button down while dragging the Information Panel to the place on the
PremierOne CAD client window where you want it, and then release the mouse button.

The Information Panel stays in its new location for your current session. The panel returns to the
default location at the lower left of the PremierOne CAD client window the next time you launch the
PremierOne CAD client.

58 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

Closing or Minimizing the Information Panel

If you need more room in the PremierOne CAD window, you can close or minimize the Information
Panel to get the panel out of your way.

To close or minimize the Information Panel:

• On the Information Panel title bar, select the minimize button to minimize the Information Panel or
select the close window button to close the Information Panel.

Figure 23: Information Panel Showing Minimize and Close Buttons

• You can also select the arrow to the left of the Information Panel title to show only the title bar
(minimize the title bar).

Figure 24: Information Panel Title Bar Showing Arrow

• Select the arrow again to open the Information Panel to its full size.

Function Keys and Other Keyboard Shortcuts

Function keys and keyboard shortcuts are designed to help you navigate quickly in the PremierOne
CAD client. Function keys are the F keys along the top of your keyboard, such as F1, F2, and F3.
Keyboard shortcuts are combinations of keys, such as Alt+left arrow, Shift+F5.

NOTE:
Your agency can configure the actions that occur when you select Function keys.

Send Feedback 59
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

General Function Keys and Other Keyboard Shortcuts

Use the general function keys and keyboard shortcuts to send commands and information to
PremierOne CAD or to start a command sequence. Some of these keys are used alone, and some are
used with other keys. To display a menu of the function key configurations for a window, press Ctrl+K
from any window in which you are working.

NOTE:
These shortcuts can be customizable, so your shortcuts may be different.
Table 7: General Function Key And Other Keyboard Shortcuts

Key Description

Function Keys

F1 Moves the focus to the command line from anywhere in the client (including mapping and
status monitors) and highlights current command line content.

Ctrl+F1 through Changes the status monitor that displays. If the status monitor is not currently displayed, this
Ctrl+F11 key combination displays the status monitor and makes it the active window.

The number for F1, F2, and so on, corresponds to the function key for the status monitor
number. The status monitor number displays in the title bar of the status monitor to the left of
the status monitor name.

Example: If the Incident Status monitor is status monitor number 1, Ctrl+F1 displays the
Incident Status monitor; if the Unit Status monitor is status monitor number 2, Ctrl+F2 displays
the Unit Status monitor, and so on.

The function keys depend on how your status monitors are provisioned.

Ctrl+Shift+F1 Pages up the display within the same status monitor for the configured function key. If the
through status monitor is not currently displayed, this key combination displays the status monitor and
Ctrl+Shift+F11 makes it the active window.

The number for F1, F2, and so on, corresponds to the function key for the status monitor
number. The status monitor number displays in the title bar of the status monitor to the left of
the status monitor name.

The function keys depend on how your status monitors are provisioned.

F2 Query Response (view) command. Displays query responses.

Shift+F2 Map command shortcut

Centers the map display on a specific incident when you enter the incident number on the
command line and press Shift+F2.

Example: On the command line, type #254. The CAD map takes focus with incident 234
centered on the map and the zoom level adjusted so you can see the details of the location.

In addition, MC. now appears in front of the incident number on the command line showing that
you used the Map command.

F3 Incident Update shortcut

• If issued on the command line with either an incident number or an active unit ID, displays
the specified incident in the Incident Update Summary form. Also, places “IU.” in front of the
incident number on the command line showing that you used the Incident Update command.

• If issued on the command line with either an incident number or a unit ID and with the
appropriate identifiers, updates an incident

60 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

Table 7: General Function Key And Other Keyboard Shortcuts (Cont.)

Key Description

Shift+F3 Incident Recall shortcut

Displays the Incident Recall form where you can enter search criteria to find a specific incident.
All the incidents you have access to for the current date display in the Work Assist Area by
default.

F4 Incident History shortcut

When the Incident Update form is displayed and active, displays the Incident History of the
displayed incident.

Shift+F4 Logout shortcut

Displays the Logout Confirmation dialog box.

F5 Clears the active form, leaving the form open.

Clears the Primary Work Area.

Shift+F5 Premise Hazard tab shortcut

Opens the Premise/Hazard or Hazard tab in the Work Assist Area when the Primary Work
Area contains an Incident Management screen.

Premise/Hazard information is information regarding a specific location that might be

important, such as hazardous chemicals.

F6 Message Read shortcut

Opens the Messaging window when submitted from a blank command line.

Shift+F6 Incident Management Summary tab shortcut

Displays the Summary/General tab in the Primary Work Area when issued from a blank
command line and when the Primary Work Area contains an Incident Management screen.

F7 Field Initiate (Traffic Stop) shortcut

When submitted from a blank Primary Work Area, F7 opens the Field Initiate (Traffic Stop)
form.

If the unit ID and address are entered on the command line, F7 issues the Field Initiate (Traffic
Stop) command.

Example: If you type U;1A12.L;123 w main on the command line (assuming valid unit ID
and correct address) and press F7, the command FI.U;1A12.L;123 W Main appears on
the command line and a traffic stop incident is created for Unit 1A12 at 123 W Main.

Shift+F7 Persons tab shortcut

Displays the Persons tab in the Primary Work Area when issued from a blank command line
and when the Primary Work Area contains an Incident Management screen.

F8 Incident Initiate shortcut

• If issued from a blank command line, F8 displays the Incident Initiation form.

• F8 creates the incident if issued from the command line with at least the location and incident
type.

Send Feedback 61
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

Table 7: General Function Key And Other Keyboard Shortcuts (Cont.)

Key Description

Shift+F8 Vehicle tab shortcut

Displays the Vehicles tab in the Primary Work Area when issued from a blank command line
and when the Primary Work Area contains an Incident Management screen.

F9 Incident Dispatch shortcut

• If issued from a blank command line when the Primary Work Area contains an Incident
Management screen, F9 displays the next oldest, highest priority pending incident.

• If issued from the command line with an incident number or active unit ID, F9 displays the
specified incident on the Incident Management – Dispatch tab. For example, you could type
DC-003 and press F9.

• if issued from the command line with an incident number and the ID of a unit that is available,
F9 dispatches an incident. For example, you could enter DC-003.1A12. The unit becomes
the primary unit.

• If issued from the command line with an incident number or active unit ID and an additional
unit ID, F9 assigns the specified additional unit as a backup. For example, you could enter
DC-003.2A12 to assign 2A12 as backup.

Shift+F9 Incident Dispatch shortcut

When the Primary Work Area contains an Incident Management screen and when issued from
a blank command line, Shift+F9 displays the Dispatch tab in the Primary Work Area.

F10 If the command line information begins with a two- or three-character command code, F10
submits the command line.

Example: II.123 w main.theft

You can also press the Enter key.

Shift+F10 Context menu shortcut

Opens the context menu (shortcut menu) for the field in focus with edit commands, such as
cut, copy, and paste. You can also right-click in the field to display the context menu.

F11 Unit Status shortcut

• If issued from the command line with a unit ID, F11 displays the Unit Status form.

• If issued from the command line with a unit ID and additional identifiers, F11 transmits a unit
status update.

Shift+F11 Populates the Incident Initiation form with the most recently answered ANI/ALI (9-1-1)
information.

F12 Submits a form after you complete the required information.

Shift+F12 Previous tab shortcut

Displays the Prev (Previous) tab in the Work Assist Area when the Primary Work Area contains
an Incident Management screen.

Ctrl+F12 Sets the Details to Follow flag when submitted from an Incident Management form. For more
information on the flag, see Setting the Details to Follow Flag on page 219.

62 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

Table 7: General Function Key And Other Keyboard Shortcuts (Cont.)

Key Description

Primary Work Area (uses Alt key)

Alt+tab number Displays the Work Area for the number that you enter. Work Area tabs display their number on
the far left side of the tab.

Tab Moves the cursor or the focus to the next field, control, or data element progressively through
the form in the Primary Work Area.

Left and right • Moves the cursor one space at a time in the direction of the arrows.
arrows
• When the focus is on items that can be collapsed and expanded, the right arrow expands the
item and the left arrow contracts the item.

Up and down Moves up and down in a list, in a grid or table, or in a box where you make a selection. Moves
arrows to the next or previous row.

Alt+left and right Moves through the tabs at the top of the Primary Work Area.
arrows

Alt+Shift+left Moves through the subtabs in the Primary Work Area.

and right arrow

Alt+> or Alt+< Displays the next or previous work area.

Space Select/Unselect a check box. Space only selects/unselects one check box.

Work Assist Area (uses Ctrl key)

Ctrl+left and Navigates through the tabs in the Work Assist Area.
right arrows

Ctrl+up and Moves up and down in the Work Assist Area. Moves to the next/previous row.
down arrows

Ctrl+Page Up Moves to the top and the bottom of the Work Assist Area.
and Page Down
arrows

Ctrl+Enter Open or close an entry in the WAA for viewing, such as person information or contractor
information.

Ctrl+W Shortcut for View buttons in many of the WAA tabs, such as Query and Notifications.

Ctrl+Space Select/Unselect check box. Ctrl+Space only selects/unselects one check box. To select all the
items in the Work Assist Area, use the check box at the top of the list.

Ctrl+Tab Moves focus to the first record in the next table. Applies only if there is more than one table in
the Work Assist Area. When focus is in the last table, Ctrl+Tab jumps focus to the first table.

Ctrl+underlined Selects a button. For example, when potential duplicates display in the WAA, then selected
letter on buttons Ctrl+A would select the Cancel button (the letter “a” is underlined).

Moving Between the Primary Work Area and Work Assist Area

Ctrl + left and Moves from the Primary Work Area to the next tab in the Work Assist Area.
right arrows

Ctrl + up and Moves from the Primary Work Area to the previously selected tab in the Work Assist Area.
down arrows

Send Feedback 63
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

Table 7: General Function Key And Other Keyboard Shortcuts (Cont.)

Key Description

Alt + left, right Moves from the Work Assist Area to the next or previous tab in the Primary Work Area.
arrow
To keep the same tab displaying, use Alt + the shortcut key for one of the fields, in the tab such
as L for Location in the Incident Management form.

Miscellaneous

Ctrl+K Displays the Dispatch Function Key Help dialog box.

Alt+Shift+Up/ For controls appearing on the right end of the global bar, functions as next or previous.
Down Arrow

Esc Closes the view mode or overlay. For details on overlays, see Working With Window Overlays
on page 55.

Num Lock Activates the keypad numbers at the right side of the keyboard. Toggle off Num Lock to use the
right keypad arrow keys.

You can use the arrow keys to display different tabs.

Ctrl+P In the Work Assist Area, opens the Print menu.

Spacebar Toggles check boxes in the Primary Work Area.

Ctrl+Space Toggles check boxes in the Work Assist Area.

Enter • In the Work Assist Area, expands some items to show the details, such as an incident in the
Prev tab.

• If the information begins with a two- or three-character command code, Enter submits the
information on the command line. For example, II.123 w main.theft.

Shift+F1 Opens the online help for the active form in a Web browser.

Mouse scroll Moves the display of the form up and down within the window.
wheel

Keyboard Shortcuts for Menus

The keys for menus help you quickly access the menus.
Table 8: Keyboard Shortcuts for Menus

Key Description

Alt+O Opens the Console menu.

Alt+E Opens the Edit menu.

Alt+W Opens the Work Area menu.

Alt+U Opens the Utilities menu.

Alt+H Opens the Help menu.

64 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

Keyboard Shortcuts for Fields in the Primary Work Area

The keys for forms help you navigate in the Primary Work Area. When tabbing or shift+tabbing through a
form in the Primary Work Area, the cursor cycles through the fields and buttons on the form. The tab
order is left-to-right and downward. The last field or button on the form returns to the first field on the
form.
Table 9: Keyboard Shortcuts for Fields in the Primary Work Area

Keys Description

Shift+Home In a text field, selects all of the text in a line to the left of the cursor.

Ctrl+Home Places the focus at the beginning of the field.

Ctrl+End Place the focus at the end of the field.

Shift+Tab Moves the cursor backward from field to field, control, or data element, within a form.

Tab Moves the cursor forward from field to field within a form.

Hot Keys
PremierOne CAD uses a feature called hot keys to “jump” the cursor to a specific field in a form. Hot
keys are used by pressing an underlined letter within the field label, such as the letter “L” in the word
“Location.”

To use hot keys, press the Alt key plus the underlined letter of the field you want to jump to. For
example, pressing Alt+C in the Incident Management or Field Initiate form moves the cursor to the
Comments field.

Figure 25: Hot Keys

Send Feedback 65
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

Keyboard Shortcuts for User-Entered Text

The keyboard shortcuts for user-entered text help you when you are writing or editing text, such as in
Comments fields.
Table 10: Keyboard Shortcuts for User-Entered Text

Key Description

Ctrl+A Selects all text on a form or dialog box.

Ctrl+C Copies the selected user-generated text.

Ctrl+V Pastes the copied text.

Ctrl+X Cuts the selected user-generated text.

Backspace Moves the cursor to the left one space at a time. Also deletes characters to the left of the
cursor.

Delete Deletes the character to the right of the cursor and moves the characters that follow the cursor
to the left by one space.

Insert Inserts new characters instead of typing over existing characters.

Shift+End Highlights text from the current cursor position to the end of the line.

Keyboard Shortcuts for Moving Between Areas of the PremierOne

CAD Client
The keyboard shortcuts for moving between areas of the PremierOne CAD client all help you jump,
move, cycle, or scroll between areas of the PremierOne CAD client, such as jumping to the command
line.
Table 11: Default Keys for Moving Between Areas of the PremierOne CAD Client

Keys Descriptions

Ctrl+Alt+A Jumps to mapping.

Ctrl+Alt+G From the command line, jumps to the primary work area and makes the selected tab active.

Ctrl+Alt+L Jumps to the command line with the cursor ready for input.

Ctrl+Alt+S Jumps to the status monitors.

Alt+Tab Cycles through other applications running on your computer.

Alt+1 through Brings up the work area. If your interface is configured for six work areas, Alt+6 brings up the
Alt+6 last work area. Alt+2 brings up the second work area.

66 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

Keyboard Shortcuts for Status Monitors

The following keyboard shortcuts can be used in status monitors.
Table 12: Keyboard Shortcuts for Status Monitors

Keys Action

Double-click an Displays the Incident Management form.

incident

Double-click a unit Displays the Unit Status form.

Ctrl+{1-n} Scrolls down the specified status monitor window. Focus returns to previous location after
access keys are released.

Ctrl+Shift+{1-n} Scrolls up the specified status monitor window. Focus returns to previous location after
access keys are released.

Up/Down arrow Move to the next/previous row when window is in focus.

Page Up/down Page up/down when window is in focus.

Ctrl+Alt+S Jump to the next status monitor.

Ctrl+Alt+` (accent Brings all status monitors to the front. Focus remains in current location.
symbol on key to left
of 1)

Keyboard Shortcuts for the Priority Notification Window

The following keyboard shortcuts can be used in the Priority Notification window.
Table 13: Keyboard Shortcuts for the Priority Notification Window

Keys Description

Ctrl+0 (zero) Moves focus to the window.

Page Up/Down Pages up and down the window.

Alt+I View Inc button.

Alt+A Ack’d button.

Keyboard Shortcuts for Interfaces

The following keyboard shortcuts can be used with interfaces.
Table 14: Keyboard Shortcuts for Interfaces

Keys Description

Ctrl+Alt+C Launches Case Manager (ProQA) in a separate window. Only functions if ProQA was
provisioned and an II or IM form is displayed.

Ctrl+Alt+F ProQA Fire. Only functions if ProQA Fire was provisioned and an II or IM form is
displayed.

Send Feedback 67
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

Table 14: Keyboard Shortcuts for Interfaces

Keys Description

Ctrl+Alt+L ProQA Law. Only functions if ProQA Law was provisioned and an II or IM form is
displayed.

Ctrl+Alt+M ProQA Medical.

Ctrl+Alt+P Retrieves ProQA case information and places it in appropriate CAD fields.

Ctrl+Alt+D Launches TDD.

Ctrl+Alt+R With the Multi Select tab selected, displays the Radio Console form in an orphaned
window.

Ctrl+Alt+A Radio Console (2 Tone Alerting).

Ctrl+Alt+W CryWolf.

Keyboard Shortcuts for Case Manager in ProQA

The following keyboard shortcuts can be used with case manager in ProQA.
Table 15: Keyboard Shortcuts for Case Manager

Keys Descriptions

Alt+T Transfer button

Alt+R Reopen Case button

Alt+U Unpend Case button

Alt+S Case Summary button

Alt+N New Case button

Alt+C Cancel button

Using Wildcards in Searches

In some of the forms in PremierOne CAD, such as the Incident Recall form or in Address Books, fields
are available for you to enter search criteria. You can use wildcards in any of the fields where you can
type (not select) information. Wildcards are useful when you do not know exactly what you are looking
for. The wildcard can be used as a placeholder for any sequence of characters or words.

• X% searches for anything beginning with X

• %X searches for anything ending in X

• %X% searches for anything containing X

Examples:
• For incident types, ACC% would return all incident types starting with ACC, such as ACC, ACCINJ,
and ACCNOINJ

• For units, 1A% would return all units beginning with 1A, such as 1A1, 1A11, 1A12, and 1AB1

68 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

• For cities, %Park would return Oak Park and Palo Park

• For locations, %Wells% would return all the locations for N Wells and S Wells streets, drives, and
circles
NOTE
NOTE:
Values are not case-sensitive; for example, unit1A% is the same as Unit1A%.

Send Feedback 69
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 3: Getting Started With PremierOne CAD

70 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Using PremierOne CAD Commands

Chapter 4

Using PremierOne CAD Commands 4

Commands are a fast way of entering information and sending it to the PremierOne CAD server.
PremierOne CAD commands can also be used to open forms in the Primary Work Area.

Using the Command Line to Open a Form

The command line is where you enter PremierOne CAD commands to open forms for data entry or to
open status monitors. You can also use the command line to enter commands and identifiers for
complete transactions without using a form.

To use the command line to open a form:

1 On the command line, type the command you need. For example, type II to open the Incident
Initiate form.

Figure 26: Command Line Showing The II Command

Send Feedback 71
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 4: Using PremierOne CAD Commands

2 Press Enter or F10.

The form opens in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 27: Incident Initiation Form In Primary Work Area

72 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 4: Using PremierOne CAD Commands

Understanding Command Line Elements

Three types of elements are used on the command line to initiate a command: Command IDs,
Identifiers, and User-Supplied Values.

Command IDs
Command IDs are abbreviated versions of the full name for the command. For example, IM is the
command ID for the Incident Management command. For a complete list of PremierOne CAD
commands, see PremierOne CAD Command Reference on page 79.

Identifiers
Abbreviations for types of information used with the command, such as L for location or CM for
comments are called identifiers. Not all identifiers are required with each command.

A list of all command identifiers and their meanings is provided in Appendix A: Default Command
Identifiers..

A default order of identifiers is defined for each command. If you use the default order, you do not need
to type the identifier itself. If you use the identifiers out of order, type the identifier and follow it with a
semicolon ( ; ), and then type the value for the identifier. For more information on default order of
identifiers, see Working with Command Identifier Entry Order on page 76.

User-Supplied Values
User-supplied values are the actual values you use with identifiers, such as the physical address, the ID
of a unit, or the incident ID.

For example, the command entry order for the II (initiate incident) command is:
II.L;T;AGT;MC;PR;CT;CPN;DE;BL;AP;U;PE;TN;AG;A;S;B;CM;
DTF;CFN;CLN;CA;PH;CC;SC;PN;PT;PS;RV;C;N;ZP;SB;MW;JA;JB;DN
When you type the information for the first two identifiers (L and T) in order on the command line, it looks
like this string:
II.123 main st.theft
This means you are initiating an incident at 123 main st of type theft. 123 main st and theft
are user-supplied values.

Do not use punctuation, such as commas and periods, within user-supplied values. PremierOne CAD
recognizes several punctuation characters as separators for information on the command line.

Send Feedback 73
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 4: Using PremierOne CAD Commands

Command Line Punctuation

PremierOne CAD command line entry uses periods ( . ), semicolons ( ; ), and commas ( , ), depending
on the type of information you are entering. Periods separate each element of a command. Semicolons
separate an identifier from its corresponding user-supplied value when the command is not written in
command entry order. Commas separate multiple entries for one command identifier.

Periods
Each element of a PremierOne CAD command is separated by a period ( . ), as shown here in the
command entry order for the Unit Status command:
US.U;US;D;WC;ACT;UL;ULD;CM;CMH;OM;PRS;CT;CPN;BL;ZP;SB
A group of repeated periods in a command string that is in command entry order signifies missing
elements. PremierOne CAD uses one period for each missing element.
Example:
US.1A12.EN...123 Main is a command string with the following expected command entry order:
US.U;<(!)unit id(s)>.US;<unit status>. D;<dispo/comment(s)>.
WC;<capability/quantity(s)>.ACT;<activity code>. UL;<unit
location>.ULD;<unit location description>.CM;<unit comments>.
CMH;<unit comments to unit history only>.OM <odometer.PRS;<person
state {out|reset}>.CT;<city>.CPN.<common place name>.BL<bldg
number(incident).ZP <zip code>.SB<subdivsion>
In the following command, there are three periods between the status (EN) and the updated location of
the unit (123 Main) identifiers:
US.1A12.EN...123 Main
The first period between the status (EN) and the updated location of the unit (123 Main) identifiers is the
separator (.); the second period represents the missing disposition identifier (D); and the third period
represents the missing disposition comments identifier (DC).

Semicolons
Use a semicolon to separate an identifier from its corresponding user-supplied value when the
command is not entered in the command entry order.
Example:
The command entry order for the US (unit status) command is:
US.U;US;D;WC;ACT;UL;ULD;CM;CMH;OM;PRS;CT;CPN;BL;ZP;SB
If you wanted to enter the UL <new location of unit> without entering a D <disposition> or DC
<disposition comments>, you would enter the UL out of order and could either use a string of periods,
(see Periods on page 74), or use the semicolon as shown here:
US.U.US.UL;<value>
Notice the semicolon after the UL identifier.

74 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 4: Using PremierOne CAD Commands

The final command would look similar to what is shown here:

US.1A12.EN.UL;123 Main

Commas
Use a comma to separate multiple entries for one command identifier, such as units.
Examples:
1 The command entry order for the US (unit status) command is:
US.U;US;D;WC;ACT;UL;ULD;CM;CMH;OM;PRS;CT;CPN;BL;ZP;SB
2 If you want to enter multiple units for the U identifier, separate each unit with a comma as shown
here:
US.1A12,1A13,1A14,1A15.EN.UL;123Main
This command would update the locations of the four units to the same location.

Forward Slashes
The forward slash ( / ) can be used to append or associate an agency ID to a user-supplied value. The
forward slash (/) can also be used to specify all the values for a parameter.
Examples:
US.PD/5C,2B,FD/1A1.EN
The first example indicates that the statuses of units 5C [of agency PD] and 2B [of user working agency]
and 1A1 [of agency FD] should be changed to enroute.
US.PD/.EN
The second example indicates that the statuses of all units in agency PD should be changed to enroute.

Whitespace
PremierOne CAD interprets whitespace in two ways:

• If the space is within a user-supplied value, PremierOne CAD preserves the space.

• If the space is adjacent to a separator or within the command or identifier, the spaces are ignored.
Examples:
For the transaction GI.N;20.L;100 MAIN STREET the location value is interpreted as 100 MAIN
STREET and not as 100MAINSTREET,

For the transaction G I.N;20 .L; 100 MAIN STREET all spaces other than the ones within
the location value are ignored, and the location value is interpreted as 100 MAIN STREET and not as
100 MAIN STREET.

Send Feedback 75
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 4: Using PremierOne CAD Commands

Punctuation in User-Supplied Values

Punctuation can only be used as part of a user-specified value if the punctuation is placed in quotes.
Example:
For the transaction IM.CN;JOHN Q”.” PUBLIC the caller name value is interpreted as JOHN Q.
PUBLIC.

Working with Command Identifier Entry Order

The easiest way to enter commands is to use the command default order. However, you can skip
identifiers or enter them out of order by using the following procedures.

Entering Identifiers in Default Order

Each PremierOne CAD command has a predefined command entry order, also known as a default
order. That order is shown in the PremierOne Quick Reference Guide as well as in the sections of the
book that discuss each command in detail.

A list of identifiers is supplied in Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Example:
The command entry order for the US (unit status) command is:
US.U;US;D;WC;ACT;UL;ULD;CM;CMH;OM;PRS;CT;CPN;BL;ZP;SB
or
US.U;<(!) unit id(s)>.US;<unit status>. D;<dispo/comment(s)>.
WC;<capability/quantity(s)>.ACT;<activity code>. UL;<unit
location>. ULD;<unit location description>.CM;<unit comments>.
CMH;<unit comments to unit history only>.OM <odometer.PRS;<person
state {out|reset}>.CT;<city>.CPN.<common place name>.BL<bldg
number(incident).ZP<zip code>.SB<subdivsion>
Because the command string is in command entry order, you do not have to type the identifiers, just your
user-supplied values.
Example:
To set the status of unit 1A12 as AD (Administrative), you would type:
US.1A12.AD
Unused identifiers at the end of a command string can be ignored, such as the unused D, DC, UL, CM.
HO, and OM identifiers. Identifiers are listed with each command in this guide.

PremierOne CAD also provides hints on the command line to help you enter the information in
command default order. For more information, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

76 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 4: Using PremierOne CAD Commands

Skipping Identifiers
If you want to skip any identifiers of the default command string, use extra periods to represent the
missing information.
Example:
To set the status of unit 1A12 to AR (arrived) and change the odometer reading to 34,567, you would
type:
US.1A12.AR......34567
The first period after the unit status (AR) is the separator. The other periods maintain the default order
because they replace the D (disposition), DC (disposition comments), UL (updated location of unit), CM
(comments), and HO (add to unit history only) identifiers—six periods, one for the separator and five for
the five missing identifiers.

Entering Identifiers Out of Default Order

If you type a command out of the command entry order, use a command identifier for the first identifier
that is out of order and every identifier after that one. The identifier lets the PremierOne CAD client know
what type of information you are entering. Use a period before each identifier and use a semicolon to
separate the identifier from its corresponding user-supplied value. If you do not type a value after the
semicolon, the identifier is ignored.
Examples:
To enter the HO (add to unit history only) identifier of the US command string example US.1A12.....Y
without the use of the periods for the four missing identifiers, D (disposition), DC (disposition comments),
UL (updated location of unit), and CM (comments), you would type:
U.1A12.UL;123 MAIN
The UL; signals to the PremierOne CAD client that unit location information, instead of disposition
information, follows the unit ID.

To enter the unit location information and then the unit ID, you would type:
US.UL;123 MAIN.U;1A12
Notice that UL; was used to signal the unit location information only and U; was used to signal the
unit ID.

NOTE:
If you use a command identifier and semicolon on the command line (such as UL; or U;, you must
use an identifier and semicolon for each of the following identifiers even if all of the identifiers are
in default order.

The following does not work because the incident type identifier (T) is missing:
US.U;1A12.UL;123 MAIN.THEFT

The following does work because each command uses a command identifier:
US.U;1A12;UL;123 MAIN.T;THEFT

Send Feedback 77
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 4: Using PremierOne CAD Commands

Using Command Line Hints

PremierOne CAD provides hints on the command line to tell you which identifier it expects next and what
that identifier means.

To use command line hints:

1 From the Utilities menu, select Command Line.

2 Make sure that Dynamic Help submenu item is checked. If it is not, select it to check it.

When Dynamic Help is checked, the command line hints appear as you type.
Examples:
Example of command line hints: When you enter the II (initiate incident) command, by typing II
followed by a period, the following appears on the command line indicating that the next identifier in
order is L (location):
II.L;<location>
Type the location information at the cursor as shown here:
II.L;123 Main<location>
When you add the period separator, the next identifier in sequence shows as a hint:
II.L;123 Main.T;<incident type>
Type the incident type code at the cursor as shown here:
II.L;123 Main.T;THEFT<incident type>
Type the period separator and the next identifier in order appears with its hint. If you do not need the
next identifier and it is not required, continue typing periods until the identifier you need appears.
Continuing in this manner is equivalent to Skipping Identifiers on page 77.

To disable command line hints while entering a command:

Type a left bracket ( [ ) as the first character after the semicolon (;)

This action disables the dynamic help and allows you to proceed out of order by entering any
parameter identifier without having to delete the previous identifier.
Example:
IU
IU.I;<incident id or active unit id>
IU.I;#006.L;<location>
IU.I;#006.L;[
IU.I;#008.L;[CM;here are comments

78 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 4: Using PremierOne CAD Commands

Submitting Information to PremierOne CAD

There are several different ways to submit information to PremierOne CAD, depending on whether you
are on the command line or in a form.

To submit information to PremierOne CAD:

• If you are in a form, press F12.

• If you are on the command line, press Enter or press F10.

• For special cases using F3, F8, F9, and F11, see the General Function Keys and Other Keyboard
Shortcuts on page 60.

PremierOne CAD Command Reference

The following table contains a brief description of the commands available in the PremierOne CAD
client.

NOTE:
For information on commands and identifiers used with internationalized (UK) versions of CAD,
see the Internationalization for PremierOne CAD - UK User Guide.
Table 16: PremierOne CAD Commands

Command Description

AB Address Book – From the command line, retrieves address books and Ready Reference
information. In the Messaging window, opens an Address Book. For more information see, Using
the Address Book on page 569.

AP Activate Plan – Replaces the current agency plan with another agency plan. For more
information, see Changing Agency Plans From the Command Line (AP) on page 156.

AS Active Shift – Changes or displays the active shift ID. For more information, see Changing or
Viewing the Active Shift (AS) on page 157.

BR BOLO Read – Displays a list of Be On the Lookout (BOLO) messages. For more information, see
Reading BOLO Messages on page 595.

CC Console Control – Modifies your signed on areas without requiring you to sign off and then sign
back on with the new area information. For more information, see Modifying Your Signed On
Areas (CC) on page 147.

CI Clone Incident – Creates cloned incidents based on an existing incident. Incidents can be cloned
from the command line or from the Clone Incident form. For more information, see Cloning
Incidents on page 283.

CR Contractor Request – Displays a list of support providers available for dispatch to an incident.
Such providers might include tow companies, judges, or detectives. For more information, see
Requesting Contractors on page 268.

CS Call Stacking – Displays a list of incidents that are currently stacked against a unit or in an area.
For more information, see Managing a Unit Call Stacking Queue (CS) on page 407.

CT Console Talkgroups – Displays a list of radio talkgroups or channels defined in PremierOne

CAD and displays the talkgroups or channels actively monitored by the console. For details, see
Working with Talkgroups on page 555.

Send Feedback 79
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 4: Using PremierOne CAD Commands

Table 16: PremierOne CAD Commands (Cont.)

Command Description

CU Contractor Update – Updates contractor actions from the command line or displays the
Contractor Info form. For more information, see Updating Contractor Requests on page 275.

CW Clear Work Area – Clears the specified work area. For more information, see Clearing Work
Areas (CW) on page 142.

DC Display Configuration – Saves the basic console display configuration, including the total screen
size, number of monitors, screen resolution, and the position and size of the mapping window
and each status monitor window (including column width). For more information, see Changing
the Console Display Configuration (DC) on page 159.

DI Dissociate Incident – Disassociates specified associated incidents. For details, see

Disassociating Incidents From the Command Line (DI) on page 289.

DS Display Status – Refreshes the status monitor and map displays. For more information, see
Refreshing Your Status Monitor and Map Displays (DS) on page 143.

FI Field Initiate (Traffic Stop) – Creates a field-initiated incident either from the command line or
Field Initiation form. For more information, see Creating Traffic Stops and Field-Initiated Incidents
on page 234.

FR Free Units from Incidents – Frees all of the assigned units from a specific active incident and
changes the status of the incident back to the agency configured initial status. For more
information, see Freeing Units From an Incident From the Command Line (FR) on page 413.

IA Incident Association – Associates incidents after they have been initiated. For more information,
see Creating Associated Incidents After Incident Initiation (IA) on page 287.

ID Incident Dispatch – Dispatches units to an incident from the command line or opens the Incident
Dispatch form. For more information, see Dispatching Resources to Incidents From the
Command Line (ID) on page 393.

IF Infotrak – Allows user to manually send incident data to Infotrak. For more information, see
Sending Incident Data to Infotrak (IF) on page 307.

IH Incident History – Displays the history for the specified incident. For more information, see
Viewing Incident History on page 302.

II Incident Initiation – Creates an incident from the command line or displays a blank Incident
Initiation form. For more information, see Initiating Incidents on page 209.

IO Incident Open – Re-opens a closed incident. For more information, see Reopening an Incident
From the Command Line (IO) on page 430.

IR Incident Recall – Displays the information for the incidents meeting the criteria entered on the
command line or opens the Incident Recall form where you can select or enter the search criteria.
For more information, see Searching for and Displaying Incidents on page 293.

IS Incident Summary – Displays the information for the incidents meeting the criteria entered on the
command line or opens the Incident Summary List showing non-closed incidents. For more
information, see Creating an Incident Summary List on page 290.

IT Incident Update Tool – Enters incident data into PremierOne CAD when you have been offline.
For more information, see Accessing the Incident Update Tool (IT) on page 627.

IU Incident Update – Updates incident information from the command line or opens the Incident
Management form for a specific incident. For more information, see Updating Incidents on
page 245.

80 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 4: Using PremierOne CAD Commands

Table 16: PremierOne CAD Commands (Cont.)

Command Description

LD Location Detail – Displays detailed street information for a verifiable location or determines
whether an address is valid. You can also obtain unit recommendations by providing an Incident
Response Factor (IRF) with the location. For more information, see Determining Location Details
on page 431.

LL Lineup List – Displays the information for the units meeting the criteria entered on the command
line or displays the Lineup List form where you can enter search criteria. For more information,
see Displaying Lineup Lists on page 341.

MA Monitored Areas – Changes the areas you are monitoring (as opposed to the areas you are
managing as defined when you signed on). Monitored Areas is often used by supervisors to view
what is happening in multiple areas. For more information, see Monitoring Areas on page 144.

MC Map Command – If the mapping application is closed, opens up the Map window. The command
also allows a user to search for a specified incident, unit, location, or cross streets from the
command line, and zoom or pan the current displayed map. For more information, see Viewing
the Map Display (MC) on page 461.

MR Message Read – From the command line, displays the contents of either the Inbox or a specified
mailbox folder. Without any identifiers, the command opens the Messaging window. For more
information, see Reading Messages on page 563.

MU Move up/Down (Station Cover and Uncover) – Temporarily moves a unit from one station and
area into another as an attempt to balance resources within the agency jurisdiction. Also remove
units from the Temporary Cover status. For more details, see Reassigning Units With the Move
Up Command (MU) on page 416.

NG Next Generation – Used to perform various actions on a line or phone number that you do
manually in the Call Control window. For more information, see Using the Call Control Command
(NG) on page 135.

NR Notification Read – Displays a summary list of Request to Notify messages. For more
information, see Reading Notification Messages on page 601.

NT Notification Send – Allows a user to send a notification message from the command line or
display a form to send a notification message. For more information, see Sending Notification
Messages on page 603.

OL Online Mode – Switches your console to online mode. Opens a dialog box where you enter your
password. For more information, see Switching Your Console to Online Mode (OL) on page 154.

ON On Duty – Places one or more units on duty. For more information, see Placing Units On Duty on
page 312.

PH Premise Hazard – Shows the list of premise hazard records and allows a user to add new
premise hazard records. For details, see Working With Premise Hazard Records on page 436.

PU Primary Unit – Designates another unit as the primary unit. This command can be used for any
type of agency. For more information, see Changing the Primary Unit (PU) on page 412.

QY Query Request – Performs a specified query. Also displays the Query form where users can
submit queries of different types. For more information, see Submitting Queries From the Queries
Form on page 521.

RA Release All Except – Releases all but the specified units and places those released units in a
status other than the default status, as specified. For more information, see Freeing All Except a
Specified Unit From an Incident (RA) on page 414.

RC Roll Call – Activates and deactivates roll calls, placing pre-defined groups of units on and off duty.
For more information, see Using Roll Calls on page 346.

Send Feedback 81
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 4: Using PremierOne CAD Commands

Table 16: PremierOne CAD Commands (Cont.)

Command Description

RE Reset Unit Emergency Indicator – Clears the emergency indicators of units activated through unit
radios or MDC to normal after the emergency is acknowledged. For more information, see
Resetting a Unit Emergency Indicator (RE) on page 369.

RI Reset Incident Timer – Resets the timeout value for a specified incident. For more information
see, Managing Incident Timeout Values on page 281.

RM Response Mode – Changes the response mode for an agency. For more information, see
Changing Standard Recommendations Using the Response Mode Command (RM) on page 415.

RP Report Number – Adds, deletes, or cancels the report numbers attached to incidents or units. For
more information, see Generating Report Numbers for Incidents (RP) on page 306.

RR Ready Reference – Searches and displays Ready Reference information. For details, see
Accessing Ready Reference Information on page 622.

SB Status Backdate – Manually backdates the timestamps of status changes. For details, see
Backdating Unit Status Timestamps on page 396.

SC Supervisor Console Control – Modifies the signed on area assignments on any console or
workstation. You must be a supervisor or other authorized user. For more information, see
Changing the Signed On Area Assignments (SC) on page 158.

SF Sign Off – Opens the Log Out dialog box. For more information, see Logging Out of PremierOne
on page 37.

SM Send Message – Sends mail messages to specified address recipients from the command line or
opens the Messaging window for composing and sending mail messages. For more information,
see Creating and Sending Email and Pager Messages on page 565.

ST Station Status – Changes the staffing level for a station. For more information, see Station Status
Command on page 374.

SW Switch Working Agency Default – Changes your signon agency to another agency or agency
type. For more information, see Changing Your Signon Agency (SW) on page 148.

TN Alerting – Allows you to tone, page, and send tear and run messages. For more information, see
Sending Tones and Pages From the Command Line (TN) on page 550.

UA Unit Assignment – Opens a unit assignment form. For more information, see Updating Unit
Assignments From the Unit Management Form on page 324.

UC Unit Current Activities – Displays units and their current activities in a specified geographic area.
For more information, see Displaying Current Unit Activities on page 338.

UF Off Duty – Takes one or more units off duty. If a unit to be placed off duty is assigned to an
incident, the unit must first be taken off the incident. For more information, see Taking Units Off
Duty on page 318.

UG Unit Groups – Creates, modifies, or deletes unit groups. For more information, see Creating Unit
Groups From the Command Line (UG) on page 366.

UH Unit History – Shows activity for a unit for the criteria entered on the command line or opens the
Unit History form where you can enter the criteria. For more information, see Viewing Unit History
on page 335.

UO Reset Unit Timer – Resets the unit status timers for an overdue unit. For more information, see
Resetting a Unit Status Timer (UO) on page 368.

US Unit Status Update – Updates the status of units. For more information, see Updating Unit Status
on page 321.

82 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 4: Using PremierOne CAD Commands

Table 16: PremierOne CAD Commands (Cont.)

Command Description

UX Unit Exchange – Exchanges the assignments of two units. For more information, see Exchanging
Unit Assignments (UX) on page 411.

VQ Query Response (View) – Displays a list of query responses. For more information, see Viewing
Query Responses on page 529.

WH Who – Displays details for logged on resources. For more information, see Displaying
Information for Signed on Resources (WH) on page 152.

WT Workload Transfer – Modifies your coverage responsibilities, including incidents and areas. For
more information, see Modifying Coverage Responsibilities From the Command Line (WT) on
page 149.

Trusted Agency Security

Trusted agency security allows multiple agencies to share a PremierOne CAD system. In a multi-agency
environment, the sharing of PremierOne CAD data across agencies is dependent on the arrangement of
their operations within the environment.

The ability to share PremierOne CAD data across agencies is at the discretion of each agency. An
agency must grant another agency access to its data.

Agencies are classified with the following definitions:

• Owning agency – The agency that grants access to another agency.

• Trusted agency – The agency that is granted access to another agency data.

Your trusted agency permissions are based on your signed on role. If you do not have access to a
command for another agency, a message displays in the status message area indicating you have
insufficient permissions.

Send Feedback 83
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 4: Using PremierOne CAD Commands

84 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Using Call Control

Chapter 5

Using Call Control 5

When your CAD system is configured for NG9-1-1 and you log in to CAD, you are automatically logged
in to the NG9-1-1 system with the features provisioned for your role. If your system uses ACD
(Automatic Call Distribution), you are logged in with the default ACD agent ID assigned to you. The Call
Control window and the associated status monitors (if provisioned) automatically display.

While the PremierOne CAD client provides CAD and Call Control functionality, Call management and
related ALI data is provided through a separate communication path than is CAD data. Should any
catastrophic event prevent proper CAD operation, Call management functions and receipt of ALI data is
not impaired.

The following terms are used:

• A call is defined as voice call (includes TDD – Telecommunications for the Deaf), an SMS (Short
Message Service) Text conversation, or the associated Abandoned Call Notification of a call.

• A position is defined as a PremierOne workstation identified by a 9-1-1 position ID and is associated

to the Call Control service.

• ANI is Automatic Number Identification and corresponds to the ten-digit telephone number of the
caller.

• ALI is Automatic Location Identification and corresponds to the address display of the caller calling
9-1-1.

NOTE:
When CAD is running Call Control and the system locks the session because the idle session
timer has timed out, the Call Control window does not lock.

Call States
The following table defines the different type of call states.
Table 17: Call States

State Definition

Voice

ABANDONED The voice call with ANI hung up before the caller spoke with a calltaker.

BUSY Another calltaker is talking to the caller.

FINISHED The voice call was finished and was released.

iHOLD The calltaker placed the voice call on hold.

iHOLD-C The calltaker placed a conference call on hold.

HOLD Another calltaker placed the voice call on hold.

Send Feedback 85
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Table 17: Call States (Cont.)

State Definition

PARK The voice call was parked (placed on hold on a special line) by the calltaker or another
calltaker.

REDIALED Another calltaker is making an outgoing call to a voice caller who just hung up (an abandoned
call).

iREDIALED The calltaker is making an outgoing call to a voice caller who just hung up (an abandoned
call).

RING An incoming voice call is ringing and has not been answered.

TALK The calltaker is on a call with a voice caller.

TALK-C The calltaker is part of a conference call with a voice caller.

SMS (Short Message Service)

ACTIVE The calltaker is communicating with an SMS user.

PRESENTED An incoming SMS conversation is ringing and has not been answered.

TERMINATED A calltaker ended an SMS conversation.

UPDATED An SMS text has an update the calltaker has not viewed yet.

Telephony Configurations
Options in the Call Control window may behave differently depending on the system configuration.
Systems can be configured in several ways:

• Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) – An incoming call rings on all workstations managing the line upon
which the call is presented.

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) – Incoming calls are presented to workstations that are ready to
accept a new call one-at-a-time.

• ACD with forced presentation – Incoming calls are presented to workstations that are ready to
accept a new call one-at-a-time. These calls are presented as “already answered” saving the
calltaker the need to answer the call.

86 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Overview of the Call Control Window

If your system is configured for Call Control, the Call Control window automatically displays when the
CAD client is launched. The window has a menu bar and the following different areas: Status, Caller
Information, Dial, Telephony, Status Message, List, and Transfer. The Call Control window can be
moved, resized, and minimized.

Figure 28: Call Control Window

NOTE:
The display of the Call Control window and corresponding status monitors (List area) is highly
configurable. The status monitors in the List area can be orphaned from the Call Control window.
Your system administrator configures the number and types of status monitors, and the fields
that display in each monitor. Your system may also be using a USB keypad for Call Control
options.
Table 18: Call Control Window Elements

Number Item Can be orphaned and resized

1 Menu bar

2 Status area

3 Caller Information area X

4 Dial area X

5 Telephony area X

Send Feedback 87
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Table 18: Call Control Window Elements (Cont.)

Number Item Can be orphaned and resized

6 Status Message area

7 List area (status monitors) X (if provisioned)

8 Transfer area – Includes Intelligent Transfer and Address X

Book

Call Control Menu Bar

The Menu bar displays in the upper-left corner of the Call Control window and has two menus:

• Console – Select a different agent ID (ACD only).

• Settings – Orphan areas and adjust ringer volume for the console headset and speakers.

For descriptions of these commands, see Changing the Agent ID on page 104, Adjusting Conversation
and Ringer Volume on page 105, and Orphaning Areas in the Call Control Window on page 105.

Status Area
The Status area displays in the upper-left corner of the Call Control window below the Menu bar. The
Status area contains buttons for answering a call, setting the status to ready/not ready (ACD only), and
muting the console. The icons that display vary, depending on the state.

For a description of these functions, see the following:

• Answering Voice Calls and Initiating Incidents on page 114

• Setting the Console Status on page 105

• Muting Calls on page 115

Figure 29: Status Area

The following icons are used to indicate the state:

Table 19: Call Position State Icons

Icon Mode Icon

Logged off CAD UCD/ACD

Logged in to CAD but telephony not connected UCD/ACD

88 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Table 19: Call Position State Icons

Icon Mode Icon

Logged in to CAD with telephony connected (but UCD/ACD

ACD logged off)

Logged in to CAD with telephony connectivity and ACD

ACD logged in

Logged in to CAD with telephony connected and ACD

ACD, but ACD is not ready

Logged in to CAD with telephony connected and ACD

ACD, and ACD is ready

Muted

Unmuted

Position states and available actions depend on the type of configuration (UCD or ACD), and include the
following:

• Logged In (UCD only)

Available actions: Dial (position intercom), Listen, Join, Disconnect from Listen & Join, Barge In
(UCD only - on call being handled at position)

• Logged In & ACD Logged Off (ACD only)

Available actions: Dial (position intercom), Listen, Join, Disconnect from Listen & Join, Barge In
(UCD only - on call being handled at position)

• Logged In & Not Ready (ACD only)

Available actions: Dial (position intercom), Listen, Join, Disconnect from Listen & Join, Barge In
(UCD only - on call being handled at position)

• Logged In & Ready (ACD only)

Available actions: Dial (position intercom), Listen, Join, Disconnect from Listen & Join, Barge In
(UCD only - on call being handled at position)

• Logged Off

Listen is enabled if the calltaker is not listening to or has not joined the specific position. Join is enabled
if the calltaker has not joined that specific position. Disconnect Listen & Join is enabled if the calltaker is
listening to or has joined that specific position.

Send Feedback 89
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Caller Information Area

The Caller Information area displays along the middle-left side of the Call Control window and has
tabs for ANI/ALI, Conf Info, SMS ALI, ALI Lookup, and Audio Playback.

The ANI/ALI tab displays ANI/ALI information related to the current call. Fields on the ANI/ALI tab are
populated with data from a voice call, which also include abandoned calls. Confidence and Uncertainty
values are in meters (the Uncertainty code is always the larger value). For a description of working with
ANI/ALI data, see Viewing ANI/ALI Data on page 106.

Figure 30: Caller Information Area – ANI/ALI Tab

The SMS ALI tab displays information related to the current SMS call. For details on the SMS ALI tab,
see Viewing SMS ALI Data on page 109.

NOTE:
PremierOne supports formatted XML. If location data is transmitted as XML-based ALI data, the
formatted data displays in the ANI/ALI or SMS ALI tab.

Figure 31: Caller Information Area – SMS ALI Tab

90 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

The Conf Info tab displays the name and phone/ext of participants in a conference call. For additional
details, see Viewing Conference Information on page 110.

Figure 32: Caller Information Area – Conf Info Tab

The ALI Lookup tab has a field for address lookup (only certain states allow this type of lookup). For
additional details, see Looking up ALI Information on page 111.

Figure 33: Caller Information Area – ALI Lookup Tab

Send Feedback 91
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

The Playback tab has controls for playing back a call. For additional details, see Replaying Calls on
page 121.

Figure 34: Caller Information Area – Playback Tab

Dial Area
The Dial area displays below the ANI/ALI information and contains a field showing the last number
dialed and a field for entering a number to dial. A button (H/F) is also available for hook flash (how the H/
F button works depends on the agency configuration).

For a description of using the Dial area, see Initiating Voice Calls on page 111.

Dial Field Last Number Dialed

Figure 35: Dial Area

Telephony Area
The Telephony area displays in the lower-left corner of the Call Control window. The area contains
Queue buttons for managing calls, a status bar with details for the current call, and buttons for releasing,
holding, parking, transferring, and conferencing calls.

For a description of working with calls, see Managing Calls on page 114.

Queue Buttons
Your system administrator provisions the type of Queue buttons that display. Right-clicking the Queue
button displays a menu with all the queue lines and their statuses.

The following information displays on the Queue button:

• Button Label – Indicates the type of line (9-1-1, Intercom, and so on).

• Ring Indicator – For calls in a RING/ PRESENTED state, the ring indicator flashes red. When the call
is answered, the ring indicator is removed and the Queue button is outlined in green.

92 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

• Hold Indicator – Indicates whether any calls in the queue are in the iHOLD or iHOLD-C state. For
calls in these states, the indicator displays yellow.

For calls that are in a iHOLD/iHOLD-C state and have exceeded the provisioned limit for being held
too long, the indicator flashes yellow.

• Number of Calls in RING State – Displays the total number of calls in the queue that are in a RING
state (UCD only).

• Elapsed Time – Displays the longest elapsed time for the call that was in the RING state when there
are one or more calls in the RING state and the queue does not have a call in the TALK/TALK-C
state.

• Call Source – Indicates the source: line or DNIS (dialed number identification service).

Figure 36: Queue Button Illustration

The following information displays on the SMS button:

• Button Label – Indicates the type of line.

• Update Indicator – For calls in an UPDATED state, the indicator flashes orange.

• Idle Too Long Indicator – For calls in an ACTIVE or UPDATED state that have exceeded the
provisioned limit for idle-too-long, the indicator flashes blue.

Send Feedback 93
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

• Number of calls in PRESENTED state – Displays the total number of calls in the queue.

• Elapsed Time – Displays the longest elapsed time for an SMS conversation in the PRESENTED
state when there are one or more calls in the PRESENTED state.

Figure 37: SMS Queue Button Illustration

Call Status Bar

The Call Status bar displays information about the current voice call the calltaker has interacted with
using the telephony system. The information included consists of the duration of the call, the call status,
and the call phone number. The call duration value updates dynamically for the duration of the call and
includes the ring time.

Figure 38: Call Status Bar

Call Action Buttons

Several buttons display below the Call Status bar for managing the current call.

Figure 39: Call Action Buttons

Button actions consist of the following:

• Release – Places the call in the TALK/TALK-C state to the FINISHED state and releases the line. For
details, see Releasing Calls on page 116.

• Hold – Places the call in the TALK/TALK-C state to the iHOLD/iHOLD-C state. For details, see
Holding Calls on page 116.

• Std Conf – Places the call in a standard conference call. For details, see Conferencing Calls Using a
Standard Conference on page 119.

94 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

• N/H Conf – Places the call in a no-hold conference call. For details, see Conferencing Calls on
page 118.

• Park – Places the call in the TALK state into the PARK state. For details, see Parking Calls on
page 117.

• Trans – Toggles the button to the activated state and initiates a blind transfer process. For details,
see Transferring Calls Using a Blind Transfer on page 120.

• Playback – Replays the last completed call, if available. For details, see Replaying Calls on
page 121.

List Area
The List area displays in the upper-right corner of the Call Control window. Your system administrator
configures what displays in the List area.

The List area is intended to display the most pertinent information regarding the calls for a specific
calltaker while status monitors are intended to display broader information regarding other calls and
positions being handled within the PSAP.

List Area tabs

The List area displays Call and Position status monitor windows that have been provisioned to appear in
this area. Following are common examples of Call and Position status monitor windows.

NOTE:
The system administrator is responsible for provisioning Call and Position Status Monitor
windows. The fields displayed and format of these windows is highly configurable. Status monitor
windows can display in the List area or can be separate windows.

• Active Calls – Displays currently active voice calls. The trunk, line, telephone number, call state, time
in the current call state, and physical address display.

Figure 40: List Area – Active Calls Tab

Send Feedback 95
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

• Call History – Displays the history of text and voice calls, including abandoned calls. The date, time,
type of call, telephone, and address display.

Figure 41: List Area – Call History Tab

• Abandoned Calls – Displays a list of abandoned calls. The date, time, telephone number, and call
state display.
NOTE
NOTE:
Abandoned calls do not have a position ID because the call was never answered.

Figure 42: List Area – Abandoned Calls Tab

96 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

• SMS – Displays the active SMS conversations. The date, time, telephone number, and call state
display.
NOTE
NOTE:
SMS conversations do not have a position ID.

Figure 43: List Area – SMS Tab

• Position Monitor – Displays a list of the workstations identified by a 9-1-1 position ID. The
Workstation ID, Agent Id, extension number, and State display.

Figure 44: List Area – Position Monitor Tab

Send Feedback 97
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

General Characteristics of the List Area tabs

A record counter displays on the relevant tabs indicating the number of records in the list.

Following are the general characteristics of the tabs:

• To sort a column, click the column title. If the display does not sort when you click a column heading,
then your system administrator has prevented you from being able to sort by columns.

• To display call details in the Call area (voice call only), double-click the row.

• To answer a phone number, retrieve a HELD/PARKED call, or dial a phone number, click the phone
number.

• To display a context menu (if provisioned) for a call list, right-click the row.

Text Conversation Window

The Text Conversation window displays in the List area when you answer an SMS conversation.
Buttons are available for Ending the call, Sending a message, and hiding the window. The call number
displays in the upper-right corner and provides a link to quickly dial the phone number of the SMS texter
in case you want to converse in person.

For a description of working with SMS conversations, see Working With Text Sessions on page 127.

Figure 45: Text Conversation Window

98 Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

TDD Conversation Window

The TDD conversation window displays in the List area when you answer a TDD call. Buttons are
available for Hearing Carry-Over (HCO - typing mode), Voice Carry-Over (VCO - voice mode), Sending
a message, and Hiding the window. The call number displays in the upper-right corner and activates as
an auto-dial link in case the call is dropped; in this case, you can redial the caller quickly.

For a description of working with TDD calls, see Working With TDD Calls on page 130.

Figure 46: TDD Conversation Window

Send Feedback 99
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Transfer Area
The Intelligent Transfer area is in the lower-right corner of the Call Control window and contains buttons
for transferring calls to recommended service providers based on the ESN value or line ID (if no ESN is
available) for each service provider type.

For a description of using the Intelligent Transfer tab, see Transferring Calls to Service Providers on
page 120.

Figure 47: Transfer Area

There are two types of transfers:

• Tandem – A transfer handled by a selective router that sends the call to the correct 911 center. All
the ANI and ALI data are sent with this type of call. Tandem transfers can only be used if the call is a
9-1-1 call to begin with.

• Non-tandem – A transfer that is a no hold conference call. Transfers to an internal extension of the
call center use non-tandem transfer.

When a call comes in, PremierOne automatically selects the appropriate transfer method for the call. If a
transfer is unable to use a tandem transfer, the non-tandem transfer number is used.

Additional transfer numbers can also be provisioned to accommodate unique situations where a
particular line type needs a unique dialing solution. These types of numbers are treated as a no-hold
conference hold. An outgoing phone number for initiating new calls is also required.

100 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

To view the additional transfer numbers or the outgoing line, right-click the Service Provider button.

Figure 48: Additional Service Providers

Call Control Phone Book

The Call Control Phone Book displays on the right side of the Call Control window in the Transfer area
on its own tab. The Call Control Phone Book has a “contact card” design where each phone book entry
corresponds to a specific address book record. Each card lists the phone numbers associated with the
record. The total number of contact cards that are in the current address book displays on the tab to the
right of the Phone Book label. If the number is more than 999, then the value 999+ displays.

Two types of contact cards are available: User and Ready Reference (information for outside contacts
such as a tow company or hospital). The order of the display is based on the order in which the contact
numbers appear in the corresponding CAD Address Book. Contact cards display alphabetically based
on the record name and populate the screen vertically, from left to right. Alphabetically groupings display
along the right side of the address book entries that you can use for quick navigation. Click the group
containing the record you are looking for.

Send Feedback 101

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

You can resize columns by dragging the column divider to the new position. The Phone Book tab can
also be orphaned from the Settings menu.

Figure 49: Call Control Phone Book Tab

To view the complete information about an entry, such as all phone numbers and addresses for the
entry, right-click anywhere on a phone card.

Figure 50: Contact Card

To dial a phone number, left-click the hyperlinked phone number description on the contact card.

NOTE:
You can only make an outgoing call when you are not already talking on a call.

Managing Call Control Sessions

After you log in to Call Control, you have options available to transfer your session, lock your session, or
log out of your session.

102 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Logging in to Call Control

You log in to Call Control by logging in to PremierOne CAD with your CAD credentials. After it is
determined that the workstation and the user role include the Call Control service and a Call Control
window is provisioned, the Call Control window appears. Initially the Call Control window is disabled,
except for the Menu area and Status Message area, until the connection and agent ID validations are
successfully performed.

Transferring Call Control Sessions

You transfer Call Control sessions in the same way that you transfer CAD sessions (Console menu,
select Session, and then select Transfer Session). After the CAD session is successfully transferred,
the Call Control session terminates and the sign-on process begins for the secondary user.

After the transfer session process is initiated, CAD determines whether you are allowed to transfer the
session at this time. The Logout/Transfer Failed dialog displays if the session transfer cannot be
performed at this time. Your only option is to close the dialog box and continue the session.

NOTE:
If your console currently has one or more active voice calls and/or text conversations, you cannot
log out or transfer your console.

Figure 51: Logout/Transfer Warning Dialog Box for Call Control Session

Send Feedback 103

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Locking Call Control Sessions

Lock a Call Control session by locking the CAD session (Console menu, select Session, then Lock
Session). When you try to lock a session, PremierOne determines whether you are allowed to lock the
session. If you cannot lock the session, the Lock Session Failed dialog box appears. Your only option is
to close the dialog box and continue the session.

You cannot lock your console if your console currently has one or more active voice calls and/or text
conversations.

If you successfully lock the session, the CAD Lock Session dialog box appears and the Call Control is
placed in the Not Ready state. Call Control remains in the Not Ready state after the session is unlocked
or transferred, requiring you to manually change the state to Ready before incoming calls can be
received.

Logging Out of Call Control

You log out or exit the Call Control session by logging out or exiting CAD (from the Console menu,
select Session, and then select Log Out). The Call Control session is terminated when the CAD
session is terminated. When you attempt to log out or exit, PremierOne determines whether you can log
out/exit. If PremierOne determines that the logout/exit cannot be performed at this time, the Logout/
Transfer Failed dialog box displays. The only option for you is to close the dialog box and continue the
session.

If your console currently has one or more active voice calls and/or text conversations, you cannot log out
or exit.

Changing the Agent ID

Console settings are for ACD only. The only item is changing the agent ID.

Calltakers can change to a different agent ID. The command is only visible if the console is provisioned
for the ACD or ACD with forced presentation. The individual agent ID menu items are only enabled if the
console is in the not ready state.

To change the agent ID:

1 From the Console menu, select Change Agent ID.

A list of agent IDs displays. A check mark displays to the left of the agent ID that is in use. The text
default displays to the right of agent id that is provisioned as the default.

Figure 52: List of Agent IDs

2 Select the new agent ID.

104 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Adjusting Conversation and Ringer Volume

You can adjust the console and ringer volume for the console headset and speakers.

To adjust the conversation and ringer volume:

1 From the Settings menu, select Volume Control.

Slider bars display for the headset and speaker.

Figure 53: Volume and Ringer Settings

2 Set the desired volume.

Orphaning Areas in the Call Control Window

If provisioned, you can orphan the Caller Information, Dial, Telephony, Transfer, and Phone Book
areas. When orphaned, the areas are duplicates of these same areas that remain within the Call Control
window.

By orphaning areas, you can minimize the main Call Control module and then only display the areas that
you want to use.

Areas can be orphaned once.

To orphan areas in the Call Control window:

• From the Settings menu, select Orphan, and then select the window.

• Drag the area where you want it.

Setting the Console Status

You can change the console status in the Status area from ready to not ready and from not ready to
ready. You can only change the status when operating in the ACD or ACD with forced presentation
mode.

To set the console status:

Click Not Ready.

To change to a ready status, click the button again.

Send Feedback 105

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Viewing ANI/ALI Data

ANI/ALI data is replaced with data from a different voice call when any of the following occurs:

• The calltaker answers a new voice call

• The calltaker takes a voice call off hold or park

• The calltaker double-clicks a voice call in the List area and the calltaker does not have a call
displayed in the Caller information area in the TALK or iHOLD state

• A call rings and the calltaker does not have a call displayed in the Caller information area in the
RING, TALK, or iHOLD state

• A call rings and the calltaker does not have a call displayed in the Caller information area that was
selected (double-clicked) from the List area

To view ANI/ALI data:

1 In the Caller Information area, click the ANI/ALI tab.

Figure 54: Caller Information Area – ANI/ALI Tab

2 To request new ALI data from the phone system at a predetermined interval, select the Auto-rebid
check box. The Auto-rebid check box is only visible if the call is wireless. The check box is only
enabled if the call is in the TALK state, and there is ALI available for the call, and the call is not a
conference call.

To request new ALI data from the phone system and re-center the corresponding icon on the map,
select the Rebid button. The Rebid button is only enabled if there is a call in the TALK state, ALI is
available for the call, and the call is not a conference call. You can only perform a rebid while you are
connected to a caller.

Rebid requests are written to the incident history.

106 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

3 To view raw ANI/ALI data, click Raw.

Raw ANI/ALI always displays exactly what the provider sent, whereas formatted ANI/ALI intends to
display the information you most commonly need.
NOTE
NOTE:
PremierOne supports formatted XML. If location data is transmitted as XML-based ALI data,
the formatted data displays in the ANI/ALI or SMS ALI tab.

The raw ALI data displays. A message may display indicating that the ALI information is incorrect. If
the ALI information is incorrect, you can flag the record as containing incorrect data. An entry
displays in the Provisioning application in the Call Control module for management by the system
administrator.

Figure 55: Call Area – ANI/ALI Tab Showing Raw Text

Send Feedback 107

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Flagging ALI Records as Incorrect

Flagging a record as having incorrect ALI information creates an entry in the Provisioning application in
the Call Control module. From the Provisioning application, the system administrator can create and
print a report or delete records.

To flag ALI records as incorrect:

1 From the ANI/ALI tab, click Raw.

2 In the Raw ALI tab, click Report ALI.

The Incorrect ALI Report dialog box appears.

Figure 56: Incorrect ALI Report Dialog Box

3 Enter any notes, and click Flag.

The dialog box closes and the Incorrect ALI label, icon, and any notes that are added display in the
RAW ANI/ALI tab.

In the Incorrect ALI Report dialog box, you can also clear a flag for a record that is marked as
incorrect or update a flagged record by adding or editing notes.

108 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Viewing SMS ALI Data

SMS ALI data is replaced with data from a text session when the calltaker begins a new SMS session.

To view SMS ALI data:

1 In the Caller Information area, click the SMS ALI tab.

Figure 57: Caller Information Area – SMS ALI Tab

The raw ALI data displays. A message may display indicating that the ALI information is incorrect. If
the ALI information is incorrect, you can flag the record as containing incorrect data. An entry
displays in the Provisioning application in the Call Control module for management by the system
administrator.

2 To view raw SMS data, click RAW.

Raw SMS ALI always displays exactly what the provider sent, whereas formatted SMS ALI intends
to display the information you most commonly need.

Figure 58: Call Area – SMS ALI Tab Showing Raw Text

Send Feedback 109

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Viewing Conference Information

The Conf Info tab in the Caller Information area lists the participants in the current conference call.

To view conference information:

In the Caller Information area, click the Conf Info tab.

The participants display. The name and phone number displays. Participants are listed in ascending
order in which they entered the conference. The calltaker initiating the conference always appears at
the bottom of the table.

If the conference is transferred to another participant, the table automatically clears when the
calltaker ends the conference by using the Release button or removes himself or herself from the
conference.

Figure 59: Caller Information Area – Conf Info Tab

110 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Looking up ALI Information

If permitted in your state and you have permissions, you can look up ALI information for a phone
number.

To look up ALI information:

1 In the Caller Information area, click the ALI Look up tab.

A field displays for the phone number.

Figure 60: Caller Information Area – Conf Info Tab

2 Enter the phone number and click Look Up.

The ALI information displays.

Figure 61: Caller Information Area – ALI Look up Tab With ALI Information

Initiating Voice Calls

CAD provides various ways to initiate a voice call to accommodate the situations that can occur, such as
calling the last caller, opening a ringdown line, or dialing a 10-digit phone number.

Send Feedback 111

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Making Outgoing Voice Calls

You can make an outgoing voice call in several different ways.

To make outgoing voice calls:

Do one of the following:

• Type a phone number in the Dial field, and then press Enter.

• Click the keypad icon to display the on-screen keypad. Use the keypad to enter the phone
number, and then click Dial.

• Issue the CAD command NG.AC;d.PH;xxxxxxxxx where xxxxxxxxxx is the phone number or
extension.

• In any call-type status monitor, right-click an item, and then select the NG command (requires
provisioning). Use the keypad to enter the phone number in the dialog box that displays.

• Enter the phone number/extension on the CAD command line, and then select the function key
combination on your workstation to make an outgoing call (requires provisioning).

• If you have an optional Function Key keypad, enter the phone number/extension on the CAD
command line, and then press Initiate voice call.

The number is removed from the Dial field and displays in the Last Dialed field.

Calling Numbers Back

You can make call back or redial a number in several different ways.

To call a number back:

Do one of the following:

• Click Redial. The Dial field must be blank to redial a number.

• Left-click the number in the status bar.

• Issue the CAD command NG.AC;c.

• From any status monitor, right-click the call, and then select Redial (requires provisioning).

• Select the function key combination that can be used to redial a number (requires provisioning).

• If you have an optional Function Key keypad, press Callback.

112 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Initiating Outgoing Voice Call to RSPs

When you are not on a voice call (have no calls in TALK state), the RSP (Response Service Providers)
buttons display the RSPs that are designated as default by your system administrator.

To initiate outgoing voice calls to an RSP:

Do one of the following:

• In the Transfer area, left-click the appropriate RSP button.

• Right-click an RSP button, and then select Show Additional Service Providers. Then left-click
the desired service provider button.

Initiating Voice Calls on a Ringdown Line

Ringdown lines are managed on Queue buttons similar to how other lines are managed on queue
buttons. Your system administrator manages the association of ringdown lines to Queue buttons.

To initiate a voice call on a ringdown line:

1 Right-click a Ringdown line queue button (a queue button that has ringdown lines allocated to its
presence)

2 Select the ringdown line.

Initiating Calls to Another Position

You can initiate a call to another position from a status monitor.

To initiate a call to another position:

From a position-type status monitor, right-click an item, and then select Dial Position.

This procedure is the same as when you select to dial a position extension when performing any of
the other methods of initiating an outgoing voice call.

Using Hook Flash

How hook flash operates depends on the setup of your telephony system; see your system
administrators for details.

Hook flash commonly places the current call on hold, simulates hanging up and then picking up again.
The button is only enabled when you have a call in the TALK state.

Send Feedback 113

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Managing Calls
You can manage voice calls by answering calls and initiating incidents, muting calls, releasing calls,
holding calls, parking calls, conferencing calls, transferring calls, listening and joining calls, and barging
in on calls.

Answering Voice Calls and Initiating Incidents

When a call comes in to your console, the Answer button flashes red, and the Line name associated
with the call displays below the Answer label. The Ring Indicator on the 911 Queue button flashes red
and the call displays in the Active Calls monitor.

For UCD, you can have multiple calls. For ACD, only one call is routed to you at a time.

To answer a voice call and initiate an incident:

1 Open an II form in the CAD client.

2 Do one of the following:

• On the command line, enter the NG command (NG.AC;a) or NG.AC;a.LI;xxx where xxx is
the call specifically ringing upon line xxx.

• In the Call Control Status area, click Answer. The highest priority and longest ringing voice call is
answered.

• In the Telephony area, click 911 queue. The highest priority and longest ringing voice call is
answered.

• In the Active Calls tab, click the phone number, and then select Answer.

• Select the function key combination on your workstation to answer a call (requires provisioning).

• If you have an optional Function Key keypad, press Answer.

The following occurs:

• The Answer button stops flashing.

• The 911 Queue button displays the line name and is outlined in green.

• The Status bar begins to update.

114 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

• The ANI/ALI indicator in the CAD client displays in red in the Caller Information area and a blue
icon displays to the right of the Middle field in the Caller section to indicate the caller data came
from ANI/ALI information.

Figure 62: ANI/ALI Indicator In CAD

• Depending on your system configuration (UCD vs ACD), the type of call (landline or wireless),
and how your administrator provisioned your system, ANI/ALI data may automatically populate
the II form.

Your system may also be configured so that you must press Shift+F11 (or whatever function key
is provisioned for your system) to answer the call and enter the ALI data in the II form.

3 Begin the conversation and initiate the incident if required.

How you create incidents depends on your agency configuration. Options include the following:

• Right-click the call in a status monitor, and then select Start Incident.

• Use the NG command.

For details on adding notes to the conversation, see Using the Call Control Phone Book on
page 123.

TDD calls are managed in the same way as voice calls. For SMS calls, see Initiating an Incident for
an SMS Call on page 129.

Muting Calls
You can mute your telephone microphone when you have a call in the TALK state. Only a voice call in a
TALK state can be muted. If the current call changes to any other state, the console automatically
unmutes.

To mute/unmute a call:

Do one of the following:

• In the Status area, click Mute.

• Issue the CAD command NG.AC;m.

Send Feedback 115

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

• From any status monitor, right-click the call, and then select Mute/Unmute (requires
provisioning).

• Select the function key combination on your workstation to mute/unmute the call (requires
provisioning).

• If you have an optional Function Key keypad, press Mute.

The call is muted/unmuted.

Releasing Calls
When you are finished with a call, release the call. Releasing a call places the call into the FINISHED
state and releases the line. You can only release a call that is in the TALK/TALK-C state.

To release a call:

Do one of the following:

• In the Telephony area, click Release.

• Issue the CAD command NG.AC;r.

• From any status monitor, right-click the call, and then select Release (requires provisioning).

• Select the function key combination on your workstation to release a call (requires provisioning).

• If you have an optional Function Key keypad, press Release.

The call is released.

Holding Calls
You can place a call into iHOLD/iHOLD-C state to process another call or when you want another
calltaker to speak with the caller. You can only place the call that you are currently connected to on hold.
When on hold, the caller cannot hear you.

You can only hold a call when the call is in the TALK/TALK-C state and the Std Conf, N/H Conf, or Trans
buttons are not active.

To hold a call:

Do any of the following:

• In the Telephony area, click Hold.

• Issue the CAD command NG.AC;h.

• From any status monitor, right-click the call, and then select Hold/Unhold (requires
provisioning).

• Select the function key combination on your workstation to hold a call (requires provisioning).

• If you have an optional Function Key keypad, press Hold.

The call is placed in iHOLD/iHOLD-C state.

116 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

The 911 Queue button changes to display a yellow update indicator (see Figure 36). The indicator
flashes when the provisioned limit for being held too long is exceeded.

Taking Held Voice Calls off Hold

Only a voice call that is in the iHOLD or HOLD state can be taken off hold.

To take a voice call off hold:

Do any of the following:

• In the List area, left-click the phone number of the held voice call.

• Issue the CAD command NG.AC;h;xxx where xxx is the line containing the voice call that is
on hold.

• From any status monitor, right-click the call, and then select Hold/Unhold (requires
provisioning). With this method, you must indicate the line for the held call.

• Select the function key combination on your workstation to take a voice call off hold (requires
provisioning). With this method, you must indicate the line for the held call.

• If you have an optional Function Key keypad, press Take-Call-Off-Hold.

The call is placed in iHOLD/iHOLD-C state.

The 911 Queue button changes to display a yellow update indicator (see Figure 36). The indicator
flashes when the provisioned limit for being held too long is exceeded.

Parking Calls
Parking a call routes a call to a special line, such as an internal extension. Only active voice calls in a
TALK state can be parked. Parking frees up the line (normally a 9-1-1 trunk line) for other 9-1-1 calls,
and is commonly used for ACD setups. The call can then be retrieved (unparked) by others by dialing
the extension on which the call was parked.

To park a call:

Do one of the following:

• In the Status area, click Park.

• Issue the CAD command NG.AC;p.

• From any status monitor, right-click the call, and then select Park (requires provisioning).

• Select the function key combination on your workstation to park a call (requires provisioning).

• If you have an optional Function Key keypad, press Park.

The call is placed in PARK state and is rerouted. The line number is removed from the 911 Queue
button.

If the parked call times out without being answered, the call is represented in a RING state. The
system administrator sets the amount of time before the call is represented.

Send Feedback 117

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Conferencing Calls
You can conference calls in two different ways, NoHold conference and Standard conference. The
difference between these two types of conference calls is whether the caller is kept in a TALK state while
you connect to other parties.

Conferencing Calls Using a NoHold Conference

In a NoHold conference call, the caller is kept in TALK state while you connect to other parties. After a
conference call is established, the Conf Info tab in the Caller Information area updates with the list of
participants. You can add and renew participants after the call is established.

To conference a call using a NoHold conference:

1 Do one of the following:

• In the Telephony area, click Conf N/H. Enter the phone number/extension of the new party in
the Dial field, and click Enter.

• Issue the CAD command NG.AC;t.PH;xxxxxxxxxx where xxxxxxxxxx is the phone

number/extension of the new party.

• From any status monitor, right-click the call, and then select Conference - No-Hold (requires
provisioning). Enter the phone number/extension of the new party in the Dial field, and click
Enter.

• On the CAD command line, enter the phone number/extension of the new party. Then select the
function key combination for a NoHold Transfer/Conference call (requires provisioning).

• On the CAD command line, enter the phone number/extension of the new party. Press No-Hold
Transfer voice call on an optional Function Key keypad.

• If you have an optional Function Key keypad, enter the phone number/extension of the new party
on the CAD command line. Press No-Hold Transfer voice call on the Function Key keypad.

You and the caller both hear the recipient being rung. After the party answers, the phone number in
the Dial field cleared.

The call changes to the TALK-C state.

2 Repeat the step for any other participants.

The participants are added to the top of the list in the Conf Info tab.

The Conf Info tab in the Caller Information area updates with a list of participants. You can remove
the last participant to join at any time by clicking the X on the N/H Conf button.

3 When finished, do one of the following:

• Click NH Conf.

• Right-click the call in a status monitor, and then select Conference - No Hold.

You and the caller remain connected.

4 When the call is finished, release the call.

118 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Conferencing Calls Using a Standard Conference

In a standard conference call, the caller is placed on hold while you connect other parties. After a
conference call is established, the Conf Info tab in the Caller Information area updates with the list of
participants. You can add and renew participants after the call is established.

To conference a call using a standard conference:

1 Do one of the following:

• In the Telephony area, click Std Conf. Enter the phone number/extension of the new party, and
then click Enter.

• Issue the CAD command NG.AC;t.PH;xxxxxxxxxx where xxxxxxxxxx is the phone

number/extension with which you and the caller is conferenced.

• From any status monitor, right-click the call, and then select Conference - No-Hold. (requires
provisioning).Enter the phone number/extension of the new party, and then click Enter.

• On the CAD command line, enter the phone number/extension of the new party. Select the
function key combination on your workstation to make a Standard conference call (requires
provisioning).

• If you have an optional Function Key keypad, enter the phone number/extension of the new party
on the CAD command line. Then press Standard on the Function Key keypad.

2 Click Std Conf to reestablish the conference call.

The Conf Info tab updates to display the list of participants.

You can remove the last participant to join at any time by clicking the X on the Std Conf button.

3 Repeat until everyone is on the call.

After six people are conferenced on the call, the quality of the call begins to degrade.

4 When the call is finished, release the call.

Transferring Calls
You can transfer calls in three different ways. The difference between these transfers is whether the
caller is kept in a TALK state while you transfer to other parties or whether the transfer drops you after
you dial the number of the transferring party.

Transferring Calls Using a NoHold Transfer

In a NoHold transfer call, the caller is kept in TALK state while you connect other parties.

To transfer a call using a NoHold transfer:

1 Follow the procedure for NoHold Conference.

For details, see Conferencing Calls on page 118.

2 Release the call.

Send Feedback 119

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Transferring Calls Using a Standard Transfer

In a Standard transfer call, the caller is placed on hold while you connect other parties.

To transfer a call using a Standard transfer:

1 Follow the procedure for Standard Conference.

For details, see Conferencing Calls Using a Standard Conference on page 119.

2 Release the call.

Transferring Calls Using a Blind Transfer

A blind transfer drops you after you dial the number of the transferring party. You cannot terminate a
blind transfer after you have called the transferring party. Unlike Standard and NoHold transfers which
are similar to Standard and NoHold conference calls, you cannot conference a call with a blind transfer.

To transfer a call using a Blind transfer:

1 Do one of the following:

• In the Telephony area, click Trans.

• From any status monitor, right-click the call, and then select Trans (requires provisioning).

• Select the function key combination on your workstation (requires provisioning).

• If you have an optional Function Key keypad, press Transfer.

The caller is placed on hold. The call changes to the iHOLD/iHOLD-c state.

2 Call the phone-number/extension.

The Dialer text box is cleared and you are dropped from the call.

Transferring Calls to Service Providers

The Transfer area contains buttons for transferring calls to Recommended Service Providers (RSP)
based on the ESN value or line ID (if no ESN is available) for each service provider type. This type of
transfer is called Intelligent Transfer. The primary purpose of this Intelligent Transfer is to facilitate a
transfer to another PSAP/agency. An Intelligent Transfer is always performed as a supervised transfer/
conference keeping the calltaker and the caller in constant contact.

A conference call can be completed with an RSP using this Intelligent Transfer functionality.

Your system administrator provisions the service provider types and RSPs that are recommended. Your
system administrator also configures the schedules for which RSPs and their phone numbers are used
during transfer based on the day of week and time of day for ESN, line the call arrived on, or a simple
default of phone number based on neither ESN or line.

120 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

To transfer a call to a service provider:

1 Do one of the following:

• In the Transfer area, left-click the service provider button.

• Issue the CAD command NG.AC;t.SPT;xxx where xxx is the service provider type to which
you want to transfer the voice call.

Service providers are commonly Law, Fire, and EMS but may be anything provisioned by the
administrator such as Animal (control), Hospital, or DPW (Department of Public Works).

• In any status monitor, right-click the call, and then select the appropriate command to transfer the
voice call to an RSP (requires provisioning).

• Select the function key combination on your workstation to transfer the call (requires
provisioning).

• If you have an optional Function Key keypad, press Transfer.

The following occurs:

• When no calls are in a TALK state, the service provider number is dialed.

• When there is a call in the TALK state, a no-hold conference transfer with the service provider
occurs.

This procedure functions similar to performing a no-hold conference using the N/H Conf button. The
exception is that you do not have to specify a phone number or extension to conference in. After the
conference is established, release the call at any time, leaving the other parties connected.

Replaying Calls
You can review a call by playing it back again. To replay a call, the call must be in the FINISHED state
and have an audio file available.

To replay a call:

1 Select the call you want to replay.

2 Do one of the following:

• Right-click the call and select Playback.

• In the Telephony area, click Playback.

Send Feedback 121

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

The call replays. Controls for the replay display in the Playback tab. The phone number and when
the call was answered displays above the controls.

Figure 63: Playback Tab Showing Call

3 Do any of the following:

• To stop the replay, select the Stop button (black square).

• To pause the replay, select Pause (double vertical rectangles).

• To restart the replay, select Play (blue right-facing arrow).

• To adjust the volume, use the volume controls at the bottom of the tab.

4 When finished, select Clear.

The call stops and the replay controls are removed from the Playback tab.

Listening to and Joining Calls

Listen and join allows a supervisor to listen in on a call and potentially join the call. Listen and Join
affects the workstation. The calltaker and caller need not be aware the supervisor is listening. If the
workstation is not on a call, the supervisor only hears silence when listening to the call.

NOTE:
Listening and joining are typical of ACE, but can also be applied to UCD.

To listen to and join a call:

1 In the Position monitor tab, right-click the workstation, and then select Listen.

You can select Listen before the calltaker answers a call.

2 Do one of the following:

• To join the call, select the workstation from the Position monitor tab, right-click, and then select
Join.

• To exit Listen/Join mode, select Disconnect (or whatever title your system administrator has
given the Disconnect from Listen & Join function).

122 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Barging in on Calls
Barging in on a call places you in a three-way conversation with the calltaker and the caller. The line
connection is brought to your workstation along with the ANI/ALI information. Barging in on a call affects
a call, not the workstation.

NOTE:
Barging can only be done on a shared line.

To barge in on a call:

1 In the Active Calls tab, right-click the call, and then select Barge In.

2 After finished, select Release to release the call from your position.

Any additional calltakers present in the conversation remain connected to the caller.

Using the Call Control Phone Book

Use the Call Control Phone Book tab to easily access and call outside contracts. For a detailed
description of the components of the window, see Call Control Phone Book on page 101.

To use the Call Control phone book:

1 In the Transfer area, click the Phone Book tab.

A list of available phone books displays. The books are all of the Address Books that you have
access to. The entries that display are only those contacts within the address book that have phone
numbers.

Figure 64: Phone Book Tab

Send Feedback 123

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

2 From the Book list, select the name of the address book.

3 To any of the following to filter the display of corresponding records:

• To display Ready Reference contact information, select the Ready References check box.

• To display PremierOne user contact information, select the Users check box.

• To filter the entries that display, type the filter text in the Find box.

For example, typing m displays only the cards beginning only m. Typing abc,def shows all user
cards with a last name starting with abc AND a first name starting with def.

4 Left click the number you want to call.

The number is highlighted to show it was called. When you move the focus elsewhere, the
highlighting is removed.

Adding Call Notes

You can add call notes to any voice, SMS, or abandoned call, even if the call is not active.

To add call notes:

1 In the List area, right-click the call, and then select Call Notes.

The Call Notes dialog box appears.

Figure 65: Add Call Notes Dialog Box

124 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

2 Enter your notes, and then click OK.

A left-facing arrow displays in the first column of the tab to indicate that notes exist.
\

Figure 66: Call History Tab Showing Call Notes Indicator

3 To add additional notes, repeat the procedure.

Send Feedback 125

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Viewing Call Notes

Calls that have associated notes display a left-facing arrow in the first column of the List area.

To view call notes:

1 Click the left-facing arrow to the left of the call.

The call notes display.

Figure 67: Call Notes

2 To add additional notes, click Add Notes and add then notes.

3 To return to the list display click the right-facing arrow on the right side of the tab.

Managing Abandoned Calls

Abandoned calls are voice calls when the caller hangs up before the voice call is answered. These types
of calls are considered to be a notification and not an actual voice call.

To manage abandoned calls:

1 To call the abandoned call, left-click the telephone number for the call in the Abandoned Calls list.

The number is called on your intercom line and the call status changes to iREDIALED. The call state
changes to REDIALED for all other calltakers.

The Att# column increments by one to keep track of how many times calltakers have collectively
attempted to contact the abandoned call.

2 Do one of the following:

• If you do not get an answer, click Release.

The call stays in the iREDIALED state.

126 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

• Initiate the call

In this case, a separate voice call is initiated. Telephony functionality such as transfer, hold, mute,
and conference do not function with abandoned call notifications. The voice call that is initiated
from a callback on an abandoned call notification, however, has all telephony functionality
available.

3 Do one of the following:

• To change the call state back to ABANDONED, right-click the call on any status monitor that
displays abandoned call notifications, and then select Make Abandoned.

• To remove the call from the list, right-click the call, and then select Delete.

Working With Text Sessions

SMS text sessions differ from voice calls in that they do not adhere to normal telephony functions. For
example, you cannot place an SMS call on hold, transfer and SMS call, or conference an SMS call.

An ACD operator can work on one voice call and one or more SMS texts at the same time. A UCD
operator can work multiple voice calls and one or more SMS texts at the same time. Only one voice call
can be in TALK status for that operator at a time (but many can be on hold).

When a text call comes in, the Ring indicator on the SMS queue button flashes red and the time
indicator displays on the SMS queue button. Calltakers can simultaneously manage Text and Voice
calls.

ProQA Paramount™ is integrated with NG 9-1-1 Text Messaging. The SMS window displays the prefix
[Q&A] before questions sent by ProQA to differentiate the questions. For details on ProQA, see Using
ProQA and ProQA Paramount on page 649.

NOTE:
An SMS text session automatically disconnects after the time configured on the SMS Gateway
(part of Viper) (10 seconds to 2 minutes). The Text only remains in a PRESENTED status until
that time has elapsed and then the Text goes into the TERMINATED state.

To work with a text session:

1 In the Telephony area, click SMS Queue.

The following occurs:

• The ring indicator disappears.

• The call displays in the SMS tab in the List area.

• The Text Conversation window displays in the area of the List area. The tabs in the List area are
disabled.

• The duration of the call displays at the top of the window to the left of the phone number.

Send Feedback 127

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

When multiple SMS calls are active, Previous/Next icons (arrows) display in the upper-right corner of
the Text Conversation window. You can use these icons to navigate between all SMS conversations
in the ACTIVE and UPDATED status. Navigation is chronological and is based on the time the call
became active at your position.
NOTE
NOTE:
You can left-click the SMS Queue button to answer the highest priority call (longest waiting) in
that queue with a call status of PRESENTED.

Figure 68: SMS Text Conversation Window

2 Do one of the following:

• To type the response, enter the response in the Text box at the bottom of the window.

• To select a preprogrammed message:

- Click the down-facing arrow on the right side of the Text box, and then select the message.

- Type the tag for the message followed by the accent character ( ‘ ).

Your system administrator creates Tags.

- Start typing a pre-programmed message. The Text box “autofills” as you type. For example,
typing a could bring up the pre-programmed message “Are you having chest pains?”

Your system administrator provisions preprogrammed messages.

Each message you send is in an enclosed “bubble” and is indented. Each message contains a
suffix indicating CALLER or your CAD ID. The date and time the message was received or sent
is also included.

3 Click Send.

The message is sent to the SMS caller.

To close the window at any time, click Hide. Closing the window does not end the call. You can
reopen the window by right-clicking the SMS button and selecting the call.

128 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

4 Repeat the previous two steps until the conversation is finished. Then click End.

The Terminate SMS Conversation dialog box appears.

Figure 69: Terminate SMS Conversation Dialog Box

5 Click OK.

The message <Conversation Terminated> displays at the end of the transcript.

To call back a citizen, place an outgoing call to the phone that initiated the SMS. You cannot initiate an
SMS text session, you can only respond to an incoming SMS call. While an SMS Text displays to all
workstations provisioned to handle SMS Text messaging, after a calltaker selects to handle an SMS
Text, only that calltaker has visibility to that specific SMS Text conversation.

Changing the Header for an SMS Call

You can change the default text that is used for an SMS header in the SMS text window. Using the
default is helpful in identifying the call when you have several SMS calls. The information does not
display in the status monitors, but makes it easy to identify each call when displayed in the SMS window.

To change the header for an SMS call:

1 In the SMS call, select the text you want to use for the header.

2 Right-click, and then select Set as Label.

The text displays at the top of the window.

Initiating an Incident for an SMS Call

You can initiate an incident in CAD from an SMS call and select information in the SMS window to copy-
and-paste to CAD. The SMS text is automatically added to the call.

To initiate an incident for an SMS Call:

1 In the SMS text window, right-click the call.

2 Do one of the following:

• If the II/IU form is active in the work area, select Associate to incident.

• If an II/IU form is not active in the work area, select Start incident. When you select Start
incident, PremierOne displays an II form in the active work area and populates the form with the
SMS location and caller information.

NOTES:
SMS ALI data populates the location and caller information of a CAD incident similar to voice call.

Send Feedback 129

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

The focus switches to CAD. On the Assoc tab, the SMS text is automatically associated.

3 Do any of the following to add incident information in CAD:

• Select location information in the SMS window, right-click, and then select Incident Location,
followed by Location, City, or Apt/Unit.

• Select name information in the SMS window, right-click, and then select Initial Caller and then
select Name (first last), Name (first), Name (last), Phone, Address, City, or Apt/Unit.

The Name (first last) item populates the first text string into the First Name field and the second
text string into the Last Name field; any additional text strings in the highlighted text are ignored.

• Select information you want added as comments, right-click, and then select Comments.

Using the right-click action appends the highlighted text to any unsubmitted text that is the II or IU
form.
NOTE
NOTE:
If a conversation is associated with more than one II/IU form currently displayed in one of the
work areas, CAD automatically switches to the next work area containing the associated II/IU
form (starting with the active work area and moving sequentially) and the highlighted text
populates the appropriate field on the form.

4 After you have entered all the information, press F10 to submit the form.

Working With TDD Calls

When a TDD call comes in, the Ring indicator on the 911 queue button flashes red, and the time
indicator displays on the 911 queue button.

A 9-1-1 TDD call is the same as any 9-1-1 voice call with regards to receiving ALI data. For details on
initiating an incident for a TDD call, see Initiating Voice Calls on page 111. The transcript of the call is
associated with the incident.

An ACD operator cannot work on a voice call and a TDD call at the same time because a TDD call is a
voice call (TDD works over a voice call). An ACD operator can work a TDD call and one or more SMS
texts at the same time (only one conversation is visible at a time).

A UCD operator can have multiple calls on hold and work a TDD call at the same time. While a TDD call
can be placed on hold, placing a TDD call on hold causes the device to disconnect so should not be
done. The voice call line would still be open but the TDD device would disconnect from the conversation.

NOTE:
TDD calls should never be placed on hold or transferred.

To work with a TDD call:

1 In the Telephony area, click the appropriate Queue button.

The following occurs:

• The ring indicator disappears.

• The call displays in the Active tab in the List area.

130 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

• The TDD window displays in the area of the List area. The tabs in the List area are disabled.

• Each message the user sends is in an enclosed “bubble” and is outdented. Each message
contains a suffix indicating CALLER or your CAD ID. The date and time the message was
received or sent is also included. The date and time with outgoing text is highlighted in pink and
incoming text is highlighted in blue.

Figure 70: TDD Window

2 Do one of the following:

• To type the response, enter it in the Text box at the bottom of the window.

• To select a preprogrammed message, click the down-facing arrow on the right side of the Text
box, and then select the message.

Your system administrator provisions these messages.

Your system may be provisioned so that a message is automatically transmitted upon activation of a
TDD session. For example, your system administrator could provision the message “You are in
contact with TownX 9-1-1. What is your emergency?” This feature keeps you from
having to manually type this message upon receipt of every TDD call.

3 Click Send or press Enter.

The message is sent to the TDD caller.

To close the window at any time, click Hide; hiding does not drop the call. You can re-open the
window by right-clicking the SMS button and the selecting the call.

At any time during the conversation, you can select text within the conversation view, right-click, and
then select copy to copy the text to any other application that allows pasting of text (such as CAD or
Messaging).

Send Feedback 131

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

To speed communication with callers that can speak and unmute the microphone, click HCO
(hearing carry over) in the TDD window. Clicking HCO disables the VCO button, the Text field, and
the Send button. Click the button a second time to deactivate the HCO mode and return the button
to its normal status.

To speed communication with callers that can speak and unmute the ear piece, click VCO (voice
carry over) in the TDD window. Clicking VCO disables the HCO button.

4 Repeat until the conversation is finished.

5 Do one of the following:

• Release the call.

• In any call-type status monitor, right-click an item, and then select Release (requires
provisioning).

• Select the function key combination on your workstation to release the call (requires
provisioning).

• If you have an optional Function Key keypad, can also press Terminate TDD call.

The message <Conversation Terminated> displays at the end of the transcript.

Your system may also be provisioned so that a message is automatically transmitted just before
termination of a TDD session. For example, your system administrator could provision the message
“You are now disconnected from TownX 9-1-1. If you need further assistance,
please call again.”

Changing the Header for a TDD Call

You can change the default text that is used for a TDD header in the TDD text window. This feature can
be helpful in identifying the call when you have several TDD calls. The information does not display in
status monitors, but makes it easy to identify each call when displayed it in the TDD window.

To change the header for a TDD call:

1 Select the text you want to use for the header.

2 Right-click, and then select Set as Label.

The text displays at the top of the TDD window.

132 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Initiating an Incident for a TDD Call

You initiate incidents in CAD for a TDD call in the same was as a voice call. For details, see Answering
Voice Calls and Initiating Incidents on page 114.

Understanding Associated Calls

Any voice or text session can be associated to an incident for reference purposes. For TDD and SMS
calls, the text of the conversation is added.

Multiple calls can be associated with a single incident and a single call can be associated with multiple
incidents, such as when an incident requires police, fire, and an EMS response. The association can be
made at the time the call is answered or presented or any time later, even if the call is in the FINISHED
or TERMINATED status. Similarly, the association can be made before creating the incident (for
example, associating the call to an II form) or anytime after the incident is created.

Associations can be established using several different methods depending on how the Automatically
display ANI/ALI option is configured. Other factors include whether your system is UCD or ACD, how
your function keys are provisioned, and how your right-click menu options are provisioned. For details
regarding the population of ANI/ALI in the form, see Table 13-1, Chapter 13, Configuring Incident
Management, in the PremierOne Provisioning Guide.
Table 20: Methods For Associating Calls

Method Description Scope

1a In UCD mode, display a blank II form before answering a voice call (TALK) and Voice/TDD
provisioned as Automatically display ANI/ALI information = YES.

1b In ACD mode, display a blank II form before the next voice call being presented to Voice/TDD
the console (RING or TALK for forced presentation) and provisioned as
Automatically display ANI/ALI information = YES.

2 Use a function key to perform the “Answer call and display II form” action with a Voice/TDD
call in the RING status and provisioned as Automatically display ANI/ALI
information = YES.

3 Select Start Incident from the right-click menu in the List area or Status Monitor. Voice/TDD
Abandoned
call
SMS

4 Select Start Incident from the right-click menu in the SMS/TDD window. TDD
SMS
The II form displays in the active work area with focus in the Location field.

5 Click the Assoc Call button in the II form or IU form with a call in the TALK or Voice/TDD
TALK-C state.

The ANI/ALI from the call does not populate the form.

Send Feedback 133

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

After an association is established using one of these methods, the associated call displays in the
Assoc WAA tab in the II form. For voice calls, the caller name and phone number display. For SMS/TDD
calls, the entire transcript is available. The transcript becomes available when the SMS conversation is
terminated or the TDD call is released.

Figure 71: Work Assist Area – Associated Calls

The association can be removed in two ways:

• Clearing the II form from the work area (includes displaying a new II form in the same work area)

• Using the Disassoc button on the Assoc WAA tab in the II or IU form

134 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

An incident history transaction is logged each time a call is associated to or disassociated from an
incident.

Figure 72: Assoc Call Button In The II Form

Using the Call Control Command (NG)

You can use the NG command to perform various actions on a line or phone number that you do
manually in the Call Control window.

To use the Call Control command:

1 On the command line, type NG followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
NG.PH; <phone number>;SPT <service provider type>;NR <not ready
reason code>; LI;<line number>;AC <action acd
state|answer|callback|dial|hold|mute|park|
rebid|release|transfer (blind)| transfer (supervised)>
If your system is ACD and was configured to require Not Ready Reasons, enter, or select the reason
for acd state.

For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the letter for the action. If needed, type the period separator followed by the
period separator.

Actions include the following:

• State – Toggles the ACD console state to Ready/Not Ready

• Answer – Answers the call with the highest priority/longest ringing or answers the specific call
when a line is specified using the LI parameter

• Call Back – Calls back the last call, either incoming or outgoing (this call is the phone number
that appears in the Last dialed field

• Dial – Dials the phone number/local extension specified using the PH parameter or takes a call off
park when the extension specified using the PH parameter contains a parked call

Send Feedback 135

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

• Hold – Does one of the following:

- Places the call in the iHOLD/iHOLD-C state when there is a call in the TALK/TALK-C state

- Places the call in the TALK/TALK-C state when the LI parameter is not specified and there is
only one call in the iHOLD/iHOLD-C state

- Places the specific call in the TALK/TALK-C state when a line is specified using the LI
parameter

• Mute – Toggles the console microphone volume from unmuted to muted or from muted to
unmuted, depending on the current state

• Park – Places the call currently in the TALK state into the PARK state

• Rebid – Rebids the ANI/ALI (and refreshes the ANI/ALI data in the Call Control window only) for
the call currently in the TALK state

• Release – Releases the call currently in the TALK or TALK-C state

• Transfer (blind) – Transfers the call currently in the TALK state to another phone number/local
extension/queue extension specified using the PH parameter; the calltaker is dropped from the
call after the transfer

• Transfer (supervised) – Transfers the call currently in the TALK state to another phone number/
local extension/queue extension specified using the PH parameter; the calltaker is not
automatically dropped from the call after the transfer

3 Press Enter or F10.

Examples
To answer a call:

NG.AC;a

To change the state of your console from ready to not ready:

NG.AC;s

Function Keys for Call Control

Your system administrator can configure function keys for the following actions. Check with your system
administrator to see if any of keys have been configured.

NOTE:
By default, F1 changes the focus to the CAD window and then to the Call Control window.

• Populate ANI/ALI in II form

• Change ACD state (as per the NG command)

• Answer voice call (as per the NG command)

• Answer voice call & display II form (as per the NG command)

No change to command line but anything currently in the active work area is cleared and the focus
moves to the II form.

136 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

• Call back last call (as per the NG command)

• Dial phone number (as per the NG command)

• Mute telephone microphone (NG command)

• Park call (as per the NG command)

• Transfer (as per the NG command)

• Place call on hold/Remove call from hold (as per the NG command)

• Rebid ANI/ALI (as per the NG command)

• Release voice call (as per the NG command)

Table 21: Function Key Actions for Call Control

Action Description

Answer voice call & display Answers the highest priority + longest ringing voice call; simultaneously displays
II form the Incident Initiation (II) form and populates ANI/ALI information in II form.

(Must not already be in a TALK state).

Answer voice call Answers the highest priority + longest ringing voice call.

(Must not already be in a TALK state).

Call back last call Places the outgoing voice call to phone number of the last call to which the user
was connected.

(Must not already be in a TALK state).

Dial phone number Places the outgoing voice call to the phone number the user has typed upon the
CAD command-line.

(Must not already be in a TALK state).

Mute Telephone microphone Mutes/Unmutes (toggles mute on/off) the user telephone microphone.

(Must be in a TALK state).

Park call Parks the currently active voice call by transferring the call from its current line to
an internal line/extension.

(Must be in a TALK state).

Place call on hold Places the currently active voice call on hold.

(Must be in a TALK state).

Populate ANI/ALI in II form Populates the ALI data in Caller and Incident Location* fields upon a CAD
Incident Initiation form.

(*dependent upon additional provisioning whether an existing incident location is

overwritten by new ALI information).

(No restriction on call activity/status. ALI populating form is last ALI received by
the workstation).

Rebid ANI/ALI Requests rebid of ANI for refreshed ALI information.

(Must be in a TALK state).

Send Feedback 137

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

Table 21: Function Key Actions for Call Control (Cont.)

Action Description

Release voice call Releases (hangs up) the currently active voice call.

(Must be in a TALK state).

Take call off hold When the user enters a line ID on the CAD command line and selects “Take call
off hold”, the system takes the held voice call on specified line off hold.

(Line specified by user must have a voice call in iHOLD or HOLD state. If in TALK
with another call when performing this action, the TALK call becomes iHOLD at
the same time held call becomes TALK).

Transfer voice call Initiates a blind transfer of currently active voice call. Cursor is placed in phone-
number-to-dial field awaiting entry of phone number to which to transfer active
voice call.

(Must be in a TALK state).

Viewing Call Details for Voice Calls

You can search and view call details using Intrado ClearStats (ICS) reporting system. You can use a
wide variety of search and filter criteria.

To view call details for voice calls:

1 In the Call Control window, select ICS Reports from the Reports menu.

The Sign In window appears.

Figure 73: Login Window

138 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

2 Enter your user name and password, and then select your role and data source.

These values are configured separately from your CAD user log in.

3 Click Sign in.

The Reporting window appears.

Figure 74: Power ICS Reporting Window

4 Enter the search criteria, and then click Run.

For details on creating reports, see your system administrator or the online help for Reporting.

Send Feedback 139

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 5: Using Call Control

140 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Controlling Your Session

Chapter 6

Controlling Your Session 6

Your session begins when you log in and ends when you log off. Session commands help you manage
your session and your workload. These include commands such as clearing work areas, refreshing your
display, modifying your signed on areas, modifying coverage responsibilities, and switching to online
mode.

NOTE:
When CAD is running Call Control and the system locks the session because the idle session
timer has timed out, the Call Control window does not lock.

Agency Definitions
The following definitions may be of use.
Table 22: Agency Definitions

Administrative or
Agency Type Description
operational*

Unit agency Agency that the unit belongs to when unit is placed on duty. Operational

Incident agency Agency that the incident was created under (not necessarily the Operational
agency creating the incident).

Owning agency Agency used to sign on. Either

Working agency If the user does not specify an agency with an incident number or Operational
unit ID (for example, IU.unit1 or IU.#39), the working agency is
the logical representation of an agency that is used as the
default.

• If a user signs on with a coverage group, the default agency

provisioned with the coverage group is used as the working
agency.

• If the user signs on to cover a single agency (not with a

coverage group), the working agency is set to the agency.

• If a user signs on to cover multiple agencies, the working

agency is set to the owning agency.

A user must always have a working agency.

The working agency can always be changed with the SW

command.

*An administrative agency does not create incidents. An operational agency creates incidents and
manages units.

Send Feedback 141

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 6: Controlling Your Session

Clearing Work Areas (CW)

When you no longer need the information in a work area, you can clear the currently displayed work
area. You can alternatively clear all work areas or a specific work area. Clearing a work area for an
incident does not close the incident.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

CW.WA
To clear work areas:

Do one of the following:

• To clear only the active work area, type CW on the command line (with no period separator) and
press Enter or F10.

• To clear all or specific work areas, type CW on the command line followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
CW.WA;<work area {all|1-n}>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

To clear all work areas, type all and press Enter or F10. To clear a specific work area, type the
number of the work area (such as 2) and press Enter. The number of the work area displays on
the tab on the left side of the window.

Figure 75: Main Window Showing Work Area Numbers

Examples:
To clear the active work area:
CW

142 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 6: Controlling Your Session

To clear all areas:

CW.all
To clear work area 3:
CW.3

Refreshing Your Status Monitor and Map Displays (DS)

Use the DS command to refresh your status monitor and map displays as incident or unit information
changes or when you want to view units and incidents in other agencies and areas. The DS command
does not function with a Fixed status monitor display.

NOTE:
The DS command affects only the display of your signed on coverage group. For details on
monitoring other areas, see Monitoring Areas on page 144.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

DS.A.CG
To refresh your status monitor and map displays for your signon areas:

Type the following:

DS
To refresh your status monitor and map displays when you are signed onto multiple coverage
groups:

Type the following:

DS..CoverageGroupName
Examples:
Refresh area1 and area2:
DS.area1,area2
Refresh coverage group Central:
DS..Central

Send Feedback 143

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 6: Controlling Your Session

Monitoring Areas
When you log in to PremierOne CAD, your signon areas display in your status monitors. You may also
have another monitor set up for monitoring areas outside (or within) your coverage group. For additional
details on these types of status monitors, see Overview of Types of Status Monitor Coverages on
page 445.

You can set the areas you want to monitor from a form or from the command line using the MA
command (Monitor Area).

NOTE:
The MA command does not alter your signed on areas; it just changes the areas you are
monitoring.

Setting Monitored Areas From the Monitor Areas Form

You can set the areas you want to monitor either from a form or from the command line. For details on
using the command, see Setting Monitored Areas From the Command Line (MA) on page 146.

To select monitored areas from the Monitor Areas form:

1 Do one of the following:

• From the Utilities menu, select Monitored Areas.

• On the command line, type MA and then press Enter or F10.

The Monitor Areas dialog box appears.

Figure 76: Monitor Areas Dialog Box

144 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 6: Controlling Your Session

2 From the Coverage Groups list, select your coverage group. If you do not have a coverage group,
skip this step.

Figure 77: Monitor Areas Dialog Box – Select Coverage Group

Your monitored areas display in the Selected Monitor Areas section of the Monitor Areas dialog box.
Click the expand and collapse buttons to expand and collapse the list.

3 From the Agencies list, select your agency or agencies.

A tab including monitored area settings for each agency you selected appears below the Agencies
list.
NOTE
NOTE:
A separate tab appears for each agency you select in this step.

Send Feedback 145

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 6: Controlling Your Session

4 On the Agency tab in the Monitor Areas section, do the following:

To add all areas to your monitored areas, select the All Areas check box.

Figure 78: Monitor Areas Dialog Box – Select All Areas

If you want to manually select your areas, do the following.

From the Areas list or lists that appear, manually select the areas you want to monitor. An arrow
beside the area name indicates that it is selected. You can click any area to select (arrow) or
deselect (no arrow) that area. When you are done selecting the areas, click outside of the Areas list.

The areas you selected display in the Selected Monitor Areas section of the Monitor Areas dialog
box.

5 Click OK to save your changes and exit the Monitor Areas dialog box.

The areas you selected are now active on your console and appear in your status monitors.

Setting Monitored Areas From the Command Line (MA)

You can set the areas you want to monitor either from a form or from the command line. Issuing the MA
command without any identifiers displays the Monitor Areas form. For details on using the form, see
Setting Monitored Areas From the Monitor Areas Form on page 144.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

MA.A.CG

146 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 6: Controlling Your Session

1 Do one of the following:

• On the command line, type MA followed by the period separator. Then type the area you want to
monitor. Separate multiple areas with commas. Only enter the agency if it is different from your
signon.

The areas that you enter are added to your current coverage.

• On the command line, type MA followed by two period separators, and then type the coverage
group. Separate multiple coverage groups with commas. Only enter the agency if it is different
than your signon.

2 Press Enter or F10.

The display refreshes to show the new areas or coverage groups.

Modifying Your Signed On Areas (CC)

You can modify your signed on areas without having to sign off and then sign back on with the new area
information by using the Console Control (CC) command. The CC command affects only your signed on
areas; you cannot transfer or receive areas with the CC command.

When you log on, you are automatically assigned to a Default Area. The Default Area is used for
incidents that do not fall in a jurisdictional area and for units that are on duty but not assigned to an area.

You can only remove an agency Default Area from your coverage based on the following conditions:

• You are no longer signed on to cover any areas for the respective agency (outside of the Default
Area)

and

• If you are signed onto a role that is provisioned to restrict sign-off, then at least one other user signed
onto the respective role is covering the Default Area

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

CC.A.CG.AC{add|delete|reset}
To modify your signed on areas:

1 On the command line, type CC followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
CC.A;<agency/area(s)>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the value for the areas you want to add to or remove from your list of signed on
areas, followed by the period separator.

Only include the agency if it is different from your signed on coverage group.

Send Feedback 147

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 6: Controlling Your Session

3 To add or remove a coverage group, type the coverage group. Otherwise type only the period
separator.

4 Type the action, a for add, d for delete, or r for reset and press Enter or F10.
Examples:
Add coverage group Group3 to your signed on areas:
CC..Group3 or CC.CG;3
Remove areas south, north, and east:
CC.south,north,east

Changing Your Signon Agency (SW)

You can change the agency to which you originally signed on (your working agency) from the command
line using the Switch Working Default (SW) command. The command allows you to change the agency
without having to sign off and sign back on again.

To view the working agency, see Viewing Your Working Agency on page 149.

NOTE:
The command line can be configured so that a number specified on the command line
represents an incident ID or a unit call sign. The command line behavior follows the owning
agency of the user and not the working agency of the user.

Command identifiers default order:

SW.AG
To change your signon agency:

1 On the command line, type SW followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
SW.AG;<agency id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 Type the ID for the new agency you want to sign on to at the cursor.

3 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne CAD changes your agency as specified.

Example:
Switch your signon agency to Agency DCMetro:
SW.DCMetro

148 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 6: Controlling Your Session

Viewing Your Working Agency

You can view your working agency to confirm the agency you are working in. The working agency is the
agency used for the commands that you issue. Specify the agency with commands only if it is different
than your working agency.

To view your working agency:

1 On the command line, type SW and press Enter or F10.

The Working Agency dialog box appears.

Figure 79: Working Agency Dialog Box

2 After viewing the information, select Close.

To change the working agency, see Changing Your Signon Agency (SW) on page 148.

Modifying Coverage Responsibilities From the Command

Line (WT)
You can change the incidents for which you are responsible on the command line using the WT
command. Typically, a dispatcher transfers a workload to focus on a single high priority incident, such as
a hostage situation or plane crash. When the dispatcher is ready to resume the regular workload, the
workload can be transferred back again.

The WT command allows a transfer to be performed across roles whereas the SC command can be
used only between users of the same role.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

WT.FC.TC.I
For the I identifier, you can use an incident number or the unit ID of the unit active on the incident.

To issue the WT command, you must have WT command permission from your owning agency.

To issue the WT command for workstations other than your workstation, you must have permissions to
use the WT_SUPERVISOR command set in Provisioning. (See the PremierOne Provisioning Guide,
“Configuring Role Permissions” — “Workload Transfer Provisioning”).

Send Feedback 149

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 6: Controlling Your Session

To modify your coverage responsibilities from the command line:

1 On the command line, type WT followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
WT.FC;<from console id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 Type the period separator followed by your console ID.

If you do not type the value for the <from console id>, the command defaults to your console ID.

3 Type the period separator followed by the ID of the console to which you are transferring your
workload.

If you do not type the <to console id>, the command defaults to your workstation ID.

The <from console id> and the <to console id> cannot be the same value.

4 To keep a specific incident, type one of the following:

• The ID of the single incident you want to keep.

• The unit ID active on the incident you want to keep.

The <incident id or active unit id> is a required value representing the incident that
you want to keep. The specified incident does not have to be present on the <from console
id> before performing the WT command.

5 Press Enter or F10.

The specified incident remains on the from console. All other incidents transfer to the console you
specify.

150 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 6: Controlling Your Session

The person receiving the workload receives a message asking if they agree to accept your workload
transfer.

Figure 80: Workload Transfer Request Dialog Box

To revert to the default coverage responsibilities:

• The consoles involved can be logged off and back on. After a console logs off, any workload
transfer activities on that console are terminated.

• The person who was covering the high priority incident (<from console>) can use the CC (or
SC) command and the AC identifier with a value of <{reset}> to reset the signed on coverage
areas from the <from console> accordingly.
Example:
To transfer (move) all incidents except incident 22:
WT.FC;dev046.TC;dev040.I;#22

Send Feedback 151

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 6: Controlling Your Session

Displaying Information for Signed on Resources (WH)

Use the Who (WH) command to display a list of resources who are currently signed on. You can use the
WH command without identifiers to display a list of all resources in your signed-on coverage group or
you can use the WH command with identifiers to filter the list of resources that are retrieved. When you
submit the command with identifiers, you can control the roles, areas, sectors, and beats that are
retrieved, and you can also retrieve assignment information for specific console IDs, unit IDs, user
Names, User IDs, and vehicle IDs.

The list of currently signed on resources displays in the Work Assist Area and contains the Unit ID and
Address Type.

NOTE:
Messaging-related commands AB, MR, SM, and WH can be performed only in one work area tab
at a time. If one of these commands is executed in a work area and the work area is not cleared
or populated with a different command, the next messaging-related command executes in the
same work area, regardless of the work area in which it was submitted.

Required identifiers for the command shown in bold in the following list. For descriptions of identifiers,
see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

WH.AG.CG.RO.A.S.B.CI.U.UN.UD.V
To display information for signed on resources:

1 Do one of the following:

• On the command line, type WH.

• On the command line, type WH followed by the period separator. Continue with additional
separators, identifiers, and values to filter the display.

2 Press Enter or F10.

If you entered the command without identifiers, a list of all resources in your signed on coverage
group displays in the Work Assist Area. If you used command identifiers, then the resources
matching your search criteria display.

The ID and address type of all logged on resources display. To sort the ID column, click the column
header.

152 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 6: Controlling Your Session

You can open a message window for Email by clicking any of the links such as Name or User ID.

Figure 81: List Of Users Currently Logged On In Work Assist Area

NOTE
NOTE:
Click the auto-dial icon for PremierOne CAD to automatically call the displayed telephone
number. If the auto-dial feature is unavailable, the icon is disabled.

3 To refine the results, select a filter from the Filter by list and then optionally enter a value to use in
the filter in the adjacent for field. Then press F12.

PremierOne CAD displays a new set of results based on your refined search criteria.
Examples:
To retrieve a list of dispatchers who are currently signed on:
WH..dispatcher
To retrieve a list of dispatchers who are currently signed on in agency PD/BLDR:
WH..dispatcher.PD/BLDR
To retrieve a list of signed on personnel for beat 007 in PD agency:
WH.B;PD/007
To retrieve a list of incidents removed via workload transfer:
WH.REM;Y

Send Feedback 153

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 6: Controlling Your Session

To retrieve a list of incidents added and removed via workload transfer:

WH.ADD;Y.REM;Y
To display assignment information for unit 1A12:
WH.U;1A12
To display assignment information for the user with the ID Mjones:
WH.UD;MJones
To display assignment information for vehicle V9987:
WH.V;V9987

Switching Your Console to Online Mode (OL)

When something causes your console to lose its connection to the network, it automatically switches to
offline mode so you can keep working. You can manually switch back to online mode when you know the
problem is fixed or you can select Now when the Server Available message appears.

Command identifiers default order:

OL
To switch your console to online mode:

On the command line, type OL and then press Enter or F10.

For details on working with offline mode, Chapter 23: Recovering From an Extended Offline Period.

154 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Using Call Center Commands

Chapter 7

Using Call Center Commands 7

Call center commands are commands that affect the entire call center, not just a single console. A
supervisor generally enters these commands.

Using Agency Plans

The highest level geographical grouping for an agency are agency plans. Plans contain the following
elements:

• Beat – smallest geographical area

• Sector – collection of beats

• Area – collection of sectors (also known as teams/districts)

Agencies make their assignments based on the coverage that is required for a specific condition.
PremierOne CAD uses this information to help with making recommendations.

Some agencies may define multiple plans to use during different time periods and activity levels. A
normal plan can be set to be in effect during the times when normal activity levels are expected. More
plans can be created to accommodate changes in the normal activity level, such as weekends, holidays,
special functions, and night shifts.

The system administrator manages agency plans. When the Activate Plan (AP) command is issued to
change the current plan, all the coverage areas in the newly activated plan that are not already covered
by another user are automatically assigned to the console issuing the command. Incidents, units, or
vehicles that are assigned to an area that is not present in a newly activated plan are reassigned to the
default area defined by your agency. Your system administrator also manages default areas.

Send Feedback 155

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 7: Using Call Center Commands

Changing Agency Plans From the Activate Plan Form

Use the Activate Plan form to change the current plan for your agency. This command is used only by
system administrators. You can also change plans from the command line. For details, see Changing
Agency Plans From the Command Line (AP) on page 156.

To change agency plans from the Activate Plan form:

1 On the command line, type AP, and then press Enter or F10.

The Activate Plan dialog box appears.

Figure 82: Activate Plan Dialog Box

2 From the Change To column, select the plan you want to activate.

3 Select Submit.

Changing Agency Plans From the Command Line (AP)

To replace the current agency plan with a different plan, you can use the Activate Plan command on the
command line. You can also change plans from the Activate Plan form. For details, see Changing
Agency Plans From the Activate Plan Form on page 156.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

AP.AG.PL
To change agency plans from the command line:

1 On the command line, type AP followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
AP.AG;<agency id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the agency ID followed by the period separator.

3 At the cursor, type the plan ID and press Enter or F10.

The new plan is activated.

156 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 7: Using Call Center Commands

Examples:
To activate plan 01 for agency PD:
AP.PD.01
To activate plan 03 in agency PD:
AP.PD.03

Changing or Viewing the Active Shift (AS)

Use the Active Shift (AS) command to change the shift that is active or to determine which shift is active.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

AS.AG.SS
To change or view the active shift:

1 On the command line, type AS followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, AG appears on the command line:

AS.AG;<agency ID>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type your agency ID followed by the period separator.

3 Do one of the following:

• To view the active shift, press Enter or F10.

• To change the shift that is active, type the value for the new shift ID.

• To change the shift to none, type -. Then press Enter or F10.

PremierOne CAD displays the active shift or changes the active shift.
Examples:
To view the active shift for agency PD:
AS.PD
To change the active shift for agency PD to 03:
AS.PD.03

Send Feedback 157

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 7: Using Call Center Commands

Changing the Signed On Area Assignments (SC)

The Supervisor Console Control gives you the ability to change the signed on area assignments on any
console.

NOTE:
You must be a supervisor or other authorized user.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

SC.A.CG.TC.FC
To change the signed on area assignments:

1 On the command line, type SC followed by a period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
SC.A;<agency/area(s)>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the value for the areas followed by the period separator.

Only include the agency if it is different from your signed on coverage group agency.

3 Do one of the following:

• To enter a coverage group, type the coverage group followed by the period separator.

• To skip the coverage group, type the period separator.

4 Type the ID of the To console followed by the period separator.

5 Type the ID of the From console.

6 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne CAD moves the specified areas from the “From console” and gives it to the “To
console.”
Examples:
To move the assignments of area1 in agency PD from console 25 to console 20:
SC.PD/area1..console25.console20
To move the assignments of area1, area2, and area3 in agency PD from console 25 to console 20:
SC.PD/area1,PD/area2,PD/area3..console25.console20

158 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 7: Using Call Center Commands

Changing the Console Display Configuration (DC)

An authorized user can change and lock the basic console display for all users, workstations, and roles
that are provisioned to use a specific Status Monitor display. These displays include Status Monitors,
Call Control Status Monitors, the Map Display, the Information Panel, and the CAD Client positions. If a
Status Monitor Display is not currently selected, then the DC command saves the Map Display,
Information Panel, and CAD Client positions for the user’s signed on role.

Command identifiers default order:

DC
To change the console display configuration:

1 On any console, create the display you want to replicate.

2 On the command line, type DC and then press Enter or F10.

Send Feedback 159

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 7: Using Call Center Commands

160 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Understanding Incident Initiation

Chapter 8

Understanding Incident Initiation 8

To initiate an incident, you record the caller information and select an incident type. PremierOne CAD
verifies the location, checks for duplicate and previous incidents, and checks for premise and hazard
information. You then submit the incident. You can add person, vehicle, and property information to the
incident when you initiate the incident or at a later time.

After you create an incident, you can clone the incident to create new incidents with their own incident
numbers.

Understanding the Incident Initiation Process

Before you learn the specific steps to creating an incident in PremierOne CAD, it is essential that you
understand some high-level concepts about initiating an incident, and what happens “behind the
scenes” while you are going through the process.

The following sections provide a high-level description of the four main phases of the incident initiation
process in PremierOne CAD.

Phase One – Receiving Information Regarding an Occurrence

First, the operator who receives information about an occurrence decides that there is a reason to
record that information in an incident. Any person with the proper authorization can create an incident in
PremierOne CAD.

Operators can receive incident information in several ways:

• A 9-1-1 phone call

• A phone call on a non-emergency line

• Transfer from another agency

• An alarm

• A field-initiated or traffic stop from a Mobile Data Terminal (MDT) or over the radio

• A walk-in report at a police station

Send Feedback 161

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

Phase Two – Gathering Information and Entering it into PremierOne

CAD
The operator enters the information received in Phase One into a form or on the command line for
processing by PremierOne CAD.

The form or command line includes information such as the following:

• Incident location – This information determines many things in addition to where the occurrence is
happening, such as which agency “owns” the incident, which units should respond and how many
units should respond. Additionally, PremierOne CAD may automatically perform a query against that
location to pre-determined external databases.

• Incident type – This information defines what is occurring but also provides a response level, priority,
and other information that PremierOne CAD can use to help determine resource recommendations.

• Caller name and address – PremierOne CAD can automatically perform a query against both the
caller name and address to a pre-determined external database.
NOTE
NOTE:
To generate an incident in PremierOne CAD, enter at a minimum an incident location and an
incident type.

Phase Three – Behind the Scenes Processing

Using the information entered in the form or command line, PremierOne CAD begins to process the
information “behind the scenes” while the operator continues the initiation process.

To help the calltaker make informed decisions about the incident before submitting the incident
information, the Work Assist Area displays information such as address verification, premise hazard
information, duplicate incidents, and query returns. This information helps the calltaker determine the
following:

• Is the location correct?

• Is there any information about the location that responding resources may need to be aware of
before their arrival?

• Has this incident already been reported? If so, what do you do with the new information?

• Is there any information relating to a name, vehicle, or location in any external databases that has
been returned and should be provided to responding resources before their arrival?

Phase Four – Submitting Information

When you are confident that you have entered at a minimum the correct incident location and incident
type, submit the information in the form by pressing F12 or on the command line by pressing F10.

PremierOne CAD then assigns the incident to the correct agency based on the incident location
information entered and assigns a priority and response level to the incident based on the incident type
entered.

PremierOne CAD uses the location and incident type information to determine which dispatcher should
be assigned to the incident for handling.

162 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

PremierOne CAD also assigns a unique incident number to the incident. The incident is assigned a
“status” of Initial or Pending, depending on how your site is provisioned.

PremierOne CAD initiates the incident and is ready to be managed with the Incident Management tasks.
These tasks are discussed in Chapter 12: Managing Incidents.

Understanding Incident Start and Create Times

For record keeping purposes, CAD records both the Create Time and the Start Time for incidents. The
Create Time is the time when you submit the incident and PremierOne CAD initiates the incident. The
Start Time is the same value as the Incident Create time, except when you initiate an incident from a
blank II form. In this case, the incident Start Time value is set to the time when data is first entered into
the form. The Start Time is when one of the following occurs:

• When ANI/ALI data is populated into a blank II form, either automatically or manually

or

• When you enter data in a blank II form

If more than one incident is created during incident initiation, each incident has the same Start Time,
based on these rules.

When associated incidents are created during incident initiation, either automatically or manually, the
incident Start Time value is set to the incident Start Time value of the original incident.

When associated incidents are created during an Incident Update transaction (for example, updating an
incident IRF to one that is provisioned to create associated incidents and then creating the associated
incidents), the incident Start Time value is set to the time that the associated incident was created (Start
Time = Create Time).

The Clone Incident process sets the Incident Start Time value to the time that the original incident was
created (Start Time = Create Time). The Traffic Stop/Field Initiation Process sets the Incident Start Time
value to the time that the incident was created (Start Time = Create Time).

To reset the incident Start Time value during the incident initiation process, clear the Incident Initiation
form from the client work area. Also clear the Incident Initiation form that is displayed due to an
incomplete Incident Initiation command line transaction. Redisplay the Incident Initiation form to ensure
that the incident Start Time is reset.

The incident Start Time does not display on the Incident Initiation or Incident Management form, but is
included in the Incident History with the INC CREATE transaction type as Start Time: {Incident
Start Time}.

Entering Locations in CAD

Every incident must have a location (where it occurred) and a type (what occurred). Understanding how
locations are managed in PremierOne CAD is important to properly entering and validating the incident
location. You can enter incident locations in any of the following ways:

• Entering Locations as Partial or Whole Street Addresses

• Entering Locations as Street Names Without Street Numbers

• Entering Locations as Block Ranges

• Entering Locations as Valid Street Names and Invalid Street Numbers

Send Feedback 163

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

• Entering Locations as Common Place Names

• Entering Locations as Intersection Names

• Entering Locations as Alias Names

• Entering Locations as Latitude and Longitude Coordinates

• Entering Locations as Alarm Numbers

• Understanding Address Verification

• Verification of UK Addresses

Entering Locations as Partial or Whole Street Addresses

PremierOne CAD interprets a street address as the street number first and then the street name. You
can type the complete street number, name, and suffix (AV, ST, LN, and so on) or just the street number
and first few letters of the street name. PremierOne CAD can typically locate an address faster than you
can type the entire street name, so to save time, type only the first few letters of the street or intersection
name. This feature also helps to eliminate spelling errors in street names. If you type a partial street
name, do not include a suffix. If you type a partial or unmatched address, the Address Verification form
appears in the Work Assist Area with possible matches. For more information on address verification,
see Understanding Address Verification on page 171.

PremierOne CAD uses logic to interpret the address information you enter. For example, if you type 123
MAIN and the only match is 123 N MAIN, PremierOne CAD returns 123 N MAIN.

NOTE:
You can use the wildcard character in the Location and City fields. For example, you could type
123 *FIELD and get a list of addresses that match a house number of 123 and a street name
ending in FIELD. Your system administrator provisions the character that is used as the wildcard
character.

If a street name consists of a single letter, such as “E Street,” enter only the street number and name
without a suffix, such as “555 E.” If you type the address 555 E St, PremierOne CAD searches for the
street name St because it interprets E as the direction east. If more than one E address name exists,
such as E Street and E Avenue, the Address Verification form appears for you to select which
address you need.

Dashes in addresses are acceptable. If the street address contains a dash, such as 257-32 104th
Dr, type the dash in the appropriate place.

You can also enter and verify locations with alphanumeric characters in the house number, such as
A123 MAIN ST, 0-123 MAIN ST, ABC123 MAIN ST, or W16576 N HUMBOLDT RD.

Additionally, you can enter and verify addresses that have fractions in them, such as 123 1/2 Main
St.

Entering Locations Using Parentheses

You can enter text in parentheses in the Location field. The parentheses and text are not considered in
the address verification; after verification, the text and parentheses display in the Location field.
Example:
You enter 1530 South Highland (around corner). CAD verifies 1530 South Highland, and
after verification displays the address and parenthetical text in the Location field.

164 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

The parentheses and text can be anywhere in the address. For example, 123(xxx) E MARQUETTE RD
is valid. 123 E MARQUETTE RD is verified and (xxx) displays without affecting the validity of the
location.

Entering Locations as Street Names Without Street Numbers

You can enter locations (streets) without street numbers, such as E MAIN ST. When the location is
verified and there are multiple matching addresses, the results contain the block range, street name,
and city. Expanding an address in the Work Assist area displays block range information, street name,
city, cross street high, cross street low, and subdivision information.

Figure 83: Matching Addresses List – Expanded Address

The following table contains examples of location without street numbers.

Table 23: Examples of Street Locations without Street Numbers

Entered Location Matched Addresses List

E MAIN ST 100-199 BLK* E MAIN ST Johnstown

200-299 BLK E MAIN ST Johnstown
300-399 BLK E MAIN ST Johnstown

MAIN ST 100-199 BLK* E MAIN ST Johnstown

200-299 BLK E MAIN ST Johnstown
300-399 BLK E MAIN ST Johnstown
100-199 BLK W MAIN ST Johnstown
200-299 BLK W MAIN ST Johnstown
300-399 BLK W MAIN ST Johnstown

Send Feedback 165

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

Table 23: Examples of Street Locations without Street Numbers (Cont.)

Entered Location Matched Addresses List

BA 300-395 BLK BAILEY ST Westminster

400-495 BLK BAILEY ST Westminster
100-199 BLK BAKER AVE Scottsdale
200-299 BLK BAKER AVE Scottsdale

*BLK is the Block keyword indicator provisioned by your system administrator. It could take other forms, such as
BLOCK.

Entering Locations as Block Ranges

When you enter a street number, followed by the keyword BLK, and then the street name, CAD returns
block ranges for the street and city. The Matching Addresses list contains block number ranges, the
street, and the cities.

The following table shows examples of finding block ranges.

Table 24: Example Block Numbers

Entered Block Number Address Match List

1250 BLK* GOODMAN ST 1200-1300 W GOODMAN ST WESTMINSTER

1200-1300 E GOODMAN ST NORTHGLEN

1124 BLK GOODMAN 1000-1600 GOODMAN RD LOUISVILLE

*BLK is the Block keyword indicator provisioned by your system administrator. It could take other forms, such as
BLOCK.

Entering Locations as Block Ranges from the Command Line

You can enter a block range from the Command line. Use the Block identifier specified by your agency.
Example:
100 Block Main St is specified on the command line within the II command as:
II.L;100 BLK MAIN ST
All command line identifiers used for address entry recognize the use of the block keyword when
specified in the Location field. The command identifiers include identifiers in the following commands:

• II – Incident Initiate

• IU – Incident Update

• LD – Location Detail

• FI – Field Initiate

• US – Unit Status

• IR – Incident Recall

166 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

Entering Locations as Valid Street Names and Invalid Street Numbers

When the entered street number does not exist for any of the street segments for the street name, the
closest street segments numerically above and below the entered number display.

The following table shows an example of what is in your agency Geographic Information System (GIS),
what is entered in the Location field, and the results shown in the Matching Addresses list.
Table 25: Invalid Street Number

In GIS Entered in Location Field Matching Addresses List Results

100-199 E MAIN ST 500 E MAIN ST 600-699 E MAIN ST

200-299 E MAIN ST 200-229 E MAIN ST

600-699 E MAIN ST 1100 MAIN 700-900 E MAIN ST

700-799 E MAIN ST

Your system may be configured to retain the invalid street number for a verified address operation. If you
enter an invalid street number and verify the address, the block numbers displays in the Location field
with the original address in parentheses.
Example:
Suppose you entered 250 E Main Street in the Location field, and there is no 250 street Number in
that block of East Main street. After verifying the address, CAD displays the original street address in the
Location field in parentheses to show you the original street address.

(250) 200 BLK E MAIN ST

Entering Locations as Common Place Names

Your GIS system administrator defines common place names. Common place names are generally
names of schools, landmarks, commonly known businesses, and topographic features.

If you do not know the complete common place name, you can enter a partial name. If the resulting
search finds more than one potential match, PremierOne CAD displays the list so you can select the
common place you want.

By using a common place name, the initiation process of PremierOne CAD is faster because the
corresponding address is not verified. The address is defined when your system administrator defines
the common place.

After you enter the common place name in the Location field and PremierOne CAD verifies the
address, PremierOne CAD places the address of the common place in the Location field and the name
of the common place in the Loc Name field. If there is no address associated with the common place
name, PremierOne CAD places the common place name in both the Location and the Loc Name fields.

For common place addresses, there are two location fields associated with the incident:

• Incident Location – This field contains the physical address of the incident. If the incident location is
verified against a common place that is not associated with an address, this field contains the
common place name.

• Incident Location Name – This field contains the common place name, when available, for a verified
location. This field is always user-editable, even after a common place name populates the field.

Send Feedback 167

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

When a unit is assigned to an incident, the Location and Location Name fields are populated with the
values from the corresponding incident fields (Unit Location = Incident Location; Unit Location
Name = Incident Location Name).

NOTE:
PremierOne CAD does not display geographic information for common places at intersections. If
PremierOne CAD encounters an intersection in the address field, it blanks out the address field
before inserting the common place record.

Entering Locations as Intersection Names

Depending on how your system is configured, you can indicate an intersection in the following ways:

• Separating the street names with an ampersand ( & )

Example: Miller&Ivy

• Separating the street names with a forward slash ( / )

Example: Miller/Ivy

You can only use a forward slash if neither of the street names contains a forward slash, such as 1/
2 Mile Rd

• Separating the street names with the at sign( @ )

Example: Miller@Ivy

Entering Locations as Alias Names

Aliases are different spellings, common misspellings, or nicknames for streets, intersections, and
common places. Any street name or common place name can have one or more aliases. Your system
administrator must configure the aliases.

An example of an alias might be a street with a state-issued route number and a name issued by a
municipality. For example, route 10 might be known as “Main Street” within the city boundaries.

You can also use an alias name when specifying an intersection or common place.

Your system administrator defines aliases and enters them in the GIS mapping system.

Entering Locations as Latitude and Longitude Coordinates

You can use a latitude and longitude coordinate for an incident location. When you specify a latitude and
longitude coordinate pair as a location, PremierOne CAD locates the closest known point, whether it is
an intersection, common place, or address point. The known point is placed in the Location field, and
the Lat/Lon is placed in the Description field. Then PremierOne CAD uses the agency, beat or zone,
and area for the known point to provide a dispatch recommendation.

Latitude and longitude can be entered in one of two ways:

• Decimal

• DMS (Degrees, Minutes, Seconds)

168 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

To enter a location as latitude and longitude coordinates:

1 From the Incident Initiation form, select the L/L button next to the Location field.

Figure 84: Incident Initiation Form Showing L/L Button

2 The Location section of the form changes to show fields for you to enter decimal latitude and
longitude.

Figure 85: Location Section Showing Decimal Fields

3 To enter your latitude and longitude in DMS (degrees, minutes, seconds) format, select the DMS
option. The Location section of the form changes again to show fields for you to type degrees,
minutes, seconds, and directional suffixes for latitude and longitude.

Figure 86: Location Section Showing DMS Fields

4 Type either the decimal or DMS latitude and longitude information.

5 Select the Loc button to return to the regular Incident Initiation form.

After PremierOne CAD verifies the location and determines that the location is an approximate
location relative to the latitude and longitude, the phrase Approx Loc: displays in the Description
field.

If you are using the DMS format, the following table describes each of the parts of the latitude or
longitude.

Send Feedback 169

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

Table 26: Latitude and Longitude Coordinates for DMS Format

Element Description

Degrees Use any number from 0-90. Zero is the equator; 90 N is the north pole; 90 S is the south
latitude pole.

Degrees Use any number from 0-180. Zero is the prime meridian at the Royal Greenwich
longitude Observatory in Greenwich, England, and 180 is the line of longitude opposite the prime
meridian.

Minutes User any number from 0-60.

Seconds User any number from 0-60.

Directional Use N (north) or S (south).

suffix: latitude

Directional Use E (east) or W (west).

suffix:
longitude

Entering Locations as Alarm Numbers

If you use an alarm number for a location, PremierOne CAD does not verify the location. Your system
administrator configured the exact address part of the record for that particular alarm.

To enter an alarm number, type a pound or hash sign ( # ) and then the alarm number; for example,
#12345. Your system administrator may have set up a default incident type for that alarm number, in
which case you can omit an incident type during the alarm incident initiation process.

NOTE:
If you use an alarm number to initiate an incident, you cannot assign a unit at the same time.

If you enter an alarm number generated by the CryWolf interface that has a status of Inactive, the
following occurs:

• The Incident Initiation form appears, with the corresponding incident information of the alarm
(Location, Incident Response Factor, Priority, and Jurisdiction).

• The following message displays in the Status Message area:

Alarm ID {Alarm ID} is currently Inactive
• On the Incident Initiation form, the following text appears as the first line of comments within the
Comments box: *** ALARM STATUS: INACTIVE ***

A carriage return is added to the end of the Alarm Status text so that you can begin entering text on
the second line of comments. Since the incident is not yet created, you have the option of deleting
this comment.

• You then have the option to:

• Continue creating the alarm incident as provisioned by submitting the form and allowing the
system to process the alarm transaction based on existing functionality.

Incident History records the alarm status whenever an incident for an inactive alarm is created.
The alarm monitoring company Name and Phone Number is also written to the incident history.

170 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

• Create the alarm incident as a Closed incident (by specifying a Disposition before submitting the
form) in order to log the event.

• Cancel creating any incident for this alarm.

For more information about the CryWolf interface, see Using CryWolf on page 659.

Understanding Address Verification

Address verification checks to see that the address exists and retrieves potential location matches
based on the information you enter in the Location area in the Incident Initiation form or on the
command line.

If no matches or two or more potential matches exist for a location, the Location and City for potential
addresses display in the Work Assist Area. If there is exactly one match, the form does not appear.

If too many addresses are returned, a message displays in the Work Assist Area that shows that the
number configured by your agency was exceeded.

If there are no addresses that match the address that is entered, or there are too many matches, a
message displays in the Status Message area. Your system administrator sets the maximum number of
matches allowed.

Address verification can occur in two different ways:

• Automatically – Address verification occurs automatically after you enter information in the Location
(street address, intersection, common place, alarm, or latitude and longitude) and City fields and
move the cursor out of the City field. Address verification occurs in the background while you
continue to enter information in the Incident Initiation form. Entering information into the City field is
not required but narrows the search.
NOTE
NOTE:
If data was entered and then the location is re-validated, the Location description field can
change or be blanked out.

• Manually – Address verification occurs when you select the Verify button. If you do not enter any
information in the Location field, when you select the Verify button, PremierOne CAD populates the
incident Location and City fields with the caller Address and City field data and performs the
verification process on that data.

After address verification starts, the status message window displays the message: Verifying
the address. When PremierOne CAD has returned all the possible matches for the location
information, a message displays indicating that the address verification is completed and potential
matching addresses display in the Work Assist Area.
NOTE
NOTE:
Because CAD filters the addresses for duplicates after the maximum is reached, the Search
results can appear to be considerably less than expected.

Send Feedback 171

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

After a location is verified, the following results occur for the incident location:

For verified locations:

• If the location is verified, the resulting jurisdictional values are the jurisdictional area, sector, and
beat.

• If the location is verified, but you manually enter an area, the resulting jurisdictional values are the
area you enter, and the jurisdictional sector and beat.

• If the location is verified, the Query button is enabled so that you can manually query databases
such as PremierOne Records for additional information on the location. If automatic location query is
provisioned, a Location query is automatically launched upon address verification.

For bypassed locations:

• If the location is bypassed using the Bypass to Nearest button, then the resulting jurisdictional values
are the jurisdictional area, sector, and beat.

• If the location is bypassed to a beat that you enter manually (no area and sector), the resulting
jurisdictional values are the jurisdictional area and sector, and the specified beat.

• If the location is bypassed to a beat and sector that you enter manually (no area specified), an error
message displays.

• If the location is bypassed to an area that you enter manually, the resulting jurisdictional value is the
specified area.

If the location is bypassed and you do not provide any jurisdictional information, an error message
displays.

NOTE:
Depending upon your system configuration, modifying any of the following fields after a location
is verified requires the location to be re-verified: Location, Subdivision, City, Apartment,
Building, Location Name, or Zip Code. Re-verification is necessary to determine that the new
information does not change the map coordinate of the incident location. For a detailed
explanation of address verification and ways to change this behavior, see Appendix
B: Understanding Address Verification.

Verification of UK Addresses
Address validation can occur at a variety of levels, based on the search level:

• Premise (street) number, subbuilding name, building name, and street – Premise Lvl

• Street name – Street Lvl

• Common place/building name – Street Lvl

• Intersection – Intersection Lvl

• Post Code – Premise Lvl

• Town District – District/Town Lvl

The Validation level displays to the right of the Verify button.

172 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

Understanding Incident Numbers

When an incident is created in PremierOne CAD, it is assigned a unique ID. You use this number to
retrieve, update, dispatch, and otherwise manipulate the incident. Incident numbers can be reset at
different intervals, such as monthly or yearly, depending on your system configuration.

In PremierOne CAD, incident numbers are eight digits long, excluding any prefixes. Depending on your
system configuration, the month or year prefixes may appear with your incident numbers.

PremierOne CAD can be configured so that either the pound (#) sign, such as #1A12 or #00023466,
precedes the incident number or Unit ID. If you do not know what your site is using, check with your
system administrator. You can retrieve an incident either by entering the incident number or entering the
ID of any unit that is assigned to the incident.

When referencing incident numbers, PremierOne CAD uses the following rules. These rules apply to
both the command line and incident-related forms.

• If you do not enter an agency ID with the incident number, PremierOne CAD uses the agency ID of
your working agency. To enter an agency, use the format agency/incident number, such as
BLDR/12345678.
NOTE
NOTE:
If you are referring to an incident in another agency and your system is configured to use the
pound (#) sign for incidents, type the # before the agency, such as #KCAC/1.

• If you enter a partial incident number, PremierOne CAD retrieves the most recent incident number
that has the matching sequence of numbers.
Examples:
If the most recent incident created for an agency is 00034567:

• Entering the incident number 0 retrieves incident number: 00034560.

• Entering the incident number 40 retrieves incident number 00034540.

• Entering the incident number 80 retrieves incident number: 00034480.

• If you enter a zero before a number, PremierOne CAD retrieves the most recent incident number that
has the exact sequence of numbers.

When retrieving time-based incident numbers, a dash (-) must be included to separate the date
value from the incident number, such as 09-0000114.
Examples:
If the most recent incident created for an agency is 00000200:

• Entering the incident number 040 on the command line retrieves the exact incident number
00000040. The more recent number of 00000140 would not be retrieved because 140 is not an
exact match.

• Entering 00 is an invalid entry because the incident number 0 does not exist.

• If the agency Incident Number Reset Interval is yearly, enter the incident number in the format
CCYY-IncNum.

CC is an optional 2-digit value for the century. If omitted, CC defaults the current century.

YY is a required 2-digit entry for the year of the incident number.

Send Feedback 173

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

Examples:
IR.14-2117 retrieves the incident 00002117 for the year 2014.

• If the agency Incident Number Reset Interval is monthly, enter the incident number in the format
CCYYMM-IncNum.

CCYY is an optional value for the century and year.

MM is a required two-digit entry of the month of the incident number.

Examples:
IR.03-2117 retrieves the default agency incident 00002117 for March of the current year.

• If the agency Incident Number Reset Interval is daily, enter the incident number in the format:
CCYYMMDD-IncNum.

CCYY is an optional value for the century and year.

MM is an optional value for the month.

DD is a required two-digit entry of the day on which the incident being requested occurred.
Examples:
IR.03-2117 retrieves the default agency incident 00002117 for the third day of the current month.

IR.0803-2117 retrieves the default agency incident 00002117 for the third day of August of the
current year.

IR.140803-2117 retrieves the default agency incident 00002117 for the third day of August in
2014.

• The format YYMMDD-Inc# is available for all reset intervals in case duplicate Incident Sequence
Numbers exist within the same year. Duplicate numbers can occur if an agency resets their incident
sequence number annually at a fiscal year interval other than January 1st.

Understanding Incident Statuses

The following table describes the different types of statuses for incidents and the status monitors the
incidents display in. Your configuration may be different.
Table 27: Incident Statuses and Status Monitors

Status Definition Status Monitor

Initial A new incident is an incident that was initiated but does not yet have a unit Pending Queue
assigned to it. Some agencies assign a pending status immediately rather
than using the new status. A new incident can also be a reopened incident
(using the Incident Open [IO] command).

Pending A pending incident is an incident that was initiated but does not yet have a Pending Queue
unit assigned to it.

Active An active incident is an incident that has a unit assigned to it using the Incident Status
Incident Dispatch (ID) command.
Pending Queue for
Freed incidents

174 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

Table 27: Incident Statuses and Status Monitors (Cont.)

Status Definition Status Monitor

Closed A closed incident is an incident that was closed using the appropriate none
command and is no longer in need of attention. For more information, see
Closing Incidents on page 425.

Special

Held PremierOne schedules a held incident for initiation at a later date or time. Pending Queue
When the scheduled date and time are reached, PremierOne initiates the
incident and updates to the incident pending status.

Stacked A stacked incident exists when the assigned unit is already busy with Pending Queue and
another incident. The new incident is preassigned and placed into the call Incident Status
stacking queue for the unit.

Incidents in Multi-Beat Intersections

An intersection can be the jurisdictional boundary for multi-beat or multi-agencies. This type of
intersection is called a multi-beat intersection. Depending on your system configuration, you may be
required to manually determine which beat to use for the incident assignment.

During incident initiation, PremierOne requires a location and an Incident Response Factor (IRF) to
determine whether multiple beats exist for the respective agencies.

If the address is a multi-beat intersection, after the address is verified, {Multi} displays within the Beat
field, requiring the operator to initiate display of the Multi-Beat Selection dialog by selecting the yellow
Multi button.

Send Feedback 175

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

Selecting Beats in Multi-Beat Intersections

In a multi-beat intersection, select the beat.

To select the beat information in a multi-beat intersection:

1 Enter the location information for the intersection.

2 Click the Verify button to verify the location.

The Work Assist Area displays the matching intersection list.

Figure 87: Work Assist Area – Matching Intersections

176 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

3 Double-click the location you want from the list.

The Beat field displays a {Multi} value, and the address Verify button changes to a yellow color
and displays the word Multi. Multi is the indication that multiple beats exist for the intersection.

Figure 88: Field Initiation Form Showing the Multi Button and Beat Field

4 Do one of the following:

• To manually enter the beat for the incident, delete the {Multi} value from the Beat field and
enter the beat.

• To bypass the beat assignment, enter an area without deleting the {Multi} value.

• To view a list of beats, click the Multi button, or leave the {Multi} value in the Beat field and
press F12. Beats display in the Multiple Beats Work Assist Area. Select a beat to complete the
operation.

Send Feedback 177

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

Updating Incident Locations

You can update an incident location from the command line or from a form.

From the command line, if you update only the Location value, then address verification is performed
and the incident jurisdiction is set appropriately. If you update the location and any jurisdictional value
(Area, Sector and/or Beat), then address verification is not performed, the location is set to the value you
enter, and the jurisdictional values are set to the values you specify or the original value if you do not
enter any values.
Example:
If the original incident data was:

Location = 500 MAIN ST (VERIFIED)

Area = NORTH
Sector = N1
Beat = N101

And you entered the following: IU.#100.L;505 MAIN.B;S345

Then the incident is updated to:

Location = 505 MAIN (BYPASSED)

Area = NORTH (Original Value)
Sector = N1 (Original Value)
Beat = S345 (Specified Value)

If you want to geoverify a location and update the jurisdictional values to another value, then do so in
two separate steps.

From the Incident Management form, if you update the location and geoverify it, the updated
jurisdictional values display. You can choose to keep the values, or manually update them.

Updating a Street Address to an Invalid Location for an Agency

If you update a street address to an agency or jurisdiction that is not valid for the current agency for the
incident, the Invalid Location dialog box appears.

Figure 89: Invalid Location Dialog Box

178 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

1 Do one of the following:

• To cancel the update, select Cancel the location update.

• To accept the location change and leave the jurisdictional information as it is, select Accept the
location change without updating the jurisdictional information.

The agency and associated jurisdictional information remain unchanged.

• To clone the incident in the new agency, select Clone the incident for the agency that
matches the specified location.

2 Click OK.

Work Assist Area - Address Verification

If no matches or two or more potential matches exist for a location, the Location and City for potential
addresses display in the Work Assist Area. If there is exactly one match, the form does not appear.

When PremierOne CAD cannot find any matches to the entered location information, the location may
be new and not yet entered into the geofile data for PremierOne, or the entered location is inaccurate.

Figure 90: Incident Initiate Form – Address Verification In Work Assist Area

Do one of the following:

• To display additional address details, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of an address.

The address range, low and high cross streets, and real name display.

Send Feedback 179

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

• Select one of the addresses in the Matching Addresses list and either select Select or press
Ctrl+S.

The warning symbol in the top right corner of the Incident Initiate form disappears and the verified
address appears in the Location field. PremierOne CAD starts the duplicate incident, premise/
hazard, and previous incident checks.

• To use a “sounds like” search to find locations that sound like the one you typed in the Address field,
select Soundex.

The Address Verification process is rerun and the window refreshes to display any new entries. The
Soundex button changes to read Standard. To return to the initial search, select Standard.

• To enter another location that you know to be correct, or in the area of the reported apparently
incorrect location information, select Bypass to Nearest.

The Bypass to Nearest Location dialog box appears.

Figure 91: Bypass to Nearest Location Dialog Box

a Enter the location and city for an address as close to the incident as possible.

b Select OK.

PremierOne CAD keeps the information you previously entered in the Location field, and a note
is entered into the Location field to indicate that the incident was created using the bypassed
address you entered in the Bypass to Nearest Location dialog box.

NOTE:
To bypass address validation, enter jurisdictional information such as the area, beat, or
sector.

When you bypass a location, PremierOne CAD does not check for duplicate incidents premise/
hazard locations, or previous incidents. The Location field is not populated with the nearby
address (for latitude and longitude locations) and the Map It button does not focus the map to the
bypassed location.

You may choose to bypass any location entered and force PremierOne CAD to use the new data
as the incident location.

Work Assist Area - Multiple Beats

Depending on your system configuration, the responsibility for an intersection can be divided among two
or more beats or among two or more agencies of the same agency type.

If you click the Multi button, or leave the {Multi} value in the Beat field and press F12, for incident
initiation, incident update, and field-initiated incidents, beats display in the Multiple Beats Work Assist
Area. The beats that display depend on the IRF.

180 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

The Multi-Beat selection form may automatically display for your working agency, also dependent upon
your system configuration.

For additional details on multi-beat intersections, see Incidents in Multi-Beat Intersections on page 175.

Figure 92: Multiple Beat Work Assist Area

Do the following:

• Select the beat.

• Click Select, press Ctrl+S, or press F12.

Related Incident Initiation Forms

Several forms or tabs may display in the Work Assist Area during incident initiation:

• Potential Duplicate Incidents on page 182

• Previous Locations, Persons, and Vehicles on page 183

• Incident Query Information on page 187

• Premise and Hazard Information on page 185

Send Feedback 181

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

• ProQA Information on page 189

• Attachments on page 189

Potential Duplicate Incidents

After a location is verified, PremierOne CAD checks to see if there are any potential duplicate incidents
in the vicinity of the location; your system administrator configures the distance that incidents are
searched for.

If PremierOne CAD finds incidents that are potential duplicates, the Prev tab in the Work Assist Area
turns orange and a number appears on the tab showing how many records were returned.

When initiating an incident from the command line, you cannot select an incident in the list of Potential
Duplicates to view it. To view an incident, open it in another tab.

NOTE:
Depending on your agency configuration, a duplicate incident does not necessarily have to be at
the exact address, but may be at a nearby location.

Figure 93: Incident Initiate Form – Potential Duplicate Incidents In The Work Assist Area

182 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

Work Assist Area - Potential Duplicate Incidents

When potential duplicate incidents exist for an incident, they display in the Work Assist Area. The
location and incident type for each potential duplicate incident is listed. If your system is configured to
use and display incident type aliases, then the alias also displays.

Do any of the following:

• To see additional information about an incident in the list, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of the
incident.

• To see additional information about all of the incidents in the list, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of
Location at the top of the list.

• If none of the incidents in the Potential Duplicates list are a duplicate of your incident, select Cancel
at the bottom of the Potential Duplicates form.

The Potential Duplicates form closes.

• To view the Incident Management form for an incident, select the incident from the list, and select
View Incid at the bottom of the Potential Duplicates form.

The incident you select displays in the Primary Work Area. The display is shaded blue to indicate
that the incident information is an overlay of the screen that was displayed. To scroll through all the
previous incidents, use the up and down arrows in the upper right-hand corner of the window. You
can make updates while in the view mode (enter the information and press F12).

To return to your original work area, select the X above the Work Assist Area or press the Esc key.

• If one of the incidents in the list is a duplicate of your incident and you want to add your caller to that
incident, select the incident from the list and select Add Caller at the bottom of the Potential
Duplicates form. The Status message indicates that the caller was added to the incident.

• If one of the incidents in the list is a duplicate of your incident and you want to add the information in
the current Incident Initiation form to the duplicate incident, select the incident from the list and then
select Append To at the bottom of the Potential Duplicates form. Any data entered regarding the
initial caller is transferred to the existing call.

The Incident Initiation form within the current work area is replaced with the Incident Management
form for the existing incident that was updated. This feature allows you to continue updating the
existing incident with additional information.

When you are finished with your actions, select Cancel at the bottom of the Potential Duplicates form.

Previous Locations, Persons, and Vehicles

After an address is verified, PremierOne CAD automatically checks to see if previous incidents have
occurred at the exact location. If PremierOne CAD finds previous incidents, the Prev tab in the Work
Assist Area turns orange and a number appears on the tab showing how many records were returned.

Previous persons and vehicles only display if you have run a Prev check from the Persons or Vehicle
tab.

Your system may also be configured to look for Prev Phone Numbers. If so, then the matches also
display on the Prev tab.

Send Feedback 183

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

To view the information, select the Prev tab. To access the tab if another tab in the Work Assist Area is
displaying, press Shift+F12.
.

Figure 94: Incident Initiate Form – Prev Tab In The Work Assist Area

Work Assist Area - Previous Location, Persons, Vehicles

When previous incidents occurred at a location, the information automatically displays in the Work
Assist Area. The items that display include incidents that are currently active at the location or were
active at the location within a time period less than or equal to the number of days configured by your
system administrator.

The Work Assist Area lists the incident type, when it was created, and whether the location is an exact
match.

Do any of the following:

• To see additional information about a record, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of the record.

• To see additional information about all of the records in the list, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of
Incd Type at the top of the list.

• Select the record and select View Incid at the bottom of the form.

The incident you select displays in the Primary Work Area. The display is shaded blue to indicate
that the incident information is an overlay of the screen that was displayed. To scroll through all the
incidents, use the up and down arrows in the upper right-hand corner of the window. You can make
updates while in the view mode (enter the information and press F12).

To return to your original work area, select the X above the Work Assist Area or press the Esc key.

184 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

• To view previous persons associated with incidents at the location, select the Previous Persons
Check row.

Persons only display if the Prev Check button is selected in the Persons tab. For details, see Adding
Person Information to an Incident on page 220.

• To view previous vehicles for incidents at the location, select the Previous Vehicles Check row.

Vehicles only display if the Prev Check button is selected in the Vehicle tab. For details, see Adding
Vehicle Information to an Incident on page 223.

• To view previous phone numbers for incidents at the location, select the Previous Phone Number
row.

Phone Number checks are an optional configuration. Incidents can be searched regardless of the
incident dispositions or can be restricted to search for incidents with specific dispositions. The
search range can be unlimited or restricted to the last x number of days.

Premise and Hazard Information

After PremierOne CAD performs address verification and checks for duplicate incidents, PremierOne
CAD checks for premise and hazard information at or near the location of the incident.

If PremierOne CAD finds potential hazard or other important premise information, the Haz tab in the
Work Assist Area turns orange and a number appears on the tab showing how many records were
returned.

Premise Hazard records can be a point location (address/intersection/common place) or an area.

To view the Premise Hazard records, select the Haz tab. You can also press Shift+F5 to display the tab.

Figure 95: Incident Initiate Form – Hazard Tab In The Work Assist Area

Send Feedback 185

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

Work Assist Area - Premise Hazard Information

When premise hazard information is available for a location, the information displays in the Work Assist
Area (WAA). For details on the display sort order for Premise/Hazard records, see Premise/Hazard Sort
Order Rules on page 440.

NOTE:
Depending on your agency configuration, a premise/hazard record does not necessarily have to
be at the same address.

Do any of the following:

• To see additional information about a premise/hazard record, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of
the record.

• To see additional information about all of the records in the list, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of
Type at the top of the list.

• To view the record, select View Rec at the bottom of the tab.

If the record is not an alarm, the Premise/Hazard Record displays in the Primary Work Area showing
additional information, including the property owner name, address, and phone number or numbers,
the designated contact phone numbers, and pertinent attachments, such as floor plans for the
building.

If the record is an alarm, the Alarm Record displays in the Primary Work Area.

• To view the location on the map, select Map it at the bottom of the tab.

• To add the location to premise hazard records and associate it with the incident, select the Create
New button. The Create New button is disabled until the address is validated. For details on creating
a premise hazard location, see Creating Premise Hazard Records on page 441.

186 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

Incident Query Information

When you run queries, the results display in the Query tab. If PremierOne CAD has query replies, the
Query tab in the Work Assist Area turns orange and a number appears on the tab showing how many
records were returned.

To view the Query responses, select the Query tab.

Figure 96: Incident Initiate Form – Query Information In The Work Assist Area

Work Assist Area - Query Information

The Query tab in the Work Assist area displays the results of searches for persons and vehicles.

Do any of the following:

• To see additional information about a query reply, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of the record.

• To sort the queries by Priority, Summary, or Date, select the column header.

• To print one of the replies, select the reply and then select the Print button.

• To view the details of the reply, select the reply and then select the View button.

The Query Responses tab of the Query form displays in the Primary Work Area with the additional
query details.

Send Feedback 187

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

• To attach one of the replies to the incident or unit history select the reply, select the Attach button,
and then select Import to History.

In the Attach Log dialog box that displays, enter any comments and select To Incident or To Unit.
Then select Attach.

• If you enter a unit ID assigned to an incident, the response is logged to the Incident and Unit
History.

• If you enter a unit ID not assigned to an incident, the response is logged only to the Unit History.
This feature allows you to associate a unit with a license plate in the U nit History record before
the incident is created.

• If you enter an incident number, the response is logged only to the Incident History.

Figure 97: Attach Log Dialog Box

If you select the Attach button in the Work Assist Area tab, the default format is used for the Query
response. If you select the Attach button when the response in the Primary Work Area, the format is
the same as the format currently displayed in the Primary Work Area overlay.

• To delete one of the replies, select the reply and then select the Delete button.

• To import a query response to an existing incident, or create an incident from a query response,
select Attach at the bottom of the Primary Work Area, and then select the desired import option. For
details on importing query responses, see Importing Query Responses From the II, IU, or QY
Screens on page 533.

188 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

ProQA Information
ProQA™ is a third-party software application by Priority Dispatch Corporation for gathering information
during the initiation of medical incidents in question and answer trees. If your agency is using ProQA, a
Q&A tab displays in the Work Assist Area to the right of the Attch tab.

For instructions on using ProQA with PremierOne CAD, see Using ProQA and ProQA Paramount on
page 649.

Work Assist Area - ProQA Information

The Work Assist Area for the Q&A tab includes the ProQA case number, the User ID, when the case
was created, and the console ID creating the case. The information entered into ProQA also displays.

The Q&A tab displays for medical and fire ProQA.

Figure 98: Q&A Tab In The Work Assist Area

Attachments
You may want to add attachments such as floor plans, video and audio files, and other types of
documents to an incident. Attaching such files to an incident helps provide more information about
occurrences to responding personnel and to the personnel investigating the incident record later.

NOTE:
The attachment must be less than five megabytes.

Some of the types of attachments that can be attached to incident records in PremierOne CAD include:
audio files (radio and/or telephony recordings), photos, videos, floor plans, map data, Word documents,
and miscellaneous files.

You can add attachments to incidents from the Incident Initiate Persons or Vehicles tabs or from the
Incident Management Summary, Persons, Vehicles, Dispatch, or History tabs.

Send Feedback 189

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

To add an attachment to an incident:

1 In the Work Assist Area, select the Attch tab.

2 At the bottom of the Work Assist Area, select Attach.

The Attach File form opens in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 99: Attach File Form In Primary Work Area

3 Select the Browser link to the right of the Look in field and navigate to and select the location of
your attachment.

Filter the display of files by suggesting the file type from the Files of type list.

To see the file before you attach it, select Open at the bottom of the Attach File form.

The file opens in a separate window.

4 Select Attach to attach the file to the incident.

The file name, its type, and its size are now shown on the Attch tab of the Work Assist Area. When
you select the plus sign next to the attachment, a representation of the attachment appears above
the list.

190 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

5 Do any of the following:

• To rename your file, select Rename File.

The Renaming File dialog box appears. In the File Name box at the bottom, type a new name for
your file and then select Rename at the bottom of the Renaming file dialog box.

Figure 100: Renaming File Dialog Box

• To delete an attachment, select the attachment file and then select Delete File.

if you delete attachments, a message appears advising you that the file or files are longer
accessible. Select Delete in the message box if you are sure you want to delete them.

Send Feedback 191

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

• To play a multimedia file, select Open.

The file opens in a separate window using your default media player.

Figure 101: Multimedia File Open in Default Media Player

6 When you are finished with your attachment, press F12 and then select Cancel at the bottom of the
Attach File form in the Primary Work Area.

192 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

Work Assist Area - Attachments

The Work Assist Area for the Attach tab in Incident Initiate lists any attachments for the incident, such as
floor plans, video and audio files, and other types of documents.

Figure 102: Incident Initiate Form – Attach Tab In The Work Assist Area

Do any of the following:

• To see comments information about a record, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of the record.

• To see additional information about all of the records in the list, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of
File Name at the top of the list.

• To add an attachment, select the Attach button and follow the procedure in Attachments on
page 189.

• To delete an attachment, select the attachment and then select Delete.

• To rename an attachment, select the attachment and then select Rename.

• To view an attachment, select the attachment and then select Open.

The file opens in a separate window using your default media player.

Send Feedback 193

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

Understanding Incident IRFs

The IRF (Incident Response Factor) determines the equipment and personnel that respond to an
incident. For each IRF, your system administrator provisions the following:

• Incident type and modifying circumstance.

• General settings, which include whether command line dispatching is allowed, settings for previous
searches for the incident type, incident priority, and available dispositions.

• Attributes, which include alarm levels, incident priority, response ID, associated incidents, and
notification messages.

Dispatchers can override any of the individual response factors.

NOTE:
IRFs are defined for agency types (such as fire, medical, and law). Defining IRFs at the agency
level helps limit the number of codes that exist for centers that have multiple agencies.

How agencies implement each of these factors is highly variable. Contact your system administrator for
details.

Understanding Incident Type Filtering and Agency Type

Defaults
When initiating an incident from the Incident Initiate (II), Clone Incident (CI), Field Initiate (FI) screens, or
searching the Location Detail (LD) screen, the list of available values for the Incident Type field is
filtered to display only the incident types you are provisioned to use.

On the Incident Initiate (II), Clone Incident (CI), and Field Initiate (FI) screens, the incident types listed in
the Incident Type list are filtered according to user role, trusted agency permissions, and Incident
Response Factors. On the Location Detail (LD) screen, incident types are filtered based on your
combined trusted agency permissions for the II, CI, and FI commands. Filtering is also performed on
valid user-entered incident type aliases.

NOTE:
The only incident types that are available to a user within the PremierOne CAD client are the
incident types that are provisioned as an Incident Response Factor (IRF). If a provisioned
incident type is not provisioned against an IRF, the incident type is not accessible to the user. For
details on IRFs, see Understanding Incident IRFs on page 194.

What displays in the Agency Type field on the Incident Initiate (II), Clone Incident (CI), and Location
Detail (LD) screens is dependent on the selection made in the Incident Type field (the Field Initiate (FI)
form requires a Unit ID, whose agency is used to validate the selected incident type). After you make a
selection in the Incid Type field, the default value that displays in the Agency Type field, if any, is
determined according to a set of hierarchical rules concerning the Agency Types that are associated
with the selected incident type, as described in the following table.

NOTE:
If the selected incident type or incident type alias is uniquely associated with only one Agency
Type (based on the incident type filtering conditions outlined in this section), the Agency Type
field is filled in with this value and becomes a read-only field.

194 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential

Table 28: Default Agency Type Hierarchical Rules
Rule Condition
1st Your Working Agency belongs to
one of the associated Agency
Types.
2nd Your Working Agency is not one
of the associated Agency Types,
but you are currently signed on to
cover agencies that belong to only
one of the associated Agency
Types, then that Agency Type is
placed into the Agency Type field.
3rd You are currently signed on to
cover agencies that belong to
more than one of the associated
Agency Types.
4th You are currently not covering an
agency for any of the associated
Agency Types. The appropriate
default Agency Type cannot be
determined.
Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation
Default Agency Type
Agency Type of your
Working Agency.
Agency Type the agency
that you are currently
signed on to cover.
BLANK. The appropriate
default Agency Type
cannot be determined.
Select the agency type
from the Agency Type list.
BLANK. The appropriate
default Agency Type
cannot be determined.
Select the agency type
from the Agency Type list.
0060190214-A
Example
Your Working Agency = PD1
(Agency Type = PD).
You are signed on to cover
agencies from Agency Type FD,
PD, and SO.
If you entered an incident type
that belonged to Agency Type =
FD, PD, and SO, the Agency Type
field defaults to the value of PD –
your Working Agency.
Your Working Agency = PSO
(Agency Type = SO).
You are signed on to cover
agencies from Agency Type PD
and SO.
If you entered an incident type
that belonged to Agency Type =
PD, FD, the Agency Type field
defaults to the value of PD –
because PD is the only Agency
Type you are signed on to cover
that has provisioned this incident
type.
Your Working Agency = PSO
(Agency Type = SO).
You are signed on to cover
agencies from Agency Type FD,
PD.
If you entered an incident type
that belonged to Agency Type =
PD, FD, the Agency Type field
defaults to the value of blank –
because PremierOne cannot
determine which default Agency
Type to use.
Your Working Agency = PSO
(Agency Type = SO).
You are signed on to only cover
agencies from Agency Type SO.
If you entered an incident type
that belonged to Agency Type =
PD, FD, the Agency Type field
defaults to the value of blank –
because PremierOne cannot
determine which default Agency
Type to use.
195
0060190214-A
Chapter 8: Understanding Incident Initiation

The following table provides details for each of the affected screens:
Table 29: Incident Type Filtering By Screen

Screen Incident Type Filtering Agency Type Default

Incident Initiate (II) Filtered by user role, trusted agency permissions, Determined by hierarchical rules.
and Incident Response Factors See the previous table.

Clone Incident (CI) Initial display for the Incident Type, Modifying
Circumstance, and Agency Type fields in first row is the
same as the cloned incident. PremierOne filters the
Incident Type list by user role, trusted agency
permissions, and Incident Response Factors.
Initial display for Agency Type is the
same as the cloned incident. When
a new incident type is selected,
PremierOne determines the Agency
Type default by hierarchical rules.
See the previous table.

Field Initiate (FI) The Field Initiate form requires a Unit ID, whose Agency Type of the Unit agency.
agency is used to validate the incident type that is
selected within the form.

When an incident type is entered in the FI screen

after a Unit ID is specified, the Modifying
Circumstances list is populated with the values
from the Agency Type that the unit agency belongs
to.

When an incident type is entered in the FI screen

before a Unit ID is specified, the Modifying
Circumstances list is populated with the values
from the Agency Type that comes first
alphabetically.

After a Unit ID is specified within the FI screen, the

Modifying Circumstance field is automatically updated
to match the values from the Agency Type that the
unit agency belongs to.

Location Detail Combined list of Agency Types that were obtained Determined by hierarchical rules.
(LD) for the CI, FI, and II commands. Any incident type See the previous table.
or incident type alias that you can use in any of
these commands is valid for the Location Detail
command.

196 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Alerts and Notifications

Chapter 9

Alerts and Notifications 9

CAD uses several types of alerts and notifications to bring your attention to important information.
Dispatchers and calltakers can automatically enter priority comments which then display in a special
format. Certain fields can additionally be configured to display in a special format when the information
in the field is changed.

Your system administrator can also configure an Alert dialog box to display with alert text under specific
conditions.

Understanding Priority Comments and Priority Updates

PremierOne CAD can be configured to use priority comments and priority updates. Roles control these
features.

• Priority comments are comments regarding an incident that you want other users to be alerted to,
such as when a weapon is involved or when a person is trapped in a burning building.

• Priority updates are updates to specific fields. Your system administrator configures the fields to be
monitored for changes (add, change, modify).

PremierOne CAD can also be configured to display a Priority Notification dialog box when priority
comments or priority updates exist. Your system administrator configures the display of the Notification
dialog box by user roles. The display is most commonly enabled for dispatchers.

NOTE:
The term “priority updates” does not refer to the Priority field itself. Although your system
administrator can configure the Priority field so it is monitored, it is not monitored by default.

Send Feedback 197

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 9: Alerts and Notifications

Your status monitors may also be configured so that an icon or text displays indicating priority updates
exist that have not been viewed.

Figure 103: Incident Management Window – Priority Notification Dialog Box

Priority Comments
You can enter priority comments in the Comments field during incident initiation or update.

• For all the comments to be treated as a priority comment, select the Priority Comment check box.

• For only some of the text to be treated as priority comment, type angle brackets around the
comments, such as <suspect may be armed>.

For the user who entered the comments, the priority comments display in the Cmnt tab of the Work
Assist Area either totally in red or just red within the angle brackets. For users at other workstations, the
comments display in bold until they are viewed. Priority comments always display as viewed for the user
who enters the comments.

When you print the incident record, high priority comments print in bold.

Priority comments also display in red and in angle brackets in the Incident History. For additional details
on incident history, see Viewing Incident History on page 302.

198 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 9: Alerts and Notifications

Adding Priority Comments in Forms

You can enter priority comments in any form that has an incidents Comments field. If you select the
Add to Associated check box to the left of the Comments field, the priority comment displays as a
priority comment in all associated incidents.

Adding Priority Comments on the Command Line

You can enter priority comments on the command line with the CM identifier for any command that uses
the CM identifier and for the Incident Update (IU) command and the CMA (for associated incidents)
identifier.

Figure 104: Incident Management Form Showing Priority Comments In The Work Assist Area

Priority Updates
Your system may be configured so that certain fields from the Incident Management form on the
Summary, Persons, or Vehicles tab are monitored for changes (add, change, and delete). These fields
are called priority update fields.

When you make a priority update, the following occurs on the workstations of other users:

• The label for the updated field displays in red followed by an asterisk ( * ).

• When a tab has an update to a priority field, the tab displays with a white label, an asterisk, and a red
background when selected and a red label with an asterisk when unselected.

• When the Work Assist Area has an update to a priority field, the Person or Vehicle Summary record
displays with white text and red background when selected and red text and white background when
unselected.

After a priority update is viewed and the form is closed, PremierOne CAD removes all special formatting.

Send Feedback 199

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 9: Alerts and Notifications

Priority updates display for updates made to closed incidents.

Priority updates display in red in the Incident History. For additional details on incident history, see
Viewing Incident History on page 302.

Figure 105: Incident Management Window Showing Priority Updates

Priority Update Notifications

Your system may be configured so that a Priority Notification dialog box displays whenever another user
enters priority comments or makes priority updates to an incident you are monitoring. The dialog box
displays in the lower left corner of the PremierOne CAD window. The title bar for the dialog box flashes
five times to draw your attention to it.

Priority Update Notifications are triggered for incidents that are not closed.

NOTE:
Your system may also be configured so that the Priority Notification dialog box displays
whenever another user makes updates to the priority fields in an associated incident.

200 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 9: Alerts and Notifications

The dialog box cannot be moved, resized, or minimized; always displays on top of all other windows and
dialog boxes; and does not take focus when it appears.

If multiple priority messages are entered or updates are made without you viewing them, they are added
sequentially to the bottom of the Priority Notification dialog box. The number on the Priority Notification
title bar indicates how many comments or updates were added.

When enough comments are added so the Notification dialog box reaches the top of the working area,
PremierOne CAD adds a scroll bar to the right side of the dialog box. In this case, the Ack’d button is
disabled until you scroll down to view all priority comments or updates. You can use the mouse or the
PageUp and PageDown keys to scroll.

If notifications exist for more than one incident that you are monitoring, a plus sign displays before the
Priority Notification label, indicating the presence of one or more additional incidents that are waiting to
be viewed. PremierOne CAD displays incident details for only one incident at a time.

Priority comments display in the Notification dialog box in angle brackets and in bold red text. Updated
priority field values display in the Notification dialog box in bold red text followed by the previous field
value in parentheses. For updates to associated incidents, the incident number also displays.

The timestamp and transaction description appear above each priority comment/update. The incident #,
incident type, location, and unit IDs of dispatched units display at the top of the notification.

Figure 106: Incident Management Window – Priority Notification Dialog Box

Send Feedback 201

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 9: Alerts and Notifications

To work with priority notifications:

Do one of the following:

• To acknowledge that you have viewed the notification information, read the notifications and
select the Ack’d button (for keyboard users, select Ctrl+0 to make the dialog box active).
Selecting Ack’d acknowledges all priority comments and updates in the window. When you
acknowledge a priority update, an entry is made in the Incident History.

The Priority Notification dialog box closes.

• To view details for the incident at the bottom of the Priority Notification dialog box, select the View
Inc button.

The Priority Notification dialog box closes.

The incident details display from the Incident Management form in the Primary Work Area. The
display is shaded blue to indicate that the incident information is an overlay of the screen that
was displayed. You can make updates while in the view mode (enter the information and press
F12).

To return to your original work area, select the X above the Work Assist Area or press the Esc
key.

NOTE:
Displaying the incident in any other manner, such as with the IU command, also closes the
Notification dialog box.

Understanding GPS Device Failure Notifications

Your system may be configured so that a Priority Notification displays when a unit GPS device has
stopped reporting its location. Each GPS failure notification appears as a separate notification. The plus
sign (+) displays on the title bar to indicate that there is at least one notification (priority comment,
priority update, or GPS failure) that has not been acknowledged. The first time another notification
arrives, the title bar flashes for five seconds. After the current notification is acknowledged, the Priority
Notification window redisplays with the next notification.

Figure 107: GPS Device Failure Notification

202 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 9: Alerts and Notifications

Understanding Status Monitor Alerts

PremierOne CAD can be configured to display an Alert dialog box and play a sound when an alert
message arrives at your workstation. Additionally, the alert text may flash on the appropriate status
monitor. Your system administrator configures the text and conditions under which alerts display.

The Alert dialog box displays in the same position as the Priority Notification dialog box. If a Priority
Notification is present that you have not yet acknowledged, the Alert displays below the Priority
Notification, but is slightly offset so that you know it is there. The bottom of the Alert dialog box displays
the name of the alert as configured by your system administrator and the number of alerts of the given
type.

• If the same type of alert exists for several units or incidents, then the notifications are listed vertically
and you can use the scroll bar to scroll through the alerts. The most recent alert displays at the top of
the list.

• If different types of alerts are present, an arrow displays in the bottom right corner of the Alert dialog
box. Select this arrow to move through the different types of alerts.

Figure 108: Alert Dialog Box

Send Feedback 203

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 9: Alerts and Notifications

To close the Alert dialog box, select the Acknowledge button with the mouse, or tab to the dialog box
and press Alt+K. If you have more than one type of alert, acknowledge each one to close it. Whether
the Alert dialog box takes focus is configurable by your system administrator.

Figure 109: Alert Dialog Box

Understanding BOLO Notifications

If your system is configured to do so, a small window appears on your screen when a BOLO notification
arrives.

Figure 110: BOLO Notification

204 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 9: Alerts and Notifications

To a read BOLO message:

Select the down arrow and select View to view the message.

The Messaging window displays with the text of the BOLO message.

Figure 111: Messaging Window – BOLO Tab

For more details on notification messages, see Working With BOLO Messages on page 595.

Understanding Hot Hit Notifications

If the response is a potential hot hit, the hot hit displays with an icon in the Query Header and
PremierOne CAD sends you an alert showing the hot hit.

Figure 112: Hot Hit Dialog Box

Send Feedback 205

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 9: Alerts and Notifications

To manage the hot hit from the Alert dialog box:

• To process and broadcast the hot hit, enter any additional information, and select Confirm.

The Hot Hit Confirmation dialog box appears. Review the information and select Close.

• If you do not want to process the information as a hot hit, select Reject.

The Hot Hit Rejection dialog box appears. Review the information and select Close.

Understanding Emergency Alerts

When a mobile unit issues an emergency notification, a notification dialog box appears.

• If the unit was on duty when the Emergency button was pressed, the Emergency signal has been
activated message appears.

Emergency alerts can also be initiated from an off-duty portable radio. When an officer presses the
Emergency button on an off-duty radio, PremierOne creates a temporary unit, and places it on duty.
Normally the temporary Unit ID begins with the letters EMX. When you have completed the
emergency, place the unit off duty.

Figure 113: On Duty Emergency Signal

The dialog box displays the ID of the unit that activated the emergency signal, cross streets, the
current location (for GPS-equipped units), the last known location (for non GPS-equipped units), the
time at last known location, and the incident number. The incident number displays only if the unit in
emergency has an active incident. If the Time at Known Loc is older than the configured timeout
value, the timestamp is highlighted in red.

When an MDT does not have GPS, the hierarchy for location is as follows: Unit direct assignment >
Unit Vehicle Assignment > Unit Person Assignment.

From this dialog box, you can do any of the following:

• To acknowledge receipt of the alert, select Acknowledge.

• To view the unit’s current or last know location on the map, select Track It. The map is panned
and zoomed to the location. The Follow Unit command is issued so the map will automatically
follow as location updates are received.

206 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 9: Alerts and Notifications

• If the unit was off duty when the radio went into emergency, and your system has been provisioned
for emergency notifications when a unit is off duty, the Off Duty Radios Emergency Signal has
been activated message appears.

Figure 114: Off Duty Radios Emergency Signal Has Been Activated

The temporary Unit ID, the approximate location, and the Radio ID display. You can treat this
temporary Unit ID as a normal unit.

From this dialog box, you can do any of the following:

• To acknowledge receipt of the alert, select Acknowledge.

• To view the unit’s approximate location on the map, select Track It.

After the unit is acknowledged, you can reset the alert. For instructions on resetting the alert, see
Resetting Unit Emergency Indicators on page 557. Resetting the alert takes the temporary unit off duty.

Send Feedback 207

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 9: Alerts and Notifications

208 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Initiating Incidents

Chapter 10

Initiating Incidents 10

To initiate an incident, you record the caller information and select an incident type. PremierOne CAD
verifies the address, checks for duplicate and previous incidents, and checks for premise and hazard
information. You then submit the incident. You can add person, vehicle, and property information to the
incident when you initiate the incident or at a later time.

After you create an incident, you can clone the incident to create new incidents with their own incident
numbers.

An incident in PremierOne is any occurrence that requires a report. To initiate an incident, the incident
location and incident type are the only two pieces of information that are required. Therefore, a calltaker
can quickly initiate an incident, pass it on to the dispatcher, and then complete the rest of the information
as it is obtained from the caller.

NOTE:
You can also create an incident from the map display. For details, see Creating Incidents on the
Map Display on page 497.

Initiating Incidents From the Initiate Incident Form

The Initiate Incident form contains the required and optional fields used to create an incident. You can
use this form instead of typing all the command and command identifiers on the command line.

After you enter the location, various forms may display in the Work Assist Area depending on the
incident information.

NOTE:
If you stop working in the form after a configured amount of time (for example, to work in another
form), PremierOne CAD may display a warning icon on the Work Area tab on the left side of the
PremierOne CAD window. The icon is a reminder that the incident is awaiting processing. When
you return to the form and continue working in the form, the icon disappears.

The Incident Initiation form is divided into four main areas:

• Location information – This information records where the incident is occurring and is grouped in the
top portion of the Incident Initiation form.

• Incident Response Factor information – Incident Response Factor (IRF) information is provided to
record what is happening, using incident types, modifying circumstances, and priority. IRF
information is also used by PremierOne CAD to help define responses (who should respond), priority
(how they should respond), and other information to help refine the incident response.

• Caller information – Caller information is provided to record who reported the information, the caller
phone number, and the caller location.

• Dispatch information – Information in this section of the Incident Initiation form helps dispatchers
determine resources that should respond to the incident, and dispatch the incident to one or more
specified resources.

Send Feedback 209

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

To initiate an incident from the Incident Initiate form:

1 On the command line, type II and press Enter or F10.

The General tab of the Incident Initiate form opens in the Primary Work Area (note that Previous
Phone Check is an optional configuration).
NOTE
NOTE:
You can set your CAD client to a larger size that allows you to view lengthy screens such as
Incident Initiation without scroll bars in the Primary Work Area. For details, see “Configuring
Workstation/MDT General Settings” in the PremierOne Provisioning User Guide.

Figure 115: Incident Initiate Form – General Tab

2 Enter the incident location information.

If 9-1-1 data is available for the incident, the location and the caller information are filled in for you.
NOTE
NOTE:
If one of the fields was blank, pressing Shift-F11 to retrieve ANI/ALI in an II form with an
existing ANI/ALI data overwrites the existing information, potentially leaving information from
both calls. Although this situation does not happen under normal operations, it can happen.

a In the Location field, type the street address, common place name, intersection name, alias
name, or alarm number of the incident. For more information on locations, see Entering
Locations in CAD on page 163.

For detailed information on entering CryWolf alarm incidents, see Using CryWolf on page 659.

210 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

b In the City field, type or select the name of the city or the code for the incident location.

If PremierOne CAD is configured to do so, when you move your cursor out of the City field,
PremierOne CAD verifies the address that you entered and lists the potential matches in the
Address Verification form in the Work Assist Area.

If PremierOne CAD does not automatically verify the address, you can tab to the Verify button
and press Enter, or select Verify.

NOTE:
For a region where the address input fields have been altered in terms of layout and order,
it may not be sensible to make the address auto-validate after tabbing off the City field. In
this circumstance, decide when enough address information is input for an address search.
To this end, an address search may be initiated quickly via a hotkey. Your agency system
administrator configures the Hotkey.

- If there is exactly one match for your location, the Address Verification form does not appear
in the Work Assist Area.

- If there are no addresses that match the address that is entered, or if there are too many
matches, a message displays in the Status Message area.

After PremierOne CAD verifies the address, PremierOne CAD fills in the nearest cross street
information, and the Valid Address icon indicates a verified address.

The Query button becomes enabled so that you can query databases, such as PremierOne
Records, for additional information about the location. If automatic location query is provisioned,
a Location query is automatically launched upon address verification and the responses appear
in the Query subtab.

After PremierOne CAD verifies an address, PremierOne considers the address verified even if
you change the jurisdiction.

NOTE:
Depending upon your system configuration, if you modify any of the following fields after a
location is verified re-verify the location: Location, Subdivision, City, Apartment,
Building, Location Name, or Zip Code. For a detailed explanation of address verification
and ways to change this behavior, see Appendix B: Understanding Address Verification.

If the location is a multi-beat or multi-agency intersection, the jurisdiction fields do not populate
after the address is verified and the incident type is entered. Instead, the Beat field displays
{Multi} and the Verify button changes to a yellow color and the label changes to Multi. For
instructions on how to proceed, see Incidents in Multi-Beat Intersections on page 175.

c Fill in the rest of the Location fields; Subdivision, Building, Floor, and Apt/Unit, as applicable.

The fields present in the Location area depend upon the configuration of your system. For
example, a system in the United States varies from one in England because location designators
are different from country to country. For example, England may have Motorway Marker, Post
Code, District/Town, and Grid Reference fields in the Location area while the United States
does not.

In some jurisdictions, the system may be configured so building names, sub-building names and
organization names are interchangeable. For example, a building name of Wendover Manor, a
sub-building name of Flat A, Unit 5, and an Organizational name of Wendover Senior Center
would all result in the same address. For these addresses to be valid, they all must exist in the
provisioned GIS data.

Send Feedback 211

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

d To display the location of the incident on the map, select the Map It button. The location displays
at a scale provisioned by your system administrator.

The Map It button is enabled only if the X/Y coordinates exist for the incident location.

e In the Description field, type additional details regarding the incident location, such as “in the
alley” or “around back, behind the dumpster.”

You can use quotes in this field. Other system-generated information may also display in this
field, such as the common place type or the phrase Approx Loc for latitude/longitude locations.

f In the field next to the Description field, select either At Loc or In front to indicate where the
incident is in relation to the location.

An example of an incident occurring “At the Location” would be a burglary or other incident
occurring within the building at the address. An example of an incident occurring “In Front of the
Location” could be an accident that occurred on the roadway in front of a store. This information
is useful when there might be different jurisdictional responses for incidents that occur at the
address or on the roadway.

3 Enter the Incident Response Factor (IRF) information and any comments.

IRFs (Agency, Agency Type, Incid Type, Mod Circum, and Disposition) are defined in Provisioning
under the Incident Management – Incident Response Factors item.

a In the Incid Type field, select the code for the type of the incident. If your system is configured to
use incident type aliases, you can manually enter the alias.

If you know the incident type code, type the first letter. If there are multiple codes that start with
the same letter, continue to type the same letter until the code you want displays in the field.

To display a list of incident type codes, press the Tab key until your cursor is in the Incid Type
field and then press the down arrow on the keyboard repeatedly, or select the arrow to the right of
the Incid Type field.

NOTE:
The list of available incident types is filtered according to user role, trusted agency
permissions, and Incident Response Factors to display only the incident types you are
provisioned to use for the II command. For details, see Understanding Incident Type
Filtering and Agency Type Defaults on page 194.

b From the Agency Type list, select the code for the agency to handle this incident, such as Law,
Fire, or Medical.

If the selected incident type is unique to an agency type, PremierOne CAD fills in the value in the
Agency Type field and disables the field.

NOTE:
A set of hierarchical rules regarding the selected incident type determines the default value
that displays in the Agency Type field, if any. For details, see Understanding Incident Type
Filtering and Agency Type Defaults on page 194.

c To override the automatic selection for the modifying circumstance, select the code for the
modifying circumstance. PremierOne CAD automatically populates the Mod Circum field based
on the incident type and agency type you select.

When you type your own modifying circumstance, the typical Incident Response Factors for an
incident, including priority and alarm level, are overridden.

212 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

Consider a burglary that is in progress and an armed suspect that is still on the premises. The
dispatcher initiates an incident with an incident type of BURG but with a modifying circumstance
code of W2 (weapons involved, recommend a two-person car) to override the usual one-person
car.

d To override the automatic priority selection, type a different priority code. PremierOne CAD
automatically populates the Priority field based on the incident type and agency type you select.

If you change the priority, then the previous priority displays in parentheses, such as Priority (2).

4 In the Comments field, type any comments you want to add to the incident information.

For all the text to be treated as a priority comment, select the Priority Comment check box. The
priority comments display in the Cmnt tab of the Work Assist Area in red.

For only some of the text to be treated as priority comment, type angle brackets around the
comments, such as <suspect may be armed>. The priority comments display in the Cmnt tab of
the Work Assist Area in red within the angle brackets.

For users at other workstations, the comments display in bold until they are viewed.

For details on priority comments, see Understanding Priority Comments and Priority Updates on
page 197.

5 Enter the Caller information. Enter the caller name in the format Firstname Lastname.

If an interface to the phone system allows the transfer of ANI/ALI information into the form, caller
information is automatically entered into the form.

If ANI/ALI data is available and your system is configured to display it, and no information is entered
into the Location field, PremierOne CAD creates the incident using the information in the Caller’s
Address field. PremierOne CAD also populates the Name and Phone fields and generates an initial
caller record on the Persons tab. PremierOne CAD does not overwrite any existing information in
those fields.

If ANI/ALI data populated the Name and Phone fields, an icon indicating the type of ANI/ALI data
displays to the right of the Contact field.

PremierOne CAD populates the Source field for ANI/ALI and alarm-initiated calls. For other calls,
select the appropriate source. PremierOne CAD populates the Service and ESN fields for ANI/ALI
calls.

If you are manually entering the phone number information, you can use any combination of 3-digit
area code, 7-digit phone number, and/or 1-4 digit extension. If you are entering an international
number, start with a + symbol, enter the country code, and then the rest of the phone number
information. Entering the + symbol causes the area code/phone number/extension formatting to be
removed.

6 If you are bypassing address verification:

a Type the agency ID in the Agency ID field. If you do not enter an agency ID with a bypassed
address, the agency ID defaults to your working agency.

b Type the area in the Area field.

You do not have to assign the area and sector values to the specific beat (the values do not have
to be a valid plan item). They can both be pseudo areas or sectors, such as a traffic or accident
desk.

Send Feedback 213

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

c Type the sector in the Sector field.

d Type the beat in the Beat field.

NOTE
NOTE:
If an incident has a provisioned override area, the Area is populated with the override area
whenever the Location is geoverified; the jurisdictional sector and beat display. When an
incident of this IRF is created (except for field-initiated incidents), the incident is created in the
override area regardless of where it is geographically. This situation is true for the II, CI, and
LD commands and for creating associated incidents.

If you update the incident to a different IRF, address verification reoccurs and the area is set to
the jurisdictional area. Also, when a new plan is activated, the area for an incident depends the
override area of the IRF.

7 To create a closed incident, select a disposition (your system may be configured so that a disposition
is not required to close an incident). If comments are required for the disposition, the Comments
field is enabled. Type your comments.

If the incident type is provisioned to have at least one type of closed disposition, you can create and
close the incident type without entering a disposition. If required, the entry is listed as Closed
[Null] in the incident history and comments can be bypassed.

When you first enter the Incident Initiate form, the disposition list contains all dispositions for your
working agency. The disposition list can change after any of the following: the location is verified and
agency is identified, you enter an agency, or the incident type and modifying circumstance are
selected or updated. Whenever the disposition list changes, the disposition you entered is not lost,
but is kept in the list unless you delete it manually.

Closed incidents are commonly created when another agency or organization is responsible for the
incident and the originating agency wants to create a record of the incident. Agencies may also want
to create closed incidents for various reasons, such as accidental calls, prank calls, or
nonemergency calls that come in as emergency calls.

8 To dispatch units, type the IDs of up to five units to dispatch to the incident. This option is used for
single-shot dispatching, where the calltaker also dispatches units to the incident. Resource
recommendations are not used in this case.

If you are dispatching a radio pseudo-unit, dispatch at least one standard resource unit. PremierOne
dispatches the standard resource units before the radio pseudo-unit resulting in units either being
dispatched, stacked, or not dispatched due to the unit status being unavailable for dispatch.

When you enter or modify a unit ID in the box and move to another field, PremierOne verifies that the
unit is on duty (or off duty if the unit is being dispatched as a temporary unit). PremierOne then
validates that the number of stacked incidents for the unit is not at its limit, and updates the Missing
Capabilities and Additional Capabilities fields on the Dispatch Summary form. If the unit is not on
duty (or the unit is on duty if it is being dispatched as a temporary unit), PremierOne CAD removes
the unit ID from the field and displays a message in the status field. If the unit is at its stacked
incident limit, PremierOne also displays a message.

If the unit you enter is configured for automatic toning, an icon appears below the unit .

214 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

9 From the Preempt or Stack list, select one of the following options:

• Select Yes to preempt the original assignment of the units (remove them from their original
assignments) and assign them immediately to the incident.

• Select Stack to place the original incident in the call stacking queue or pending queue for the
unit, depending on your agency configuration. For more details, see Understanding Call Stacking
on page 404.

• Leave the default value of No (neither preempt or stack incidents) for the assigned units.

The rules in this table apply to incident initiating from either the form or the command line.
Table 30: Unit Status Provisioning Options

Unit Status
Pre-Empt Value Is the Unit Currently
Resulting Provisioning Option
Specified With the Assigned to an
Transaction Applied to the
Transaction Incident
Transaction

No No Attempt to dispatch the Unit is available for

unit onto the incident dispatch:

• Yes = Dispatch

• No = Do not Dispatch

No Yes Attempt to stack the Unit is out-of-service:

incident against the unit
• Yes = Do not stack

• No = Stack

Stacked No Attempt to stack the Unit is out-of-service:

incident against the unit
• Yes = Do not dispatch

• No = Dispatch

Stacked Yes Attempt to stack the Unit is out-of-service:

incident against the unit
• Yes = Do not dispatch

• No = Dispatch

Yes No Attempt to dispatch the Unit is available for

unit onto the incident dispatch:

• Yes = Dispatch

• No = Do not Dispatch

Yes Yes Attempt to preempt the Unit can be preempted:

unit with the new
incident • Yes = Preempt

• No = Do not preempt

10 To create more than one incident for a particular location, enter the number of incidents in the Create
<#> incidents field. Each incident has a unique incident number. If you do not enter anything in this
field, PremierOne CAD creates one incident.

As an example, a unit may be performing parking enforcement and may need to generate multiple
incidents for each parking infraction at the same location.

Send Feedback 215

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

11 Enter any related incident information in the other tabs:

• Adding Person Information to an Incident on page 220

• Adding Vehicle Information to an Incident on page 223

• Scheduling Incidents on page 228

12 To submit the incident, press F12.

PremierOne CAD processes the incident. Depending on your agency configuration, you may be
prompted to create associated incidents. For details, see Creating Associated Incidents When
Creating the Initial Incident on page 231.

When the incident is successfully initiated, PremierOne CAD displays a message in the status
message area indicating the incident number.
NOTE
NOTE:
If provisioned to do so, CAD displays a warning dialog when you attempt to perform a function
that causes data to be lost from an Incident Initiate form, such as attempting to log off, exit,
selecting the Clear Form function, or entering any command that would eliminate an open II
form. If you have unsaved II forms open in multiple work areas, the system displays a warning
dialog for each unsaved II form.

Using Update On Demand

As you enter incident information in the Incident Initiate or Incident Management forms, you can use
command line identifiers in a separate dialog box to quickly enter new information for fields in the form
without changing the focus to the field containing the information. This feature allows you to continue
working without having to change the position of the field you are currently working in, which saves
valuable time in data entry and navigation. This feature is called Update On Demand.

Update On Demand can be used to update a field such as a location or to add new information, such as
a response to queries. For example, if you receive license plate information for a query, you could enter
PN;ABC123.PS;CO. The plate number and state number populates in the License Plate and State
fields on the Vehicles tab after you submit the information. Information on the primary command line is
not affected.

This feature behaves in the same manner as it does when you direct update the field.

216 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

To use Update on Demand:

1 In any field in the Incident Initiation or Incident Management forms, press Ctrl+Alt+Z. Your system
may additionally be configured to use a function key combination; check with your system
administrator.

The Update on Demand dialog box displays on top of the form.

Figure 116: Update On Demand Dialog Box

2 In the Update on Demand dialog box, enter the appropriate command identifiers and values.
NOTE
NOTE:
The initial characters you enter into the dialog box determine whether the entry is considered a
comment. If the first characters do no match a valid identifier, separator, and value (such as
T.theft), then the entire entry is treated as a comment. The Add to Comments check box is
disabled in this case. If the provisioned Command Line Separator value is entered, such as a
period, the entire entry within the dialog box is treated as a comment.

If you enter location information, address verification occurs when you submit the form.

Most of the command identifiers that can be used with II and IM commands can be entered in the
Update On Demand dialog box. Exceptions are the following:

• IU – AU, CMA, D, DTF, I, and SY are not allowed

• II – AG, AGT, N, U, DTF, I, and SY are not allowed

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

You can use quotes with the DE identifier.

Send Feedback 217

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

3 If you want the information also added to the Comments box, select the Add to Comments check
box.

In the Comments box, *Update* precedes the identifiers and values that you enter.

Figure 117: Comments Box Showing Update On Demand Values

4 Select Update and then press F12.

If you enter the command line identifier incorrectly, an error message displays in the On Demand
Update dialog box, but you can continue working without correcting the error. Errors are not included
in the Comments box.

Figure 118: Update On Demand Dialog Box Showing Error

Depending on whether Dynamic Help is enabled (select the Utilities menu, and then select
Command Line), command line hints appear as you type in the Update On Demand dialog box.

218 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

Setting the Details to Follow Flag

In some emergency situations, the calltaker receives a call that must be dispatched immediately, such
as a shooting. In this case, the calltaker can enter the pertinent information (location and incident
response factors), stay on the phone with the caller, and immediately initiate the incident. The calltaker
can set a Details to Follow (DTF) flag that informs the dispatcher that the calltaker is still on the phone
with the caller obtaining additional information. The dispatcher can then inform the units being
dispatched that more information regarding the incident is being obtained.

When the calltaker is finished obtaining information, the calltaker can remove the DTF flag, signifying
that no further information is available.

Figure 119: Incident Management Form Showing Details To Follow Flag

To add the DTF flag from the command line:

Use the DTF;Y identifier and value.

To add the DTF flag to the Incident Management form:

Submit the form using Ctrl + F12 (as opposed to F12 by itself).

To keep the DTF flag in the Incident Management form:

Submit the form by pressing Ctrl+F12 (Initiate Incident and Incident Management forms).

Send Feedback 219

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

To remove the DTF flag from the Incident Management form:

Submit the form by pressing F12. PremierOne removes the DTF flag.

Adding Person Information to an Incident

When adding a person to an incident record, the person is associated with the incident in terms of their
“role” in regard to the incident. The following default roles are available in PremierOne CAD: Initial
Caller, Additional Caller, Subject, Witness, and Victim.

The Persons tab in the Primary Work Area of either the Incident Initiation or Incident Management form
is where you enter the information for any of the people involved in an incident.

NOTE:
You can import information from person query responses directly to the Persons tab. For details,
see Importing Query Responses to Incidents on page 533.

To add person information to an incident:

1 Select the Persons tab from either an Incident Initiation form or an Incident Management form.

2 At the bottom of the Primary Work Area, select Add New.

The Persons form appears. If you select the Persons tab from the Incident Management form, the
Persons form shows the incident number at the top and a Req Contractor (Request Contractor)
button on the bottom.

Figure 120: Incident Initiate Form – Persons Tab

3 From the Role list, select the type of person you want to describe: Initial, Subject, Witness, Victim, or
Additional Caller.

220 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

4 Enter as much information as you have available in the rest of the form.

Information such as Gender, Build, Hair Color, and Eye Color are defined in Provisioning under the
Lists and Statute Management item. This information is used in NCIC and other queries.

As you enter information in the Primary Work Area, the Sequence Number, Name, Address, and role
information appears in the Work Assist Area in the Persons Summary List. To identify person records
in the incident history record, PremierOne CAD assigns sequence numbers to each record.

To enter height, use three digits with a zero separating the feet from the inches. For example, 5’7”
would be 507, 6’2” would be 602, and 5’11” inches would be 511.

When data is available, the ANI/ALI information displays at the bottom of the form. To see the caller
location on a map, select Map It. The location displays at a scale provisioned by your system
administrator.

CAUTION:
After you modify or delete the record, press F12 to save the changes.

5 Use the Search fields to enter the information relating to any searches that occurred with this
Subject.

a From the Search Type list, select the type of search, such as vehicle, personal, or
property.

b In the Property Seized field, select the box if any property was confiscated.

c In the Prob Cause field, type the cause for the search, such as Subject was observed
crossing the middle line on the road (possible DUI), or Subject seen sneaking
around vehicle and looking in the windows (possible criminal trespass).

d In the State/Fed Entry # field, type the number, if known.

6 To run a query on this person, select Query at the bottom of the form.

To associate a unit assigned to the query, enter the unit ID in the Unit ID field. The unit ID is included
in the Query Header section on the Query/Responses window.

NOTES:
If you submit a query from the Person tab by typing a unit ID in the Unit Id field, both the submitter
and the requester ORIs are associated with the query request. See Associating Query Submitter
and Requester ORIs to Queries on page 525.

If automatic person query is provisioned, a Person query automatically launches when you submit
the incident.

The Unit ID is not retained in the form after the query is submitted.

Query results from the PremierOne CAD system display on the Prev tab in the Work Assist Area,
and external query results appear on the Query tab in the Work Assist Area. If PremierOne CAD has
query replies, the Query tab turns orange and a number appears on the tab showing how many
records were returned.

Send Feedback 221

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

7 To check for previous persons that were added to records initiated at the address, select the Prev
Check button.

Figure 121: Previous Persons Summary List

8 When finished, press F12.

9 To add another person to the incident, select Add New at the bottom of the form.

10 To delete a person from an incident, select the person from the list on the Pers tab in the Work Assist
Area, and then select Delete at the bottom of the Primary Work Area.

This action is recorded to the audit record for the incident.

11 To view the Contractor Summary List, click the arrow in front of Contractor Summary List at the
bottom of the Work Assist Area.

222 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

Work Assist Area - Persons

The Work Assist Area for the Persons tab in Incident Management lists the persons involved with the
incident and any contractors that might have been assigned to the incident.

Figure 122: Person Work Assist Area Tab

Adding Vehicle Information to an Incident

Use the Vehicle tab in the Primary Work Area for either the Incident Initiation form or the Incident
Management form to enter information for any of the vehicles involved in an incident.

NOTE:
You can import information from vehicle query responses directly to the Vehicle tab. For details,
see Importing Query Responses to Incidents on page 533.

To add vehicle information to an incident:

1 Select the Vehicles tab from either an Incident Initiation form or an Incident Management form.

Vehicle information fields display.

Send Feedback 223

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

2 Select Add New at the bottom of the Primary Work Area.

The Vehicle form appears. If you select the Vehicle tab from the Incident Management form, the
Vehicle form shows the incident number at the top and a Req Contractor (Request Contractor)
button on the bottom.

Figure 123: Incident Initiate Form – Vehicles Tab

3 From the Role list, select Vehicle.

4 Enter as much vehicle information as possible in the rest of the fields.

Information such as Make, Model, Color 1, Color 2, Style, and Reason is defined in Provisioning
under the Lists and Statute Management item and is used in NCIC and other queries.

Owner information is derived from all the persons listed on the Persons tab. You are not limited to
the suggestions that display. If you enter persons manually (not on the list), there may be state-
specific formatting considerations.

224 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

Stored vehicle information is near the bottom of the form. The available fields are defined in
Provisioning under the Queries item. For more information about stored vehicle entry, see Stored
Vehicle Entry on page 229.

NOTES:

If your agency is provisioned to use standard NCIC colors and the vehicle has more than two
colors, select MUL/COL in either the Color 1 or Color 2 fields and use the Misc Info field to
record the colors.

Some agencies are required to submit stored vehicle entries to the state and enter the
information into PremierOne under the following conditions.
- A field officer informs their dispatcher of a towed, abandoned, impounded, or repossessed
vehicle.
- A calltaker receives a call from a tow company operator who is in the process of towing a
vehicle to a storage facility.

Because the reporting officer or tow company operator may only provide you with the license
plate and state or the VIN, you may have to query the state system to obtain a description of
the vehicle.

To associate a unit assigned to the query, enter the unit ID in the Unit ID field (just above the Tow
section). The unit ID is then included in the Query Header section on the Query/Responses window.

NOTES:
If you submit a query from the Vehicle tab by typing a Unit ID in the Unit Id field, both the name of
the submitter (dispatcher/call taker) and the name of the requester (officer) ORIs are associated
with the query request. See Associating Query Submitter and Requester ORIs to Queries on
page 525.

The Unit ID is not retained in the form after the query is submitted.

5 Press F12 to submit your information.

6 To run a query on this vehicle, select Query at the bottom of the form.

To submit vehicle data to a state system, select the state system by clicking the down arrow on the
Query button. If there is no down arrow, your agency is not provisioned to submit vehicle information
to a state system. PremierOne captures state system queries in Incident History.

External query results and query results from the PremierOne CAD system display on the Query tab
in the Work Assist Area, If PremierOne CAD has query replies, the Query tab turns orange and a
number appears on the tab showing how many records were returned.

7 To check for previous vehicles that were added to records initiated at the address, select the Prev
Check button.

Any matching vehicles display on the Prev tab in the Previous Vehicles Check section.

Send Feedback 225

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

8 When finished, press F12.

Figure 124: Previous Vehicles Check List

9 To add another vehicle to the incident, select Add New at the bottom of the form.

10 To delete a vehicle from an incident, select the vehicle from the list on the Vehs tab in the Work
Assist Area, and then select Delete at the bottom of the Primary Work Area.

This action is recorded to the audit record for the incident.

11 To view the Contractor Summary List, click the arrow in front of Contractor Summary List at the
bottom of the Work Assist Area.

226 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

Work Assist Area - Vehicles

The Work Assist Area for the Vehicles tab lists the vehicles involved with the incident and any
contractors that may haven been requested for the incident.

Figure 125: Vehicle Work Assist Area Tab

Send Feedback 227

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

Scheduling Incidents
Occasionally, you may need to create an incident for handling at a later date and/or time, such as
dispatching extra units to a parade route or scheduling an ambulance pickup. You can schedule an
incident so it is initiated at a specific time on a specific date.

To schedule an incident:

1 From the Incident Initiation form, enter the incident information.

2 Select the Scheduling tab.

The scheduling form appears in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 126: Incident Initiation Form – Scheduling Tab

3 Do one of the following:

• In the Date field, type the date on which you want the incident to be initiated.

• From the calendar, select the date on which you want the incident to be initiated.

If you select the date from the calendar, the Date field is automatically filled in.

4 In the Time field, type the time at which you want the incident to be initiated. Type A or P after the
time to indicate AM or PM.

5 Press F12.

PremierOne CAD creates the incident, but the incident does not display for handling until the time
you designated.

228 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

The scheduled incident appears in the Work Assist Area of the Scheduling tab in a blank Incident
Initiation form, along with any previously scheduled incidents.
NOTE
NOTE:
To change the date/time for a scheduled incident that has not yet matured, open the
Scheduling tab for the Incident Initiation form. Select the incident and select modify. Reselect
the Scheduling tab and enter the new date/time on the calendar.

Work Assist Area - Scheduled Incidents

The Work Assist Area for scheduled incidents lists the incidents and the date and time the incidents are
initiated. To display the WAA, open the Incident Initiation form and select the Scheduling tab.

Do any of the following:

• To modify one of the scheduled incidents, select the incident and then click the Modify button. The
Incident Initiation form displays where you can change field values.

The last comment entry displays in the Comments box. Because the incident has not yet been
initiated, you can make changes to the comment. If you delete an existing comment, then the
system-generated message SCHEDULED INICDENT COMMENT WAS DELETED displays. All
modifications are listed on the Cmnt tab in the Work Assist Area for the incident after the incident is
initiated.

• To delete one of the scheduled incidents, select the incident and then select the Delete button.

• To print one of the scheduled incidents, select the incident and then select the Print button.

Stored Vehicle Entry

This section contains information that you need if your agency sends information about stored vehicles
to your state to facilitate queries of towed, abandoned, impounded, or repossessed vehicles that are
being stored.

Typically, the Mobile operator or officer does the stored vehicle information entry using the PremierOne
Mobile client and the PremierOne Records application. PremierOne Records has all of the fields
required by NCIC. However, you may want to include the information supplied by the operator on the
Vehicles tab for local rather than state queries. For more information, see Adding Vehicle Information to
an Incident on page 223.
Example 1:
A tow company calls you, the dispatcher, to report a towed, abandoned, impounded, or repossessed
vehicle. Later, the owner of the vehicle calls 9-1-1 to report his vehicle as stolen. The person taking that
call can now run a query of the state database to determine whether that vehicle was towed,
abandoned, impounded, or repossessed and pass that knowledge on to the vehicle owner.
Example 2:
The Mobile operator or officer is out of his vehicle and cannot initiate the incident or do the Records
entry himself at this time. Therefore the Mobile operator requests that you, the dispatcher create the
incident. The operator can then retrieve the incident at a later time and go through Mobile to Records to
submit the stored vehicle information.

Send Feedback 229

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

Initiating an Incident From the Command Line (II)

To initiate an incident from the command line, use the Initiate Incident command. You can use the Initiate
Incident command with identifiers to initiate an incident from the command line, or you can use this
command without any identifiers to display the Initiate Incident form. For more information about the
Initiate Incident form, see Initiating Incidents From the Initiate Incident Form on page 209.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

II.L.T.AGT.MC.PR.CT.CPN.DE.BL.AP.U.PE.TN.AG.A.S.B.CM.DTF.CFN.CLN.
CA.PH.CC.SC.PN.PT.PS.RV.C.N.ZP.SB.MW.JA.JB.DN.GP

NOTE:
If you use an alarm number to initiate an incident, you cannot assign a unit at the same time.

To initiate an incident from the command line:

1 On the command line, type II followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
II.L;<location>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the value for the location, followed by the period separator.

For detailed information about entering alarm incidents, see Using CryWolf on page 659.

3 At the cursor, type the incident type, followed by the period separator.

If your system is configured to use incident type aliases, you can enter the real incident type or the
alias.

4 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

5 Press Enter or F10.

The Initiate Incident form appears. Various forms may display depending on the incident information:

• Incidents in Multi-Beat Intersections on page 175

• Potential Duplicate Incidents on page 182

• Previous Locations, Persons, and Vehicles on page 183

• Premise and Hazard Information on page 185

6 Enter any other pertinent information and press F12.

PremierOne CAD creates the incident. Depending on your agency configuration, you may be
prompted to associate the incident. For details, see Creating Associated Incidents When Creating
the Initial Incident on page 231.

When the incident is successfully initiated, PremierOne CAD displays a message in the status
message area indicating the incident number.

230 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

Examples:
To initiate an incident for alarm #15:
II.#0015
To initiate an incident of type DOMES at 100 Main and add comments.
II.100 main.DOMES.cm;second call today

Using F8 to Issue the Initiate Incident Command

Pressing F8 is the same as using the Incident Update (II) command without typing II on the command
line. You type all of the information on the command line that you need except II, and then press F8
instead of Enter or F10.

To initiate an incident using F8:

1 On the command line, type the incident identifiers and information.

2 Press F8.

The incident is initiated.

Creating Associated Incidents When Creating the Initial

Incident
In multi-jurisdictional, multi-agency environments, your system may be configured to generate more
than one incident simultaneously. For example, an accident with injuries may require a response from
law, medical, and fire agencies to manage the incident completely. PremierOne CAD allows you to
generate all the incidents for all the agencies required to fulfill the response requirements at one time.

Your system administrator can configure automatic initiation of Associated incidents for agency types or
for specific agencies.

When you create an incident and your agency is configured to create associated incidents, the
Recommended Associated Incident to Create dialog box appears after you submit the Initiate Incident
form or command.

• If the location is a verified address and a jurisdiction (area and beat) is defined for an agency, the
associated incidents are read-only values.

• If the location is a verified address but is in a jurisdiction not defined for the agency or if the address
is unverified, the associated incidents are read-only values except for the area and beat fields.

If your agency is configured to automatically create associated incidents, the Recommended

Associated Incidents to Create dialog box only displays for agencies outside of the jurisdiction for
your agency. If your system is configured to use and display incident type aliases, associated
incidents created with aliases display in the dialog box along with the real incident type.

If you update an incident with a new IRF, any associated incidents for the new IRF are created
without regard to the fact that the original incident had already created an associated incident type.

Send Feedback 231

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

Associated incidents are defined in Provisioning under the Incident Management – Incident
Response Factors item.

Figure 127: Recommended Associated Incidents To Create Dialog Box

NOTE:
A maximum of 100 incidents can be associated together. There may already be incidents
associated with a particular incident.

To create an associated incident when creating the initial incident:

1 If you do not want to create an associated incident, select the check box to the left of the agency type
to clear it.

2 If the Area or Beat fields are blank, enter the missing information. The Area and Beat fields are
mutually exclusive; you can only enter a value in the one of these fields.

If you leave both fields blank, then the agency default area is used. Your system administrator
configures the default area.

232 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

For incidents that occur at a multi-beat intersection, select the exact jurisdiction.

• For multi-beat, single agency intersections, the Beat list displays {Multi}, indicating that you
must select the beat. When you select the beat, the Area field populates based on your
selection.

Figure 128: Recommended Associated Incidents to Create Dialog Box Showing Multi Beat and
Agency

• For multi-beat, multi-agency intersections, the Agency list displays {Multi}, telling you to
select the agency. After you select the agency, the Beat field reads {Multi}if multiple beats
exist for that agency. Otherwise, the beat displays.

3 At the bottom of the dialog box, select Create Assoc.

PremierOne CAD associates the incidents and the associated incidents appear on the Assoc tab in
the Work Assist Area.

Send Feedback 233

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

When an incident has other incidents associated with it, they are displayed in the Assoc tab in the
Work Assist Area along with the original incident. To view the history for all the associated incidents,
select History at the bottom of the form.

Figure 129: Assoc Tab In The Work Assist Area

Creating Traffic Stops and Field-Initiated Incidents

One of the ways in which occurrences can be reported to communication center operators is through
resources in the field. These occurrences are most likely to be traffic stops but can also include
occurrences such as building checks, suspicious people, and any other occurrence an officer in the field
encounters while performing day-to-day tasks.

Your system administrator configures PremierOne CAD for either one- or two-pass processing. The type
of processing determines whether the incident is initiated immediately or the specified unit is assigned a
status.

234 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

One-Pass Traffic Stops

For one-pass traffic stops, the incident is initiated immediately. One-pass traffic stops require that you
assign one or more standard resource units along with any radio pseudo-units you want in the
transaction.

A one-pass field initiated/traffic stop transaction processes the units differently than an Incident Initiate
(II) or Incident Dispatch (ID) transaction. If one or more of the units you specified cannot be dispatched
onto the incident, PremierOne terminates the entire transaction and no incident is created. An error
message is generated for each standard resource unit that cannot be successfully dispatched onto the
incident.

Two-Pass Traffic Stops

For two-pass traffic stops, the unit is first placed in a traffic stop status. A second FI action is required to
initiate the incident. The unit remains in the first-pass state for all other unit status updates until the unit
is placed into a Clear status or another traffic stop transaction is performed for the unit.

Because the first pass of a two-pass field initiated/traffic stop transaction is just a status change to the
unit and no incident is being created, you can specify a radio pseudo-unit in this type of transaction. If
the second pass of a two-pass field initiated/traffic stop transaction would result in a radio pseudo-unit
being the only unit assigned to the incident, PremierOne terminates the transaction and displays an
error message. The message states that radio units cannot be the only units actively assigned to an
incident. This scenario can happen when all the standard resource units are either stacked against the
incident or not dispatched onto the incident due to their current status being not available for dispatch.

Also because the first pass of a two-pass field initiated/traffic stop transaction is just a status change to
the unit and no incident is being created, PremierOne updates the status of the unit to the provisioned
unit status code for Traffic Stop: First Pass of Two Pass Traffic Stop. PremierOne takes this action
regardless of the unit status the unit is currently in (Out of Service, Meal, and so on).

Your system administrator configures parameters that control how traffic stops and field-initiated
incidents are created for incidents outside your agency. You cannot create traffic stops across agency
types. However, if the unit enters the jurisdiction of an agency that is in the same agency type as the
unit, PremierOne CAD uses the foreign unit data provisioned against the specified agency for the
agency of the unit.

You can create traffic stops for temporary units.

You can create traffic stops from the Field Initiate form or from the command line.

Send Feedback 235

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

Creating Traffic Stops or Field-Initiated Incidents From the Field

Initiate Form
You can create traffic stops or field-initiated incidents from the Field Initiate form or from the command
line. For details on creating traffic stops from the command line, see Creating Traffic Stops or Field-
Initiated Incidents From the Command Line (FI) on page 239.

After you enter the location, various forms may display in the Work Assist Area depending on the
incident information.

To create a traffic stop or field-initiated incident from the Field Initiate form:

1 On the command line, type FI and press Enter or F10.

The Field Initiate form displays in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 130: Field Initiate Form

2 In the Unit ID(s) field, type the ID of the unit. If there is more than one unit, separate each unit with a
comma.

You can only enter multiple units from the same agency.

3 If status is not preconfigured, select the status from the Status field.

4 In the Location field, type the location of the incident.

For information about types of locations, see Entering Locations in CAD on page 163.

236 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

5 To verify the address, select Verify.

As in normal incident initiation, if you use latitude and longitude location information, PremierOne
CAD populates the Description field with the closest address to the latitude and longitude you
entered.

If you enter a common place address, PremierOne CAD populates the Description field with the
address of the common place you entered.

If entering a street address or intersection address, use the Description field to further define the
address you entered in the Location field. For example, “500 ft north of the intersection” or “In the lot
on the east side of the building.”
NOTE
NOTE:
If your system is configured so that address verification is required, PremierOne CAD verifies
the address from the form. If the address is invalid, the form displays a message in the Work
Assist Area indicating that no records are found. If the FI form is then submitted with an invalid
address, an incident is created at the default area (example, PCW).

If the location is a multi-beat intersection, the jurisdiction fields do not populate after the address is
verified and the IRF is entered. Instead, the Beat field displays {Multi} and the Verify button
changes to a yellow color and read Multi. For instructions on how to proceed, see Incidents in
Multi-Beat Intersections on page 175.

6 From the City field, select the name of the city where the incident occurred.

7 From the State list, select the state where the license plate was issued.

You can leave this field blank and the default provisioned for your agency is used.

8 From the Plate Type list, select the type of vehicle, such as a car or a truck.

You can leave this field blank and the system uses the default setup for your agency in PremierOne
Provisioning.

Plate Type and State codes are defined in Provisioning under the Lists and Statute Management
item.

9 From the Incid Type list, select the code for the incident type, or manually enter the incident type
alias (if your system is configured to use incident type aliases).

You can leave this field blank and the default provisioned for your agency is used.
NOTE
NOTE:
The list of available incident types is filtered according to user role, trusted agency
permissions, and Incident Response Factors to display only the incident types you are
provisioned to use for the FI command. For details, see Understanding Incident Type Filtering
and Agency Type Defaults on page 194.

IRFs (Agency, Agency Type, Incid Type, Mod Circum, and Disposition) are defined in Provisioning
under the Incident Management – Incident Response Factors item.

10 From the Mod Circ list, select the code modifying circumstance.

You can leave this field blank and the default provisioned for your agency is used.

Send Feedback 237

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

11 If you did not verify the Location, you may enter Agency, Area, Beat, or Sector, if required.
NOTE
NOTE:
If they are not required, these fields may be disabled.

12 In the Comments field, type any pertinent comments.

To enter priority comments, enter angle brackets around the comments, such as <supsect may be
armed>. For details on priority comments, see Priority Comments on page 198.

13 From the Preempt or Stack list, select one of the following options:

• To preempt the original assignment of the units (remove them from their original assignments)
and assign them immediately to the incident, select Yes.

• To place the original incident in the call stacking queue or pending queue of the unit (depending
on your agency configuration), select Stack. Stack is the default value. For more details, see
Understanding Call Stacking on page 404.

• Leave the default value of No – neither preempt or stack incidents for the assigned units.
NOTE
NOTE:
For two-pass traffic stops, the Preempt option is ignored because the first pass does not
create the incident. The second pass automatically creates the traffic stop incident and
assigns the unit to it.

14 To run a query on this vehicle, select Query at the bottom of the form.

NOTES:
If you submit a query from the FI form with the Unit ID(s) text box filled in with an ON_DUTY unit,
and the License Plate field populated with a plate number, the ORIs of the submitter and the
requester are associated with the query request.

If automatic vehicle query is provisioned, a vehicle query automatically launches when you submit
the incident.

Query results display on the Query tab in the Work Assist Area (see Work Assist Area - Query
Information on page 187).

15 To submit the incident, press F12.

For a one-pass traffic stop, PremierOne CAD generates the incident, assigns an incident number,
and assigns the specified resources to the incident.

16 For a two-pass traffic stop, press F12 again to initiate the incident.

NOTE:
If you entered a temporary unit in the Unit ID field, remove the asterisk from the Unit ID before
submitting the two-pass traffic stop. The first time the traffic stop is submitted with the temporary
unit assignment, the unit is placed on duty and is no longer temporary.

238 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

Creating Traffic Stops or Field-Initiated Incidents From the Command

Line (FI)
You can create traffic stops or field-initiated incidents from the Field Initiate form or from the command
line. For details on creating traffic stops from the form, see Creating Traffic Stops or Field-Initiated
Incidents From the Field Initiate Form on page 236.

Initiating an incident from the command line is considered one-pass processing. One-pass processing
initiates the incident immediately.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

FI.U.L.PS.PN.CM.PT.PY.CT.T.MC.US.PE.TN.CPN.BL.ZP.SB.GP
To initiate a traffic stop or field-initiated incident from the command line:

1 On the command line, type FI, followed by the period separator.

The following hint appears on the command line:

FI.U;<unit id(s)>
2 At the cursor, type the value for the unit ID, followed by another period separator.

3 At the cursor, type the location.

4 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

5 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne CAD processes the incident using the information entered on the command line, and
assigns the resources specified in the Unit field to the incident. For a one-pass traffic stop,
PremierOne CAD assigns an incident number.

6 For a two-pass traffic stop, enter FI.U;<unit id(s)>.Location and press Enter or F10.

The incident is initiated and PremierOne CAD assigns an incident number.

Examples:
To initiate a traffic incident at 100 Main for unit 1A12:
FI.1A12..100 main
To initiate an incident at 123 Broadway for unit1 and unit2 with comments:
FI.unit1,unit2.L;123 broadway.CM;pile up on interstate

Send Feedback 239

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

Using F7 to Issue the Field Initiate Command

Pressing F7 is equivalent to using the Field Initiate (FI) command without typing FI on the command line.
You type all of the information on the command line that you need except FI, and then press F7 instead
of Enter or F10.

To initiate a traffic stop using F7:

1 On the command line, type the unit ID and address, and any other information.

2 Press F7.

The incident is initiated.

Adding Attachments
You may want to add attachments such as floor plans, video and audio files, and other types of
documents to an incident. Attaching such files to an incident helps provide more information about
occurrences to responding personnel and to the personnel investigating the incident record later.

NOTE:
The attachment must be less than five megabytes.

Some of the types of attachments that can be attached to incident records in PremierOne CAD include:
audio files (radio and/or telephony recordings), photos, videos, floor plans, map data, Word documents,
and miscellaneous files.

You can add attachments to incidents from the Incident Initiate Persons or Vehicles tabs or from the
Incident Management Summary, Persons, Vehicles, Dispatch, or History tabs.

240 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

To add an attachment to an incident:

1 In the Work Assist Area, select the Attch tab.

2 At the bottom of the Work Assist Area, select Attach.

The Attach File form opens in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 131: Attach File Form In Primary Work Area

3 Select the Browser link to the right of the Look in field and navigate to and select the location of
your attachment.

Filter the display of files by suggesting the file type from the Files of type list.

To see the file before you attach it, select Open at the bottom of the Attach File form.

The file opens in a separate window.

4 Select Attach to attach the file to the incident.

The file name, its type, and its size are now shown on the Attch tab of the Work Assist Area. When
you select the plus sign next to the attachment, a representation of the attachment appears above
the list.

Send Feedback 241

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

5 Do any of the following:

• To rename your file, select Rename File.

The Renaming File dialog box appears. In the File Name box at the bottom, type a new name for
your file and then select Rename at the bottom of the Renaming file dialog box.

Figure 132: Renaming File Dialog Box

• To delete an attachment, select the attachment file and then select Delete File.

if you delete attachments, a message appears advising you that the file or files are longer
accessible. Select Delete in the message box if you are sure you want to delete them.

242 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

• To play a multimedia file, select Open.

The file opens in a separate window using your default media player.

Figure 133: Multimedia File Open in Default Media Player

6 When you are finished with your attachment, press F12 and then select Cancel at the bottom of the
Attach File form in the Primary Work Area.

Creating Incidents from Query Responses

You can create an incident from a person or vehicle query response, and automatically populate the
Person and/or Vehicle tabs with information from the query response. For details, see Importing Query
Responses to Incidents on page 533.

Send Feedback 243

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 10: Initiating Incidents

244 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Updating Incidents

Chapter 11

Updating Incidents 11

After you or someone else initiates an incident, you can update the incident with additional information.
This information could include basic incident information, person and vehicle information, additional
comments, and so on.

Displaying and Updating Incidents From the Incident

Management Form
Use the Incident Management form to perform tasks related to managing incidents, such as dispatching
units, entering additional incident information, closing the incident, creating additional associated
incidents, and reopening an incident.

To display and update incidents from the Incident Management form:

1 Do one of the following:

• On the command line, type IU.incident# and press Enter or F10.

NOTE:
For details on how to enter incident numbers, see Understanding Incident Numbers on
page 173.

• On the command line, type IU and press Enter. The Incident Management form appears. Type
the incident number or the unit number in the Incident # field and press F12.

NOTE:
If your agency is configured to use # before incident numbers on the command line, use
the # sign in the Incident number field.

For details on incident numbers, see Understanding Incident Numbers on page 173.

• From the Pending Queue or Incident Status Monitor, double-click the incident.

PremierOne CAD displays the incident information from the Incident Management form. The cursor
is located in the Comments field so you can quickly add comments. For all the text to be treated as
a priority comment, select the Priority Comment check box. The priority comments display in the
Cmnt tab of the Work Assist Area in red.

For only some of the text to be treated as priority comment, type angle brackets around the
comments, such as <suspect may be armed>. The priority comments display in the Cmnt tab of
the Work Assist Area in red within the angle brackets.

Send Feedback 245

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

For users at other workstations, the comments display in bold until they are viewed.

Figure 134: Incident Management Form

The following tabs are available in the Primary Work Area:

• Summary – Displays summary information about the incident.

• Dispatch – Displays information about units dispatched for this incident. For details, see
Dispatching Resources to Incidents From the Dispatch Form on page 385.

• History – Contains a running narrative regarding all actions for the incident. For details, see
Viewing Incident History on page 302.

• Persons – Contains information related to persons associated with the incident record. For
details, see Viewing and Updating Person Information on page 263.

• Vehicle – Contains information related to vehicles associated with the incident record. For details,
see Viewing and Updating Vehicle Information on page 264.

2 Make your modifications and press F12.

If your system is configured to use alias incident types, you can select the incident type or manually
enter the incident type alias.

Depending on your system configuration, if the location is updated to a multi-beat location, the
jurisdiction fields do not populate after an address is re-verified. The Beat field displays {Multi}
and the Verify button changes to a yellow color and read Multi. For instructions on how to proceed,
see Incidents in Multi-Beat Intersections on page 175.

The Multi-Beat selection form may automatically display for your working agency, depending upon
your system configuration.

246 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

If automatic location query is provisioned, the system automatically initiates a query for the location
following address verification. If automatic person query or automatic vehicle query is provisioned,
an automatic query is launched for any new Person or Vehicle records when you submit the updated
incident.

Updating Location Information

If you update the verified location of an incident that is within the jurisdiction of the agency for incident,
the area, sector, and beat are updated to the jurisdiction of the updated location. The original
jurisdictional values remain unchanged under the following circumstances:

• You update the incident location to a verified location that is outside the jurisdiction of the incident
agency.

When you update the location of an existing incident to a location that is geoverified outside of t
jurisdiction of the incident agency, the following message displays in the status message area:
Note: Location is outside the agency’s jurisdiction. You can continue updating the
incident.

• You update the incident location to a non-verified (bypassed) location.

Because an area value remains displayed within the form, the transaction is processed.

When you submit the Incident Management form with updated location information for an agency that is
outside of the jurisdiction of the incident agency, the Out of Jurisdiction dialog box appears. The options
that display in the dialog box depend on your role permissions.

To create a cloned incident for the out of jurisdiction agency:

This procedure is for creating a clone of an incident that was originally in your jurisdiction and updating
its location to an out of jurisdiction agency.

You must have the following permissions for your signed on agency and for the role or roles you signed
on with:

• Clone incident permission for the incident agency

• Incident initiate permission for the agency that has jurisdiction for the updated location

If you have these permissions, a dialog box appears after you submit the Incident Management
Summary form as shown in Figure 135 with the updated information stating that the updated location is
outside of the agency jurisdiction and asking you to select from the following options:

• Update the incident without changing the jurisdictional information

If you select this option, PremierOne processes the incident update transaction, leaving the original
jurisdictional values intact.

Send Feedback 247

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

• Update and clone the incident to agency {Agency ID}, which is the agency responsible for the
specified location

If you select this option, PremierOne creates an incident for the agency that has jurisdiction for the
updated location. The incident is created via a Clone Incident (CI) transaction, using the default
identifier value settings for the CI command as provisioned for your owning agency.

Figure 135: Out of Jurisdiction Dialog Box – Clone

If you select OK, PremierOne processes the option you selected.

If you select Cancel, PremierOne completely cancels the update transaction and returns you to the
Incident Management Summary form.

To create an updated location where there is no agency responsible for the updated location:

If the updated location does not have an agency defined under the corresponding Agency Type (no beat
is associated with this location), a dialog box appears after you submit the Incident Management
Summary form.

Figure 136: Out of Jurisdiction Dialog Box – Clone

If you select OK, PremierOne processes the incident update transaction, leaving the original
jurisdictional values intact.

If you select Cancel, PremierOne completely cancels the update transaction and returns you to the
Incident Management Summary form.

To clone an out of jurisdiction incident:

You must have the following permissions:

• Clone incident permission for your owning agency

• Clone incident permission for the original incident agency (source agency)

248 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

• Incident initiation permission for your owning agency

• Incident initiation permission for the updated location jurisdictional agency (target agency)

If you do not have permission to one or more of these permissions, a dialog box appears after you
submit the Incident Management Summary form.

Figure 137: Out of Jurisdiction Dialog Box – Target Agency

If you select OK, PremierOne processes the incident update transaction, leaving the original
jurisdictional values intact.

If you select Cancel, PremierOne completely cancels the update transaction and returns you to the
Incident Management Summary form.

Updating Location Information from the Command Line

If you update an incident location from the command line, the Out of Jurisdiction dialog box appears
when a single matching address is returned that is outside of the agency jurisdiction.

If multiple address matches are returned, the Incident Management Summary form displays. See
Updating Location Information on page 247.

Updating Location Information in a Multi-Beat Situation

Depending on your system configuration, if the location is updated to a multi-beat location, the
jurisdiction fields remain displayed after an address is re-verified. The label of the Verify button changes
to a yellow color and displays the word Multi. For instructions on how to proceed, see Incidents in
Multi-Beat Intersections on page 175.

The Multi-Beat selection form may automatically display depending upon your system configuration.

Related Work Assist Areas – Incident Management Form

When you select a tab in the Incident Management Form, the Work Assist Area displays additional
information. The Work Assist Area displays the following tabs:

• Cmnt – Displays incident comments. Only present when the Summary, Dispatch, or History tab is
selected in the Primary work Area. For details, see Work Assist Area – Cmnt Tab on page 250.

• Prev – Displays any other incidents that occurred at the location, or persons or vehicles that were
involved with incidents at the location. For details, see Work Assist Area – Prev Tab on page 253.

Send Feedback 249

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

• Assoc – Displays any associated incidents. For details, see Work Assist Area – Assoc Tab on
page 254.

• Query – Displays any query results. For details, see Work Assist Area – Query Tab on page 255.

• Haz – Displays information regarding any hazard or premise locations. For details, see Work Assist
Area – Haz Tab on page 256.

• Attach – Displays a list of any attachments for the incident. For details, see Work Assist Area –
Attach Tab on page 257.

• Radio – Displays options for issuing the Radio Console command. For details, see Work Assist Area
– Radio Tab on page 260. This tab only displays when your system is integrated with the MC7500
radio system.

• Dptch – Displays incident information. For details, see Work Assist Area – Dptch Tab on page 258.
This tab only displays when the Dispatch tab of the Incident Management form is selected.

Work Assist Area – Cmnt Tab

The Cmnt (Comments) tab displays all comments and notifications entered into the incident record. The
time, date, console ID, and user ID of the person who entered the comment appear in the Work Assist
Area. Unread High priority comments display in red. For details on high priority comments, see
Understanding Priority Comments and Priority Updates on page 197. Unread non-priority comments
appear in bold black type.

250 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

Do any of the following:

• To sort the comments by time/date, User ID or Console ID, select the appropriate column heading.

• To print the comments, select Print in the Primary Work Assist area and then select Detailed. High
priority comments print in bold.

Figure 138: Incident Management Form – Cmnt Tab In The Work Assist Area

Send Feedback 251

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

To help organize the way that comments and response messages display in the Work Assist Area, your
system administrator can configure PremierOne to display comments and response messages on the
Cmnt WAA tab in either of the following ways:

• Comments and response messages together (along with time, date, and type of response message)

• Comments and response messages in separate sections on the tab

Figure 139: Cmnt Tab In WAA Showing Separate Comments and Response Msgs

The title bar on each section shows the number of items the section contains. Use the arrows on the
section title bar to expand or collapse the section. If a section contains no items, it is collapsed by
default.

The order in which the sections appear on the tab, as well as whether each section is expanded by
default, is also configurable by your system administrator.

252 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

Work Assist Area – Prev Tab

The Prev tab displays any other incidents that occurred at the location and also shows persons or
vehicles that were involved in any incidents at the location. If your system is configured to use and
display incident type aliases, incidents created with aliases display in the list along with the real incident
type.

The tab displays in orange and a counter indicates the number of records on the tab.

Figure 140: Incident Management Form – Prev Tab In The Work Assist Area

Do any of the following:

• To see additional information about a record, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of the record.

• To see additional information about all of the records in the list, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of
Incid Type at the top of the column for that list.

• To view details for an incident, select the record and select View Incid.

The incident you select displays in the Primary Work Area. The display is shaded blue to indicate
that the incident information is an overlay of the screen that was displayed. To scroll through the
incidents, use the Up and Down arrows in the upper right-hand corner of the window. You can make
updates while in the view mode (enter the information and press F12).

To return to your original work area, select the X above the Work Assist Area or press the Esc key.

Send Feedback 253

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

Work Assist Area – Assoc Tab

The Assoc tab displays a list of any associated incidents. If your system is configured to use and display
incident type aliases, incidents created with aliases display in the list along with the real incident type.
The original incident is also listed. If you want to add associated incidents, see Creating Associated
Incidents After Incident Initiation (IA) on page 287.

Figure 141: Incident Management Form – Assoc Tab In The Work Assist Area

Do any of the following:

• To view the History for a specific associated incident, select the incident in the Work Assist Area, and
then select History.

The Incident History dialog box appears showing the incident history for the selected incident and
any associated incidents. You can filter the list of incidents that displays using the Incident # list and
filter the types of transactions using the Trans Type list. When finished, select Close to return to the
Associated Incidents list.

For a list of transaction types, see Viewing Incident History on page 302.

• To view the incident details for a specific associated incident, select the incident in the Work Assist
Area, and then select View Incid.

The incident you select displays in the Primary Work Area. The display is shaded blue to indicate
that the incident information is an overlay of the screen that was displayed. To scroll through the
incidents, use the Up and Down arrows in the upper right-hand corner of the window. You can make
updates while in the view mode (enter the information and press F12).

To return to your original work area, select the X above the Work Assist Area or press the Esc key.

254 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

• To disassociate an incident, select the incident or incidents you want to disassociate from the original
incident (the one in the Primary Work Area) and then select Disassoc.

You are prompted to confirm the action. PremierOne CAD removes the association between the
incidents and a success message appears in the status message box.

Work Assist Area – Query Tab

The Query tab in the Work Assist Area displays the results of any searches for persons and vehicles.

NOTE:
If Display all (and only) associated query responses when viewing an incident record is
configured for your agency in Provisioning, CAD displays only the query responses associated
with the active incident you are viewing. The Delete button on the WAA Query tab is hidden, and
the counter on the Query tab shows the total number of associated responses, both read and
unread. For details, see Understanding Distributed Query Responses on page 521.

Figure 142: Incident Management Form – Query Tab In The Work Assist Area

Do any of the following:

• To see additional information about a query reply, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of the record.

• To sort the queries by Priority, Summary, or Date, select the column header.

• To print one of the replies, select the reply and then select the Print button.

Send Feedback 255

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

• To view the details of the reply, select the reply and then select the View button.

The Query Responses tab of the Query form displays in the Primary Work Area with the additional
query details.

• To attach one of the replies to the incident or unit history, select the reply and then select the Attach
button.

In the Attach Log dialog box that displays, enter any comments and select To Incident or To Unit.
Then select Attach.

• To delete one of the replies, select the reply and then select the Delete button.

Work Assist Area – Haz Tab

The Haz tab displays any premise hazard information for the location. The tab displays in orange and a
counter indicates the number of records on the tab.

For details on the display sort order for Premise/Hazard records, see Premise/Hazard Sort Order Rules
on page 440.

NOTE:
Depending on your agency configuration, a premise/hazard record does not necessarily have to
be at the same address.
.

Figure 143: Incident Management Form – Haz Tab In The Work Assist Area

256 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

Do any of the following:

• To see additional information about a premise/hazard record, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of
the record.

• To see additional information about all of the records in the list, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of
Type at the top of the list.

• To view the record, select View Rec at the bottom of the tab.

If the record is not an alarm, the Premise/Hazard Record displays in the Primary Work Area showing
additional information, including the name, address, and phone numbers of the property owner, the
phone number or numbers of the designated contact, and pertinent attachments, such as floor plans
for the building.

If the record is an alarm, the alarm record displays in the Primary Work Area.

• To view a location on the map, select the location and select Map it at the bottom of the tab. The
location displays at a scale provisioned by your system administrator.

• To add the location to premise hazard records and associate it with the incident, select the Create
New button. The Create New button is disabled until the address is verified. For details on creating a
premise hazard location, see Creating Premise Hazard Records on page 441.

Work Assist Area – Attach Tab

The Attach tab lists any items attached to the incident, such as floor plans, video and audio files, and
other types of documents. Attaching such files to an incident helps provide more information about
occurrences to responding personnel and to those personnel investigating the incident record later.

Figure 144: Incident Management Form – Attach Tab In The Work Assist Area

Send Feedback 257

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

Do any of the following:

• To add an attachment, select Attach. Follow the instructions in Attachments on page 189.

• To rename an attachment, select Rename and then enter a new name.

• To delete an attachment, select the attachment file, and then select Delete.

• To play a multimedia file, select the file and then select Open.

The Multimedia Player opens where you can play or view your file.

Work Assist Area – Dptch Tab

When you are in the Dispatch tab of the Incident Management form, a Dptch tab appears in the Work
Assist Area. The tab displays the incident and unit information and is provided for reference.

Figure 145: Incident Management Form – Dptch Tab In The Work Assist Area

The following recommendation information displays at the bottom of the form:

• The Unit Rspns field lists the response (by capabilities and count) for the IRF and updates
whenever you update the IRF.

• The Missing from Inc field lists the capabilities (and their count) that are not covered by the units
that are currently assigned to the incident. This value is the difference between the unit response
and the units currently dispatched on the incident when the unit response is greater.

• The Add’l Capab field lists the capabilities (and their count) that are covered by the units that are
currently dispatched on the incident in excess of the unit response. This value is the difference
between the unit response and the units currently dispatched on the incident when the units that are
currently dispatched are greater.

258 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

To eliminate the need to click between the individual tabs in the Work Assist Area, your system
administrator can configure PremierOne to display dispatch information, comments, and response
messages on the Dptch WAA tab in any of the following ways:

• Dispatch summary information only

• Dispatch summary information and comments and response messages (along with time, date, and
type of response message) in separate sections

• Dispatch summary information, comments, and response messages all in separate sections

Figure 146: Dptch Tab In WAA With Dispatch Info, Comments, and Response Msgs

The title bar on each section shows the number of items the section contains. Use the arrows on the
section title bar to expand or collapse the section. If a section contains no items, it is collapsed by
default.

The order in which the sections appear on the tab, as well as whether each section is expanded by
default, is also configurable by your system administrator.

Send Feedback 259

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

Work Assist Area – Radio Tab

If your system is integrated with the MC7500 radio system, the Radio tab displays in the Work Assist
Area when you select the Dispatch tab.

Figure 147: Incident Management Form – Radio Tab In The Work Assist Area

Do the following to issue the radio console command:

1 Select the Issue Radio Console Command check box.

2 Select the Multi-Select Function.

• P – Populate the channels to the Channels in Groups list. Use this selection when you might
want to add additional channels manually.

• L – Populate the channels to the Channels in Groups list and then load the channels.

• O – Populate the channels to the Channels in Groups list, load the channels, and then open the
channels. This operation transmits audio to the headset on the receiving end.

3 Select the Geographic Level.

• B – Use the name of the beat containing the incident.

• S – Use the name of the sector responsible for the incident.

• A – Use the name of the area containing the incident.

4 Press F12.

For additional details on radio functionality, see Using Radios on page 555.

260 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

Work Assist Area – Pers Tab

The Work Assist Area for the Pers tab in the Incident form lists any persons added to the incident.

Figure 148: Incident Initiate Form – Pers Tab in Work Assist Area

Do any of the following:

• To see information about a record, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of the record. The Name,
Address, and Role display.

• To see additional information about all of the records in the list, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of
Name at the top of the list.

• To view contractors assigned to the incident, select the Contractor Summary List label. The
Contractor ID, Name, and Last Action display.

• If automatic person query is provisioned, an automatic query is launched for any new Person records
when you submit the updated incident.

Send Feedback 261

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

Work Assist Area – Veh Tab

The Work Assist Area for the Veh tab lists the vehicles involved with the incident and any contractors
that may have been requested for the incident.

Figure 149: Incident Initiate Form – Veh Tab in Work Assist Area

If automatic vehicle query is provisioned, an automatic query launches for any new Vehicle records
when you submit the updated incident.

Using F3 to Issue the Update Incident Command

Pressing F3 is equivalent to using the Incident Update (IU) command without typing IU on the command
line. You type all of the necessary information on the command line except IU, and then press F3
instead of Enter or F10.

To display the Incident Management form using F3:

1 On the command line, type the incident number or the ID of a unit active on the incident.

2 Press F3.

The Incident Management form displays.

262 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

To update incident information using F3:

1 On the command line, type the incident number or the ID of a unit active on the incident and the
incident information.

2 Press F3.

The incident is updated and the Incident Management form displays with the updated information.

Viewing and Updating Person Information

You can view or update person information from the Persons tab of the Incident Initiation or Incident
Management form.

NOTE:
You can import information from person query responses directly to the Persons tab. For details,
see Importing Query Responses to Incidents on page 533.

To view or update person information:

1 Open the Incident Management form.

For details, see Displaying and Updating Incidents From the Incident Management Form on
page 245.

2 Select the Persons tab.

The Persons form appears.

Figure 150: Incident Management Form – Persons Tab

Send Feedback 263

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

3 If there is more than one person, select the person in the Work Assist Area tab.

The person information displays.

4 Update the person information.

For submitting queries, you can enter the ID of the unit associated with the incident. The Unit ID is
included in the Query Header section in the Primary Work Area on the Query/Responses screen.
NOTE
NOTE:
If you submit a query from the Person tab by typing a Unit ID in the Unit Id field, both the ORIs
of the submitters and requesters are associated with the query request. See Associating
Query Submitter and Requester ORIs to Queries on page 525.

If Automatic Person Query is provisioned, the system automatically initiates a query for any new
person records after you submit the updated incident.

For details on adding person records, see Adding Person Information to an Incident on page 220.

Viewing and Updating Vehicle Information

You can view or update vehicle information from the Vehicles tab of the Incident Initiation or Incident
Management forms.

NOTE:
You can import information from vehicle query responses directly to the Vehicles tab. For details,
see Importing Query Responses to Incidents on page 533.

To view or update vehicle information:

1 Open the Incident Management form.

For details, see Displaying and Updating Incidents From the Incident Management Form on
page 245.

264 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

2 Select the Vehicles tab.

The Vehicle form appears.

Figure 151: Incident Management Form – Vehicles Tab

3 If there is more than one vehicle, select the vehicle in the Work Assist Area tab.

The vehicle information displays.

4 Update the vehicle information.

NOTE
NOTE:
If you submit a query from the Person tab by typing a Unit ID in the Unit Id field, both the ORIs
of the submitters and requesters are associated with the query request. See Associating
Query Submitter and Requester ORIs to Queries on page 525.

If Automatic Vehicle Query is provisioned, the system automatically initiates a query for any new
vehicle records after you submit the updated incident.

For details on adding vehicle information, see the instructions in Adding Vehicle Information to an
Incident on page 223.

Send Feedback 265

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

Updating Incidents From the Command Line (IU)

You can view incident information from the Incident Management form and then update the information
or update information from the command line.

If you issue this command with no identifiers, the Incident Management form appears.

Command identifiers default order:

IU.I.L.CT.T.MC.PR.AL.A.S.B.CM.CMA.DTF.RP.FN.MN.LN.AD.RA.GD.DOB.
AGE.OLN.OLS.PH.CC.SC.RV.PN.PT.PS.PY.VN.QY.CPN.DE.BL.AP.CL.D.C.DV.
SY.ZP.SB.MW.JA.JB.DN.GP
For the required I identifier, you can enter either the incident id or the active unit id. You cannot use a
period in comments entered on the command line.

NOTE:
For customers that upgrade to PremierOne CAD 4.1, the RA, GD, and VN identifiers are
appended to the end of the current IU command line format for all existing agencies. For
agencies created after upgrading to version 4.1, the RA, GD, and VN identifiers appear in the
command line default order shown in the Command identifiers default order.

To view or update an incident from the command line:

1 On the command line, type IU followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
IU.I;<incident id or active unit id>
The unit you use to view or update an incident can be a radio pseudo-unit.

2 At the cursor, type the value for the incident ID or a unit ID of a unit active on the incident.

If your system is configured to use incident type aliases, you can enter the alias or real incident type
for the incident type.

3 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

4 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne CAD updates the incident.

Examples:
To update the incident type from theft to burglary:
IU.0001234.T;burglary
To update incident 0001234 with the caller address:
IU.0001234.CA;1452 MAIN ST

Radio Pseudo-Unit Commands

If you use a radio pseudo-unit in the IU command, you can use the following additional commands with
that unit ID:

• CS - Call Stacking.

266 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

• FI - Field Initiate. This transaction requires that you specify one or more standard resource units
along with a radio pseudo-unit. If, on a two-pass field initiate transaction, the second pass
determines that no standard resource units are available (all are stacked against the incident or not
dispatched onto the incident because their current status is not available for dispatch), an error
message appears stating that radio pseudo-units cannot be the only units actively assigned to an
incident.

• ID - Incident Dispatch. If one or more standard resource units are not already assigned to the
incident, you must specify the standard resource units along with the radio pseudo-unit.

• II - Incident Initiate (front-end dispatching). This transaction requires one or more standard resource
units be specified along with a radio pseudo-unit.

• IR - Incident Recall.

• ON - On Duty.

• RE - Reset Unit Emergency Indicator.

• UA - Unit Assignment.

• UC - Unit Summary.

• UF - Off Duty.

• UH - Unit History.

• UO - Reset Unit Timer.

• US - Unit Status.

Updating Comments
Incident comments provide a detailed record of incident information and are frequently added to an
incident before an incident is closed. You can update comments from the Incident Management form or
from the command line.

Viewing and Adding Incident Comments From the Incident

Management Form
You can view and add incident comments from the Incident Management form or add comments from
the command line. For details on adding comments from the command line, see Adding Incident
Comments From the Command Line on page 268.

To view or update incident comments from the Incident Management form:

1 Open the incident from the Incident Management form.

For more information, see Displaying and Updating Incidents From the Incident Management Form
on page 245.

2 To view comments from the Work Assist Area, select the Cmnt (Comments) tab if it is not already
selected.

A list of comments with their time, date, console ID, and the User ID of the person who entered the
comment appears in the Work Assist Area. Priority comments display in red. Unread nonpriority
comments display in bold until they are read. Then they display in regular black text.

Send Feedback 267

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

3 To add comments, type the additional comments in the Comments field, and then press F12.

To enter priority comments, enter angle brackets around the comments, such as <suspect may be
armed>. For details on priority comments, see Priority Comments on page 198.

Adding Incident Comments From the Command Line

You can view and add incident comments from the Incident Management form or add comments from
the command line. For details on adding comments from the form, see Viewing and Adding Incident
Comments From the Incident Management Form on page 267.

You add incident comments from the command line using the Incident Update (IU) command with the
comment (CM) or (CMA) identifier; CMA is for associated incidents. For a full list of IU identifiers, see
Updating Incidents From the Command Line (IU) on page 266.

To add comments from the command line:

1 On the command line, type IU, followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
IU.I;<incident id or active unit id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the period separator followed by the ID of the incident or the ID of the unit active
on the incident.

3 At the cursor, type the period separator followed by the CM identifier.

4 At the cursor, type a semi-colon followed by any comments.

To enter priority comments, enter angle brackets around the comments, such as <suspect may be
armed>. For details on priority comments, see Priority Comments on page 198.

5 Press Enter or F10.

The comments are added to the incident.

Examples:
To add comments to incident 1234:
IU.#1234.cm;suspect sighted in alley
To add comments to the incident that unit 1A12 is active on:
IU.1A12.cm;suspect sighted in alley

Requesting Contractors
The Contractor Request feature provides a means of assigning support providers to an incident from a
rotational list. Such providers might include tow companies, taxi services, judges, or detectives.

When you access this feature, a list of support providers for the agency and geographical beat appears,
from which you can select and contact the next qualified contractor in the rotation.

268 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

Understanding Rotation Frequency

The frequency with which a contractor list rotates is provisioned for your agency by your system
administrator. A contractor list can be configured to rotate with each request, or it can be set to rotate
daily, weekly, monthly, yearly, or to remain static.

If the frequency is set to rotate with each request, the first contractor in the rotation moves to the bottom
of the list after receiving a request for service. If the incident calls for additional assistance, for example,
a second tow truck, make a new request and contact the next contractor on the list to order the second
truck.

If the rotation frequency is set to a longer period, for example, weekly or monthly, the first contractor
maintains the same position on the list after receiving a request for service, and also receives the
second request. The Contractor Request form provides a Reqst’d field for requesting multiple contractor
services (for example, tow trucks) from a single contractor when the rotation frequency is set to longer
than each request. See your system administrator for information on the rotation frequency provisioned
for your agency.

Using Default Contractor Rotations

For each contractor type, your system administrator can create a default rotation list that display when a
geographical beat cannot be found for the location of a contractor request. This situation might occur
when the incident location cannot be verified, or when you request a contractor for a location that is
outside of your agency jurisdiction. Unlike other contractor rotation lists, the default rotation is not
associated with any geographical boundaries.

When you assign a contractor from the default rotation list to an incident, a unique contractor request
number is assigned to the request, and can be obtained from the incident history on the History tab or
from the Contractor Info form.

Requesting Contractors From the Contractor Request Form

You can request a contractor from the Contractor Request form or from the command line. For details
about requesting contractors from the command line, see Requesting Contractors From the Command
Line (CR) on page 274.

To request a contractor from the Contractor Request form:

1 Access the Contractor Request form by doing one of the following:

• On the command line, type CR.incident# or CR.unitID for the unit that is active on the
incident and then press Enter or F10.

• On the Incident Management form, select the Persons or Vehicles tab, and then select the Req
Contractor button at the bottom of the form.

Send Feedback 269

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

The Contractor Request form appears. The Agency ID field defaults to the agency of the incident.

Figure 152: Contractor Request Form

2 If you must request a contractor in another agency jurisdiction, select the appropriate agency from
the Agency ID list.
NOTE
NOTE:
If you request contractor service for a location outside your agency jurisdiction, a default
contractor rotation list may display. For more information, see Using Default Contractor
Rotations on page 269.

3 From the Contr Type list, select the contractor type for this request, for example, Towing.

Contractor Types and Capabilities are defined in Provisioning under the Contractor Rotation item.

4 Do one of the following:

• In the Contr ID field, select a contractor ID to request a specific contractor.

If you enter a value in the Contr ID field, the Capabilities, Payment, and Auto Club fields are
disabled.

• If you do not enter a value in the Contr ID field, you can use the Capabilities, Payment, and
Auto Club fields to further refine your search.

Payment method and Auto Club codes are defined in Provisioning under the Lists and Statute
Management item.

This search is an AND search, not an OR search. An AND search retrieves contractors that meet
all of your entered criteria. An OR search retrieves contractors that meet one criteria or another
but not both. When you leave fields such as Capab, Payment, and Auto Club blank, all values
for those fields are included in the search results.

270 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

5 When you have entered all your search criteria, select Request.
NOTE
NOTE:
Pressing F12 does not submit the Contractor Request form. Select Request to submit the
form.

A list of contractors meeting your specified criteria appears. The contractor who is next in the rotation
appears at the top of the list and is in focus.

Figure 153: Contractor Rotation List

Send Feedback 271

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

6 Select the plus sign ( + ) next to the entry for the first contractor to display contact information.

The contractor contact information appears.

Figure 154: Contractor Contact Information

7 Using the displayed information, contact the contractor to request service.

If the contractor list is not set to rotate after each request, the Reqst’d field is enabled. You can
specify a number in this field to request multiple services, for example, two tow trucks, instead of
initiating a new request for a second truck. For more information on rotation frequency, see
Understanding Rotation Frequency on page 269.

8 From the Action list, make one of the following selections. For details on the system response to
each action, see Understanding Action Code Selections on page 273.

• If the contractor agrees to your request, select CA (contractor accepted).

• If the contractor declines your request, select CD (contractor declined).

• If you paged the contractor, select CP (contractor paged).

• If you are unable to contact the first contractor, select CU (contractor could not be contacted).

• If you do not wish to use the first contractor, select N (show next company).

The actions listed here are the default actions. Your system may be configured to have different
action codes.

9 Select Submit.

272 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

If the requested contractor accepts the request, the contractor information appears in the Contractor
Summary List in the Work Assist area. For information on other scenarios after requesting a
contractor, see Understanding Action Code Selections on page 273.
NOTE
NOTE:
Every Action Code entry is recorded in incident history. For more information, see Viewing
Incident History From the Incident Management Form on page 302.

Understanding Action Code Selections

The following topics describe the system response to each of the Action options on the Contractor
Request page.

CA (contractor accepted)
• The contractor request information appears in the Contractor Summary List in the Work Assist Area.
CA appears in the Last Action field.

• A unique contractor request number is assigned to the request in the format <Incident Number>–
<Contractor Type>–<Request Number>. The sequence number always begins with 01 for a
contractor type first request for an incident.
Example:
The first tow truck requested on incident D0000100789 would be assigned the request number
D0000100789-TOW-01. The second truck requested would be assigned D0000100789-TOW-02.

To update a contractor request using the command line, enter this contractor request number. The
contractor request number can be obtained from the incident history on the History tab, or from the
Contractor Info form.

For more information on incident history, see Viewing Incident History From the Incident
Management Form on page 302. For more information on updating contractor requests, see
Updating Contractor Requests on page 275.

• If configured for the requested contractor type, the Arrival Timeout timer starts. If the contractor has
not arrived at the incident location when this timer expires, an Arrival Timeout alert icon appears in
the Last Action field in the Contractor Summary List.

Arrival Timeout Icon

If you are updating the contractor request from the Persons or Vehicles tab, the Arrival Timeout alert
icon also appears on the Contractor Info form. For more information, see Updating Contractor
Requests From the Persons or Vehicles Tab on page 276.

NOTE:
After submitting the request, associate the contractor to a specific person or vehicle from the
Assoc’d Person or Assoc’d Vehicle field on the Contractor Info form. For more information, see
Updating Contractor Requests From the Persons or Vehicles Tab on page 276.

CD (contractor declined)
The next contractor on the list is highlighted. Repeat the steps to contact the next contractor.

Send Feedback 273

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

CP (contractor paged)
• The contractor request information appears in the Contractor Summary List in the Work Assist Area.
CP appears in the Last Action field. A unique contractor request number is assigned to the request,
and can be obtained from the incident history on the History tab or from the Contractor Info form.

• If configured for the requested contractor type, the Acknowledged Timeout timer starts. If the
contractor has not acknowledged your request when this timer expires, an Acknowledgement
Timeout alert icon appears in the Last Action field in the Contractor Summary List.

Acknowledgement Timeout Icon

If you are updating the contractor request from the Persons or Vehicles tab, the Acknowledgment
Timeout alert icon also appears on the Contractor Info form. For more information, see Updating
Contractor Requests From the Persons or Vehicles Tab on page 276.

NOTE:
After submitting the request, associate the contractor to a specific person or vehicle from the
Assoc’d Person or Assoc’d Vehicle field on the Contractor Info form. For more information, see
Updating Contractor Requests From the Persons or Vehicles Tab on page 276.

CU (contractor could not be contacted)

The next contractor on the list is highlighted. Repeat the steps described in Requesting Contractors
From the Contractor Request Form on page 269 to contact the next contractor.

N (show next company)

The next contractor on the list is highlighted. Repeat the steps described in Requesting Contractors
From the Contractor Request Form on page 269 to contact the next contractor.

Requesting Contractors From the Command Line (CR)

You can request a contractor from the Contractor Request form or from the command line. For details
about requesting contractors using the Contractor Request form, see Requesting Contractors From the
Contractor Request Form on page 269.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

CR.I;CTP;CID;CB;PC;AU;AG;B
For the required I identifier, you can enter either the incident id or the active unit id.

To request a contractor from the command line:

1 On the command line, type CR followed by the period separator, and then type the I identifier.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
CR.I;<Incident id or active unit id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the value for the incident ID or the unit ID of a unit active on the incident.

274 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

3 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

4 Press Enter or F10.

Examples:
To request a towing contractor for incident 12345:
CR.#12345.tow
To request a tow contractor that represents AAA auto club for incident 12345:
RI.#12345.tow...AAA

Updating Contractor Requests

After a contractor request is submitted, you can update the request from the Persons or Vehicles tab of
the Incident Management form or from the command line. From the form, you can associate or
disassociate a contractor from a person or vehicle involved in the incident, and you can update the
action code to reflect the current status of the contractor request. From the command line, you can
update the action code only.

• Updating Contractor Requests From the Persons or Vehicles Tab

• Updating Contractor Requests From the Command Line (CU)

Send Feedback 275

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

Updating Contractor Requests From the Persons or Vehicles Tab

You can update a contractor request from the Persons or Vehicles tab of the Incident Management form
or from the command line. For details on updating contractor requests from the command line, see
Updating Contractor Requests From the Command Line (CU) on page 278.

To update a contractor request from the Persons or Vehicles tab:

1 Display the incident in the Incident Management form as described in Updating Contractor Requests
From the Persons or Vehicles Tab on page 276.

2 Depending on the contractor type of the request, select the Persons or Vehicles tab.

The Persons or Vehicles tab appears. The Contractor Summary List displays in the Work Assist Area
on the lower right side of the form.

Figure 155: Contractor Summary List

3 In the Contractor Summary List, select the contractor request that you want to update.

The Contractor Info form appears in the Primary Work Area.

276 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

If the Arrival Timeout or the Acknowledged Timeout timer has expired, the appropriate alert icon
appears next to the Timer field.

Figure 156: Contractor Info Form

4 In the Action field of the Contractor Info form, select the action code that reflects the updated state
of the contractor request. Depending on the value in the Last Action field, only certain actions are
available for selection.

The following table shows the action codes that are available when updating a contractor request
from the Contractor Info form:
Table 31: Action Codes for Contractor Request Updates

Last Action Available Action Codes

CA (Contractor • None
accepted)
• AW (Agency withdrew request)

• CW (Contractor withdrew acceptance)

• RT (Reset timer)

• ST (Stop timer)

Send Feedback 277

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

Table 31: Action Codes for Contractor Request Updates (Cont.)

Last Action Available Action Codes

CP (Contractor paged) • None

• AW (Agency withdrew request)

• CA (Contractor accepted)

• CD (Contractor declined)

• CU (Contractor could not be contacted)

• RT (Reset timer)

• ST (Stop timer)

5 In the Assoc’d Persons field (in the Persons tab) or Assoc’d Vehicles field (in the Vehicles tab),
select the check box to associate the contractor with a person or vehicle in the list. To disassociate
the contractor with the person or vehicle, clear the check box.

After associating the contractor to a vehicle, the Impound Location, Reason, and Hold fields are
enabled.

6 If the vehicle is impounded, type the address of the impound lot in the Impound Location field.

7 If the vehicle is in Hold status due to criminal circumstances, select the Hold check box.

When in Hold status, the owner of the impounded vehicle is not permitted to retrieve it.

8 In the Reason field, type the reason for the vehicle being impounded or held. For example, Vehicle
abandoned; Awaiting search warrant.

9 When you are finished, press F12.

Updating Contractor Requests From the Command Line (CU)

You can update a contractor request from the command line or from the Persons or Vehicles tab of the
Incident Management form. For details on updating contractor requests from the Persons or Vehicles
tab of the Incident Management form, see Updating Contractor Requests From the Persons or Vehicles
Tab on page 276.

When updating a contractor request from the command line, only the action code can be updated.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

CU.I.RQ.AC
For the required I identifier, you can enter either the incident id or the active unit id.

To update a contractor request from the command line:

1 On the command line, type CU followed by a period separator, and then type the I identifier.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
CU.I;<Incident id or active unit id>

278 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the value for the incident ID or the unit ID of a unit active on the incident, followed
by the period separator.

3 At the cursor, type the contractor request number for the request you want to update, followed by the
period separator.

You can find the contractor request number in the incident history or on the Contractor Info form. For
more information on viewing incident history, see Viewing Incident History From the Incident
Management Form on page 302.

4 At the cursor, type the value for the updated action code.

Based on the last action code entered for this request, only certain action codes are valid for the
update.

5 Press Enter or F10.

Examples:
To reset the timer for towing contractor request 02 on incident 12345:
CU.#12345.12345-tow-02.RT
To withdraw the agency request for service from towing contractor request 01 on incident 12345:
CU.#12345.12345-tow-01.AW

Send Feedback 279

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 11: Updating Incidents

280 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Managing Incidents

Chapter 12

Managing Incidents 12

Incident Management is where you manage incident timeout values, clone incidents, create associated
incidents, disassociate incidents, create an incident summary list, search for and display incidents, and
view incident history.

Managing Incident Timeout Values

Agencies configure timeout values for each incident type. The timeout value is the number of minutes an
incident can remain in a specific status. If the incident is in a status longer than the set time, the calltaker
or dispatcher is notified in some manner. Additionally, the Incident Status monitor can indicate a timeout
by displaying the incident information in a different color.

For example, a priority 2 incident might be configured to time out in two minutes to help ensure it
receives immediate attention. When the timer crosses the two minute threshold, PremierOne CAD can
alert the dispatcher that the incident is in the pending status for two minutes. This alert, which can
consist of changing the color of the incident in the pending queue, or playing a sound, prompts the
operator to take the required action.

All incident statuses are assigned a time-out value during the provisioning process. You can reset an
incident timeout value from the Incident Status monitor or from the command line using the RI
command. This action is recorded to the incident history.

Resetting Incident Timeout Values From the Incident Status Monitor

You can reset an incident timer directly from the Status Monitor or from the command line. The status
monitor must be configured to have the Reset Option. For information about resetting from the
command line, see Resetting Incident Timeout Values From the Command Line (RI) on page 282.

To reset an incident timeout value from the Incident Status monitor:

1 From the Incident Status monitor, select the incident that has exceeded its timeout value.

2 Right-click and then select Reset Incident Timeout Value.

Send Feedback 281

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

The Reset Incident Timeout Value dialog box appears.

Figure 157: Reset Incident Timeout Value Dialog Box

3 In the Timeout Value field, type a new timeout value in minutes.

4 Select OK.

PremierOne CAD resets the timer. The incident does not show as timed out until it exceeds the time
you set.

Resetting Incident Timeout Values From the Command Line (RI)

You can reset an incident timeout value from the command line or the status monitor. For information
about resetting the timeout value from the Incident Status monitor, see Resetting Incident Timeout
Values From the Incident Status Monitor on page 281.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

RI.I.TO
To reset an incident timeout value from the command line:

1 On the command line, type RI followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
RI.I;<incident id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the incident ID with the timeout value your want to reset, followed by the period
separator.

3 At the cursor, type a new timeout value.

Timeout values are in minutes. If you do not provide a value, PremierOne CAD resets the timer to
the original value for the incident status.

4 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne CAD resets the timer. The incident does not show as timed out until it exceeds the time
you set.

282 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

Examples:
To reset the timer for incident 12345 to the original value configured for the status:
RI.#12345
To reset the time out value for incident 12345 to ten minutes:
RI.#12345.10

Cloning Incidents
After you initiate an incident, you can clone the incident to create incidents. For example, if you are
working on a DUI incident, you may need to dispatch the test van from a different agency. After you
create the original incident, you can use the Clone Incident command to clone all the necessary
information to a new incident for the agency responsible for the test van.

Cloning incidents requires specific permissions. Contact your system administrator to ensure that you
have the following permissions:

• Clone incident permission for the owning agency of the user

• Clone incident permission for the agency of the user (source agency)

• Incident initiation permission for the owning agency of the user

• Incident initiation permission for the agency for which the incident is being cloned (target agency)
NOTE
NOTE:
You no longer are required to have clone incident permission for the agency for which the
incident is being cloned (target agency).

You can clone incidents from the command line or from the Clone Incident form.

NOTE:
Cloned incidents do not have any relationship to the original unit, unless you choose to associate
them.

Cloning Incidents From the Clone Incident Form

You can clone incidents from the command line or from the Clone Incident form. For details on cloning
incidents from the command line, see Cloning Incidents From the Command Line (CI) on page 286.

To clone an incident from the Clone Incident form:

1 On the command line, type CI followed by the period separator.

CI.I;<incident id or active unit id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 Enter either the incident number you want to clone or the number of the unit that is active on the
incident you want to clone, followed by the period separator.

Send Feedback 283

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

3 Enter fm;y and press F10 or Enter. For example, CI.#56.fm;y

The Clone Incident form appears. The details for the original incident display at the top of the form.
Two rows automatically display in the lower part of the form; when you complete a row, an additional
row is automatically added.

The values for the Incident Type, Agency Type, Modifying Circumstance, Agency, Area, and
Beat of the original incident display in the first row, but you can modify these values. Fields that are
shaded gray cannot be changed; they are dependent upon values entered in other fields in the rows.

IRFs (Incid Type, Agy Type, Agency, Mod Cir, and Disposition) are defined in Provisioning under the
Incident Management – Incident Response Factors item.

Figure 158: Clone Incident Form

4 In the Additional Comments box at the top of the form, enter any new comments you want copied
to all of the incidents. To enter priority comments, type the comments in brackets, such as <cloning
comments>. For additional details on priority comments, see Priority Comments on page 198.

5 In the Qty field, enter the number of incidents you want created.

284 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

6 Enter the appropriate values in the remaining fields.

If your system is configured to use incident type aliases, you can enter the real incident type or the
alias in the Incid Type field.
NOTE
NOTE:
The list of available incident types is filtered according to user role, trusted agency
permissions, and Incident Response Factors to display only the incident types you are
provisioned to use for the CI command. For details, see Understanding Incident Type Filtering
and Agency Type Defaults on page 194.

PremierOne determines the default value, if any, that displays in the Agy Type field by a set of
hierarchical rules with regard to the selected incident type. For details, see Understanding
Incident Type Filtering and Agency Type Defaults on page 194.

The Disposition and Disposition Comments fields are only enabled if you enter a unit ID. If you
enter a unit ID, the incident is created as closed. The same rules are used to create the incident as
when creating an incident using the Incident Initiation form.

7 To include the comments, person information, vehicle information, or incident history of the original
incident, select the appropriate check boxes below the cloning information.

• If you clone the incident history, all transactions from the original incident are included in the
Incident History of the cloned incident with the original timestamp for each transaction. The
transaction type for all of these transactions is prefixed with an asterisk; for example, *INC
UPDT, *INC STAT, *CMNTS, *DPTCH, *VEH INFO, *RPT NUM, and so on. CMNTS transactions
are included but these comments do not appear on the Incident Management Cmnt Work Assist
Area tab of the cloned incident.

• If you clone the comments, all CMNTS transactions from the original incident are included in the
Incident History with the original timestamp for each transaction. The transaction type for all of
these transactions is prefixed with an asterisk, *CMNTS. These comments appear on the Incident
Management Cmnt Work Assist Area tab for the cloned incident without the *.

• If you enter a Unit ID, all the same transactions are logged to the cloned Incident History and the
Unit History as when a closed incident is created using the Initiate Incident form.

8 To associate the incident with the original incident, select the Assoc w/ Orig check box.

For details on associated incidents, see Creating Associated Incidents When Creating the Initial
Incident on page 231.

9 To add another row, tab out of the last enabled field. Then enter the incident information.

10 When finished, press F12 to submit the information.

The cloned incidents are created. Entries are made in the Incident History for the original incident
and the cloned incident.

Send Feedback 285

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

Cloning Incidents From the Command Line (CI)

You can clone incidents from the command line or from the Clone Incident form. For details on cloning
incidents from the form, see Cloning Incidents From the Clone Incident Form on page 283.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

CI.I.N.FM.T.AGT.MC.U.AG.A.B.CM.C.AO.IC.IP.IV.IH
For the required I identifier, you can enter either the incident id or the active unit id.

To clone an incident from the command line:

1 On the command line, type CI followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
CI.I;<incident id or active unit id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the incident ID of the incident you want to clone or type the ID of a unit active on
the incident.

3 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed. Set the FM (display form)
identifier to No unless you want to display the Clone Incident form.
NOTE
NOTE:
When you enter the number of incidents to clone, a maximum of 100 incidents can be
associated together. There may already be incidents associated with this incident.

4 To submit the incident, press Enter or F10.

PremierOne CAD clones the incident.

Entering CI.I;{incident number or active unit id}, creates one cloned incident with
the same location, jurisdiction, incident type, and modifying circumstance of the original incident. The
Clone Incident form does not display.

Entering CI.I;{incident number or active unit id} and any other parameters (except
FM;Y) creates cloned incidents with the same location, jurisdiction, incident type, and modifying
circumstance of the original incident unless specified otherwise. The Clone Incident form does not
display.
Examples:
To clone incident 12345 and create two cloned incidents to a type of theft and not open the Clone
Incident form:
CI.#12345.2.T;theft
To display the Clone Incident form for the incident that 1A12 is active on:
CI.1A12.fm;Y

286 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

Transferring Incidents
There is no Incident Transfer command, but you can easily transfer an incident using the following
procedure:

To transfer an incident:

1 Display the incident by doing one of the following:

• Issuing the IU command with the incident number.

For details, see Displaying and Updating Incidents From the Incident Management Form on
page 245 or Updating Incidents From the Command Line (IU) on page 266.

• Issuing the IS command, selecting the incident, and then displaying the incident.

For details, see Creating an Incident Summary List on page 290.

2 Enter the new jurisdictional coordinates and submit the incident.

The incident is transferred. The incident retains its original number.

Creating Associated Incidents After Incident Initiation (IA)

To associate incidents after the incidents have already been initiated, use the Incident Association
command. Associating incidents creates a link between the incidents. Associated incidents are most
commonly used in multi-jurisdictional, multi-agency environments. For example, an accident with
injuries may require a response from Law Enforcement, Medical, and Fire agencies to manage the
incident completely. When incidents are associated, they display in the Assoc tab for each incident.
Comments can also be shared between associated incidents.

NOTE:
A maximum of 100 incidents can be associated together. There may already be incidents
associated with a particular incident.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

IA.I1.I2.CM
To create associated incidents after incident initiation:

1 On the command line, type IA, followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
IA.I1;<incident id1 or active unit id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the value for the first incident ID (the incident you want to associate the other
incident to) or the ID of a unit active on the incident followed by another separator.

3 At the cursor, type the value for the incident to associate to the first incident.

Send Feedback 287

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

4 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

NOTE
NOTE:
A maximum of 100 incidents can be associated together. There may already be incidents
associated with this incident.

To enter priority comments, enter angle brackets around the comments, such as <supsect may be
armed>. For details on priority comments, see Priority Comments on page 198.

5 To finish the association, press Enter or F10.

PremierOne CAD associates the incidents and the associated incident appears on the Assoc tab in
the Work Assist Area.
Examples:
To associate incidents 01378 and 01379:
IA.01378.01379
To associate incident 01378 from agency BLDR to incident 02457 from agency BFIRE:
IA.BLDR/01378.BFIRE/02547
To associate incidents from different days, when incident numbers change daily, use the format:

IA.I1;#agencyID/YYYYMMDD-SequenceNumber.I2;#agencyID/YYYYMMDD-
SequenceNumber

Disassociating Incidents
You can remove the association between incidents at any time. If you disassociate incidents from the
form, you can individually select the incidents to disassociate. If you disassociate incidents from the
command line, all incident associations are removed for the specified incident.

Disassociating Incidents from the Incident Management Form

You can disassociate all associated incidents from a specific incident on the command line, or select
specific associated incidents to disassociate from the Assoc tab in the Work Assist Area of the Incident
Management form. For details on disassociating incidents from the command line, see Disassociating
Incidents From the Command Line (DI) on page 289.

To disassociate incidents from the Incident Management form:

1 Display the incident.

For details, see Displaying and Updating Incidents From the Incident Management Form on
page 245.

2 In the Work Assist area, select the Assoc tab.

288 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

A list of incidents associated with the current incident display.

Figure 159: Incident Management Form – Assoc Tab In The Work Assist Area

3 Select the check box for the incidents you want to disassociate.

4 At the bottom of the work area, select the Disassoc button.

You are prompted to confirm the action. PremierOne CAD removes the association between the
incidents and a success message appears in the status message box.

Disassociating Incidents From the Command Line (DI)

You can disassociate all associated incidents from the command line, or specific associated units from
the Assoc tab in the Work Assist Area of the Incident Management form. For details on disassociating
incidents from the Assoc tab, see Disassociating Incidents from the Incident Management Form on
page 288.

Command identifiers default order:

DI.I.CM
For the required I identifier, you can enter either the incident id or the active unit id.

To disassociate associated incidents from the command line:

1 On the command line, type DI, followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
DI.I;<incident id(s) or active unit id(s)>.CM;<comments>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

Send Feedback 289

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

2 At the cursor, type the value for the first incident ID or the ID of a unit active on the incident followed
by another separator.

Optionally type the period separator followed by any comments.

3 To submit the command, press Enter or F10.

Example:
To disassociate incidents 01378 from all other associated incidents:
DI.01378

Creating an Incident Summary List

The Incident Summary list displays nonclosed incidents. You can filter the list by agency, status, area,
sector, and beat. The agency, area, incident number, status, priority, incident type, created time and
date, address, and primary unit display. sector, or beat. If you do not specify any filter criteria, then all the
incidents in your coverage group are retrieved (or those incidents which have been transferred to your
control).

NOTE:
A maximum of the 250 most recent incidents display. If the maximum occurs, refine your search
conditions so the search is more limited.

Creating an Incident Summary List From the Incident Summary Form

You can create an Incident Summary list from the command line or from the form. For details on creating
an incident summary list from the command line, see Creating an Incident Summary List From the
Command Line (IS) on page 292.

290 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

To create an incident summary list from the Incident Summary form:

1 On the command line, type IS and then press Enter or F10.

The Incident Summary Filter Criteria form displays. Additionally, all pending, active, and stacked
incidents for the agency/areas of your sign on area display. If you want to narrow the results or
search an agency, area, sector, or beat outside of your signed on areas, enter the criteria and submit
the request.

Figure 160: Incident Summary Filter Criteria Form In Primary Work Area

2 Select and/or enter the filter criteria. To filter the returns, enter as much information as possible in the
Filter Criteria form.

You can select multiple entries from the lists, such as Status. To do so using the keyboard, press
Ctrl-space. You can also enter multiple entries in the Area, Sector, and Beat fields. To do so,
separate the entries with commas. Multiple values entered in these fields are not validated (you do
not receive an error message if an agency/area/sector/beat combination does not exist).

The values that you select are treated as OR conditions. For example, if you select agencies AG1
and AG2, then any incidents in AG1 or AG2 are returned.

As another example, if you select Agency = DC, BL, Area = AR1, AR2, Sector = S1, and Beat =
B101, all incidents would be returned where Area = DC/AR1 or DC/AR2 or BL/AR1 or BL/AR2,
Sector = DC/S1 or BL/S1, and Beat = DC/B101 or BL/101.

Send Feedback 291

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

The following information governs the values you enter:

• If you do not specify an agency for any Area, Sector, or Beat value, the values of your coverage
group are used in the search.

• Whenever you enter more than one value for the Agency, Area, Sector, or Beat fields,
PremierOne CAD ignores any validation exceptions and attempts to retrieve all of the incidents
based on the values you enter that have valid combinations.

• Whenever you enter zero or one value in the Agency, Area, Sector, or Beat fields, PremierOne
CAD validates the entered values for the respective agency (in this case you receive an error
message if one of the combinations does not exist).

3 After entering the search criteria, press F12.

The results display in the work area. The sort order of the results is by Agency ID, then by Area, and
then by when created.

• To sort the list, select the column title you want to sort by. If your system is configured to display
incident type aliases, incidents created with aliases display in the Results list along with the real
incident type.

• To view an incident, select the incident you want to view, and select View Incid at the bottom of
the form.

The incident you select displays in the Primary Work Area. The display is shaded blue to indicate
that the incident information is an overlay of the screen that was displayed. To scroll through the
incidents, use the Up and Down arrows in the upper right-hand corner of the window. You can
make updates while in the view mode (enter the information and press F12).

To return to your original work area, select the X above the Work Assist Area or press the Esc
key.

Creating an Incident Summary List From the Command Line (IS)

You can create an Incident Summary list from the command line or from the form. For details on creating
an incident summary list from the form, see Creating an Incident Summary List From the Incident
Summary Form on page 290.

Command identifiers default order:

IS.A.S.B.IS
To create an incident summary list from the command line:

1 On the command line, type IS followed by the period separator.

2 Type the appropriate command identifiers (A;S;B;IS) and separators (statuses are pending, initial,
stacked, and active).

<agency ID>/ Displays all incidents for a specific agency.

<agency ID>/<area> Displays all incidents for a specific agency/area.

<area> Displays all incidents in a specific area. The signon agency is the default.

IS.A;agency/, IS.S;agency/, and IS.B;agency/ all return the same values (the commands
are all areas for agency, all sectors for agency, and all beats for agency).

292 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

Separate multiple agencies with commas, such as IS.BO/,BF.

If you do not specify an agency, your working agency is used. If you enter an incident number, then
any other identifiers are ignored.

3 Press Enter or F10.

The results display. For details on the form displays, see Creating an Incident Summary List From
the Incident Summary Form on page 290.
Examples:
To display a list of incidents in agency DC, RG, and FB:
IS.DC/,RG/,FB/
To display a list of pending incidents in area1:
IS.DC/area1;IS.pending

Searching for and Displaying Incidents

Using the Incident Recall (IR) command, you can retrieve a list of closed and open incidents based on a
wide range of criteria, such as location, status, incident type, dates, persons, and vehicles. The IR
command provides a way to review information that is related to the specified incident, view the active
incidents assigned to the specified unit, and print information.

You can retrieve the list by entering search criteria in the IR form or by using the IR command.

Searching for Incidents From the Incident Recall Form

You can search for incidents from the command line or from the Incident Recall form. For information
about searching for incidents from the command line, see Searching for Incidents From the Command
Line (IR) on page 300.

NOTE:
Validation is only performed on the format of the Report Number and Date fields.

From the reporting database, you can search incident comments using a full text search. You can search
for words and phrases contained within incident comments to retrieve the incident details. This type of
search can be useful in looking up previous information within past incidents that may pertain to an
incident currently being worked on.

To search for incidents from the Incident Recall form:

1 On the command line, type IR and then press Enter or F10.

The Incident Recall form appears in the Primary Work Area.

2 Enter the search criteria.

A description of the fields is in the following tables.

Send Feedback 293

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

Agency and General Section

Figure 161: Incident Recall Form - Agency and General Section

Table 32: Incident Recall Field Descriptions - Agency and General Section

Field Description

Agency Select one or more agencies. To select multiple agencies using the keyboard, press
Space.

If you do not select an agency, then your working agency is used. If you do select
agencies, then your working area is not automatically included. Only the specified
agencies are used.

For example, if you select Agency ID = A, B and Unit ID = Unit1, then

PremierOne retrieves incidents that A/Unit1, and B/Unit1 are or were assigned to.

The Agency list only refers to the agencies you are trying to search; it does not apply to
other fields.

General Enter information as needed. To type multiple values in a field, separate each value with
a comma. To select multiple agencies using the keyboard, press Space.

Incident Type Enter the incident type you want to search for. If your system is configured to use
incident alias types, you can select an incident type or manually enter an incident type
alias.

Priority Enter the incident priority you want to search for.

Mod Circum Enter the modifying circumstance you want to search for.

Alarm Level Enter the alarm level you want to search for.

294 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

Table 32: Incident Recall Field Descriptions - Agency and General Section (Cont.)

Status Select the incident status. Options include pending, initial, stacked, active, closed, and
open. To select multiple statuses using the keyboard, press Space.

Report # Enter the report number you want to search for. Do not use the report format for your
agency. Instead, either enter the actual value of the report #, or YYYYMMDD-report #.

For example, for report number DC-1000007-2010, you would only enter 1000007 or
20100519-1000007. Select the appropriate agency for the report number from the
Agency ID field. You can also enter partial numbers, such as 05 or 5 for 0000005.

Disposition Enter the disposition you want to search for. To only search for primary unit dispositions,
select the For primary units only check box.

Alarm ID Enter the alarm ID you want to search for.

Call Source Enter the call source you want to search for.

NOTE: You can use the percent sign (%) as a wildcard in all but the Report # field when you are not exactly
sure of what you are looking for. For example, you can type 1A% in the Unit ID field to find all units that
start with 1A, such as 1A1, 1A11, 1A12, 1AB1, and so on. For additional details on using wildcards in
searches, see Using Wildcards in Searches on page 68.

Location Section

Figure 162: Incident Recall Form - Location Section

Send Feedback 295

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

Table 33: Incident Recall Field Descriptions - Location Section

Field Format

Location Enter the location search criteria as needed.

The Location field is a required field for address related search. You can enter % to match
any location.

• To search for a common place only, enter a wildcard into the Location field to match all
locations. Then enter the Loc Name with the wildcard you want to search with.

• If you enter values in any of the Location, Loc Name, or City fields, the Address as Entered
option is automatically selected, indicating that the search returns incidents at that
location even if the address information is not verified.

• If you verified the address information and if the Address as Entered field is selected, you
can enter a distance in the Proximity Search Distance field. PremierOne CAD retrieves
all incidents within the distance you enter. If you do not enter a value in this field,
PremierOne CAD uses the default value set by your system administrator.
• To search for incidents that occurred along the entire length of the street, even if the
location was not verified, select Along Length of Street.

• To search for incidents within the hundred block of the specified location, select Within
100 Block Range. The address must be verified.

Date Range Section

Figure 163: Incident Recall Form - Date Range Section

296 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

Table 34: Incident Recall Field Descriptions - Location Section

Format Description

Date Range Enter the date range you want to search.

• To retrieve all the matching incidents from your specified start date and start time to
your specified end date and end time, select Inclusive. For example, you can search
for all incidents created from 12:01 AM on January 1st through midnight on January
31st. The search returns incidents created at any time on any of those days.

• To retrieve all the matching incidents from your specified start date to your specified
end date within the start time and end time for each day, select Restrictive. For
example, you can search for all incidents created between 9:01 PM and midnight on
any day in the month of July. The search returns only those incidents created after
9:00 PM on those days.

Person Section

Figure 164: Incident Recall Form - Person Section

Table 35: Incident Recall Field Descriptions - Person Section

Format Description

Person Enter the person information as needed.

To enter multiple roles in the Role field, separate the roles with a comma, such as
caller, victim.

The State, Type, Make, Model, and Color codes are defined in Provisioning under the
List and Statute Management item.

Send Feedback 297

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

Vehicle Section

Figure 165: Incident Recall Form - Vehicle Section

Table 36: Incident Recall Field Descriptions - Vehicle Section

Format Description

Vehicle Enter the vehicle information as needed.

When PremierOne performs a vehicle search, it considers the colors in both the Color 1
and Color 2 fields.

If the specified color exists in either Color 1 or Color 2, PremierOne considers this vehicle
a match against the color search criteria.

If there is a value in Color 1 but no value in Color 2, the value submitted for queries is the
value in Color 1.

If there is a value in Color 2 but no value in Color 1, the value submitted for queries is the
value in Color 2.

For a multi-colored vehicle, use the value MUL/COL in either Color 1 or Color 2. MUL/COL
is the value submitted for queries.

License Plate Section

Figure 166: Incident Recall Form - License Plate Section

Table 37: Incident Recall Field Descriptions - License Plate Section

Format Description

License Plate Enter information as needed. You can select multiple values in the Make and Model fields.

298 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

Contractor and Other IDs Section

Figure 167: Incident Recall Form - Contractor and Other IDs Sections

Table 38: Incident Recall Field Descriptions

Field Description

Contractor Type a contractor ID to search for a specific contractor, or type a Contractor Type to
search for all contractors associated with a contractor type.

NOTE: Agency-specific fields default to your working agency. In each case, you can enter the agency ID if it
is different than the selected agency for the search.

Initiating ID Type the ID number of the person who initiated the incident.

User ID Type the ID number of the person who has made entries or actions on the incident. If the
agency is different than the selected agency for the search, you can enter the agency ID
before the Personnel or Console ID.

Console ID Type the console ID of the person who made entries or changes to the incident. You can
enter the agency ID before the Personnel or Console ID if it is different than the selected
agency for the search.

Officer ID Type the personnel ID of any officer who was assigned to a unit that was assigned to the
incident.

Unit ID Type one or more unit IDs separated by commas. PremierOne CAD retrieves
incidents that are or were assigned to the specified units. To search only for primary
units, select the Only When Primary check box.

NOTE: If you enter the agency ID with call sign, the specific unit is searched for in the
given agency. If you do not specify the agency ID with the call sign.

• If the call sign is unique for all on-duty units, the unit call sign is used for the IR search.

• If the call sign is not unique for all on-duty units, then your working agency is used for
the IR search.

3 To start the search, press F12.

If there is only one result, the Search Results display in the Primary Work Area. If there is more than
one result, the results appear in the Work Assist Area. If your system is configured to use and display
incident type aliases, incidents created with aliases display in the Results list along with the real
incident type.

Send Feedback 299

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

To sort the results, select the sort criteria from the Sort by list.

Figure 168: Search Results in Work Assist Area

Work Assist Area – Incident Recall

The Work Assist Area displays the results of the incident search.

Do any of the following:

• To scroll though all the incidents returned, select an incident and then select the View Incid button.

The incident you selected displays in the Primary Work Area. The display is shaded blue to indicate
that the incident information is an overlay of the screen that was displayed.

• To scroll through the incidents, use the Up and Down arrows in the upper right-hand corner of the
window. You can make updates while in the view mode (enter the updated information and press
F12).

• To return to your original work area, select the X above the Work Assist Area or press the Esc key.

Searching for Incidents From the Command Line (IR)

You can search for incidents from the command line or from the Incident Recall form. For information
about the Incident Recall form and about the possible search criteria, see Searching for Incidents From
the Incident Recall Form on page 293.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

300 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

Command identifiers default order:

IR.I.AG.U.T.A.S.B.IS.MC.AL.PN.PS.PY.MA.MO.VN.RP.FN.LN.
AD.PH.SC.RN.D.FA.AM.CID.CTP.L.CPN.CT.SB.BL.FL.AP.LS.
PSD.SD.DF.DT.TF.TT.TI.IN.OP.WS.OF.ZP
To search for an incident from the command line:

1 On the command line, type IR followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
IR.I;<incident id or active unit id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

The more information you provide, the narrower your search is; PremierOne CAD returns fewer
incidents in the results. For incident types, you can type the real incident type or alias, if your system
is configured for aliases.
NOTE
NOTE:
To recall a specific incident from a year different than the current year, enter the incident
number in the format YYYY-# where YYYY is the year and # is the incident number.

3 Press Enter to start the search.

PremierOne CAD runs the search and the search results appear in the Work Assist Area.

To sort the search results, select one of the following in the Sort by field: Address. Type, Incid #,
Status, Date, Time, and LocName.
Examples:
To retrieve a list of incidents in agency DC:
IR.dc;is.pending
To retrieve a list of incidents in agency DC in pending status:
IR.dc.IS;pending
To retrieve a list of incidents closed since 01/01/2015:
IR.IS;closed.DF;01/01/2009

Send Feedback 301

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

Viewing Incident History

PremierOne CAD maintains a history or log of all the transactions for an incident, including incident
information, when the incident was initiated, dispatched, updated, whether the incident timed out,
whether the units assigned to the incident were freed, and so on. For each activity, PremierOne CAD
shows the date, time, user ID, and console ID of the person who performed that activity.

Filters are available both in the form and from the command line.

Viewing Incident History From the Incident Management Form

You can view an incident history from the Incident Management form or from the command line. To view
the history from the command line, see Viewing Incident History From the Command Line (IH) on
page 304.

To view incident history from the Incident Management History form:

1 Display the incident.

For details, see Displaying and Updating Incidents From the Incident Management Form on
page 245.

2 Select the History tab or press F4.

The Incident History form for the incident appears. System-generated transactions are labeled with
System in the Console ID column. Priority comments and priority updates display in red text. For
additional details, Understanding Priority Comments and Priority Updates on page 197.

Incidents created with an alias display the incident type as real incident type - alias incident type,
such as trafficaccident - tra.

For cloned incidents, if you or another user selected the Incident History of the original incident to be
included with the cloned incident, all transactions from cloning are prefixed with an asterisk, such as
*CMNTS, *INC UPDT, *INC STAT, *CMNTS, *DPTCH, *VEH INFO, *RPT NUM, and so on. CMNTS
transactions are included but these comments do not appear on the Incident Management Cmnt
Work Assist Area tab of the cloned incident.

302 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

Incidents that were created as closed incidents without a disposition display a status of Closed
(null).

Figure 169: Incident Management History Form

3 To limit the display, select a filter from the Filter By list.

The filter by list disregards any asterisks from cloning.

4 Do any of the following:

• To sort the information, select the column header.

• To print the list, select the Print button.

• To refresh the data in the history to see the latest information, select Refresh at the bottom of the
form.

Dynamic refresh automatically updates the view of the History as other users (both CAD
consoles and Mobile units) continue to update the incident and its responding units.

• To open the Incident History form in a new window, select the Orphan button. You can then move
the window. This procedure allows you to continue to monitor the incident history while doing
other tasks in PremierOne CAD.

Send Feedback 303

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

Incident History Transaction Types

The following table shows the types of transactions that can display in the Incident History:
Table 39: Incident History Transaction Types

Transaction Explanation

CALL ASSOC Call associated or disassociated

CLONE Clone actions

CMNTS Comment

DPTCH Dispatch actions

INC CREATE Incident created

INC STAT Incident status

INC UPDT Incident updated

PER INFO Person action

PRIM UNIT Primary unit

REBID Manual or auto rebid

REC Recommendations

RPT NUM Report number actions

TIMEOUT Incident timeout, incident timeout reset

UNIT MGMT Unit actions

UNIT STAT Unit status

VEH INFO Vehicle actions

Viewing Incident History From the Command Line (IH)

You can retrieve the history for an incident from the Incident Management form or from the command
line. To view the history from the form, see Viewing Incident History From the Incident Management
Form on page 302.

When you issue the Incident History command from the command line, you can specify the incident
number and filter. When the history displays, the filter is already applied.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

IH.I.F
For the required I identifier, you can enter either the incident id or the active unit id.

304 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

To view incident history from the command line:

1 On the command line, type IH followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
IH.I;<incident id or active unit id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the incident ID of the incident or the ID of a unit active on the incident.

3 If you know that you want to filter the results, type the period separator.

4 At the cursor, type one of the following filter types.

• ADD BYPASS

• CMNTS

• DPTH

• FREE UNIT

• INC CREATE

• INC STAT

• INC UPDATE

5 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne CAD opens the Incident Management History form for your incident using the filter you
specified.

For a description of actions you can perform in the form, see Viewing Incident History From the
Incident Management Form on page 302.
Examples:
To retrieve the history for incident 1234 filtered by comments:
IH.#1234.CMNTS
To retrieve the history for incident 1234:
IH.#1234

Send Feedback 305

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

Generating Report Numbers for Incidents (RP)

If provisioned to do so by your system administrator, PremierOne assigns a report number to an incident
when the first unit from your agency is placed into the provisioned status category that is set to
automatically generate a report number.

Example: If the provisioned status category is At Scene, when the first unit arrives at the incident and is
placed into unit status category of At Scene, a unit-based report number is generated.

To generate report numbers, use the Report Number command. For descriptions of identifiers, see
Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

RP.I.U.AC{add|delete|reset}.N.RN.AG
For the identifier N, you can enter 1-9. If you do not enter a value, 1 is assumed. To apply a report
number given to the first incident to a subsequent second incident, use the add action. To generate a
report number for another agency, use the identifier AG.

To generate report numbers for incidents:

1 On the command line, type RP followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
RP.I;<incident id(s) or active unit id(s)>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

Depending on your agency configuration, you can assign a report number to a unit where the report
number comes from the agency owning the unit and not the agency owning the incident to which the
unit is assigned.

2 At the cursor, type the value for incident ID or the ID of a unit active on the incident for which you
want to generate report numbers.

You can generate report numbers for more than one incident by separating the incident IDs with
commas. Type the period separator at the end.

3 Type the period separator.

The prompt AC;<action {add|delete|cancel}> appears.

4 At the cursor, type a, d, or c, and then type the period separator.

CAUTION:
Deleting a report number removes the report number from the incidents/units and from the
system. Canceling the report number only removes the number from the incident/unit, but the
number is still available to be assigned again.

5 If you are adding report numbers, at the cursor, type the number of report numbers you want to
generate.

306 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

6 To enter a specific report number, type the period separator and enter the report number.
NOTE
NOTE:
The format for the report number depends on your agency configuration. For the Report #, do
not use the actual report format for your agency. Instead, either enter the actual value of the
report # or YYYYMMDD- report #. For example, for report number DC-1000007-2010, you
would only enter 1000007 or 20100519-100000

7 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne CAD generates (or deletes or cancels) the number of report numbers you specified.
Examples:
To add six report numbers for incident 0001234:
RP.#0001234.AC;add.N;6
To add a report number for the incident that unit 1A32 is active on:
RP.1A132.AC;add.N;1

Sending Incident Data to Infotrak (IF)

When you want to send incident data to Infotrak, use the Infotrak (IF) command. Your system must be
provisioned for Infotrak.

Command identifiers default order:

IF.I;OV
To send incident data to Infotrak:

1 Type IF on the command line, followed by the period separator.

The following hint appears on the command line:

IF.I;<incident id(s) or active unit id(s)>
2 At the cursor, type the incident number or unit ID. To enter more than one incident number or unit ID,
separate your entries with commas.

3 Press Enter.

PremierOne sends the data to Infotrak and a success message appears in the status message area
to the right of the command line.

If any of the incidents do not meet the criteria defined by your system administrator, a warning
message appears. You can choose to continue sending the information or to cancel.
Example:
IF.I;0001234,0001235,0001236

Send Feedback 307

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 12: Managing Incidents

308 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Managing Resources

Chapter 13

Managing Resources 13

The term resource includes the personnel, vehicles, and equipment of the agencies you might manage
on an incident. For a single law agency, resources might simply be police cruisers, mounted or foot
patrols, equipment, and officers, together known as “units.” In a multiple agency environment, resources
could also include fire and ambulance vehicles, equipment, and personnel.

The tasks related to Resource Management include items such as placing a unit on duty; assigning the
jurisdiction personnel and vehicles to a unit; making status changes; and taking units off duty at the end
of their shift.

PremierOne CAD provides tools for viewing unit history, a summary of unit activities, and viewing a
lineup list. You can also create and use roll calls and temporary unit groups.

For more information on tasks related to dispatching, see Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources.

Summary of Unit Management

Use the Unit Management form to manage the current activities and on-duty assignments for a unit. The
functionality that is available to you within the form is dependent on the permissions that are granted to
you and to your workstation.

1 You can display the form using several different commands. Each of the commands displays a
different tab in the form. Using the command that directly displays the tab in the form you need can
save you time and keystrokes.

• The US.<unit ID> command displays the Assignments tab–Status tab for the unit. See
Updating Unit Status on page 321.

• The ON command displays the Assignments tab–Duty subtab. See Placing Units On Duty on
page 312.

• The UA.<unit ID> command displays the Assignments tab–Duty subtab for the unit. See
Updating Unit Assignments From the Unit Management Form on page 324.

• The CS.<unit ID> command displays the Assignments tab–Stack tab for the unit. See
Managing a Unit Call Stacking Queue (CS) on page 407.

Send Feedback 309

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Unit Statuses are defined in Provisioning under the Unit Management – Unit Status Codes item.
Capabilities are defined under the Resources – Capability/Skill item.

Figure 170: Unit Management Form – Status Subtab

Following is a brief description of the tabs and subtabs in the Unit Management form:
Table 40: Commands Displaying the Unit Management Form

Command Tab–Subtab Use to

US.<unit ID> Status Manage the current activities of the unit (status, location,
comments, and so on)

US.<unit ID> command opens the Unit Management form with the Status tab active.

ON Assignments Manage assignments for a unit in following subtabs.

UA.<unit ID>

ON command opens the Unit Management form with the Assignment–Duty subtab active.

UA.<unit ID> command opens the Unit Management form with Assignment–Jurisdiction tab active.

Duty Place a unit on duty or take a unit off duty. Also displays the
current status of the unit (if the unit is On Duty) and allows
you to enter a limited set of information that is found on the
other subtabs with the Assignments tab.

310 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Table 40: Commands Displaying the Unit Management Form (Cont.)

Command Tab–Subtab Use to (Cont.)

Jurisdiction Manage area, sector, and beat assignments for the unit.

Personnel Manage personnel assigned to the unit.

Vehicle Manage vehicle information for the unit.

Unit Management equipment for the unit.

equipment

Rider Manage rider information for the unit.

CS.<unit ID> Stack Manage the call stacking queue of a unit.

CS.<unit ID> command opens the Unit Management form with the Stack tab active.

Understanding Unit IDs

Unit IDs can be a maximum of 15 characters. If shift IDs are used, they must follow the unit ID and
include a hyphen, such as 1A12-1.

If you do not use an agency with the Unit ID, the Agency ID is set to your working agency.

If your agency uses Shift IDs with the unit number, the following rules must be met:

• When there is only a single unit on duty with a particular unit ID, you can reference the unit using the
unit ID only, without the shift ID.

• When there is more than one unit on duty using the same unit ID for an agency (but with different
shift ID suffixes), reference the unit using the Shift ID.

• When there is more than one unit using the same unit ID for an agency (but with different shift ID
suffixes), but the units are not on duty during the same time period, you can reference the unit using
the unit ID only, without the shift ID.

Your system administrator can configure PremierOne CAD so that you must precede either the incident
number or Unit ID by the pound (#) sign, such as #1A12 or #00023466. If you do not know what your
site is using, check with your system administrator.

NOTE:
If you are referring to a unit in another agency and your system is configured to use the pound (#)
sign for units, type the # before the unit ID, such as #KCAC/1a12.

Send Feedback 311

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Placing Units On Duty

You can place units on duty from the Unit Management form or using the On Duty (ON) command.

Depending on your system configuration and your type of agency, the minimum information required to
place a unit on duty is the unit ID and the area of assignment; your agency may also require the User ID.
If a unit has permanent assignments, then only the unit ID is required to place a unit on duty.

NOTE:
Radio pseudo-units are only intended to reference the radio channel assignments of an incident.
Radio pseudo-units cannot have personnel and/or vehicle assignments. Therefore, when you
place a radio pseudo-unit on duty, either from the form or the command line, do not specify any
personnel or vehicle assignments.

Placing Units On Duty From the Unit Management Form

You can place units on duty from the Unit Management Assignments form or from the command line.
For details on placing units on duty from the command line, see Placing Units On Duty From the
Command Line (ON) on page 316.

NOTE:
A Provisioning parameter controls whether you must use preconfigured unit IDs.

To place a unit on duty from the Unit Management form:

1 On the command line, type ON and then press Enter or F10.

The Assignments tab of the Unit Management form appears in the Primary Work Area. The Duty
subtab is automatically selected.

312 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Activity Codes are defined in Provisioning under the Unit Management – Activity Codes item.

Figure 171: Blank Unit Management Assignments Form

2 In the Unit ID field, type the Unit ID for the unit you want to place on duty. If the unit is in a different
agency than your signon agency, be sure to include the agency before the Unit ID, such as KCAC/
Unit1.

3 Press F12.

Send Feedback 313

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

The Unit ID displays in the Primary Work area and an icon displays indicating the unit is on duty.

Figure 172: Unit Management Assignment Form For Unit On Duty

4 In the Odometer field, type a starting odometer reading for the unit, if required.

5 From the Activity Code list, select an activity code for this unit, if required.

Activity codes categorize activity and time spent by units other than the time tracked by unit status
codes, such as special DUI patrols.

Activity Codes are defined in Provisioning under the Unit Management – Activity Codes item.

6 Do one of the following:

• To use the jurisdictional assignment of personnel 1, select the Use personnel 1’s jurisdictional
assignment check box. Assignments are made by the system administrator in Provisioning. If
there are multiple users, then the assignment of the first assigned user is used. The first
assigned user is the user whose user ID appears first in the User ID(s) field on the Duty tab and
in the table on the Personnel tab.

314 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

All fields in the On-Duty Assignment table are then disabled. At the top of the Jurisdiction tab, the
label Using personnel jurisdictional assignment displays.

Figure 173: Jurisdiction Tab – Using Personnel Jurisdictional Assignment

• At the bottom of the form, enter the required assignment information: areas, beats, user IDs, and
vehicle ID. These fields are provided to allow you to quickly enter a limited set of information
found on the other subtabs. If you enter resource information not in your signon agency, be sure
to precede the information with the agency, such as KCAC/Unit1. You can also add the name or
information about a rider.

• For agencies that are provisioned to use stations, select the Jurisdiction tab and select the
station from the Station list.

Figure 174: Jurisdiction Tab – Station List

• Select the Jurisdiction, Personnel, Vehicle, Unit Equipment, and Capability tabs and enter the
assignment information as needed. For details regarding these tabs, see the following topics:

• To use permanent duty assignments, select the Reload Permanent button. Any assignment data
you manually added is not cleared.

NOTE:
Your system administrator configures permanent settings. The unit may or may not have
permanent settings.

7 Press F12.

Send Feedback 315

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

The icon changes to On Duty and a summary of the assignment information displays in the Work
Assist Area.

Figure 175: Unit Management Form For On Duty Unit

Work Assist Area – Assignments Tab Unit Management Form

The Work Assist Area for the Unit Management form has two tabs:

• The Duty Assign tab displays a summary of the On Duty Assignment information entered in the
Primary Work Area. The jurisdiction, user name, user ID, vehicle, unit equipment, and rider
information display.

• The Perm Assign tab displays a summary of permanent assignment information for the unit, if
applicable. Your system administrator configures Permanent assignments.

Placing Units On Duty From the Command Line (ON)

You can place a unit on duty from the Unit Management Summary form or from the command line. For
details on placing units on duty from the Unit Management Summary form, see Placing Units On Duty
From the Unit Management Form on page 312.

You can only place one unit on duty at time from the command line.

NOTE:
A Provisioning parameter controls whether you must use preconfigured unit IDs.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

ON.U.FM.UD.V.ACT.ST.A.S.B.UP.OM.RI

316 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

If you are using permanent assignments, the UD (user ID) identifier is not required. You must at a
minimum indicate the area for assignment when you place the unit on duty.

To place a unit on duty from the command line:

1 On the command line, type ON followed by a period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
ON.U;<unit id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type a value for unit ID followed by the period separator.

3 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

If you do not enter an agency, the agency defaults to your working agency.

Use the UP identifier (yes|NO} to indicate that the jurisdictional assignments of the personnel
should be used. If there are multiple users, then the assignment of the first assigned user is used.

4 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne CAD places the specified unit on duty, the unit status monitor is updated with the unit
ID.
Examples:
To place 1A12 on duty with officer MJones in Area 1:
ON.1A12.UD;MJones.A;Area1
To display the ON form for officer1:
ON.officer1.Y

CAD-to-CAD and On Duty Transactions

NOTE:
Temporary units are not considered for CAD-to-CAD On Duty transactions until they are
transitioned to normal units.

When you place one of your Local Agency units on duty and your Local Agency has provisioned the
Send unit menu, Local Agency Settings option, PremierOne transfers that unit to the specified
Foreign CAD system via an On Duty transfer message.

Troubleshooting On Duty Transfer Messages for a Foreign Agency Unit

When PremierOne receives an On Duty transfer message for a Foreign Agency unit, PremierOne
checks the Receive unit status updates for units from this agency field provisioning setting on the
Interface menu, Foreign Agency Settings option:

• If the provisioning setting is checked, then PremierOne continues processing this message.

• If the provisioning setting is not checked, then PremierOne does not process the message and
shows an error message stating that the On Duty transaction failed. The message states that the
agency of the unit is not provisioned to receive Unit Status Update messages from the external
system

Send Feedback 317

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

PremierOne checks the current Validate unit ID setting on the Unit Management menu, Transactions
option, Transaction = On Duty for the agency:

• If the provisioning setting is checked and if the unit ID value is not provisioned as a valid Unit Call
Sign, then PremierOne does not process this record. PremierOne shows an error message stating
that the On Duty transaction failed and the unit is not a valid unit ID.

• If the provisioning setting is checked and if the Unit ID value is provisioned as a valid Unit Call Sign,
then PremierOne continues processing this message.

• If the provisioning setting is not checked, then PremierOne continues processing this message
because all unit IDs are considered valid as part of the provisioning setting.

The following conditions for On Duty Transfer messages for a foreign agency unit are also considered.

• If PremierOne cannot determine a Foreign Agency unit Agency ID the Organization Name plus the
Organization ID field values that are supplied with the On Duty transfer message then PremierOne
does not process the record. An error message states that the On Duty transaction failed and that
the unit agency cannot be determined.

• If a Foreign Agency unit Agency ID is not provisioned as a Foreign Agency, then PremierOne does
not process the record. PremierOne displays an error message stating that the On Duty transaction
failed and that the unit agency is not provisioned as a Foreign Agency.

• If the unit is already on duty, then PremierOne does not process the record. The error message
states that the On Duty transaction failed and the unit is already on duty.

• If the unit is not on duty, then PremierOne attempts to place the Foreign Agency unit on duty using
the on duty information supplied within the On Duty transfer message.

• If the {Agency ID} + {Unit ID} combination matches a Unit Preassignment record, then the Unit
Preassignment record is used to provide default values for any information that is not specified in the
On Duty transfer message.

• If the on duty information for the unit is insufficient or contains invalid data, and if that prevents the
unit from being placed on duty, then PremierOne does not process the record. For example, the area
or station assignment are invalid or missing. In this scenario, the resulting error message states that
the On Duty transaction failed and that the unit cannot be placed on duty because of missing or
invalid data.

• If the attempt to place the unit on duty fails for any other reason, then PremierOne does not process
the record and shows an error message stating that the On Duty transaction failed for unknown
reasons.

Taking Units Off Duty

You can take units off duty from the Unit Management form or using the Off Duty (UF) command. You
cannot take a unit off duty that is assigned to an incident; a message displays that the unit is placed in
deferred off duty status. After the unit clears from the incident, it is automatically taken off duty.

NOTE:
You can also take units off duty from a roll call. If you take a unit off duty using a roll call,
PremierOne CAD clears any activity code assigned the unit. For more information about using
roll calls to take units off duty, see Performing Roll Calls on page 362.

318 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Taking Units Off Duty From the Unit Management Form

You can take units off duty from the Unit Management Assignments form or from the command line. For
details on taking units off duty from the command line, see Taking Units Off Duty From the Command
Line (UF) on page 320.

To take a unit off duty from the Unit Management form:

1 On the command line, type UF with no additional identifiers, and then press Enter or F10.

The Assignments tab of the Unit Management form appears in the Primary Work Area. The Duty
subtab is automatically selected.

Figure 176: Taking a Unit Off Duty

2 In the Unit ID field, type the unit ID of the unit you want to take off duty.

To take more than one unit off duty, type each unit ID in the field separated by semi-colons with no
spaces; for example, Unit1;Unit2;Unit3.

3 In the Odometer field, type an ending odometer reading for the unit, if required.

4 Select the button for Off Duty.

5 Press F12.

Send Feedback 319

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Taking Units Off Duty From the Command Line (UF)

Use the Unit Off Duty (UF) command to take a unit off duty. If your agency does not require an odometer
reading, you can take multiple units off duty with the same command. For details on taking units off duty
from the form, see Taking Units Off Duty From the Unit Management Form on page 319.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

UF.U.OM
To take a unit off duty from the command line:

1 On the command line, type UF followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
UF.U;<unit id(s)>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the value for the unit ID. If your agency does not require an odometer reading,
you can take multiple units off duty by separating them with commas.

3 Enter the period separator followed by the odometer reading, if required.

4 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne CAD removes the unit from duty.

If an activity code was assigned to the unit, the timer or clock for the activity code automatically turns
off when you take the unit off duty.
Examples:
To take unit 1A12 off duty:
UF.1A12
To take unit 1A12 off duty and specify the odometer reading:
UF.1A12.4321

CAD-to-CAD and Off Duty Transactions

When you place one of your Local Agency units off duty and your Local Agency has provisioned the
Send unit status updates from this agency to the external system as checked in Provisioning,
PremierOne transfers that unit to the specified Foreign CAD system via an Off Duty transfer message.

Troubleshooting Off Duty Transfer Messages for a Foreign Agency Unit

When PremierOne receives an Off Duty transfer message for a Foreign Agency unit, PremierOne
checks the current Receive unit status updates for units from this agency field Provisioning setting.

• If the provisioning setting is checked, then PremierOne continues processing the message.

• If the provisioning setting is not checked, then PremierOne ignores the message.

320 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

When PremierOne processes an Off Duty transfer message for a Foreign Agency unit, PremierOne
checks the on duty status of the specified unit.

• If the unit is not on duty, then PremierOne ignores the message.

• If the unit is on duty, then PremierOne processes the transaction.

Updating Unit Status

You can view and update the status of a single unit from the Unit Management form or from the
command line. You can also update the statuses of multiple units assigned to the same incident.

Unit Status and Radio Pseudo-Units

You can apply all unit status codes to a radio pseudo-unit that are provisioned for the radio pseudo-unit
agency or agency type. You can update the unit status code of a radio pseudo-unit while the unit is
assigned to an incident or while the unit is not assigned to an incident.

A radio pseudo-unit can be cleared from its assigned incident at any time.

NOTE:
Dispositions are not used with radio pseudo-units.

Updating Unit Status From the Unit Management Form

You can view and update unit status from the Unit Management form or from the command line. For
details on using the command line, see Updating Unit Status From the Command Line (US) on
page 323.

To update a unit status from the Unit Management form, enter the US command on the command line
without any identifiers. You can update the status, activity code, disposition, location, odometer, and unit
comments from the form.

To update unit status from the Unit Management form:

1 On the command line, do one of the following:

• Type US and press Enter or F10.

The Unit Management Status form opens in the Primary Work Area with the Status tab active. In
the Unit ID field, type the ID of the unit whose information you want to retrieve and press F12.

• On the command line, type US.unitID and press F10.

Send Feedback 321

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

• On the command line, type unitID and press F11.

PremierOne CAD populates the Unit Management Status form with the unit information and
populates the Work Assist Area with the duty assignment information.

Figure 177: Unit Management Status Form in Primary Work Area and Duty Assignments in Work
Assist Area

2 Make any necessary changes.

Use the Unit Location section to indicate where the unit is located. The information entered here is
used to populate Last Known Loc (Location) fields on other forms.

If your system supports tracking officers out of vehicle, the Person Current State field in the Unit
Location section displays the status for the officer. You can change the status in the Person State
list to Based on Unit Status or Out of Veh. Based on Unit Status sets the in or out of vehicle
condition based on what is provisioned for the current unit status.

You can also manually change the status to out of vehicle using the US command with the
PRS;<person state {out|reset}> identifier (for example, US.U;UNIT1.PRS;OUT or
US.U;UNIT1.PRS;RESET). Reset changes the in or out condition based on what is provisioned for
the current unit status (in vehicle or out of vehicle).

322 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

To close the incident on which the unit is active, enter the disposition in the Disposition field.

NOTES:
When you clear the final standard resource unit from an incident, PremierOne CAD does one of
two things: if open incidents are not allowed, PremierOne CAD closes the incident based on the
rules enforced by disposition management; if open incidents are allowed, PremierOne CAD allows
the incident to remain open.

CAD also clears any radio pseudo-units.

Work Assist Area – Status Tab Unit Management Form

The Work Assist Area for the Status tab of the Unit Management form displays a summary of the On
Duty Assignment information. The jurisdiction, user name, user ID, vehicle, unit equipment, and rider
information also display in the Work Assist Area.

Updating Unit Status From the Command Line (US)

You can view and update a unit status from the Unit Management form or from the command line. For
details on using the Unit Management form, see Updating Unit Status From the Unit Management Form
on page 321.

You can update the status, activity code, disposition, location, comments, odometer, and indicate
whether to add the information to the unit history from the command line. If the units are all part of the
same agency, you can update the status of all units assigned to the same incident at the same time.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

US.U.US.D.WC.ACT.UL.ULD.CM.CMH.OM.PRS.CT.CPN.BL.ZP.SB
To update unit status from the command line:

1 On the command line, type US followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
US.U;<unit id(s)(!)>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 Do one of the following:

• To update the status of a single unit, type the unit ID of the unit whose information you want to
update.

• To update the status of all units on the incident, type an exclamation point ( ! ), followed by the ID
of any unit on the incident. You can use the ID of any unit on the incident; for example,
US.U;!1234. You cannot enter an odometer reading with the US command when multiple units
are specified on the command line, or if the unit ID is prefixed with an exclamation point.

3 Type the period separator.

Send Feedback 323

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

4 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

NOTES:
When you clear the final standard resource unit from an incident, PremierOne CAD does one of
two things: if open incidents are not allowed, PremierOne CAD closes the incident based on the
rules enforced by disposition management; if open incidents are allowed, PremierOne CAD allows
the incident to remain open.

CAD also clears any radio pseudo-units.

5 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne CAD updates the information.

Examples:
To change the status of unit 1234 and all the other units assigned to the same incident to arrived:
US.!1234.arrived
To change the status of unit 1234 from enroute to arrived:
US.1234.arrived
To change the status of unit 1234 and all the other units on an incident to clear, and to assign the
disposition of closed:
US.!1234.clear.closed
To change the status of unit 5C in agency PD, the status of unit 2B in your working agency, and unit 1A1
in agency FD to enroute:
US.PD/5C,PD/2B,FD/1A1.EN

Updating Unit Assignments

Unit assignment information consists of duty, jurisdiction, personnel, vehicle, unit equipment, and rider.
You can update assignment information from the Unit Assignment form or from the command line.

Updating Unit Assignments From the Unit Management Form

You can update unit assignment information from the Unit Management form or the command line. For
details on updating assignment information from the command line, see Updating Unit Assignments
From the Command Line (UA) on page 333.

To update a unit assignments from the Unit Management form:

1 On the command line, type UA followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
UA.U;<unit id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

324 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

2 At the cursor, type the value for the unit ID and press Enter or F10.

The Assignments tab for the unit opens in the Primary Work Area with the Duty tab as the active tab.

Figure 178: Unit Management – Assignments Tab

3 Make any necessary updates on the tabs and press F12.

Updating Duty Information From the Unit Assignments Form

Duty information consists of duty status, odometer reading, and assignment information.

To update duty information from the Unit Assignments form:

1 Open the Assignments tab of the Unit Assignments form.

For details, see Updating Unit Assignments From the Unit Management Form on page 324.

2 Select the Duty subtab.

Send Feedback 325

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Duty information appears.

Figure 179: Unit Assignments – Duty Subtab

3 Change the duty status: Off Duty or On Duty.

4 Enter the odometer reading of the unit when it goes on duty or goes off duty.

5 Do one of the following:

• At the bottom of the form, enter the required assignment information: areas, beats, user IDs,
vehicle ID, and rider. These fields are provided to allow you to quickly enter a limited set of
information found on the other subtabs.

• To exempt this unit from station staffing, select the Exempt from station staffing check box.
This field is available only when the unit is provisioned with a station staffing requirement. The
current Station Staffing level provisioned for this unit appears in the Work Assist Area. For more
information about station staffing, see Station Staffing on page 370.

• Select the Jurisdiction, Personnel, and Vehicle tabs and to enter the assignment information as
needed.

• To use permanent duty assignments, select the Reload Permanent button. Any assignment data
you manually added is not cleared.
NOTE
NOTE:
Your system administrator configures permanent settings. The unit may or may not have
permanent settings.

6 Press F12.

326 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Updating Jurisdiction Information From the Unit Assignments Form

Jurisdiction information consists of area, sector, and beats. You can view and update jurisdiction
information.

To update jurisdiction information from the Unit Assignments form:

1 Open the Assignments tab of the Unit Assignments form.

For details, see Updating Unit Assignments From the Unit Management Form on page 324.

2 Select the Jurisdiction subtab.

Figure 180: Unit Assignments – Jurisdiction Tab

3 To add areas, type a new area ID in the blank box below the last designated area. to add the new
area, press F12 or press Tab to create a new blank box so you can add another area.

4 Do any of the following:

• To load the permanent area assignments for the unit, select Reload Permanent at the bottom of
the Primary Work Area. Any areas you manually added are not cleared. When you load
permanent assignments, the Sector and Beat information displays in addition to the Area
information.

• To delete areas, sectors, or beats, place the cursor in the box containing the area, sector, or beat
that you want to delete, and use the keyboard to delete the information in the box. Then press
F12.

Send Feedback 327

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

• To change the order of the areas, select the area and then select one of the Move buttons at the
bottom of the Primary Work Area.

The order of areas is used for area-based recommendations. The one at the top of the list is
considered first in recommendations.

• To clear all areas, sectors, and beats from the form, select Clear at the bottom of the Primary
Work Area.

Updating Personnel Information From the Unit Assignments Form

Personnel information consists of the name, user ID, equipment type, and equipment ID.

To update personnel information from the Unit Assignments form:

1 Open the Assignments tab of the Unit Assignments form.

For details, see Updating Unit Assignments From the Unit Management Form on page 324.

2 Select the Personnel subtab.

Figure 181: Unit Assignments – Personnel Subtab

3 To load permanent personnel information for the unit, select Load Permanent at the bottom of the
Primary Work Area and press F12.

PremierOne CAD does not delete any personnel data that you manually add.

4 To add non-permanent personnel information:

a In the Agency ID field, type the ID for the agency to which the person belongs.

b In the User ID field, type the ID of the person.

328 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

c From the Equip Type list, select the type of equipment assigned to this person. You can add
multiple pieces of equipment by selecting a value in the Equip Type field, and then pressing Tab
to create new Equip Type and Equip ID fields.

NOTE:
If an asterisk ( * ) appears next to the name or the person at the top of their box, that
person has a vehicle assigned to them.

d In the Equip ID field, type the ID of the piece of equipment. IDs must be assigned to equipment
in Provisioning by your system administrator.

e From the Riding Position list, select the riding position assigned to this person. Riding positions
must be enabled and created in Provisioning by your system administrator.

f To create a set of boxes so you can add additional personnel information, press F12 or press
Tab.

5 To delete personnel information, select the delete icon next to the name at the top of the person
information box. Then press F12.
NOTE
NOTE:
Any personnel data you manually added is not deleted when you select Load Permanent. If
there is a vehicle assigned to the personnel, the vehicle data is populated on the Vehicle
subtab.

Updating Vehicle Information From the Unit Assignments Form

When making a vehicle assignment, you can select one of the unit pre-assigned vehicles or to specify
an alternative vehicle for the unit on-duty assignment. Vehicle information consists of the person to
whom the vehicle is assigned, the agency ID, and the vehicle ID.

To update vehicle information from the Unit Assignments form:

1 Open the Assignments tab of the Unit Management form.

For details, see Updating Unit Assignments From the Unit Management Form on page 324.

Send Feedback 329

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

2 Select the Vehicle subtab.

Figure 182: Unit Assignments – Vehicle Subtab

3 To load permanent vehicle information for the unit, select Load Permanent at the bottom of the
Primary Work Area and press F12.

4 To add non-permanent/alternative vehicle information:

a In the Agency ID field, type the ID for the agency to which the vehicle belongs.

b In the Vehicle ID field, type the ID of the vehicle. Your system administrator provisions Vehicle
IDs.

5 To add the new vehicle, press F12.

Updating Unit Equipment Information From the Unit Assignments Form

Unit equipment information consists of the Agency ID, equipment type, and equipment ID for equipment
assigned to the unit.

To update unit equipment information from the Unit Assignments form:

1 Open the Assignments tab of the Unit Assignments form.

For details, see Updating Unit Assignments From the Unit Management Form on page 324.

330 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

2 Select the Unit Equip subtab.

Figure 183: Unit Assignments – Unit Equip Subtab

3 To load permanent equipment information for the unit, select Load Permanent at the bottom of the
Primary Work Area and press F12.

Any equipment data you manually add is not deleted.

4 To load non-permanent equipment information:

a In the Agency ID field, type the ID for the agency to which the equipment belongs.

b From the Equip Type list, select the type of equipment assigned to this unit.

c In the Equip ID field, type the ID of each piece of equipment.

d Do one of the following:

- To add the new equipment, press F12.

- To create a set of boxes so you can add equipment information, press Tab.

Updating Capability Information From the Unit Assignments Form

Capability information consists of the personnel assigned, on-duty capabilities, and on-duty skills.

To update capability information from the Unit Assignments form:

1 Open the Assignments tab of the Unit Assignments form.

For details, see Updating Unit Assignments From the Unit Management Form on page 324.

Send Feedback 331

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

2 Select the Capability subtab.

Figure 184: Unit Assignments – Capability Subtab

The Capability subtab lists all the provisioned capabilities provisioned by your System Administrator
plus any changes made to on-duty vehicle assignments on the Vehicle subtab.

PremierOne CAD groups Capabilities by their provisioned response category and the response
categories are ordered alphabetically. Within each response category, capabilities are sorted by: 1)
capabilities that do not allow numeric entry, and 2) capabilities that allow numeric entry.

The Personnel Assigned field at the top of the form is calculated from the number of personnel
assigned to the unit. You can manually change this value to temporarily remove or add crew
members without having to physically change the personnel assigned to the unit. For example, a
crew member might need to be away from the unit for a short time such as when a paramedic
assigned to an engine rides with an ambulance to the hospital. The number of personnel is important
for agencies that use personnel counts within recommendations.

3 Make the necessary changes to the number of personnel assigned, the capabilities that allow
numeric entry, and/or the quantity of on-duty skills.

4 Press F12.

332 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Updating Unit Assignments From the Command Line (UA)

You can update unit assignment information from the Unit Management form or the command line. For
details on updating assignment information from the command line, see Updating Unit Assignments
From the Unit Management Form on page 324.

You can update the station ID, area, sector, and beat from the command line.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

UA.U.ST.A.S.B.SE
To update a unit assignments from the command line:

1 On the command line, type UA followed by the period separator.

2 At the cursor, type the unit ID followed by the period separator.

3 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

4 Press Enter or F10.

Examples:
To change the area for unit 1a12 to AR1:
UA.1a12.A;AR1
To change the status for unit 1a12 to arrived:
UA.1a12.arr

Temporarily Changing Station Staffing for a Unit

If a unit is provisioned as a station-staffed unit, you can exempt it temporarily from station staffing or
reverse the exemption and include the unit in station staffing from the command line.

To temporarily change station staffing for a unit:

1 On the command line, type UA followed by the period separator.

2 At the cursor, type the unit ID followed by the period separator.

3 At the cursor, type SE (station exempt) followed by the period separator.

4 Take one of the following actions:

• To exempt the unit from station staffing, at the cursor type Y.

• To reverse the exemption and include the unit as a station-staffed unit in station staffing, at the
cursor type N.

NOTE:
If you take the exempt unit off duty and place it back on duty, the unit reverts to its non-
exempt status and thus is included as a station-staffed unit.

Send Feedback 333

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

CAD-to-CAD and Unit Status Updates

For a CAD system to efficiently recommend units that are managed on external systems, the CAD
system shares all status updates in a timely manner.

Unit Status Update (USU) messages between CAD systems recognize your Local Agency default
“Busy” unit status code, and the provisioned submitting agency.

• PremierOne sends unit status and ARL updates for all Local Agency units to external systems as
each unit status update occurs.

• PremierOne receives unit status updates and ARL data for all Foreign Agency units from external
systems and applies the updates and data to your local CAD system.

• PremierOne transfers all unit status updates and ARL data for Local Agency units to an external
system at regular intervals defined in Provisioning by your agency.

• As a PremierOne user, you are not responsible for updating the unit status of Foreign Agency units
that are assigned to Local Agency incidents. Each agency is responsible for updating their own unit
statuses as part of the USU message even when these units are assigned to mutual aid incidents.

• If your agency requires dispositions for Local Agency incidents, PremierOne uses your Local Agency
default disposition on secondary incidents.

• PremierOne places Foreign Agency units into the default “Busy” unit status code when you assign
the unit to a Foreign Agency incident.

• When PremierOne sends unit status updates from your agency, PremierOne uses the submitting
agency that is provisioned.

PremierOne does not process unit status update messages that are applied to a temporary unit.

Transferring Units
There is no Unit Transfer command, but you can easily transfer a unit using the following procedure:

To transfer a unit:

1 Display the unit by doing one of the following:

• Issue the US command with the unit number.

For details, see Displaying and Updating Incidents From the Incident Management Form on
page 245 or Updating Incidents From the Command Line (IU) on page 266.

• Issue the UC command, selecting the unit, and then displaying the unit.

For details, see Creating an Incident Summary List on page 290.

2 Enter the new jurisdictional coordinates and submit the record.

The unit is transferred. The unit retains its original number.

334 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Viewing Unit History

Use the Unit History (UH) command to show the history for a specific unit. You can use the UH
command without identifiers to open the Unit History Search form and enter search criteria, or you can
use the UH command with the search criteria entered as identifiers. Using identifiers can help narrow
your search.

Viewing Unit History From the Unit History Search Form

You can view unit history from the Unit Search form or from the command line. For details on viewing
unit history from the command line, see Viewing Unit History From the Command Line (UH) on
page 337.

To view unit history from the Unit History Search form:

1 On the command line, type UH and press Enter or F10.

The Unit History Search form appears.

Figure 185: Unit History Search Form

2 Enter the search criteria in the form. You can search by Agency ID, Unit ID, Date, and Time.

To retrieve all the matching records from your specified start date and time to your specified end date
and time, select Inclusive.

Send Feedback 335

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

To retrieve all the matching records from your specified start date to your specified end date within
the start time and end time for each day, select Restrictive.
NOTE
NOTE:
CAD returns a maximum of the 250 newest records. To refine your search, change the values
for the following fields. Date From – If you do not use a values for the Date From field, CAD
defaults to the current day only. Time From – If you do not use values for the Time From and
the Time To fields, CAD defaults to 00:00 for the Time From and the current time for the
Time To. Time To – Time range (Inclusive |Restrictive).

3 When finished entering search criteria, press F12.

The results display in the Unit History form.

Figure 186: Unit Search Results

4 After you have the results, do any of the following:

• To filter the results by type of unit transaction, select the filter from the Filter by field.

• To print the Unit History, select Print at the bottom of the Primary Work Area.

• To view an incident, select the incident you want to view, and select View Incid at the bottom of
the form.

The incident you select displays in the Primary Work Area. The display is shaded blue to indicate
that the incident information is an overlay of the screen that was displayed. To scroll through the
incidents, use the Up and Down arrows in the upper right-hand corner of the window. You can
make updates while in the view mode (enter the information and press F12).

To return to your original work area, select the X above the Work Assist Area or press the Esc
key.

336 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Unit History Transaction Types

The following table shows the types of transactions that can display in the Unit History:

Transaction Explanation

ACT PLAN Activated plan change

DPTCH Dispatch actions

INC CREATE Incident created

ON DUTY On duty

PRIM UNIT Primary unit

UNIT MANG Unit management actions

UNIT STAT Unit status actions

Viewing Unit History From the Command Line (UH)

You can view unit history from the command line or from the Unit History form. For details on viewing
unit history from the form, see Viewing Unit History From the Unit History Search Form on page 335.

You can search for unit history by the incident number the unit is assigned to or by unit ID.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

UH.U.I.UD.DF.N.TF.TT.TI
A value for unit or incident is required.

To view unit history from the command line:

1 On the command line, type UH followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
UH.<unit id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 Enter the unit or incident ID followed by separators, identifiers, and values for the additional
information.

3 Press Enter or F10.

NOTE
NOTE:
CAD returns a maximum of the 250 oldest records. To refine your search, change the values
for the following fields. Date From – If you do not use a values for the Date From field, CAD
defaults to the current day only. Time From – If you do not use values for the Time From and
the Time To fields, CAD defaults to 00:00 for the Time From and the current time for the
Time To. Time To – Time range (Inclusive |Restrictive).

PremierOne CAD displays the Unit Search Result form in the Primary Work Area using the search
criteria that you entered. For details on filtering the display and transaction types, see Viewing Unit
History From the Unit History Search Form on page 335.

Send Feedback 337

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Examples:
To display the unit history for unit 1a12:
UH.1a12
To display the unit history for unit 1a12 since 1/1/2009:
UH.1a12.DF;1/1/2009

Displaying Current Unit Activities

Use the Unit Current Activities (UC) command to display a list of the current activities for all on and/or
off-duty units; this list is also called a unit summary. You can use the UC command without identifiers to
display a list of all units in your signed on coverage group, or you can use the UC command with
identifiers to limit the display of the units that are retrieved. Using identifiers can help narrow your
search. When you submit the command with identifiers, you control the various criteria of the units that
display, such as agency area, sector, and beat.

The UC command displays information similar to the information in the Unit status monitor, but you can
filter the search criteria by areas, agency, coverage groups, station IDs, sectors, and beats in a single
command.

Displaying Unit Current Activities From the Unit Summary Form

You can view unit summaries from the form or from the command line. For details on viewing summaries
from the command line, see Displaying Unit Current Activities From the Command Line (UC) on
page 340.

To display the current activities of units from the Unit Summary form:

1 On the command line, type UC and press Enter or F10.

A list of all units in your signed on coverage group displays.

The unit ID, location, time in status, vehicle equipment, unit equipment, vehicle number, and unit
location display. If a unit is active on an incident, the incident number and type also display. If
provisioned, icons display in the UE (Unit Equipment) and VF (Vehicle Flag) columns indicating the
vehicle equipment (such as AVL-equipped) and type of vehicle (such as primary unit with one
person).

338 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

By default, the first row is selected. The default sort order is first by area and then unit ID, but you
can sort by any of the columns by selecting the column header.

Figure 187: Unit Current Activities in Primary Work Area

2 Do any of the following:

• To expand unit information, using the mouse, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of the jurisdiction
for the unit. Using the keyboard, use the arrow keys to select the row containing the unit and
press Enter or F10.

• To view the unit assignment details, select the unit and select the View Unit button. The Unit
Management form appears.

• To view the incident details for the incident the unit is assigned to, select the unit and select the
View Incid button. The View Incid button is enabled only if the selected unit is active on an
incident.

The incident you select displays in the Primary Work Area. The display is shaded blue to indicate
that the incident information is an overlay of the screen that was displayed. You can make
updates while in the view mode (enter the information and press F12).

To return to your original work area, select the X above the Work Assist Area or press the Esc
key.

• To show off duty units, Select the Show Off Duty check box.

NOTES:
The only searches that work with the Show Off Duty check box selected are searches based on
Agency or Unit ID.

Send Feedback 339

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

3 To refine the search, select the Agency ID and the field you want to search by, and then enter the
appropriate values if desired (such as areas).If you do not enter any values, PremierOne CAD
returns all values.

PremierOne CAD displays a new set of results based on your refined search criteria.
Example:
If you search on Signed On Coverage Areas and you do not enter any values, CAD returns all
signed on coverage areas.

Displaying Unit Current Activities From the Command Line (UC)

You can view unit summaries from the form or from the command line. For details on viewing summaries
from the command line, see Displaying Unit Current Activities From the Command Line (UC) on
page 340.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

UC.A.S.B.ST.CG.U.V.SOF
To display the current activities of units from the command line:

1 On the command line, type UC followed by separators, identifiers, and values for the additional
information.

2 Press Enter or F10.

If you entered the command without identifiers, PremierOne CAD displays a list of all units in your
signed on coverage group. If you used identifiers, PremierOne CAD displays a list of units that meet
the criteria you entered. For details on the form display, see Displaying Unit Current Activities From
the Unit Summary Form on page 338.
Examples:
To see all the units covering AR1 in agency DC:
UC.A;DC/AR1
To see all the units covering all the areas for agency DC:
UC.A;DC/

340 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Displaying Lineup Lists

Use the Line Up List (LL) command to display a list of all units patrolling in a specific area of an agency.
You can use the LL command without identifiers to display a list of all units in your signed on coverage
areas, or you can use the LL command with identifiers to limit the list of units that are retrieved. When
you submit the command with identifiers, you control the area, sector, beat, station ID, and/or coverage
groups to include in the list.

Displaying Lineup Lists From the Lineup List Form

You can search for and display a lineup list from the Lineup List form or from the Lineup List command.
For details on displaying a list from the command line, see Displaying Lineup Lists From the Command
Line (LL) on page 342.

To display a lineup list from the Lineup List form:

1 On the command line, type LL and press Enter or F10.

The Lineup List form appears. By default a list of units in your signed on coverage areas.

Figure 188: Lineup List

2 Select the Agency ID and the field you want to search by, and then enter the appropriate values if
desired (such as areas). If you do not enter any values, PremierOne CAD returns all values.

3 Press F12.

The matching records display. The User Name, User ID, Unit ID, Vehicle ID, Jurisdiction, and
Agency ID display. To sort the list, select the column header you want to sort by.

The total number of records found displays in the status message area.

Send Feedback 341

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

4 To view the details for a unit, double-click the unit or select the unit and select the View Unit button.

The unit details display.

Figure 189: Lineup List – View Unit

You can scroll through the lineup list using the Up and Down arrows above the Work Assist Area. To
clear the overlay, press F5. To close the display and return to the lineup list, select the X to the right
of the Up and Down arrows. To refine the search, select, or enter the search criteria on the Lineup
List screen and press F12.

Displaying Lineup Lists From the Command Line (LL)

You can search for and display a lineup list from the Lineup list form or from the LineUp List command.
For details on displaying a list from the form, see Displaying Lineup Lists From the Lineup List Form on
page 341.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

LL.A.S.B.ST.CG
To display a lineup list from the command line:

1 On the command line, type LL followed by the period separator.

2 Type the appropriate command identifiers.

<agency ID>/ Displays all units for a specific agency.

<agency ID>/<area> Displays all units for a specific agency/area.

342 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

If you do not enter a jurisdiction, then the units in your coverage areas display.

3 Press Enter or F10.

The results display. For details on the form display, see Displaying Lineup Lists From the Lineup List
Form on page 341.
Examples:
To display the lineup list for agency DC:
LL.DC/
To display the lineup list for beat 07:
LL.B;dc/dcn7

Using Temporary Units

Use the temporary unit assignment for law units that are not officially on duty but are needed during
off-hour times. Temporary units can receive assignments without being placed on duty with the US
command.

Temporary units assignment is designed for officers who take vehicles home or are not required to
report to the communications center. Agencies can place these officers on calls or administrative
assignments after their normal duty time. If emergencies necessitate calling in these officers after hours,
this feature allows them to come on duty without appearing in a roll call or without using the ON
command or form.

Temporary units are not associated with a personnel number.

NOTE:
The temporary unit feature cannot be used with call stacking.

Designating Temporary Units

You designate a temporary unit from the command line using the asterisk.

To designate a temporary unit:

Type an asterisk ( * ) before the unit ID on the command line.

For example, to dispatch temporary unit 1A12 to incident #34:

ID.#34.*1A12
NOTE
NOTE:
The asterisk is required for the initial status but is not necessary for subsequent actions
performed with the unit, such as unit status updates or taking the unit off duty.

Temporary units display a Temp icon in the Assignments tab – Duty subtab (see Figure 190).

For a list of commands that can be used with temporary units, see Valid Commands for Temporary
Units on page 344.

Send Feedback 343

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Assigning Incident Numbers to Temporary Units

If you use a temporary unit with the Field Initiate (F7) key or command (FI), PremierOne CAD places the
unit on duty in the working agency PCW (Police City Wide) area and not in the area where the incident is
occurring. If you dispatch a temporary unit to a pending incident or initiate an incident with a temporary
unit assigned, PremierOne CAD places the temporary unit on duty in the area in which the incident is
occurring.

You can use the Unit Management form to update coverage areas for a unit at any time.

PremierOne CAD determines incident numbers for temporary units that are dispatched using the Field
Initiate (F7) key or command (FI) based on the current address verification setting, as follows:

• If address verification is enabled, incident numbers are determined from the unit location.

• If address verification is disabled, incident numbers are determined from your working agency.

• If address verification is disabled, and the temporary unit agency is used with the Field Initiate (F7)
key or command (FI), incident numbers are determined from the temporary unit agency.

• If address verification is disabled and the temporary unit is not from the working agency, incident
numbers are determined from the temporary unit agency.

Valid Commands for Temporary Units

You can use the following commands for temporary units. Most of the commands are incident-related
commands.

• Field Initiate (FI)

• Free Units from Incidents (FR)

• Incident Dispatch (ID)

• Incident Initiate (II)

• Unit Status (US)

• Unit Exchange (UX)

All of the identifiers that are valid for these commands are also valid when using the temporary unit
feature.

Temporary units are not associated with a personnel number, so no officer information is available for
reporting purposes.

If a temporary unit belongs to an agency that is different than the signon agency, the non-signon agency
can be designated in one of two ways:

• By placing an asterisk ( * ) before the agency ID and a forward slash ( / ) after the agency ID on the
command line; for example, *SO/1A12

• By placing an asterisk after the slash and before the unit ID; for example, SO/*1A12

344 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Transitioning Temporary Units to On Duty Status

Temporary units contain a Transition to normal Unit check box on the Duty sub tab of the Assignments
tab. You use this check box to change the status of a temporary unit to on duty.

NOTE:
If your agency is provisioned so that all unit IDs must be predefined, then only those temporary
units that are on that list can be made permanent. For example, *AC12 cannot be made an on
duty unit unless AC12 is already a defined unit ID.

To transition a temporary unit to On Duty status:

1 Display the unit status form for the unit.

For instructions, see Updating Unit Status on page 321.

2 Click the Assignments tab.

3 Select the Transition to normal Unit check box.

Figure 190: Transition To Normal Unit Check Box

4 Press F12.

Send Feedback 345

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Using Roll Calls

Roll calls are groups of units that are related by shift (time of duty). Roll calls are useful if an agency
uses the same lineups on a consistent basis. You can use the roll call to place a list of units on duty or off
duty as a group.

Creating Roll Calls

You create a roll call, or a list of units, so you can manage multiple units on/off duty status and
assignments as a group.

To create a roll call:

1 On the command line, type RC and then press Enter or F10.

The Roll Call Summary form appears in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 191: Roll Call Summary Form

2 To create a roll call based on an existing roll call, select the existing roll call, and then click Set Like.

A master roll call record containing all the same data as the highlighted roll call except the Roll Call
ID, Roll Call Description, and scheduling information appears. The remaining unit assignment
information may be updated later.

346 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

3 To create a roll call, click Create New.

The Create New Roll Call form appears.

Figure 192: Create New Roll Call Form

4 From the Agency ID field, select the agency for the roll call.

After you add one or more units to the Roll Call, this field becomes disabled. If you delete all of the
units, this field becomes enabled again.

If you change the Agency ID, the following fields are reinitialized to blank because their values may
be agency-specific: Default Shift ID, Activity Code, and Status.

5 In the Roll Call ID field, type a name for the roll call.

This field is the name that is used on the command line to refer to this roll call in the future.

6 In the Roll Call Description field, type a short description for the roll call.

7 If the majority of the units in the roll call use the same shift ID, select the shift ID from the Default
Shift ID list. You can indicate exceptions on the Units tab when you select the units for the roll call.

Shift IDs are defined in Provisioning under the Unit Management – Settings – Shift ID Codes item.

8 If the majority of the units in the roll call use the same activity code, select that code from the
Activity Code field. You can indicate exceptions on the Units tab when you select the units for the
roll call.

Activity codes categorize activity and time spent by units other than the time tracked by unit status
codes, such as special DUI patrols.

Activity Codes are defined in Provisioning under the Unit Management – Activity Codes item.

Send Feedback 347

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

9 Select a status from the Status field.

This field sets the status for all units in the roll call when the units go on duty. If you select the status
of Default, PremierOne CAD uses the provisioned Roll Call status when bringing units on duty using
this roll call.

10 In the Notify When Active field, type the email addresses of those people you want notified, if any,
when this roll call successfully becomes active.

11 In the Set Notification Priority for Active field, set the priority for the active email.

12 In the Notify on Error field, type the email addresses of those people you want notified when this
roll call fails or completes with errors.

13 In the Set Notification Priority for Error field, set the priority for the error email.

14 Continue with Selecting Units for a Roll Call on page 348, Managing Units in a Roll Call on page 351
and Scheduling Units in a Roll Call on page 354.

Selecting Units for a Roll Call

Select units for a roll call after you fill in the Roll Call – Master form.

To select units for a Roll Call:

1 Select the Units tab.

A blank Roll Call form appears in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 193: Blank Roll Call Units Form

348 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

2 In the Unit IDs field, type each of the unit IDs that should be associated with this roll call, in the
format <Agency ID><Call Sign><-Shift ID>. Separate each unit ID with a comma; for example, DC/
Unit1-AM,DC/Unit2-AM,DC/Unit3-AM.

The <Agency ID> is optional, however, every unit you add to the Roll Call must belong to the Roll
Call Agency ID specified on the Roll Call Summary tab.

The <-Shift ID> is optional.

3 Click Add Units.

All of your selected units appear in the Roll Call list in the Primary Work Area. The Work Assist Area
defaults to the Pre-Assign tab which shows any unit preassignments for the selected unit. The
heading area of the WAA displays the <Agency ID>/Call Sign><-Shift ID> for the selected unit
whether this information is shown in the Primary Work Area or not.

Figure 194: Roll Call Units In Primary Work Area and Pre-Assign Tab in Work Assist Area

Send Feedback 349

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

The Override tab displays any Roll Call-specific data that overrides the Unit Pre-Assignment data for
the selected unit, such as Unit Equipment that was assigned on the Unit Equip overlay in Manage
Units. (For more information, see Managing Units in a Roll Call on page 351.)

Figure 195: Roll Call Units In Primary Work Area and Override Tab in Work Assist Area

4 Select the Use Default Shift ID option to use the shift ID you selected in step 7 in Creating Roll
Calls.

This check box is only enabled for units that are added to the Roll Call without a Shift ID value.
These units are displayed as: <Agency ID>/Call Sign>; for example, DC/UNIT2 and are given the
Shift ID specified on the main Roll Call form/Create a New Roll Call form. Those units added with a
Shift ID value are displayed as: <Agency ID>/Call Sign><-Shift ID>; for example, DC/UNIT1-RCA.

5 Assign an activity code to each unit, if needed.

If you assigned an activity code to the roll call, the activity code you assign here overrides the one
you assigned in step 8 in Creating Roll Calls.

If you did not assign an activity code to the roll call, you can assign activity codes by unit here. This
field is the only place you can assign a different activity code within a roll call.

6 Continue with Managing Units in a Roll Call on page 351 and Scheduling Units in a Roll Call on
page 354.

350 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Managing Units in a Roll Call

Manage units in a roll call to change their jurisdiction, personnel, vehicle information, unit equipment, or
capabilities.

CAUTION:
The Roll Call can only be saved by pressing F12 from the main Roll Call form. The roll call cannot
be saved from within any of the Manage Units overlay forms. Return to one of the tabs of the
main Roll Call form to submit your changes.

To manage units in a Roll Call:

Select the unit you want to manage from the list so that it is highlighted, and then click Manage Unit
at the bottom of the screen.

An overlay appears with tabs for Jurisdiction, Personnel, Vehicle, Unit Equip, and Capability. The
Personnel overlay displays by default when you press Manage Unit. If you have the Override pre-
assignment field checked, you can navigate through the fields on these overlays using your Tab
key.
NOTE
NOTE:
You can use the Tab key to move from field to field on any of the tabs: Jurisdiction, Personnel,
Vehicle, or Unit Equip. Use the Shift key to select the Override pre-assignment check box
when it is highlighted.

By default, a unit is placed on duty by a roll call using the assignment data as provisioned within Unit
Preassignments. While the unit is associated with a roll call, the unit assignment data entered on the
roll call overrides the unit preassignment data when brought on duty or updated by the roll call.

• The Jurisdiction overlay is where you modify jurisdictions, such as the absence of an area, beat,
or sector.

Figure 196: Roll Call – Jurisdiction Overlay

Send Feedback 351

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

• The Personnel overlay is where you modify personnel information, including agency ID, user ID,
equipment type, and equipment ID.

Figure 197: Overlay for Personnel

The personnel you enter remain in the order in which they were entered.

• The Vehicle overlay is where you modify vehicle information, including to whom the vehicle is
assigned, agency ID, and vehicle ID.

Figure 198: Overlay for Vehicle

352 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

• The Unit Equip overlay is where you modify unit equipment information, including agency ID,
equipment type, and equipment ID.

Figure 199: Overlay for Unit Equipment

Send Feedback 353

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Scheduling Units in a Roll Call

Schedule units in a roll call when you want to have the roll call take effect on a regular basis.

To schedule units in a Roll Call:

1 Schedule the roll call by doing the following:

a Select the Scheduling tab.

b From the list, select the schedule that most closely meets your needs.

Figure 200: Schedule Roll Call

354 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

New fields appear that correspond to your selection.

Figure 201: Schedule Roll Call With New Fields

c Enter information in the new fields.

2 From the Scheduled Action field, select the action, if any, to take at the scheduled date and time:
None, On Duty, or Update.

3 To enable the schedule, select the Schedule Enabled check box.

4 To temporarily disable the schedule without deleting the roll call, de-select the Schedule Enabled
check box.

The roll call and schedule remain intact, however the roll call does not automatically occur until you
select the Schedule Enabled check box again.

5 Select Save or press F12.

PremierOne CAD creates and schedules the roll call, and assigns the specified units. A summary of
the schedule appears in the Schedule Summary area.

Temporarily Updating the Next Occurrence of a Roll Call

When you want to make a temporary change to the next occurrence of a roll call without affecting any of
the other occurrences, you can update any of the elements of an existing roll call except the status and
the schedule on the Roll Call – Next form.
Example:
For one day only, because there is a playoff football game in your jurisdiction and you expect heavy
traffic and some drunk and disorderly conduct, you want to add extra units to the roll call.

Send Feedback 355

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

To temporarily update the next occurrence of a roll call:

1 Do one of the following:

• On the command line, type RC.<roll call ID> and press Enter or F10.

• On the command line, type RC and press Enter or F10.

PremierOne CAD displays the Roll Call Summary form in the Primary Work Area.

2 Select the Agency ID and Roll Call ID that you want to retrieve and press F12.

3 Select the roll call so it is highlighted, and then click View Next.

The Roll Call – Next form appears.

Figure 202: Next Occurrence of the Roll Call

4 Make the necessary changes to the Summary form and/or the Units form.

To abandon your changes, click Reload Master to reload your master information.

The fields that can be modified on this form include the following:

• Action

(None) – Used if Roll Call data is just being updated, and there is no action to perform (for
example, a CAD user intends to manually action the changes later from the command line).

On Duty – Used if a new unit is being added to the Roll Call.

Update – Used if an on duty unit already on the Roll Call is having its assignments changed.

356 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

• Default Shift ID

For any units being added to the active Roll Call marked as using the Default Shift ID (for
example, where the Action is set to on duty), the units can be placed on duty with a different shift
ID from the existing on duty units by changing the Default Shift ID value.

Do not change this value if the action is Update, or you receive a transaction error. Existing on
duty units cannot have their shift ID changed.

• Activity Code

The Default Activity Code can be changed when adding units to the active Roll Call (for example,
with Action set to on duty) and when updating units already on duty on the active Roll Call (for
example, with Action set to Update).

• Status

For any units being added to the active Roll Call, such as where the Action is set to On Duty, they
can be taken on duty with a different default status from the existing on duty units by changing
the status value.

Changing the value of Status when the Action is Update does not give a transaction error, but
does not change the status of on duty units already on the Roll Call. This situation happens
because the Update action never changes the unit status.

5 On the Summary form, in the Action field, do one of the following:

• If you are going to put this roll call on duty now, select On Duty.

The Roll Call – Last form appears.

• If you are going to change the units that are already on duty, select Update.

Change the personnel for your fire units at shift change.

The Roll Call – Last form appears.

Updating the Last Occurrence of a Roll Call

The only field you can modify for the last occurrence of a roll call (the current roll call) is the Action field.
You can place the roll call In Service, Off Duty, or you can Fix errors. The default value is to Fix the
errors from the action you last performed.
Example:
If the last action you performed was an Update and errors occurred, the list in the Action field would
include these values in this order: Fix-Update, In Service, and Off Duty.

The In Service action completes bringing units on duty when the status that the units were brought on
duty with was a non-recommendable status (usually the Default status). When you perform the In
Service action, the units that were previously brought on duty and placed in a “Roll Call” status are now
placed in the provisioned “On Duty” status and are now recommendable.

To update the last occurrence of a roll call:

1 On the command line, type RC and then press Enter or F10.

PremierOne CAD displays the Roll Call Summary form in the Primary Work Area.

Send Feedback 357

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

2 Select the Agency ID and Roll Call ID that you want to retrieve and press F12.

3 Select the roll call so it is highlighted, and then click View Last.
NOTE
NOTE:
The View Last button is enabled only when a roll call record is highlighted and at least one
action as been performed on the roll call.

The Roll Call – Last form appears.

Figure 203: Last Occurrence of the Roll Call (Current Roll Call)

4 From the Action field, select the action you want to take: Fix, In Service, or Off Duty.

If you select Fix, PremierOne CAD performs the fix action using only the units associated with the
transaction errors that exist on the roll call.

If a transaction errors is the result of a roll call having been placed On Duty, when you perform the
Fix - On Duty action, PremierOne CAD attempts to place the units associated with the roll call
transaction errors on duty.

A fix may result in new transaction errors.

If you select In Service, PremierOne CAD changes the status of units associated with the roll call to
the provisioned On Duty status only when the associated unit is in the provisioned Roll Call status.
No errors are produced.

The Roll Call transaction status is provisioned as HQ (headquarters, a non-recommendable status).

The On Duty transaction status is provisioned as CL (clear, a recommendable status). You select In
Service. CAD changes all units in HQ status to CL.

358 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

If you select Off Duty, PremierOne CAD places the associated units off duty and logs transaction
errors against those units that could not be placed off duty because they were not in a status that
made them available to be taken off duty.

5 Press F12.

Modifying Master Roll Calls

You can modify any of the elements of an existing master roll call. When you perform this procedure, it
affects all future occurrences of the roll call.

To modify a master roll call:

1 Do one of the following:

• On the command line, type RC.<roll call ID> and press Enter or F10.

• On the command line, type RC and press Enter or F10.

PremierOne CAD displays the Roll Call Summary form in the Primary Work Area.

2 Select the Agency ID and Roll Call ID that you want to retrieve and press F12.

3 Select the roll call so it is highlighted, and then click View Master.

The Roll Call – Master form appears.

Figure 204: Roll Call Summary Form In Primary Work Area

4 Make any necessary changes to the Summary, Units, and/or the Scheduling forms.

5 Press F12.

Send Feedback 359

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Fixing Transaction Errors in Roll Calls

When you put a new roll call on duty, update the next occurrence of a roll call, or modify a master roll
call, a transaction error can occur. A list of transaction errors appears in the Roll Call Summary form in
the Work Assist Area.

Figure 205: Roll Call Transaction Errors List

360 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

To fix roll call transaction errors:

1 Select the transaction error you want to fix, and then select Fix Error.

An overlay appears in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 206: Overlay for Jurisdiction

The overlay is specific to the error you selected.

• The Jurisdiction overlay is where you modify jurisdictions, such as the absence of an area, beat,
or sector.

• The Personnel overlay is where you modify personnel information, including agency ID, user ID,
equipment type, and equipment ID.

• The Vehicle overlay is where you modify vehicle information, including to whom the vehicle is
assigned, agency ID, and vehicle ID.

• The Unit Equip overlay is where you modify unit equipment information, including agency ID,
equipment type, and equipment ID.

2 Fix the error, and then select Save.

3 Apply all fixes by performing the Fix action from the last occurrence of the roll call.

Send Feedback 361

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Performing Roll Calls

You can perform roll calls from the Roll Call form or from the command line.

Performing Roll Calls From the Roll Call Form

You can perform roll calls from the Roll Call form or from the command line. For details on activating roll
calls from the command line, see Performing Roll Calls From the Command Line (RC) on page 362

To perform a roll call from the Roll Call form:

1 On the command line, type RC and press Enter or F10.

2 Select the Agency ID and Roll Call ID that you want to retrieve and press F12.

PremierOne CAD displays the Roll Call Summary form in the Primary Work Area.

3 From the Transaction list, select the action:

• On duty – Place the units in the roll call on duty and assign the status code associated to the roll
call and defined by the agency.

Use this option for a single-step process. The result of this process is identical to placing a unit
on duty for each unit within the roll call.

• In Service – Place the units in the roll call into the on duty status as defined by the agency.

Use this option for the second step in a two-step process to bring units on duty by making them
available for dispatchers.

• Off Duty – Take the units in the roll call off duty.

• Update – Update the roll call.

4 Press F12.

Errors may occur because a unit is already on duty or not found; there is a jurisdiction-related or
vehicle-related error; and so on. PremierOne CAD gives you the opportunity to fix the error by
selecting the error and selecting Fix Error at the bottom of the Work Assist Area.

After you correct all the errors, perform the appropriate Fix action for the roll call.

Performing Roll Calls From the Command Line (RC)

You can perform, update, and delete roll calls from the command line. For details on activating roll calls
from the form, see Performing Roll Calls From the Roll Call Form on page 362.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

RC.RC.DS.ACT.US.AC

362 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

To perform a roll call from the command line:

1 On the command line, type RC followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
RC.RC;<agency/roll call name>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

The following list describes the options for the action (AC) identifier.

• O – On duty: Place the units in the roll call on duty in a clear status or in a “Roll Call” status until
brought In Service (dictated by the status of the roll call).

• I – In Service: Place the units in the roll call into the on duty status as defined by the agency.

Use this option for the second step in a two-step process to bring units on duty by making them
available for dispatchers.

• F – Off Duty: Take the units in the roll call off duty.

• U – Update: Update the roll call.

The following information applies the unit status (US) identifier:

• The unit status (US) identifier accepts the DEFAULT value. PremierOne CAD applies your
agency provisioned unit status for roll calls when you specify DEFAULT.

• The US identifier is required only if the action (AC) identified is entered as “O” (on duty). When
the AC identifier is specified as an “update,” “in service,” or “off duty” action, the unit status is
ignored. If the US identifier is set to DEFAULT when performing an on duty action, then the status
for units being brought on duty is set to your agency provisioned On Duty status.

3 Press Enter or F10.

Using Unit Groups

Unit groups are temporary groups of units that you create so you can manage the group as a single unit.

For example, it might be necessary to treat a Tactical Response Group responding to a hostage
situation as one unit to easily track status changes, incident updates, and other incident-related
comments and information. You can group Unit1, Unit3, Unit5, and SGT2 together and manage them all
as TAC1.When the incident is over, the group can easily be disbanded to allow the tracking of individual
units again.

Send Feedback 363

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Creating Unit Groups From the Unit Group Form

You can create units groups from the Unit Group form or from the command line. For details on creating
groups from the command line, see Creating Unit Groups From the Command Line (UG) on page 366.

Create a unit group when you want to temporarily manage a group of units as a single unit.

To create a unit group from the Unit Groups form:

1 On the command line, type UG, and then press Enter or F10.

The blank Unit Groups form appears in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 207: Blank Unit Groups Form

2 Select Form Group at the bottom of the Primary Work Area.

364 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

The Unit Groups form appears, displaying fields for the Group name, agency, and Unit IDs.

Figure 208: Unit Groups Form With Field For Unit

3 In the Name field, type a name for the group.

4 From the Agency list, select the agency for which you are creating a group.

5 In the Unit field, type the ID of the first unit for the group.

6 To add another Unit field, press Tab.

7 Repeat the previous steps until you have added all the units for your group.

8 In the Leader column, select the unit you want to be the leader of the group.

9 Press F12.

PremierOne CAD creates the group.

Work Assist Area – Unit Groups

The Work Assist Area for the Unit Groups form lists the following information:

• Name – Select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of the name to view group details.

• Type – Type of group.

• Incd # – Incident the group is assigned to. To view the incident, select the group and then select the
View Incd button. Unit groups are treated as a single group with regards to incident dispatching.

Send Feedback 365

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Creating Unit Groups From the Command Line (UG)

You can create units groups from the Unit Group form or from the command line. For details on creating
groups from the form, see Creating Unit Groups From the Unit Group Form on page 364.

Create a unit group when you want to temporarily manage a group of units as a single unit.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

UG.UG.AC.U
To create a unit group from the command line:

1 On the command line, type UG, followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
UG.UG;<agency/unit group name>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the name of the unit group, followed by the period separator.

3 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

4 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne CAD displays the Unit Groups form showing the information you specified.

366 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Modifying Unit Groups From the Unit Group Form

You can modify units groups from the Unit Group form or from the command line. For details on
modifying groups from the command line, see Modifying Unit Groups From the Command Line (UG) on
page 368.

After a group is created, you can add units and change the leader in a group from the Unit Groups form.

To modify a unit group from the Unit Groups form:

1 On the command line, type UG.<groupname> and then press Enter or F10.

The Unit Groups form appears in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 209: Unit Groups Form With Field For Unit

2 Do any of the following:

• To add a unit, enter the unit ID in the Unit box.

• To select a new leader, select the unit you want to be the leader in the Leader column.

• To delete a group, select Delete Group at the bottom of the window. All units must be in a clear
status or assigned to the same incident.

3 Press F12.

PremierOne CAD modifies the group.

Send Feedback 367

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Modifying Unit Groups From the Command Line (UG)

You can modify units groups from the Unit Group form or from the command line. For details on
modifying groups from the Unit Group form, see Modifying Unit Groups From the Unit Group Form on
page 367.

You can add units from a unit group, remove units from a unit group, and delete a unit group from the
command line.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

UG.UG.AC.U
To modify unit groups from the command line:

1 On the command line, type UG followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
UG.UG;<agency/unit group name>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the unit group name followed by the period separator.

3 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

4 Press Enter or F10.

Resetting a Unit Status Timer (UO)

Whenever a unit status changes, a new timer starts to track the amount of time the unit is in that status.
These timers alert you when a time limit is reached.

For example, a unit may be dispatched to a priority one (1) incident, placing the unit into a DS status. A
DS status for a priority one (1) incident may be set to time out in one minute. If the status does not
change in one minute, PremierOne CAD can be configured to change the color of the unit in the status
monitor or play a sound to alert the operator that the unit has not yet acknowledged receipt of the
incident.

When you change the unit status, the time is reset to the timer of the new status.

Timeouts can be used to prompt operators to perform certain tasks, such as a radio check when a unit is
on the scene of an incident for a certain amount of time. After the radio check, reset the status to start
the timer for the next radio check.

Use the Reset Unit Overdue Timers (UO) command to reset the timeout value for up to five overdue
units. Your system administrator defined the original timeout value. If you know that the unit situation
warrants extra time, however, you can reset the timeout value.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

UO.U.TO

368 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

To reset a unit status timer:

1 On the command line, type UO followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
UO.U;<unit id(s)>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the ID of the unit whose timer you want to reset, followed by the period separator.

3 Do one of the following:

• To reset the timer, type a new timeout value.

• To reset the timer to the default value, leave the TO identifier blank.

• To disable the timer, type a zero ( 0 ) for the value.

4 Press Enter or F10.

Resetting a Unit Emergency Indicator (RE)

Units equipped with Mobile Data Computers (MDCs) and radios may be capable of placing themselves
into an emergency status. When this situation occurs, all signed on operators monitoring the area where
the unit is working receive the emergency indicator at their workstation, and the map focuses to the
location of the unit.

After the situation is handled (refer to your agency Standard Operating Procedures for how to handle
these situations at your site) the operator resets emergency indicator to acknowledge the indicator.

Use the Reset Emergency Indicator (RE) command to disable the emergency indicators of units
activated through unit radios and MDCs.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

RE.U
To reset a unit emergency indicator from the command line:

1 On the command line, type RE followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
RE.U;<unit id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the ID of the unit whose emergency indicator you want to reset.

3 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne CAD resets the specified unit emergency indicator.

Send Feedback 369

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Example:
To reset the timer for unit 1A12:
RE.1A12

NOTE:
The RE command only accepts a Unit ID. When a mobile client is not logged on and sends the
emergency, a fake unit is created with the value EmergencyDeviceId. For example, if the
mobile client device ID is Dev022, use the command RE.Emergencydev022 to reset the unit
emergency status.

To reset a unit emergency indicator from the Reset Emergency Notifications dialog box:

1 On the command line, type RE and then press Enter or F10.

The Reset Emergency Notifications dialog box displays. All emergencies triggered by radios and
MDCs display.

If there are not any devices in emergency status, a notification message displays in the status
message area indicating there are not any emergency notifications.

Figure 210: Reset Emergency Notifications Dialog Box

2 Select the devices for which you want to clear the emergency status.

3 Click Reset.

The status is reset and the dialog box closes.

Station Staffing
Station staffing is designed to staff the station as opposed to each unit within the station. Station staffing
supports units that are staffed by a crew assigned to a station, referred to as a station-staffed unit, in
addition to units that are staffed with a dedicated crew.

370 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Example:
A fire agency has the following units and staffing levels:

Type of Units Normal Staffing Level

Ambulance or Medic 2 people

Water Tender or Tanker 2 people

Engine 4 or more people

Truck, Ladder 4 or more people

Rescue Engine 4 or more people

Fully staffing the example units would require a minimum of 16 personnel to be assigned to the station.
However, the agency chose to staff the station with only 4 personnel and all of the example units are
shared by the staff. Therefore, determining the combination of units that can be out of the station at the
same time depends on the actual number of personnel assigned to the station, in this case 4, along with
the actual number of personnel assigned to each unit upon dispatch. When there are insufficient
personnel left at the station to handle any more units, the remaining units become Unavailable Due
to Cross-Staffing.

Specialized Station-Staffed Units

In addition to the 2-person and 4-person units that a station’s crew shares, some stations also contain
specialized units, such as a HazMat truck. The specialized units are also shared with the crew, but must
be kept available at all times while in station regardless of whether any personnel are left in the station.

If a specialized unit is dispatched onto an incident while sufficient personnel are in the station,
PremierOne assumes that most (or all) of the personnel that are in the station will leave with the unit,
thereby causing the remaining units within the station to become Unavailable Due to Cross-
Staffing.

However, if the specialized unit is in the station while all of the station’s personnel are out with another
unit, the agency sends a crew from another station to pick up the specialized unit. Therefore, the
specialized unit must remain available while in the station.

Station Staffing Definitions

The following terms are used with station staffing.

• Blank ( --- ) - Stations are not being used. Blank is the default value.

• Full crew - This level represents station-staffed units that require a staffing of four or more
personnel. When a full crew unit dispatched, a full crew unit leaves the station depleted of any
additional personnel. Therefore, no other full or partial crew unit can be dispatched along with a
full crew unit.

Send Feedback 371

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

• Partial crew - This level represents station-staffed units that require a staffing of two personnel.
When a partial crew unit is the only unit dispatched, sufficient personnel remain in the station to
handle one additional station-staffed unit. Therefore, when one partial crew unit is dispatched,
one additional full crew or partial crew unit can be dispatched as well.

• Reserved - This level represents the specialized units that participate in station staffing activities,
such as a HazMat truck. The reserved unit is also shared with the crew, but must be kept
available at all times while it is in station regardless of whether any personnel are left in the
station. When you dispatch the reserved unit onto an incident while sufficient personnel are in the
station, PremierOne assumes most (or all) of the personnel who are in the station leave with the
unit, thus causing the remaining units within the station to become Unavailable Due to
Cross Staffing. However, if the reserved unit is in the station while all of the station’s
personnel are out with another unit, the agency sends a crew from another station to pick up the
specialized unit. For this reason, the specialized unit must remain available while in station. In
the Jurisdiction section, type the areas, sectors, and beats for the unit assignment for the unit.

Availability of Station-Staffed Units

PremierOne determines the availability of station-staffed units only when a station-staffed unit switches
between an In Station and an Out of Station status. PremierOne determines this status by the
provisioning settings for the current status of the unit.
Table 41: Availability of Station-Staffed Units

If the Unit Status is Provisioned as:

The Unit is Considered:
Category Unit in Station Checkbox

Acknowledged Checked or Unchecked Out of Station

Administrative Checked In Station

Unchecked Out of Station

Assigned Checked or Unchecked Out of Station

At Other Checked or Unchecked Out of Station

At Scene Checked or Unchecked Out of Station

Clear Checked In Station

Unchecked Out of Station

Enroute Checked or Unchecked Out of Station

Other Activity Checked or Unchecked Out of Station

To Other Checked or Unchecked Out of Station

The Administrative and In Station = Yes status allows an agency to temporarily place a station-
staffed unit in a status such as Out-of-Service without affecting any of the other station-staffed units.
Example:
If every station-staffed unit is currently available in station, those units are all in a Clear and In
Station status, making them all available for recommendation for an incident. However, the
ambulance within the station has become inoperable and must be temporarily placed Out-of-Service. By
provisioning the Out-of-Service status as Administrative and In Station = Yes, placing the

372 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

ambulance into this status does not affect any of the other units because the unit remains in an In
Station status. When the ambulance is repaired and placed back into a Clear and In Station
status, the status change keeps the unit in an In Station status and therefore does not affect the current
status of any other units.

Stations With Station-Staffed Units

Each time you place a station-staffed unit into an Out of Station or In Station status,
PremierOne reevaluates the status of every station-staffed unit within the station that is in a Clear, In
Station, or Unavailable Due to Cross-Staffing status. Therefore, you do not have to
provision the station to support Station Staffing. Instead, any station with two or more station-staffed
units automatically adheres to the Station Staffing rules.

Move Ups and Station-Staffed Units

When you move a station-staffed unit up to cover a station, PremierOne does not consider that unit to be
participating in Station Staffing activities at the Move Up station during this period. The crew assigned to
the moved up unit is considered a dedicated crew on that unit while covering another station and is not
allowed to be assigned to any of the other station-staffed units while covering another station.

Temporarily Staffing Station-Staffed Units

Under some circumstances, an agency may call in additional personnel to be a dedicated crew on a
particular station-staffed unit.
Example:
A fire station with station-staffed units is along the path of a parade route and the agency wants to place
a dedicated crew on the Medic unit during this event. When the Medic unit is dispatched, this dedicated
crew is the only personnel going out with the unit. When the Engine is dispatched, the dedicated crew
that is assigned to the Medic unit is not a part of the Engine crew. They stay behind with the Medic unit.
Because the Medic unit has its own dedicated crew during this event, the unit is no longer associated
with the station-staffed units. When the parade is over, the Medic crew goes back to its home station and
the Medic unit must be placed back into the set of station staffed units.

Normal and Minimum Staffing Levels

When PremierOne recommends a Full Crew unit while the station is at a Normal Staffing level,
PremierOne will not recommend any other Full Crew or Partial Crew units that are in an In Station
status from this station.

When PremierOne recommends a Partial Crew unit while the station is at a Normal Staffing level,
PremierOne checks the current status of the other station-staffed units from this station.

If Then

If one or more Full Crew units from this station are PremierOne will not recommend any other Full Crew or
currently Out of Station, Partial Crew units that are in an In Station status from
this station.

Send Feedback 373

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

If Then

If one or more Partial Crew units from this station PremierOne will not recommend any other Full Crew or
are currently Out of Station, Partial Crew units that are in an In Station status from
this station.

If no other Partial Crew or Full Crew unit from this PremierOne allows either:
station is currently Out of Station,
• One additional Full Crew unit to be recommended from
this station, or

• One additional Partial Crew unit to be recommended

from this station

A Reserved unit can always be recommended from a station in which Full Crew and Partial Crew units
are being recommended. However, once a Reserved unit is recommended while the station is at a
Normal Staffing level, PremierOne will not recommend any other Full Crew or Partial Crew units that are
in an In Station status from this station.

Station Status Command

Using the station status command, you can alter the staffing level of a station between normal and
minimum. (For more information about normal and minimum staffing levels, see Normal and Minimum
Staffing Levels on page 373.) You can also use the station status command to open the Station Status
form and view the current staffing level of one or more stations.

PremierOne ignores any agency that does not use stations when processing the station status
command. This way, if you are currently signed on to cover Law and Fire agencies, you can execute the
station status command for their signed on coverage areas without receiving an error due to the Law
agencies not using stations.

374 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Viewing the Staffing Level of a Station From the Station Status Form
You can view staffing levels from the Station Status form. To change the staffing levels, use the
command line. To use the command line, see Changing or Viewing the Staffing Level of a Station From
the Command Line (ST) on page 376.

To view the staffing level of a station from the Station Status form:

1 Display the form by performing one of the following actions:

• To display the Station Status form filtered by your signed on coverage areas, type ST on the
command line. Press Enter.

• To display the Station Status form filtered by station IDs and stations you specify, type
ST.ST;<agency/station id(s)>.

Figure 211: Station Status Form

2 From the Search By list, select the criteria on which you want to search.

You can select Signed On Coverage Areas, Agency Only, or Station ID(s).

3 If you selected Agency Only or Station ID(s) for your Search By criteria, from the Agency list,
select the ID of the agency whose staffing level you want to change or view.

4 If you selected Station ID(s), type the station ID or IDs on which you want to search.

5 Press Enter or F10.

A list of agencies and station information appears. The final column, Station Staffing, displays the
Minimum value when the station in that row has been set to Minimum. Otherwise the column is
blank.

Send Feedback 375

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

Changing or Viewing the Staffing Level of a Station From the

Command Line (ST)
For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

ST.ST;<agency/station id(s)>.MS;<minimum staffing {yes|no}>
To change or view the staffing level of a station from the command line:

1 On the command line, type ST followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
ST.ST;<agency/station id(s)>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 Enter the agency ID and station ID for the station or stations you want to change or view, followed by
the period separator.

3 Enter MS; followed by a Y for minimum or an N for normal. Press F10 or Enter. For example,
ST.FD/ST05,FD/ST09.MS;Y
Examples:
• To display the Station Status form filtered by signed on coverage areas:

ST

If your working agency is provisioned as Use Stations = Yes, the Station Status form displays
for all stations in your signed on coverage areas.

• To display the Station Status form filtered by station IDs and the stations specified:

ST.ST;FD/ST01,FD/ST02

If agency FD is provisioned as Use Stations = Yes, the Station Status form displays showing
stations 01 and 02 from agency FD.

• To change the staffing of the specified stations to Minimum:

ST.ST;FD/ST01,FD/ST02.MS;Y

The staffing levels of stations 01 and 02 from agency FD are changed.

• To change the staffing of the specified stations and the specified agency to Minimum:

ST.ST;FD/ST01,FD/ST02,BF/.MS;Y

The staffing levels of stations 01 and 02 from agency FD plus all of the existing stations from
agency BF are changed.

• To change the staffing of the specified stations to Normal:

ST.ST;FD/ST01,FD/ST02.MS;N

The staffing levels of stations 01 and 02 from agency FD are changed.

376 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

How PremierOne Applies Station Staffing Rules

These sections describe the effects of having a station-staffed unit go from any In Station status to
any Out of Station status and from any Out of Station status to any In Station status.
Because you can manually change the status of a unit, the effects on a station-staffed unit whose status
was manually changed between a Clear and In station status and an Unavailable Due to
Cross-Staffing status is also affected.

When You Apply Move Ups to Station-Staffed Units

When a station-staffed unit is in a Move Up situation at another station, that unit does not participate in
station staffing activities while it is at the covered station. Therefore, PremierOne treats the station-
staffed unit as if it has a designated staff while it is in a Move Up situation.

When the unit returns to its home station, PremierOne once again considers it a station-staffed unit
based on its provisioned station staffing requirement level.

When You Place Units Into an Unavailable Due to Cross-Staffing Status

When a Full Crew unit leaves the station:

If Then

If a Full Crew unit changes from any In Station
status to any Out of Station status,
PremierOne updates the status of all Full Crew and Partial
Crew units in a Clear and In Station status within the
station to the Unavailable Due to Cross-Staffing
status provisioned for the agency of the unit or its agency
type.

This condition applies whether the station is at a Normal or

a Minimum staffing level.

When a Partial Crew unit leaves the station:

If Then

If a Partial Crew unit changes from any In PremierOne checks the current status of the other station-
Station status to any Out of Station status staffed units residing in the station.
while the station is at a Normal staffing level,

If all other Full Crew or Partial Crew units are the status of all other station-status units remains
currently In Station, unchanged.

Having one Partial Crew unit Out of Station does not

affect any of the other station-staffed units. Therefore, one
additional Full Crew or Partial Crew unit can also go Out
of Station.

If one or more Full Crew units are currently Out of
Station,
PremierOne updates the status of all Full Crew and Partial
Crew units in a Clear and In Station status in the
station to the Unavailable Due to Cross-Staffing
status provisioned for the agency of the unit or its agency
type.

If you manually updated the station-staffed units all other station-staffed units in the station become
from the Unavailable Due to Cross- Unavailable Due to Cross-Staffing.
Staffing status to a Clear and In Station
status while a Full Crew unit was Out of
Station, and you dispatch a Partial Crew unit,

Send Feedback 377

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

If Then

If one or more Partial Crew units are currently Out
of Station,
PremierOne updates the status of all Full Crew and Partial
Crew units in a Clear and In Station status in the
station to the Unavailable Due to Cross-Staffing
status provisioned for the agency of the unit or its agency
type.

If you change a Partial Crew unit from any In
Station status to any Out of Station status
while the station is at a Minimum staffing level,
PremierOne updates the status of all Full Crew and Partial
Crew units in a Clear and In Station status in the
station to the Unavailable Due to Cross-Staffing
status provisioned for the agency of the unit or its agency
type.

If you dispatch a Partial Crew unit while the station
is at a Minimum staffing level,
PremierOne does not allow you to dispatch another Full
Crew or Partial Crew. When a station is at a Minimum
staffing level, PremierOne assumes that the station is
depleted of personnel when you dispatch any station-
staffed unit.

When a Reserved unit leaves the station:

If Then

If you change a Reserved unit from any In
Station status to any Out of Station status,
PremierOne updates the status of all Full Crew and Partial
Crew units in a Clear and In Station status in the
station to the Unavailable Due to Cross-Staffing
status provisioned for the agency of the unit or its agency
type.

This condition applies whether the station is at a Normal or

a Minimum staffing level.

When You Return Units From Unavailable Due to Cross-Staffing to

Clear From Unavailable Cross-Staffing Status
When a Full Crew unit returns to the station:

If The station is considered

If you change a Full Crew unit from any Out of
Station status to any In Station status,
PremierOne updates all Full Crew and Partial Crew units in
the station that are Unavailable Due to Cross-
Staffing to the Clear from Unavailable Cross-
Staffing status provisioned for the agency of the unit or
its agency type.

This condition applies whether the station is at a Normal or

a Minimum staffing level.

When a Partial Crew unit returns to the station:

NOTE:
The effects of having a Partial Crew unit return to the station while other station-staffed units
remain out of station is dependent on the Station Staffing setting provisioned as part of the
Additional Properties of the Clear from Available Cross-Staffing status transaction for
the agency of the unit or its agency type.

378 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential

If
If you change a Partial Crew unit changes from any
Out of Station status to any In Station
status, while all other station-staffed units in the
station are In Station,
If you change a Partial Crew unit changes from any
Out of Station status to any In Station
status while the station is at a Normal staffing level
and another Partial Crew unit remains Out of
Station,
If you change a Partial Crew unit from any Out of
Station status to any In Station status while
the station is at a Normal staffing level and a Full
Crew unit or multiple station-staffed units remain
Out of Station,
If you change a Partial Crew unit changes from any
Out of Station status to any In Station
status while the station is at a Minimum staffing
level and one or more station-staffed units remain
Out of Station,
Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources
Then
PremierOne changes all Full Crew and Partial Crew units
in the station that are Unavailable Due to Cross-
Staffing to the Clear from Unavailable Cross-
Staffing status provisioned for the agency of the unit or
its agency type.
This condition applies whether the station is at a Normal or
a Minimum staffing level.
PremierOne applies the Station Staffing 1 setting
provisioned for the Clear from Unavailable Cross-
Staffing status provisioned for the agency of the unit or
its agency type.
If Station Staffing 1 = None of the units, all station-staffed
units that are currently Unavailable Due to Cross
Staffing remain Unavailable Due to Cross
Staffing.
If Station Staffing 1 = Only the Partial Crew units,
PremierOne updates all Partial Crew units that are
currently Unavailable Due to Cross-Staffing in
the station to Clear from Unavailable Cross-
Staffing status.
If Station Staffing 1 = All Full and Partial Crew units,
PremierOne updates all Full Crew and Partial Crew units
that are currently Unavailable Due to Cross-
Staffing in the station to Clear from Unavailable
Cross-Staffing status.
PremierOne applies the PremierOne applies the Station
Staffing 2 setting provisioned for the Clear from
Unavailable Cross-Staffing status provisioned for
the agency of the unit or its agency type.
PremierOne applies the PremierOne applies the Station
Staffing 2 setting provisioned for the Clear from
Unavailable Cross-Staffing status provisioned for
the agency of the unit or its agency type.
If Station Staffing 2 = None of the units, all station-staffed
units that are currently Unavailable Due to Cross
Staffing remain Unavailable Due to Cross
Staffing.
If Station Staffing 2 = Only the Partial Crew units,
PremierOne updates all Partial Crew units that are
currently Unavailable Due to Cross-Staffing in
the station to Clear from Unavailable Cross-
Staffing status.
379
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources
When a reserved unit returns to the station:
If
If you change any Reserved unit from any Out of
Station status to any In Station status while
other station-staffed units in the station are In
Station,
If you change any Reserved unit from any Out of
Station status to any In Station status while
the station is at a Normal Staffing level and a Partial
Crew unit remains Out of Station,
If you change a Reserved unit from any Out of
Station status to any In Station status while
the station is at a Normal staffing level and a Full
Crew remains Out of Station,
If you change a Reserved unit from any Out of
Station status to any In Station status while
the station is at a Minimum staffing level and one or
more station-staffed units remain Out of
Station,
Station-Staffed Units and Recommendations
PremierOne recommends station-staffed units solely on their current status. However, the number of
station-staffed units that can be recommended is dependent on a station’s current Station Staffing
situation.
380
Motorola Solutions Confidential
Then
PremierOne changes all Full Crew and Partial Crew units
in the station that are Unavailable Due to Cross-
Staffing to the Clear from Unavailable Cross-
Staffing status provisioned for the agency of the unit or
its agency type.
PremierOne applies the Station Staffing 1 setting
provisioned for the Clear from Unavailable Cross-
Staffing status for the agency of the unit or its agency
type.
If Station Staffing 1 = None of the units, all station-staffed
units that are currently Unavailable Due to Cross-
Staffing remain Unavailable Due to Cross-
Staffing.
If Station Staffing 1 = Only the Partial Crew units,
PremierOne updates all Partial Crew units that are
currently Unavailable Due to Cross-Staffing in
the station to Clear from Unavailable Cross-
Staffing status.
If Station Staffing 1 = All Full and Partial Crew units,
PremierOne updates all Full Crew and Partial Crew units
that are currently Unavailable Due to Cross-
Staffing in the station to Clear from Unavailable
Cross-Staffing status.
PremierOne assumes that when a Reserved unit returns to
the station while a Partial Crew unit remains out of the
station, the crew on the Reserved unit are the crew
members assigned to the station. Because some crew
members are now back at the station while a Partial Crew
unit is out of the station, the Station Staffing 1 rule should be
applied.
all Full Crew and Partial Crew units in the station that are
Unavailable Due to Cross-Staffing remain in that
status.
PremierOne assumes that a temporary crew was called in
to handle the Reserved unit because the crew was out with
the Full Crew unit and the temporary crew will leave the
station after returning the Reserved unit.
all Full Crew and Partial Crew units in the station that are
Unavailable Due to Cross-Staffing remain in that
status.
PremierOne assumes that a temporary crew was called in
to handle the Reserved unit because the crew was out with
the Full Crew unit and the temporary crew will leave the
station after returning the Reserved unit.
Send Feedback
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

PremierOne assumes that under a Normal staffing level, the crew in a station can handle one additional
station-staffed unit when it recommends a Partial Crew unit and the station is fully staffed. Therefore, the
recommendation of one Partial Crew unit can be followed by the recommendation of another Partial
Crew or Full Crew unit.

Conversely, when PremierOne recommends a Full Crew unit, it assumes that the station will be depleted
of crew members with this unit. Therefore, PremierOne cannot recommend any other unit along with a
Full Crew unit. This is why the order in which station-staffed units are recommended is very important.

For PremierOne to recommend a Partial Crew unit and a Full Crew unit simultaneously from the same
station, the Response Card must be provisioned to recommend the capability for the Partial Crew unit
ahead of the capability for the Full Crew unit. Otherwise, PremierOne only allows the Full Crew unit to be
recommended for the station.

There are also rules that apply to Reserved units. For PremierOne to recommend a Reserved unit from
the same station as a Full Crew or Partial Crew unit, the capability for the Reserved unit must be
provisioned after the capabilities for the Full Crew or Partial Crew unit in the Response Card. Otherwise,
once PremierOne recommends the Reserved unit, none of the Full Crew or Partial Crew units from the
same station can be recommended.

NOTE:
Station staffing rules regarding recommendations only affect the station-staffed units that are
currently In Station. A station-staffed unit that PremierOne recommends while Out of
Station has no impact on the station-staffed units that remain In Station.
If for some reason, two Full Crew units are Out of Station and recommendable, and all of
the other station-staffed units are in a Clear and In Station status, it is possible that the
two Full Crew units that are Out of Station can be recommended along with one of the In
Station units. Only when the In Station unit is recommended will PremierOne evaluate
the current In Station and Out of Station status of the other station-staffed units from
this station.

While the Station is at a Normal Staffing Level

When PremierOne recommends a Full Crew unit while the station is at a Normal Staffing level,
PremierOne will not recommend any other Full Crew or Partial Crew units that are in an In Station
status from this station.

When PremierOne recommends a Partial Crew unit while the station is at a Normal Staffing level,
PremierOne checks the current status of the other station-staffed units from this station.

If Then

If one or more Full Crew units from this station are PremierOne will not recommend any other Full Crew or
currently Out of Station, Partial Crew units that are in an In Station status from
this station.

If one or more Partial Crew units from this station PremierOne will not recommend any other Full Crew or
are currently Out of Station, Partial Crew units that are in an In Station status from
this station.

If no other Partial Crew or Full Crew unit from this PremierOne allows either:
station is currently Out of Station,
• One additional Full Crew unit to be recommended from
this station, or

• One additional Partial Crew unit to be recommended

from this station

Send Feedback 381

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

A Reserved unit can always be recommended from a station in which Full Crew and Partial Crew units
are being recommended. However, once a Reserved unit is recommended while the station is at a
Normal Staffing level, PremierOne will not recommend any other Full Crew or Partial Crew units that are
in an In Station status from this station.

While the Station is at a Minimum Staffing Level

When PremierOne recommends a Full Crew unit while the station is at a Minimum Staffing level,
PremierOne will not recommend any other Full Crew or Partial Crew units that are in an In Station
status from this station.

When PremierOne recommends a Partial Crew unit while the station is at a Minimum Staffing level,
PremierOne checks the current status of the other station-staffed units from this station.

A Reserved unit can always be recommended from a station in which Full Crew and Partial Crew units
are being recommended. However, once a Reserved unit is recommended while the station is at a
Minimum Staffing level, PremierOne will not recommend any other Full Crew or Partial Crew units that
are in an In Station status from this station.

Station Staffing and the Unit Status Monitor Window

The provisioned Station Staffing Requirement icon displays in each unit status monitor window that is
provisioned to display this icon.

A Station Staffing Requirement icon does not display for:

• Any unit not participating in station staffing activities (the provisioned Station Staffing Requirement
= ---)

• Any station-staffed unit that is exempt from station staffing activities

• Any station-staffed unit that is in a Move Up situation

The provisioned Full Crew Station Staffing Requirement icon displays for any station-staffed unit that
currently meets all of the following criteria:

• Provisioned as Station Staffing Requirement = Full Crew

• Not exempt from station staffing activities

• Assigned to its home station (not in a Move Up situation)

The Partial Crew Station Staffing Requirement icon displays for any station-staffed unit that currently
meets all of the following criteria:

• Provisioned as Station Staffing Requirement = Partial Crew

• Not exempt from station staffing activities

• Assigned to its home station (not in a Move Up situation)

382 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

The Reserved Station Staffing Requirement icon displays for any station-staffed unit that currently meets
all of the following criteria:

• Provisioned as Station Staffing Requirement = Reserved

• Not exempt from station staffing activities

• Assigned to its home station (not in a Move Up situation)

Send Feedback 383

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 13: Managing Resources

384 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Dispatching Resources

Chapter 14

Dispatching Resources 14

Dispatch tasks include dispatching units to an incident, freeing units from an incident, managing stacked
incidents, assigning the primary resource to an incident, and other tasks related to managing resources
assigned to incidents.

PremierOne uses the Incident and Unit Management forms for resource dispatch, status updates, call
stack management, and comments. You can also use commands to exchange unit assignments,
change the primary unit, reset a unit status timer, reset a unit emergency indicator, and free units from
incidents.

For more information about resource tasks, see Chapter 13: Managing Resources.

Dispatching Resources to Incidents

You can dispatch units to an incident either from the Dispatch tab of the Incident Management form or
from the command line. Using the ID command with only the incident number or unit ID displays the
Incident Management form.

Dispatching Resources to Incidents From the Dispatch Form

You can dispatch resources to an incident from the Dispatch form or from the command line. For details
on dispatching units from the command line, see Dispatching Resources to Incidents From the
Command Line (ID) on page 393.

Use the Dispatch tab of the Incident Management form to select and dispatch units.

To dispatch resources to incidents from the Dispatch form:

1 Perform the following actions:

• On the command line, type ID, and then press Enter or F10.

The Incident Management Summary form displays in the Primary Work Area with the Dispatch
tab in focus.
NOTE
NOTE:
Alternatively, you can press F9 to display the next pending incident for dispatch.

The form has two subtabs: Dptch Units and Units Assigned.

• The Dptch Units subtab displays the incident information and is where you select the units for
dispatch.

• The Units Assigned subtab displays the units that have been dispatched to the incident.

The top of the Dptch Units form shows the incident number, the date and time the incident was
created, the status of the incident and Incident Response Factor (IRF) information, including incident
type, modifying circumstance, alarm level, and priority.

Send Feedback 385

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

The Dptch List and Missing from Rec (Dispatch List and Missing from Recommendations) fields
are in the middle of the form. These fields update dynamically, based on changes you make in the
Units Recommended table. Any radio pseudo-units that are already assigned to the incident appear
in the Dptch List so you know which radio channels are active for this incident.

The Units Recommended table displays in the bottom half of the form.

Figure 212: Dispatch Form – Units Recommended (Fixed) Table

When you first display the form, the Units Recommended (Fixed) table displays. The “Fixed” label in
the top right corner of the table indicates that these recommendations are fixed recommendations.
Fixed unit recommendations are based solely on a provisioned response card and run cards. Travel
time estimates of units to the scene of the incident are not considered.

The table shows the recommended units with the units selected for dispatch (those units in the
Dispatch List) displayed in a blue background. Any units shown with a white background are
recommended but not selected for dispatch because the response card was set to obtain a specific
number of additional units.

If a unit is unstaffed at the time the recommendation is generated, a hyphen displays in parentheses
after the unit ID, such as L61 (-). This indicator appears when the Dispatch screen initially displays,
or whenever the Request Rec button is selected. This indicator allows you to take whatever actions
are necessary to ensure that unstaffed units are picked up and adequately staffed.

If a unit is unmanned, the unit displays in pink.

The Personnel Assigned value on the Unit Assignments – Capability tab is the value used to
determine the staffing level for a unit. If the unit Personnel Assigned value is equal to zero, the unit is
considered unstaffed.
NOTE
NOTE:
For the indicator to display, your system administrator must enable the indicator in
Provisioning.

386 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

2 Add or remove units from the Dispatch List if needed by toggling between the selected unit and the
other units by clicking the mouse or using the space bar. When you select a unit the background
changes color. The first unit is in focus when you open the form unless you have unavailable units
(see the following step).

The Dispatch List updates automatically as you add or remove units from the table.

The Missing from Rec (Recommendations) field also updates automatically as you add or remove
units from the table. This field lists the capabilities (and their count) that are missing from the current
recommendation; either because PremierOne could not provide all the recommended units or
because you deselected one or more recommended units without specifying replacements.

Within a Dispatch transaction, you can specify a radio pseudo-unit manually or it can be shown as a
recommended unit. If you are dispatching a radio pseudo-unit, dispatch at least one standard
resource unit. PremierOne dispatches the standard resource units before the radio pseudo-unit
resulting in units either being dispatched, stacked, or not dispatched due to the unit status being
unavailable for dispatch.

PremierOne updates the unit status based on the following rules:

• If your agency has provisioned a unit status code for the radio pseudo-unit transaction,
PremierOne dispatches the pseudo-unit to the incident and places it in the provisioned status.

• If your agency did not provision a unit status code for the radio pseudo-unit transaction, but a
status code is provisioned for this transaction at your agency type level (for example, law, fire,
EMS), PremierOne dispatches the pseudo-unit to the incident and places it in this status.

• If neither agency-level nor agency-type level provisioning is set for the unit status code for the
radio pseudo-unit transaction, PremierOne does not dispatch the radio pseudo-unit and an error
message displays stating that the status for <Agency ID>/<Unit ID>-<Shift ID> is not defined.

When PremierOne dispatches the radio pseudo-unit, the pseudo-unit is included in any supported
interface that provides unit assignments within dispatch messages. This action includes, but is not
limited to, the following interfaces:

• Fire Station Alerting

• Tear-N-Run reports

• Paging messages

• Incident notification (emails)

3 Monitor the following fields in the Work Assist Area:

• The Unit Rspns field lists the response (by capabilities and count) for the current incident IRF;
for example, 2-LADDER 1-ENGINE 1-TRUCK

• The Missing from Inc field lists the capabilities (and their count) that are not covered by the
units that are currently assigned to the incident. This field compares the working capabilities of
each of the units assigned to the incident against the unit response and displays the quantity of
each capability that is missing from the incident; for example, 1-TRUCK. 1-TRUCK would
indicate that the incident requires one Truck capability that is missing from the incident.

Send Feedback 387

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

For a pending incident, this field is blank because no one is assigned to the incident (all
capabilities are currently missing).

Figure 213: Unit Rspns and Missing from Inc Fields in WAA

• Add’l Capab field lists the capabilities (and their count) that are covered by the units that are
currently dispatched on the incident more than the unit response; for example, 2-ENGINE.
2-ENGINE would indicate that there are two additional Engines on the incident more than what
was required for the incident.

If you change any IRF value, such as Incident Type, Modifying Circumstance, or Alarm Level, on this
screen, the Dptch List, Missing from Rec, Unit Rspns, Missing from Inc, and Add’l Capab fields
and the Units Recommended table immediately clear and the table displays the “Press Request to
request recommendation” label. When you press the Request button, the five fields and the table
re-populate. The change to the IRF is not updated in PremierOne until the form is submitted.

4 If any of the units you entered for dispatch are not available for dispatch (for example, already
enroute to an incident), PremierOne indicates this status by an asterisk ( * ) prefix for the unit ID; the
text is bold/yellow when selected or bold/black when unselected. If an asterisk displays, do one of
the following:

5 In the text boxes below the recommended units, enter additional units to dispatch, if needed, to
satisfy the recommendation, and optionally specify a working capability for each by using the
corresponding field.

388 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

6 From the Preempt/Stack field, select your desired action:

• To preempt the original assignment of the units (remove them from their original assignments)
and assign them immediately to your higher-priority incident, select Yes. (default). PremierOne
places the original incident in the unit call stacking queue or pending queue, depending on your
agency configuration. Either the call stacking or the pending queue is the default value. For more
details, see Understanding Call Stacking on page 404.

• To stack the units against the incident, clear the Preempt box. Because the units are stacked
against the incident and not being dispatched immediately, they are not meeting the capability
needs immediately. Therefore, you may want to meet those capabilities in some other way. For
more information on stacking, see Placing an Incident Into a Unit Call Stacking Queue on
page 406.

7 Perform any of the following actions as needed:

• To reset the selected units to the units that were initially recommended without removing any
units entered in the text boxes, select the Reset Rec button.

• To clear all recommended units and display a new set of recommended units, select the Request
Rec button.

• To clear all units entered in the text boxes and reset the corresponding lists, select the Clear
Add’l button.

• To determine how the recommended units were obtained, select the Resp List button. The
response card associated with the response, the capabilities being requested, and the run card
order for each capability display. Click any of the capabilities to view the run card order for the
capability. This list can be useful in troubleshooting unit recommendations.

Figure 214: Response List Showing Run Card Order For Capabilities

8 To show recommendations based on response card, run card, and ARL (instead of just response
card and run cards), select the Show Pref button.

When you select Show Pref, the Units Recommended (Fixed) table changes to the Units
Recommended (Preferred) table. The Units Recommended (Preferred) table displays
recommendations based on response card, run card, and ARL. Each ETA displays next to the unit
ID when ARL information is available.

Send Feedback 389

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

The label for the Pref button changes to Show Fixed after PremierOne calculates the list of
recommended units based on the provisioned run card and unit location as determined by ARL.

When you select Show Fixed, you return to the Units Recommended (Fixed) table.

Figure 215: Dispatch Form – Units Recommended (Preferred) Table

390 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

9 To show alerts associated with units, click Alerting.

Figure 216: Alerting From Dispatch

The Unit Alerting List appears in the work assist area. In the Unit Alerting List, you can toggle
between the Unit (shown in previous figure) View and the Type View which sorts by the specific
Alerting Types of Toning, Paging, Tear N Run, Two-Tone Paging, FAX, and so on.

Printers, Pagers, and Toning Devices are all listed on the Type View, showing specific details
including the unit IDs and device names for pagers, the printer names and whether the associated
unit is out-of-station, and the toning device names for toning devices.

PremierOne checks the items to be alerted.

a Expand the items to be alerted by clicking the plus symbol.

b Click Cancel in the bottom right corner to close the Alerting overlay.

10 To dispatch the units in the Dispatch List (those units with a blue background), press F12. When you
press F12, you dispatch what is on your current screen, whether it is the Preferred or Fixed table.

PremierOne dispatches the units shown in the current window.

NOTE
NOTE:
When you dispatch standard resource units and radio pseudo-units to an incident, the first
standard resource unit assigned to the incident becomes the incident primary unit. A radio
pseudo-unit can never be considered the primary unit on an incident.

Send Feedback 391

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

11 To view the unit or units dispatched, select the Units Assigned subtab at the top of the Primary Work
Area.

Figure 217: Dispatch Form – Units Assigned Tab Showing Primary Unit

PremierOne indicates the primary unit with a green arrow next to the unit ID.

The Times column shows the last status change and the status transaction time for this incident.

If the RA command is issued to release all but one unit, the previously assigned units still display in
the list of dispatched units.

12 Do the following as needed:

• To toggle between showing the last unit status changes (and transaction times while on this
incident) for each unit and all the unit status changes (and transaction times while on this
incident) for each unit, select the All Statuses button. When you select the All Statuses button,
the button label changes to Last Status. You can sort the table by selecting any column heading.

• To redisplay the list of all dispatched units in your agency provisioned sort order, select the
Default Sort button.

• To display the Unit Management form in the view mode for the highlighted unit in the Units
Assigned table, select the View Unit button.

NOTE:
Temporary units can be dispatched only from the command line.

392 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

Dispatching Resources to Incidents From the Command Line (ID)

You can dispatch resources to an incident from the Dispatch form or from the command line. For details
on dispatching resources from the form, see Dispatching Resources to Incidents From the Dispatch
Form on page 385.

To dispatch resources to an incident from the command line, use the Incident Dispatch (ID) command.
Use the ID command with identifiers to rapidly dispatch incidents from the command line.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

ID.I.U.PE.TN.ADS.US.AL.RL.RD
To dispatch resources to incidents from the command line:

1 On the command line, type ID followed by a period separator.

If hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
ID.I;<incident id or active unit id>
For details on using hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type an incident number followed by a period separator. If you are dispatching
additional units to an incident, you can alternatively type the ID of a unit active on the incident.

3 At the cursor, type the unit ID of the first unit you want to dispatch. To dispatch multiple units,
separate each unit ID with a comma.

4 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

5 Press Enter or F10.

If each unit is available, PremierOne dispatches the units. If any unit is already assigned to an
incident, the Preempt Unit dialog box appears. For more information, see the last step of Dispatching
Resources to Incidents From the Dispatch Form on page 385.
Examples:
To dispatch units 1A12 and 1A13 to incident 1234:
ID.#1234.1A12,1A13
To open the Dispatch Incident form for incident 2261:
ID.#2261
To dispatch unit A101 to incident 2261 and automatically place the unit in an arrived status:
ID.#2261.A101.US;AR

Send Feedback 393

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

Recommending User-Specified Capabilities From the Command Line (RL)

When units arrive on the scene of an incident, they may require the assistance of units that are outside
of the normal response requirements. Overriding the provisioned response requirements can only be
performed from the command line.

Use the RL (response list) identifier with the ID command to enter quantity plus capability combinations
like the following:

RL;<Qty1>-<Cap1>,<Qty2>-<Cap2>,<Qty3>-<Cap3>, and so on
where <Qty> is a value between 1 and 99 and <Cap> is any valid capability provisioned for the incident
agency.

If you include a response list identifier, you can also specify a valid response descriptor like the
following:
RD;<response descriptor>
PremierOne uses your specified response descriptor for all of the quantity + capability combinations that
you previously specified.
Example:
A police unit that responded to an accident suspects that there may be drugs in the vehicle and requests
the assistance of a narcotic detection K-9 unit. The dispatcher must therefore be allowed to specify the
corresponding capability and have PremierOne recommend the appropriate K-9 unit. This type of
requested recommendation overrides any response requirements provisioned for the incident.

Viewing Resources Dispatched to an Incident

You may want to view the units already dispatched to an incident before dispatching additional units.

To view resources dispatched to an incident:

1 Do one of the following:

• On the command line, type IU and press Enter or F10. Type the incident number in the Incident
# field and press F12.

• On the command line, type IU.# and press Enter or F10.

The Incident Management Summary form displays in the Primary Work Area.

2 Select the Dispatch tab.

3 Select the Units Assigned subtab in the Primary Work Area.

A form displays showing any units that have already been dispatched to the incident in the Dispatch
List at the bottom of the form.

394 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

If the RA command is issued to release all but one unit, the previously assigned units still display in
the list of dispatched units.

Figure 218: Units Assigned Subtab Showing Units Dispatched To Incident

4 Do any of the following:

• To sort the units, select the column header you want to sort by. To return to the default sort order,
select Default Sort at the bottom of the Primary Work Area (the default sort order is configured
for each agency).

• To view details about a unit, select the unit and then select View Unit at the bottom of the
Primary Work Area.

The incident you select displays in the Primary Work Area in the Status tab of the Unit
Management form. The display is shaded blue to indicate that the unit information is an overlay
of the screen that was displayed.

To return to your original work area, select the X above the Work Assist Area or press the Esc
key.

• To dispatch additional units, select the Dptch Units (Dispatch Units) tab at the top of the Primary
Work Area.

Send Feedback 395

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

Using F9 to Issue the Incident Dispatch Command

Pressing F9 is equivalent to using the Incident Dispatch (ID) command without typing ID on the
command line. You type all of the information on the command line that you need except ID, and then
press F9 instead of Enter or F10.

To display the Incident Management – Dispatch form using F9:

1 On the command line, type the incident number or the ID of the unit active on the incident.

2 Press F9.

The Incident Management form displays.

To dispatch an incident using F9:

1 On the command line, type the incident number and the unit ID.

2 Press F9.

The unit is dispatched to the incident.

Backdating Unit Status Timestamps

Use the SB command to backdate, or to add one or more unit status codes against a specified unit for a
particular incident. Because you can apply the backdating to incidents that occurred sometime in the
past, including days or weeks ago, you can enter a date and a time for each backdated status code
entry.

You cannot change or update any existing unit status timestamps, but you can add unit statuses to an
incident later. The only verification that PremierOne performs against each backdated timestamp is that
the backdated timestamp must be before the current time.

PremierOne appends a record of your action to both the incident and unit history. Consider the last
status entry in the incident and unit history logs (which is based on the transaction time or which you
submitted the backdated status) as the correct status time to use when you calculate response times
within a report.

This command is useful when:

• A unit status transaction was missed

• The CAD system becomes unavailable (planned or unplanned downtime)

• A transaction must be corrected.

• The mobile device of the officer transmitted transaction was transmitted but PremierOne did not
receive the transaction in a timely manner.

In the cases shown in the list, you can manually capture the transactions using a method that is external
to CAD, such as on cards, or you can simply add the missed transaction and its corresponding
timestamp while still managing the incident.

The SB command does not affect the current status or the activity of the unit. The SB command can be
issued for a unit that is on or off duty.

396 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

To backdate unit status timestamps:

1 Do one of following:

• On the command line, type SB.I;<incident id or active unit id>.U;<unit id> and
press F10.

• On the command line, type SB.<incident# or active unit ID> and press Enter or F10.

If you want to open the Backdating Status form with the Unit ID field already populated, type
SB.<incident#>.U;<unit ID> and press Enter or F10.

• On the command line, type SB and press Enter. The Status Backdating form appears. In the
Incid # field, type the incident number or the unit ID of a unit assigned to an incident. Press F10.

PremierOne checks the specified unit ID against all on duty units that are within your set of trusted
agencies. If the unit ID is on duty for only one of these agencies, PremierOne applies that agency to
the unit. Otherwise, PremierOne uses your working agency. If the agency of the unit is provisioned to
Validate Unit IDs (Provisioning: Unit Management – Settings – Transactions; Transaction = On
Duty), and if the specified unit ID does not exist as a provisioned unit ID for the respective agency,
PremierOne displays an error message. The message states that the specified unit must be a
defined unit ID. The message gives you the agency ID and the shift ID.

The Status Backdating form displays. The table at the bottom of the form lists all unit status
transactions that were logged to the incident, including all actual and backdated unit status
transactions.

Figure 219: Status Backdating Form Shown After Entering Incident Number and Unit ID

Send Feedback 397

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

2 If you did not enter the Unit ID from the command line, from the Unit ID list, type or select the unit ID
for the unit status transaction you want to enter.

The only unit IDs that appear in the unit ID list are those units that had unit transactions logged
against the incident shown at the bottom of the form. However, you can enter other units that were
assigned to the incident but not as of yet logged to the incident.

3 From the Status list, select the unit status.

As you select the status, a new row is added for additional transaction entries.

4 From the Date and Time fields, enter the appropriate values to be recorded against the transaction.

5 Repeat for any other unit status entries for the same or different units.

6 Press F12.

PremierOne processes each status timestamp individually and in the order in which you entered
them.

The Status Backdating form redisplays with the unit status entries added to the bottom of the form.
The form now reflects any unit status updates that occurred since you initially displayed the form,
including timestamps entered by another user. The Status Time column shows the timestamp that
you entered for the backdated status and the Transaction Time column shows the actual time that
you changed the status. Any backdated unit status timestamps display with an asterisk after the
Status Time value to differentiate them from actual status transactions.

398 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

Each new unit status timestamp generates its own unit and incident history logs.
NOTE
NOTE:
For reporting purposes, when multiple unit status codes exist for the same unit, the most
accurate status would be the most recent Transaction Time.

Figure 220: Status Backdating Form

PremierOne sends each backdated unit status transaction to RDW.

Backdated Unit Status Timestamps and Unit History

PremierOne adds all backdated unit status timestamps to the Unit History log for the respective unit.

The backdated changes show the usual information plus the word “Backdated” in the area where you
would normally see the type of transaction.

The Time/Date column shows the times and dates that the user submitted the Status Backdating form.

The Time/Date column shows the timestamp in which the user submitted the Status Backdating form.
The timestamp value that PremierOne captures within the backdated unit status transaction shows the
backdated timestamp specified by the user. Use this value for reporting purposes.

Send Feedback 399

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

Figure 221: Unit History With Backdated Unit Statuses

Backdated Unit Status Timestamps and Incident History

PremierOne adds all backdated unit status timestamps to the Incident History form. The backdated
changes show the usual information plus the word “Backdated” in the area where you would normally
see the type of transaction.

Figure 222: Incident History Showing Backdated Unit Statuses

400 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

Backdated Unit Status Timestamps and Incident Dispatch

PremierOne adds all backdated unit status timestamps to the Incident Dispatch form, Units Assigned
tab. PremierOne indicates all backdated statuses with an asterisk ( * ). For Backdated transactions, the
Times column shows the Submitted time entered for the transaction.

Figure 223: Incident Dispatch - Units Assigned Tab Showing Backdated Unit Status

Send Feedback 401

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

When you click All Statuses, PremierOne lists unit status times for each unit in the order based on their
transaction time. (The transaction time is not shown on this form.)

Figure 224: Incident Dispatch - Units Assigned Tab Showing All Statuses

402 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

CAD-to-CAD and Dispatching Units

Requests for resources with incident information can come from your agency (the Local Agency) to
request units from a Foreign Agency to help with your Local Agency incident. In this case, the requests
come from PremierOne.

Figure 225: Dispatching a Foreign Unit

When you manually enter additional units for dispatch, you can add Foreign Agency units to dispatch to
a Local Agency incident. Use the Incident Dispatch command on the command line to manually add
Foreign Agency units.

When you dispatch a Foreign Agency unit to a Local Agency incident, PremierOne validates the
dispatch transaction. You can use any of the PremierOne commands that assign a unit to an incident; for
example, Unit Exchange.

If the dispatch is successful, PremierOne performs the following actions:

• Assigns the Foreign Agency unit to the incident

• Places the unit into the Request for Resource: Dispatch status provisioned for the agency of the
unit.

If your System Administrator has not provisioned the Request for Resource: Dispatch status for
both the agency of the Foreign Agency unit and for the corresponding agency type, PremierOne
does not dispatch the unit. An error message appears stating that the default status is not defined for
Request for Resource: Dispatch.

You are not responsible for managing Foreign Agency units until they are assigned to your Local Agency
incident. A dispatcher on your local CAD system cannot assign a Foreign Agency unit to a traffic stop or
field-initiated incident. In this situation, an error message appears stating that the command used is not
valid for Foreign Agency units.

Send Feedback 403

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

PremierOne manages requests for resources by sending and receiving messages to maintain contact
with your agency and the Foreign Agency.

Understanding Call Stacking

If call stacking is enabled for your system, you can preassign incidents to a unit regardless of whether
the unit is currently assigned to an incident. The number of incidents that can be stacked against a unit
is configurable by your system administrator. A setting called Preempt controls whether the newly
dispatched incident can replace the current assignment. Depending on other call stacking parameters,
the replaced incident can be returned to the call stacking queue or to the pending queue.

When you stack an incident, the incident is placed in the call stacking queue with a status of S (stacked).
The Pending Queue and Incident status monitors can be configured to show this status.

Call stacking cannot be used with temporary units.

When the last active unit on an incident is cleared, one of the following occurs, depending on your
system configuration:

• The incident is closed.

• The incident is kept in the call stacking queue of units stacked against the incident.

Call Stacking Parameters

The following parameters control call stacking:

• Maximum in Stacking Queue – Controls the maximum number of calls that are allowed in the call
stacking queue for a unit. The system administrator sets this parameter.

• Preempt – When dispatching a new incident, the dispatcher controls whether the unit currently
assigned incident should be preempted, or placed on hold, for a new assignment. The dispatcher
controls this setting for each incident in the II, FI, and ID forms or commands, although a default
value is configured. When a current incident is preempted for a new incident, the unit is cleared from
the current incident before being assigned to the new incident.
NOTE
NOTE:
When a dispatcher preempts the last unit from an incident that has at least one disposition, the
incident closes instead of returning to the provisioned pending status.

• Exceed Stack – Controls whether a unit is allowed to exceed the Maximum in Stacking Queue
value for a field-initiated incident (or traffic stop) (this situation does not affect the limit for the II
command). If set to Yes, the unit can exceed the number by 1. The system administrator enables this
parameter.

The following table provides examples of the actions that would occur for the different values of Exceed
Stack and Preempt parameters for the FI and II commands. For the purposes of the table, the limit of
the stacking queue is assumed to be 1.

404 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

Table 42: Examples for Exceed Stack and Preempt Parameters for Maximum in
Stacking Queue = 1

Exceed Stack = N Exceed Stack = Y

Scenario Preempt = Y Preempt = N Preempt = Y Preempt = N

FI command (stacked incidents = 0)

Unit assigned to Result 1 Result 2 Same as Result 1 Same as Result 2

INC1
INC1 placed into INC1 remains
Stacked incidents stacking queue assigned to unit
=0
Unit assigned to INC2 into stacking
FI or II command - INC2 queue
Attempt to assign
unit to INC2 Stacked incidents = Stacked incidents
1 =1

FI command (stacked incidents = 1)

Unit assigned to Result 3 Result 4 Result 5 Result 6

INC2
Unit is assigned to Unit remains Unit is assigned to Unit remains
Stack queue has INC3 assigned to INC2 INC3 assigned to INC2
INC1 in it
INC1 remains in INC1 remains in INC1 remains in INC1 remains in
Stacked incidents stacking queue stacking queue stacking queue stacking queue
=1
INC2 is returned to Status Message INC2 assigned to INC3 assigned to
Attempt to assign pending queue states unit cannot stacking queue stacking queue
unit to INC3 be placed on INC3
Stacked incidents without preempt = Stacked incidents = Stacked incidents
=1 Y 2 =2

Stacked incidents
=1

II/ID command (Cannot exceed stack maximum)

Unit assigned to Same as Result 3 Same as Result 4 Same as result 3 Same as result4
INC2

Stack queue has

INC1 in it

Stacked incidents
=1

Attempt to assign
unit to INC3

Send Feedback 405

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

Table 42: Examples for Exceed Stack and Preempt Parameters for Maximum in
Stacking Queue = 1 (Cont.)

Exceed Stack = N Exceed Stack = Y

Scenario Preempt = Y Preempt = N Preempt = Y Preempt = N

FI command

Unit assigned to N/A N/A Result 7 Result 8

INC3
INC1 and INC2 INC1 and INC2
INC1 and INC2 are Cannot happen remain in call stack remain in call
in call stacking Exceed Stack = N queue stack queue
queue would not have
allowed INC2 to be INC3 returns to Unit remains
Stacked incidents placed in stacking pending queue assigned to INC3
=2 queue
Unit is assigned Status Message
Attempt to assign INC4 states unit cannot
unit to INC4 be placed on
Stacked units = 2 INC4 without
preempt = Y

Stacked units = 2

II/ID command (Cannot exceed stack maximum)

Unit assigned to N/A N/A Same as Result 7 Same as Result 8

INC3

INC1 and INC2 are

in call stacking
queue

Stacked incidents
=2

Attempt to assign
unit to INC4

Placing an Incident Into a Unit Call Stacking Queue

Assigning an on-duty unit to more than one law incident places the incident into the call stacking queue
for that unit.

NOTE:
A unit is only considered stacked if all the standard resource units (not radio pseudo-units) that
are requested for this incident are assigned to another incident. A radio pseudo-unit can never be
the only unit assigned or stacked to an incident; standard resource units must already be
assigned or must be assigned concurrently.

406 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

Your choice on the Preempt Unit dialog box determines which incident goes into the unit call stacking
queue. The Preempt Unit dialog box appears when any unit or units you enter for dispatch are already
assigned to an incident.

Figure 226: Preempt Unit Dialog Box

• If you select a unit from the Preempt Unit dialog box and select OK, PremierOne removes the unit
from its original assignment and dispatches it to your incident. The original assignment is placed in
the unit call stacking queue and PremierOne changes the original incident status to S (stacked).

• If you select a unit from the Preempt Unit dialog box and select Cancel, PremierOne places your
current incident in the unit call stacking queue to await dispatch when the original incident and any
other incidents in the queue are complete. PremierOne changes the unit status to S (stacked).

Managing a Unit Call Stacking Queue (CS)

Use the Call Stacking (CS) command to manage the incidents stacked against units. You can obtain
either a list of incidents that are stacked against a particular unit or a list of all units that have stacked
incidents. If you use the command without identifiers, then a list of all units with stacked incidents in your
coverage group displays.

When the Automatically dispatch next incident parameter is enabled in Provisioning, the unit
automatically receives the next incident in the stack queue. When the parameter is disabled, then the
dispatcher can use the Dispatch action in the CS form or command to manually assign the next stacked
incident to the unit.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

CS.U.A.ST.CG.UC.I.AC.UR.D

Send Feedback 407

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

Actions (AC) include close, return to pending, dispatch, swap, and reassign.

To manage the unit call stacking queue:

1 Do one of the following:

• In the Unit Status form, select the Stack tab. For details on opening the form, see Updating Unit
Status From the Unit Management Form on page 321.

• To view the list of incidents stacked against the units in your coverage group, type CS on the
command line and press Enter or F10.

• To view the list of incidents stacked against a particular unit, type CS on the command line,
followed by the period separator and the ID of the unit. Continue with additional separators,
identifiers, and values as needed and press Enter or F10.

PremierOne displays the Stacked Incident Summary form in the Primary Work Area and the Stacked
Incident Summary in the Work Assist Area.
NOTE
NOTE:
You may need to scroll in the Primary Work area to see all of the incident information for each
unit.

Figure 227: Stacked Incidents Summary Window

408 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

2 Do any of the following:

• To view additional information about an incident, select the plus icon to the left of the incident
number.

• To view details about the current incident, select the View Incid button at the top of the window to
the right of the Location field.

• To view the incident details for another incident, select the incident, and then select the View
Incid button at the top of the form.

The incident you select displays in the Primary Work Area. The display is shaded blue to indicate
that the incident information is an overlay of the screen that was displayed. You can make
updates while in the view mode (enter the information and press F12).

To return to your original work area, select the X above the Work Assist Area or press the Esc
key.

• To automatically assign the incident to the unit when the unit clears from its current incident,
select the Auto check box in the incident row.

• To perform one of the following actions with the incident, select the action from the Actions
column.

Close – Close the incident. If you select Close, the Disposition button at the bottom of the
Primary Work Area becomes active so you can select a closing disposition.

Return to pending – Return the incident to the pending queue.

Clear Unit – Clear the unit from the incident.

Reassign to – Reassign the incident to a different unit. If you select Reassign to, specify a new
unit in the Unit ID column.

Swap with current – (Available only when a unit with stacked incidents is currently assigned to an
incident) Swap the incident with the current incident. This option is not available if the unit does
not have a current incident. Swapping one of the stacked units against the current incident of that
unit is the same as preempting the current incident of that unit with another, higher priority
incident.

Dispatch – (Available only when a unit with stacked incidents is not currently assigned to an
incident) Dispatch the unit to the incident. This option is not available if the unit is already
assigned to an incident. When the Automatically dispatch next incident parameter is disabled in
Provisioning, you can use the Dispatch action in the CS form or command to manually assign the
next stacked incident to the unit.

• To change the default sort order of the incidents in the table, select an incident, and then select
one of the Move buttons at the bottom of the Primary Work Area.

• To view a summary of all stacked incidents in your coverage area, select Stacked Summary at
the bottom of the Primary Work Area; see Viewing Stacked Incidents Summary on page 410 for
details. To return to the units stack, select View Unit’s Stack at the bottom of the Primary Work
Area.

Send Feedback 409

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

Viewing Stacked Incidents Summary

You can view a list of incidents that are stacked against the units in your coverage group.

To view a stacked incident summary:

1 On the command line, type CS and press Enter or F10.

The Stacked Incidents Summary window appears. The Stacked Incident Summary Work Assist Area
displays the list of stacked incidents. The Primary Work Area displays call stacking details for the unit
selected in the Work Assist Area.

To only display units in a clear status, select the Show clear units only check box.

Figure 228: Stacked Incidents Summary Window

2 To view the call stacking details for a specific unit, select the unit in the Work Assist Area.

The list of incidents stacked against the unit displays in the Primary work area. For a description of
actions you can perform, see Managing a Unit Call Stacking Queue (CS) on page 407.

3 To view the unit stack for a specified unit, select an incident assigned to that unit from the table in the
Primary Work Area, and then select View Unit’s Stack at the bottom of the Primary Work Area. To
return to the Stacked Incident Summary, select Stacked Summary at the bottom of the Primary
Work Area.

Work Assist Area – Stacked Incident Summary

The Work Assist Area for the Stacked Incident Summary displays a list of all units that have incidents
stacked against them. The unit ID, incident number, and location display.

To sort the list by Unit ID, Incident #, or Location, select the appropriate column header.

410 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

Exchanging Unit Assignments (UX)

Use the Unit Exchange (UX) command to exchange the assignments of two units on active incidents.
Both units must be on duty within the same agency and both units cannot be assigned to the same
incident.

If one of the units is a primary unit, the exchanged unit becomes the new primary unit. PremierOne
updates the Unit History records for both units with the new information. Call stacking rules apply when
you exchange units.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

UX.U1.U2.CM;TN
To exchange unit assignments:

1 On the command line, type UX followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
UX.U1;<unit id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the ID of the first unit, followed by the period separator.

3 At the cursor, type the ID of the second unit.

4 At the cursor, type the period separator, and then type any comments for the unit exchange.

5 At the cursor, type the period separator, and then type Y to include an alert for this unit exchange or
N to suppress the alert.

6 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne exchanges the units and writes the information to the unit history for each unit.
Example:
To exchange unit 1A12 with 1A25:
UX.1A12.1A25

Understanding Primary Units

The primary unit is defined as the first unit listed in the Incident Initiation form (for single-shot
dispatching), the Incident Management form–Dispatch tab, or entered on the command line that is
successfully dispatched. The primary unit is usually the unit responsible for filing the report for the
incident.

If a previously assigned incident is returned to the pending queue for any reason, the incident retains the
primary unit assignment until another unit is manually designated as primary.

The primary unit can be changed with the Primary Unit command.

Send Feedback 411

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

Changing the Primary Unit (PU)

Use the Primary Unit command to designate a different unit as the primary unit. Any changes to the
primary unit appear in the unit and incident history. The unit being made the primary must be active or
have been active on the incident.

The Change Primary Unit (PU) command does not remove a unit from the incident.

NOTE:
The PU command is the only way to change the primary unit assignment without reopening the
incident.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

PU.U.I.D
You can use either the incident ID or unit ID of a unit active on the incident for the I identifier. The
D;<dispo/comments> identifier and values are applied to the unit that is the primary unit for the
incident.

The D;<dispo/comments> identifier and values are applied to the unit that is being made the primary
unit for the incident.

To change the primary unit:

1 On the command line, type PU followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
PU.U;<unit id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the value of the unit ID for the primary unit and then type the period separator.

3 Do one of the following:

• At the cursor, type the ID of a unit active on the incident.

• At the cursor, type the incident number on which the unit is active.

4 If the unit being made primary was previously cleared from the incident and your agency is
provisioned to require a disposition for the unit, type another period and enter the disposition and
comments.

5 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne designates the specified unit as the primary unit and updates the unit status monitor
with the primary unit.

Freeing Units From Incidents

You can free units from incidents from the Incident Management Summary form or from the command
line. When you use either method, PremierOne clears all units currently assigned or stacked to the
incident, and places the incident in the pending status or in your agency defined initial status.

412 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

Freeing Units From an Incident Using the Incident Management

Summary Form
You can free units from an incident from the Incident Management Summary form or from the command
line. For details on freeing units from the command line, see Freeing Units From an Incident From the
Command Line (FR) on page 413.

To free units from an incident from the Incident Management Summary form:

1 Do one of the following:

• On the command line, type IU and press Enter or F10. Type the incident number in the Incident
# field and press F12.

• On the command line, type IU.# and press Enter or F10.

The Summary tab of the Incident Management Summary form displays in the Primary Work Area.

To see which units have been dispatched to your incident, select the Dispatch tab and then select
the Units Assigned tab. If the RA command is issued to release all but one unit, the previously
assigned units still display in the list of dispatched units.

2 In the Summary tab, select Free at the bottom of the Incident Management Summary form.

PremierOne clears all units currently assigned or stacked to the incident, and places the incident in
the pending status or in your agency-defined initial status.

Freeing Units From an Incident From the Command Line (FR)

You can free units from an incident with the Incident Management Summary form or from the command
line. For details on freeing units from the form, see Freeing Units From an Incident Using the Incident
Management Summary Form on page 413.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

FR.I.CM
To free units from an incident from the command line:

1 On the command line, type FR followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
FR.I;<incident id or active unit id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the incident ID of the incident from which you want to free units or type the ID of a
unit active on the incident.

3 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

4 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne clears all units currently assigned or stacked to the incident, and places the incident in
the pending status or in your agency-defined initial status.

Send Feedback 413

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

Example:
To free unit 1A12:
FR.1A12

Freeing All Except a Specified Unit From an Incident (RA)

Sometimes, it becomes necessary to release every unit on an incident with the exception of one or two
units that may be staying on the incident to complete paperwork, wait for utilities to arrive, or simply to
monitor the situation.

Use the Release All Except (RA) command to release all except the specified unit or units. You can also
place the released units in a specified status and add comments.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

RA.U.US.CM.D
The unit status (US) (optional) is assigned to all units released from the incident. If the unit status is
not specified, the unit is placed in the provisioned default status.

To free all except a specified unit from an incident:

1 On the command line, type RA followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
RA.U;<unit id(s)>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the IDs of the unit you do not want to release and then type the period separator.

You can type multiple units separated by commas.

3 At the cursor, type the unit status to assign to the unit or units being released.

4 Type the period separator.

5 Add a comment about the release.

To enter priority comments, enter angle brackets around the comments, such as <suspect may be
armed>. For details on priority comments, see Priority Comments on page 198.

6 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne releases all units except the unit or units you specified. If designated, PremierOne
assigns a unit status to the released units and adds comments. The transactions are written to the
unit history of each released unit.
Example:
To release all units but unit 1 and 2 and assign them a clear status:
RA.U;Unit1,Unit2.US;CL.CM;Released all units except Unit1 and Unit2
because incident not as serious as originally reported

414 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

Changing Standard Recommendations Using the Response

Mode Command (RM)
Use the Response Mode (RM) command to alter the current unit recommendation requirements within a
specified jurisdiction.
Example:
Your agency may define and activate a response mode of BUSINESS during working hours within its
business districts. This scenario would result in a greater number of units being recommended during
this busier, heavily congested time, than at night when the business district is relatively quiet.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

RM.RM.A.S.B.CG

NOTE:
Unit recommendations are always set or reset at the beat level.

To change standard unit recommendations using the Response Mode command:

1 On the command line, type RM followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
RM.RM;<response mode>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type a value for the new response mode followed by the period separator.

Your system administrator defines response mode values.

RM.RM;WEATHER
3 At the cursor, type the A identifier (if not using command line hints) plus the Agency ID/Area ID
values. This action is required if you specify a response mode.
RM.RM;WEATHER.A;DC/AR4
PremierOne attempts to use the response mode in making recommendations.

4 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

5 Press Enter.

Resetting the Response Mode to the Default Response

The response mode always has a default response of blank. Reset the response mode to the default
response when you want to return to the current unit recommendation requirements within a specified
jurisdiction.
Example:
Your agency changed to the response mode of BUSINESS during working hours within its business
districts. The time is now after working hours; therefore you reset to the default response.

Send Feedback 415

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

To reset a response mode to the default response:

1 On the command line, type RM followed by the period separator.

2 For the RM identifier, type RESET.

3 To specify the jurisdiction or jurisdictions to reset, type the period separator, followed by the A
identifier, followed by the Agency ID/Area ID that you want to reset.

Separate multiple agency/area combinations with commas.

4 Press Enter.

Reassigning Units With the Move Up Command (MU)

The Move Up command (MU) allows you to replenish stations or areas that have been depleted of
resources; for example, a station that sends all of its units to fight a fire. You can “move up” one or more
units to temporarily replace the resources that are away from a station or area. You can use the MU
command within your own agency or for foreign agencies.

During the time that a unit is assigned to a temporary station or area through the use of the MU
command, the system recommends the unit as though its “home” assignment is the temporary station or
area assigned by the move up. After being assigned to an incident and subsequently cleared, the unit
remains assigned to the temporary station for assignment to other incidents. Only when the MU
command is executed for the unit with no station or area specified is the unit returned to its home station
or area.

An agency must be provisioned to use either stations or areas for the recommendation assignments of
the agency units. A single agency cannot mix the assignments of stations and areas. Depending on how
an agency is provisioned, the MU command specifies coverage of the same entity provisioned for that
agency (stations or areas).

You do not need to create an incident for a move up, however, your system may be configured to create
a closed incident for tracking purposes whenever the MU command is executed. See your system
administrator to determine if your system is configured this way. For more information, see “Configuring
Move Ups” in the PremierOne Provisioning Guide.

Command identifiers default order:

MU.U.ST.A.TN
To reassign units with the Move Up command:

1 On the command line, type MU followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
MU.U;<unit id(s)>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type a value for the unit you want to move up followed by the period separator.

You can type multiple units separated by commas.

3 At the cursor, type the station or the area that you want the moved up unit or units to cover.

4 At the cursor, type TN followed by Y to send paging and toning alerts, or N to override auto-alerting.

416 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

5 Press Enter or F10.

The move up is confirmed in the Status Message area, and the move up reassignment can be
viewed in the Unit Status monitor. Your agency can provision an icon indicating the moved-up status
of the unit to display on the Unit Status monitor and on the Status tab of the Unit Status screen. For
more information on the fields that display move up information on the Unit Status monitor, see
Types of Status Monitors on page 446.

When the unit is moved up, a paging alert is sent to pagers associated with the unit and personnel
manning the unit and tear and run alerts are sent to associated printers, regardless of whether the
units are assigned to incidents.

If your system is provisioned to do so, an incident is created for each agency owning units that are
moved up. Creating an incident is a provisionable setting.
Example:
To reassign Unit1 to cover Area5:
MU.U;Unit1.ST;.A;AR5
To return a moved-up unit to its home station or area:

1 On the command line, type MU followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
.U;<unit id(s)>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the value for the unit you want to return to its original assigned area or station. Do
not specify an area or station.

You can type multiple units separated by commas.

3 Press Enter or F10.

4 The unit or units are returned to their originally assigned areas or stations.
Example:
To return Unit1 to its original assigned area:
MU.U;Unit1

Send Feedback 417

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

Foreign Agencies and the Move Up Command

A local agency unit can be either temporarily placed into a Move Up station or returned to its home
station from the CAD client.

When a local agency unit is involved in a Move Up transaction and its agency has provisioned the Send
status updates from this agency to the external system as checked, that unit is transferred to the
specified foreign CAD system via a Move Up transfer message.

When PremierOne receives a Move Up transfer message for a foreign agency unit, it checks the current
Receive unit status updates for units from the agency provisioning setting for the respective
agency.

• If the provisioning setting is checked, PremierOne continues processing this message.

• If the provisioning setting is not checked, PremierOne ignores this message.

When processing a Move Up transfer message for a Foreign Agency unit, PremierOne checks the on
duty status of the specified unit within its respective agency.

• If the unit is not on duty, PremierOne ignores this message.

• If the unit is on duty, PremierOne continues processing this message.

When processing a Move Up transfer message for a foreign agency unit, PremierOne places the unit in
the specified jurisdiction (station or area).

• If the respective unit is already within the specified jurisdiction, this message is ignored.

• If the specified jurisdiction is invalid for the respective unit agency, this message is ignored.

Alerts and the Move Up Command

NOTE:
The Auto alert on Move-Up field must be selected on the Settings form in Provisioning.

If both stations have provisioned Station ID in their Alerting Scheme you perform a move up command,
the following occurs:

• When a unit moves from its home station to a covering station, PremierOne alerts its home station.

• When a unit moves from a covering station back to its home station, PremierOne alerts the covering
station of the unit.

• When a unit moves from a covering station to another covering station, PremierOne alerts the
original covering station.

If the home station has Station ID and Toning System provisioned plus one or more of Duty Type, Unit
ID, and/or Incident Type, then the covering station must have the same scheme as the home station.

If neither station has Station ID provisioned, PremierOne checks the other provisioning for the unit. If
there are pagers assigned to the unit, personnel, and/or vehicle and if the home station provisioning is
set to send alerts for the current station, then pager alerts go into the Unit Alerting List and the alerts are
selected.

418 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

• In general, move up alerting follows the unit.

Example:
If a unit moves from its home station of, for example, FD/ST01 to FD/ST02, the alerting record for
FD/ST01 is used for the initial move up to FD/STA02. However, once the unit is successfully moved
and assigned to FD/ST02, the FD/ST02 alerting record is used for dispatch as well as a move up to
another station. Once the unit is in that station, even if it is a foreign agency, the agency alerting
scheme is checked, and if it includes Station ID, the alerting records for that agency are used.

Using Pagers With the Move Up Command

Pagers can be targets of messages sent during alerting for move ups. When a pager is assigned to a
unit (as unit equipment), a vehicle (as vehicle equipment), or to personnel manning a unit (as associated
equipment), and the unit is specified in a move up command, PremierOne pages all the pagers
associated with the unit whether it is due to personnel, vehicle, or unit assignment.

If PremierOne finds pagers associated with a unit (whether by personnel, vehicle, or unit assignment),
the alerts sent to the pagers are always placed into the Unit Alerting List.

The paging message sent when a unit is moved up to a station is “{unit ID} moved up to {station
description}.”

The paging message sent when a unit is moved up to an area is “{unit ID} moved up to {area name}.” If
a unit is being assigned to multiple areas, PremierOne lists each area name in the message.

Send Feedback 419

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 14: Dispatching Resources

420 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Closing and Reopening Incidents

Chapter 15

Closing and Reopening Incidents 15

You can close incidents in several different ways, depending on the incident status and whether a unit
was assigned to the incident. Whether the disposition is required to close an incident depends on your
agency configuration. After closed, you can reopen an incident.

Understanding Open Incidents

Under normal circumstances, when the last unit is cleared from an incident, the incident is placed in a
closed status. However, agencies can be configured so that when the last unit clears from the incident,
the incident is not closed. Open incidents remain displayed within the appropriate status monitors. If
necessary, units can be reassigned to the incident without having to search for and reopen the incident
or by creating an incident for the same situation.

For details on closing open incidents, see Closing Incidents on page 425.

Disposition Management
Agencies can configure whether the disposition is required to close an incident. If an agency decides
that the disposition is not required, then an incident can be closed with or without the disposition.

If an agency decides that the disposition is required, the agency has the following configuration options:

• Require at least one disposition in order to close the incident.

In this case, the disposition must be provided when closing an incident. The disposition may or may
not be associated with a standard resource unit that was assigned to the incident.

• Require each standard resource unit that was assigned to the incident to specify the disposition
before that unit can be cleared from the incident.

In this case, to clear an active unit from an incident, the disposition must be provided for the standard
resource unit.

• Require the disposition only from the standard resource unit that is designated as the primary unit.

In this case, the primary unit is required to provide the disposition to be cleared from the incident. All
other non-primary units can be cleared from the incident without requiring the disposition.

In all three cases, the appropriate dispositions can be provided when closing the incident. The
appropriate dispositions can be provided ahead of time (while units remain assigned to the incident),
therefore allowing you to close the incident by simply clearing the last unit from the incident.

The disposition is still required when closing unassigned incidents, such as a pending incident.
However, any unit-related rules do not apply because these incidents are not assigned to any unit.

NOTE:
Dispositions are not used with radio pseudo-units.

Send Feedback 421

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 15: Closing and Reopening Incidents

Table 43: How Dispositions Are Applied To Incidents And Units With The IU Command

IU command using incident ID IU command using active unit ID

IU.I;<incident id>.C;<close IU.I;<active unit id>.C;<close

dispo/comments> dispo/comments>

Condition IU.I;<incident id>.D;<dispo/ IU.I;<active unit id>.D;<dispo/

comments> comments>

IU.I;<incident id>.C;<close IU.I;<active unit id>.C;<close

dispo/comments>.D;<dispo/ dispo/comments>.D;<dispo/
comments> comments>

At least one Dispositions are applied only to the Dispositions are applied to the incident the
disposition is incident. The associated units are not unit is active on. The associated units are
required to close assigned the dispositions. assigned the same dispositions.
incident

or

Disposition is not
required

Disposition Dispositions are applied to all currently active assigned units (not stacked and not
required for all cleared).
standard resource
units

Disposition only Dispositions are applied to the primary unit.

required for
primary unit

Clearing Units
A standard resource unit is subject to the rules of disposition management when the unit is removed
from an incident using the US, RA, or IU commands.

• US – Updates the status of units. This command can also be used to assign specific standard
resource units a Clear status and then close the incidents to which they are assigned. For details on
the US command, see Updating Unit Status on page 321.

• IU – Updates incident information or displays the incident record for a specific incident. For details on
the IU command, see Displaying and Updating Incidents From the Incident Management Form on
page 245.

• RA – Releases all but the specified standard resource units, and, if specified, places those released
units in a status other than the default status. For details on the RA command, see Freeing All
Except a Specified Unit From an Incident (RA) on page 414.

422 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 15: Closing and Reopening Incidents

A standard resource unit is not subject to the rules of disposition management when the unit is removed
from the incident using the FR command, UX command, or is preempted.

• FR – Frees all standard resource units from an incident and returns the incident to the agency
provisioned initial status (pending). For details on the FR command, see Freeing Units From
Incidents on page 412.

• UX – Removes a standard resource unit from an incident and assigns it to another incident. For
details on the UX command, see Exchanging Unit Assignments (UX) on page 411.

• Preempted – Removes the unit from its original assignment and dispatches it to the new incident.
For details on preempted units, see Understanding Call Stacking on page 404.

When you clear the final standard resource unit from an incident, PremierOne does one of two things: if
open incidents are not allowed, PremierOne attempts to close the incident based on the rules of
disposition management; when open incidents are allowed, the incident remains open.

NOTES:
Radio pseudo-units are automatically cleared when the final standard resource unit is cleared.

Dispositions are not used with radio pseudo-units.

The Free Units command does not close an incident.

Send Feedback 423

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 15: Closing and Reopening Incidents

Clearing Units: Examples

In the following scenarios, the agency is provisioned to close the incident after all units are cleared from
the incident:
Table 44: Clearing Units: Examples

User Clears the

Current Unit Assignments Resulting Condition
Following Units

Incident: FD/001 (Active) E1 Incident: FD/001 (Active)

Standard Resource Units: Standard Resource Units:

• E1 (Assigned) • TK17 (Assigned)

• TK17 (Assigned) • BC4 (Assigned)

• BC4 (Assigned) Radio Pseudo-Units:

Radio Pseudo-Units: • CH1 (Assigned)

• CH1 (Assigned) • CH7 (Assigned)

• CH7 (Assigned) Because other standard resource units remain

currently assigned to the incident, the radio
pseudo-units are not automatically cleared from
the incident and remain assigned or stacked
against the incident.

Incident: FD/001 (Active) TK17, BC4 Incident: FD001 (Closed)

Standard Resource Units: Because the user cleared all the currently
assigned standard resource units from the
• TK17 (Assigned) incident, PremierOne also cleared all the radio
pseudo-units that are currently assigned or
• BC4 (Assigned) stacked against the incident, resulting in the
incident being closed.
Radio Pseudo-Units:

• CH1 (Assigned)

• CH7 (Stacked)

424 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 15: Closing and Reopening Incidents

Table 44: Clearing Units: Examples (Cont.)

User Clears the

Current Unit Assignments Resulting Condition
Following Units

Incident: FD/003 (Active) E1, TK17, BC4 Incident: FD/001 (Stacked)

Standard Resource Units: Standard Resource Units:

• E1 (Assigned) • HM11 (Stacked)

• TK17 (Assigned) Because the user cleared all currently assigned

standard resource units from the incident,
• BC4 (Assigned) PremierOne also cleared all the radio pseudo-
units that are currently assigned or stacked
• HM11 (Stacked) against the incident, resulting in the incident
being stacked (because HM11 is still stacked
Radio Pseudo-Units: against the incident).
• CH1 (Assigned)

• CH7 (Stacked)

Incident FD/003 (Active) CH1, CH7 Incident: FD/001 (Active)

Standard Resource Units: Standard Resource Units:

• E1 (Assigned) • E1 (Assigned)

• TK17 (Assigned) • TK17 (Assigned)

Radio Pseudo-Units: Clearing all radio pseudo-units from an incident

does not cause any other units to be
• CH1 (Assigned) automatically cleared. Therefore, E1 and TK17
remain assigned to the incident.
• CH7 (Stacked)

Closing Incidents
You close incidents in different ways depending on the incident status, whether a unit was assigned to
the incident, and whether the disposition is required to close the incident.

If an incident requires a disposition, the rules governing the assignment of disposition are enforced; for
details, see Disposition Management on page 421.

To close a pending incident, use one of the following methods. Pending incidents do not have units
assigned to them.

• Summary tab of the Incident Management form (Disposition field). For more information, see step 7
of Initiating Incidents From the Initiate Incident Form on page 209.

• Incident Update (IU) command (Disposition identifier). For more information, see Closing Incidents
From the Command Line (IU) on page 427.

To close an active incident, use one of the following methods. Active incidents have one or more
standard resource units assigned to them.

• Summary tab of the Incident Management form (Disposition field). For more information, see
Updating Unit Status From the Unit Management Form on page 321.

Send Feedback 425

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 15: Closing and Reopening Incidents

• Incident Update (IU) command (Disposition identifier). For more information, see Closing Incidents
From the Command Line (IU) on page 427.

• Status tab of the Unit Management form (Disposition field). For more information, see Updating Unit
Status From the Unit Management Form on page 321.

• Unit status (US) command (Disposition identifier). For more information, see Updating Unit Status
From the Command Line (US) on page 323.

In some cases, such as for open incidents, the incident may need to be closed explicitly, regardless of
whether the disposition is required. If the disposition is not required, you may also need to explicitly
close the incident. In this case, use one of the following methods to close the incident.

• Use the Close Incid button in the Incident Management Summary window.

• Use the CL;yes identifier with the IU command.

The CL identifier specifically closes an incident when set Y.

• Use the C;<close dispo/comment> identifier with the IU command.

The C identifier closes an incident when the disposition is used with it (as opposed to the D identifier
which only gives the disposition without closing).

If an open incident requires a disposition, the rules governing the assignment of disposition are enforced
as if the units are being cleared from the incident; for details, see Disposition Management on page 421.

Closing Incidents From the Incident Management Form

You can close an incident directly from the Incident Management form.

To close an incident from the Incident Management form:

1 Open the incident from the Incident Management form.

For details on opening incidents, see Displaying and Updating Incidents From the Incident
Management Form on page 245.

2 From the Disposition list, select the closing disposition for your incident.

A disposition may not be required depending on your agency configuration.

3 At the bottom of the form, click Close Incid.

If the disposition requires a comment, a message displays in the message field. Enter a comment in
the Comment field, if necessary, and then click Close again.

426 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 15: Closing and Reopening Incidents

Closing Incidents From the Command Line (IU)

You can close an incident from the command line using the Incident Update (IU) command with the
disposition (D) and close (C) identifiers. For a full list of identifiers, see Updating Incidents From the
Command Line (IU) on page 266.

To close an incident from the command line:

1 On the command line, type IU, followed by the period separator. You can alternatively omit the IU
and press F3 when you are finished entering the identifiers.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
IU.I;<incident id or active unit id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the period separator followed by the ID of the incident you want to close or the ID
of the unit that is active on the incident. Then type the period separator.

3 Depending on your system configuration, use the appropriate identifiers to close the incident.
Identifiers include the following:
CL;<close incident {yes|NO}>.D;<dispo/comment(s)>.C;<close dispo/
comment>
The CL identifier closes the incident without needing the disposition, the D identifier provides the
disposition for the incident without closing the incident, and the C identifier closes the incident with
the disposition. Generally the CL and D identifiers are used together or the C identifier is used by
itself.

How the dispositions are applied depends on how your system is configured with regard to
dispositions. For details, see Disposition Management on page 421.

• If the disposition is not required and the disposition is given, then the disposition is applied to the
incident.

• If the disposition is required, but is not required for any standard resource unit (primary unit or all
units), then the disposition is applied to the incident.

• If the disposition is required for all standard resource units, then the disposition entered is applied
to the incident and all units on the incident at the time the disposition is entered. If you give the
incident a disposition and then place another unit on the incident, the new unit does not
automatically receive the disposition. Five the new unit a disposition (or the whole incident)
before you clear the new primary unit or close the incident.

• If the disposition is required for the primary unit, then the disposition entered is applied to the
incident and associated only to the primary unit. If another unit is made primary after you apply
the disposition, then the new primary requires a another disposition (or the whole incident) before
you clear the new primary unit or close the incident.

NOTE:
Dispositions are not used with radio pseudo-units.

4 To close the incident, press Enter or F10.

PremierOne closes the incident.

Send Feedback 427

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 15: Closing and Reopening Incidents

Examples:
To close incident 0001234 with DISP1 disposition and comments:
IU.#0001234.CL;Y.D;DISP1/Cancelled by reporting party
To close incident 0001234 with two dispositions, CAN1 and CAN2 and comments:
IU.#0001234.CL;Y.D;CAN1/Comment1,CAN2/Comment2
To close incident 0001235 (incident does not require a disposition):
IU.0001235.CL;Y

Reopening Incidents
Use the Incident Open (IO) command to open a closed incident. When you open a closed incident, it
returns to the Pending queue or is placed in an initial status. The original incident initiation date and time
do not change.

When an incident is re-opened and then closed again, the dispositions applied the first time do not affect
the application of disposition management rules when the incident is closed again. If dispositions are
required before allowing the incident to be closed, then dispositions are required in the same manner
every time the incident is closed.

You can reopen an incident from the Incident Management form or using the IO command.

Reopening an Incident From the Incident Management Summary

Form
You can reopen an incident from the Incident Management Summary form or from the command line.
For information about reopening an incident from the command line, see Reopening an Incident From
the Command Line (IO) on page 430.

To reopen an incident from the Incident Management Summary form:

1 Open the incident from the Incident Management form.

For details on opening the form, see Displaying and Updating Incidents From the Incident
Management Form on page 245.

428 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 15: Closing and Reopening Incidents

Figure 229: Closed Incident In The Incident Management Summary Form

2 In the Comments box, enter any comments.

To enter priority comments, enter angle brackets around the comments, such as <suspect may be
armed>. For details on priority comments, see Priority Comments on page 198.

3 At the bottom of the Primary Work Area, click Reopen.

The Reopen Incident dialog box appears.

Figure 230: Reopen Incident Dialog Box

4 Type the reason you are reopening the incident, and then click OK.

PremierOne opens the incident and places it in the pending status or in your agency defined initial
status.

Send Feedback 429

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 15: Closing and Reopening Incidents

Reopening an Incident From the Command Line (IO)

You can reopen an incident from the Incident Management form or from the command line. For
information about reopening an incident from the Incident Management form, see Reopening an
Incident From the Incident Management Summary Form on page 428.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

IO.I.CM
To reopen an incident from the command line:

1 On the command line, type IO followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
IO.I;<incident id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the incident ID of the incident you want to reopen.

3 At the cursor, type the reason you are reopening the incident.

To enter priority comments, enter angle brackets around the comments, such as <suspect may be
armed>. For details on priority comments, see Priority Comments on page 198.

4 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne opens the incident and places it in the pending status or in your agency defined initial
status.
Example:
To reopen incident 12345:
I0.12345..do not affect. Add more subject information

430 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Managing Locations

Chapter 16

Managing Locations 16

PremierOne provides commands to determine location details and unit response to a specific IRF at a
location, and to manage premise/hazard records. You can create a premise/hazard record separate
from an incident.

Determining Location Details

The Location Details command displays all jurisdictional agencies, areas, sectors, and beats associated
with a location. The command also automatically displays the location on the map display.

The Location Details command provides GIS data for the location, along with the Police, Fire, and/or
Medical agencies that are jurisdictionally responsible for that location. The command provides a means
for validating the GIS data for locations without having to go through the incident initiation process.
Premise/Hazard and Previous Incident information for the geoverified location also display.

You can also enter IRF information to obtain a list of units that would be recommended for a specific IRF
at the location. Doing so can help answer “What If” scenarios; for example, which units would respond if
there was a chemical fire reported at 100 Main St?

Determining Location Details From the Location Detail Form

You can determine location detail from the Location Detail form or from the command line. For more
information about the command line, see Determining Location Detail From the Command Line (LD) on
page 435.

To determine location details from the Location Detail form:

1 On the command line, type LD and then press Enter or F10.

The Location Detail form appears in the Primary Work Area.

Send Feedback 431

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 16: Managing Locations

Figure 231: Location Details Form – Location Detail Tab

2 In the Location field, type the location.

You can enter the address, intersection, or common place. To use latitude and longitude coordinates,
click the L/L button.
NOTE
NOTE:
Always use the Real Street Name for all Premise Hazard searches. Do not use aliases.

3 In the City field, type or select the name of the city (optional).

4 Select Verify to verify the address. If you enter the City, the address verification process starts
automatically.

One of the following occurs:

• If there is a single matching record, the location details display in the Primary Work Area and the
location automatically displays on the Map display. The map readjusts so the location is in the
center of the map.

• If there is more than one matching record, the matching records display in the Work Assist Area.

To view details for a record, select the record and then click the View Rec button. To view a
record on the map display, select and click the Map It button. The location displays at a scale
provisioned by your system administrator.

When you select a record, the previous Incident and Premise/Hazard information for the location is
retrieved.

If an address cannot be validated, then the Map It feature is disabled. An error message indicates
that no records are found.

432 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 16: Managing Locations

The bottom of the form displays the information for all the jurisdictions covering the location,
including multi-beat, multi-agency intersections.

Determining Recommendations From the Location Details Form

You can use the Location Details form to determine the recommendations that would be made for the
location. You can use this feature to confirm that the unit recommendations process is working correctly
at a particular location. Units recommended for a Location Detail transaction do not prevent the units
from being recommended for an actual Incident Dispatch transaction.

To determine recommendations from the Location Details form:

1 On the command line, type LD and then press Enter or F10.

The Location Detail form appears in the Primary Work Area.

2 Enter the location information.

For instructions, see Determining Location Details From the Location Detail Form on page 431.
NOTE
NOTE:
Always use the Real Street Name for all Premise/Hazard searches. Do not use aliases.

3 Enter the IRF information.

Only the incident type is required. For the incident type, if your system is configured for aliases, you
can either select the incident type or manually type the alias.

NOTE:
The list of available incident types is filtered according to user role, trusted agency permissions,
and Incident Response Factors to display only the incident types you are provisioned to use for
the LD command. For details, see Understanding Incident Type Filtering and Agency Type
Defaults on page 194.

The agency type is only required if the specified incident type is duplicated across agency types.

IRFs (Agency, Agency Type, Incid Type, and Mod Circum) are defined in Provisioning under the
Incident Management – Incident Response Factors item.

The responsibility for an intersection can be divided among two or more beats or among two or more
agencies of the same agency type. In this case, a list of beats displays in the Work Assist Area.
Select the beat in the Work Assist Area and click the Select button, press Alt+E, or skip to the next
step.

4 Press F12.

The results display on the Recommendations tab. You cannot actually recommend any of the units
from this display, but you can see the units that would respond to and incident at the location.

Units that would be recommended for dispatch display in a blue background. Any units shown with a
white background would be recommended but not selected for dispatch because the response card
was set to obtain a specific number of additional units.

If any of the units are not available for dispatch (for example, already enroute to an incident),
PremierOne indicates them with an asterisk prefix ( * ) and bold/yellow text.

Send Feedback 433

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 16: Managing Locations

The Show Pref button retrieves the Unit recommendation list that is based on the AVL/ARL method.
The Request Rec button retrieves the updated, current recommend list from the system. For details
on AVL recommendations, see Dispatching Resources to Incidents From the Dispatch Form on
page 385.

If any of the units are not available for dispatch (for example, already enroute to an incident), the unit
ID has an asterisk ( * ) prefix; the text is bold/yellow when selected or bold/black when unselected.

If a unit is unstaffed at the time the recommendation is generated, a hyphen displays in parentheses
after the unit ID, such as L61 (-). This indicator appears when the Dispatch screen initially displays,
or whenever the Request Rec button is selected. This indicator allows you to take whatever actions
necessary to ensure that unstaffed units are picked up and adequately staffed.

The Personnel Assigned value on the Unit Assignments – Capability tab is the value used to
determine the staffing level for a unit. If the Personnel Assigned value for the unit is equal to zero,
the unit is considered unstaffed.
NOTE
NOTE:
For the indicator to display, your system administrator must enable the indicator in
Provisioning.

Figure 232: Location Details Window – Recommendations Tab

434 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 16: Managing Locations

Determining Location Detail From the Command Line (LD)

You can retrieve location details from the command line or from the Location Detail form. You can also
optionally enter IRF information to obtain a list of units that would be recommended for a specific IRF at
the location.

For more information about the form, see Determining Location Details From the Location Detail Form
on page 431.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

LD.L.CT.AP.T.AGT.MC.AL.CPN.BL.ZP.SB.MW.JA.JB.DN
To determine location details from the command line:

1 On the command line, type LD followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
LD.L;<location>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the value for the location.

3 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

If your system is configured to use and display incident type aliases, you can either enter the incident
type or the alias for the incident type.

4 Press Enter or F10.

Various forms may display in the Work Assist Area depending on the incident information:

• Incidents in Multi-Beat Intersections on page 175

• Previous Locations, Persons, and Vehicles on page 183

The location details display in the Primary Work Area. If there is only one matching address for the
location, then the location automatically displays on the Map display. The Map It button is then
disabled.
Examples:
To display location details for 123 Main St in Boulder City:
LD.123 Main St.Boulder City
To display location details for incident type of theft at 123 Main St:
LD.123 Main St..theft

Send Feedback 435

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 16: Managing Locations

Working With Premise Hazard Records

Premise Hazard records are records that have unique or special information regarding a specific
location that could be useful to the officer responding to an incident at the location. Examples include
gate codes, special entry information, VIP contact and protocol information, presence of toxic chemicals,
or known drug dealers.

In PremierOne, you can search, add, edit, view, and delete premise/hazard records.

NOTE:
You cannot edit or delete permanent premise hazard records.

Types of Premise/Hazard Records

Premise/hazard records can be associated with a location, such an address, common place, or
intersection, or an area. The Premise/Hazard record then displays for any location that is within that
area. An example of using this functionality would be to display the Gate Code for an incident that has
occurred within a gated community.

When a Premise/Hazard record is selected that has an associated premise/hazard area, the premise/
hazard area is highlighted on the map.

436 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 16: Managing Locations

Premise Hazard areas must be imported into the mapping system by your system administrator.

Figure 233: Premise Hazard Area Polygon

Send Feedback 437

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 16: Managing Locations

Premise hazard records associated with a premise/hazard area display in the Work Assist area with a
proximity of “In Area.”Sort order is Direct Hit, In Area, Inner, and then Outer.

Figure 234: Work Assist Area

438 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 16: Managing Locations

Searching for Premise/Hazard Records

You can search for any existing Premise/Hazard location records. They do not have to be associated
with an incident. Before creating a record, it is a good idea to search existing records to make sure the
record is not already in PremierOne.

To search for a premise/hazard record:

1 On the command line, type PH and then press F10 or Enter.

The Premise Hazard search form appears.

Figure 235: Premise Hazard Search Form

2 Enter the search criteria that you want to use to locate the record.

You can search by location, such as an address or common place; you can search by intersection; or
you can search by area. When you search using area, you get records within the selected premise
hazards area.

You can use % for wildcard searches for addresses, common places, intersections, and Cities.

To enter an Intersection, click the Intersection option. The form refreshes to show the Intersection
field and the Intersection button changes to read Address. To return to the Address and Common
Place fields, click the Address option.

Available search fields include Location (street, address, common place, or intersection),
Intersection, City, Agency ID, Record Title, and PremHaz Type. The information must be an exact
match.

Send Feedback 439

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 16: Managing Locations

3 Press F12.

The search results display in the lower part of the window.

Figure 236: Premise Hazard Form - With Information

Premise/Hazard Sort Order Rules

Premise Hazard Types, Settings, and Sort Order are defined in Provisioning under the Incident
Management – Premise/Hazard item. When multiple locations are displayed within the Premise/Hazard
Search Form, the records are first sorted by Location and City before applying the following Premise/
Hazard Sort Order Rules:

1 The Proximity value for the corresponding Premise/Hazard record in ascending order.

All Direct Hit records appear first, followed by Inner Proximity records, and then by Outer Proximity
records.

2 The Sort Order Sequence Number provisioned against the Premise/Hazard Type for the
corresponding Premise/Hazard record in ascending order.

All Premise/Hazard records with a Sort Order Sequence Number of 1 appears first, followed
sequentially by the next number in the sequence until Sort Order Sequence Number 999.

3 The Agency ID that owns the Premise/Hazard Type for the corresponding Premise/Hazard record
based on the Agency Sort Order provisioned for the user owning agency in their defined order.

a The agencies display in the provisioned Defined Sort Order.

b All agencies that are not included within the Defined Sort Order display alphabetically
immediately after the agencies in the Defined Sort Order.

440 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 16: Managing Locations

4 The Premise/Hazard Type assigned to the corresponding Premise/Hazard record in alphabetical

order – when more than one Premise/Hazard Type has the same Sort Order Sequence Number
within an agency.

5 The approximate distance between the Premise/Hazard record location and the specified location in
ascending order – when more than one Premise/Hazard Record exists within the same Premise/
Hazard Type. This situation only applies to Inner and Outer Proximity records, since the approximate
distance for Direct Hit records would be zero.

6 The Premise/Hazard Record Title in alphabetical order for Direct Hit records– when more than one
Premise/Hazard Record exists for the same approximate distance value within the same Premise/
Hazard Type.

Creating Premise Hazard Records

You can create a premise/hazard record from the Premise Hazard form. You can access this form from
the Premise Hazards Search results form, or from the Haz tab in the Incident Initiation and Incident
Management tabs. Creating a premise/hazard location or area from the Incident Initiate or Management
forms associates the premise/hazard location or area with the incident.

NOTE:
For point locations, you can only create a premise/hazard record for a verified address.

To create a premise/hazard record:

1 Search PremierOne to ensure the record does not exist.

For details, see Searching for Premise/Hazard Records on page 439.

2 Select the Create New button.

The Create New dialog box appears.

NOTE
NOTE:
You can only create a premise hazard record for an area that has already been imported into
the mapping system.

Send Feedback 441

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 16: Managing Locations

3 Do one of the following:

• For an area, enter the premise/hazard area and click Search. Then select the area form the list
of premise/hazard areas that displays.

• For a point location, enter the address information and click Verify. Then select the address from
the list of verified address that displays.

Figure 237: Premise Hazard – Create New Dialog Box

442 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 16: Managing Locations

The Premise Hazard Record appears.

Figure 238: Premise Hazard Record

4 Enter the available premise/hazard information and press Submit.

CAUTION:
Do not press F12 or Enter. If you do, a search occurs in the background from the data entered
in the Search screen and the record is not created.

You can use any combination of 3-digit area code, 7-digit phone number, and/or 1-4 digit extension
for the Owner Phone number and Contact Phone number fields. If you are entering an international
number, start with a + symbol, enter the country code, and then the rest of the phone number
information. Entering the + symbol causes the area code/phone number/extension formatting to be
removed.

NOTES:
A Contact Name is required to enable the Contact Phone number field.

The record is created.

Viewing or Editing Premise Hazard Records

You can view or edit existing premise hazard records.

To view or edit a premise hazard record:

1 Search PremierOne to locate the record.

For details, see Searching for Premise/Hazard Records on page 439.

Send Feedback 443

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 16: Managing Locations

2 Select the record and then click View at the bottom of the Premise Hazards Search Results form.

The record displays. The last time the record was updated displays at the top of the record with the
user ID and name of the user making the change.

Figure 239: Premise Hazard Record

3 To edit the record, click Edit at the bottom of the form. Make your modifications and click Submit.

CAUTION:
Do not press F12 or Enter. If you do, a search occurs in the background from the data entered
in the Search screen and the record is not created.

You cannot change the Title, Status, or Location. To change those fields, delete the record and
create a record.

Deleting Premise/Hazard Records

You can delete premise/hazard records that are no longer needed. You can only delete temporary
records. Records are made permanent in Provisioning.

To delete a premise/hazard record:

1 Search PremierOne to locate the record.

For details, see Searching for Premise/Hazard Records on page 439.

2 Select the record and then click View at the bottom of the Premise Hazards Search Results form.

3 Select Delete at the bottom of the form.

You are prompted to confirm the deletion.

444 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Using Status Monitors

Chapter 17

Using Status Monitors 17

The PremierOne status monitors show the statuses of units and incidents in the areas assigned to your
console. PremierOne updates these monitors automatically whenever a unit or an incident changes
status. Status monitors can be configured at each site to display a wide variety of information in different
formats. Several of the most commonly used status monitors are:

• Unit status monitor – Displays information about the status of units.

• Incident status monitor – Displays information about incidents in progress.

• Pending Incident status monitor – Displays information about incidents that are waiting for dispatch.

NOTE:
CAD Status Monitors are currently limited to about 950 items.

Overview of Types of Status Monitor Coverages

Status monitors can cover fixed or different areas and display the statuses of units and incidents in the
areas. The attributes of status monitors are configured in Provisioning. PremierOne provides the
following types of monitors:

• Signed On Coverage Areas – This type of status monitor displays the specific areas that the user
signs on to and is most commonly used by police agencies.

The DS command affects the display of signed on coverage groups. For details on the DS
command, see Refreshing Your Status Monitor and Map Displays (DS) on page 143.

• Monitored Areas – This type of status monitor can display areas outside of the set of signed on
coverage areas in addition to those areas in the coverage areas. Users can issue the MA command
for one or more agency/area combinations and see what is happening in those areas without
affecting the display in the Signed On Coverage Area status monitor windows.

As an example, a police dispatcher who is informed of a large fire in FD Station 3 area might issue
MA.FD/STN3 to monitor the incidents within that area. The dispatcher can in turn keep police units
within that and surrounding areas of the situation, all by watching the status monitor.

Users can issue the MA command to change the areas being monitored. For details on the MA
command, see Monitoring Areas on page 144.

• Fixed Areas – This type of status monitor always displays the same areas. Fixed areas are beneficial
to remote PremierOne clients used by field unit supervisors at different fire, police, and EMS
stations. The user can sign on to cover only one area within the larger set of areas of responsibility.
As part of the default status monitor display, the user could also have incident and unit status monitor
windows that display all the areas, so that the user could always see all of the areas regardless of
how the user signs on. The CC, WT, and DS commands do not function with fixed areas.

Send Feedback 445

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 17: Using Status Monitors

• Signed On Coverage Areas and Monitored Areas – This type of status monitor blends signed on
coverage areas with monitored areas in the same window. This type of monitor is helpful when there
is limited monitor space.

With this type of status monitor, the MA command can only add to the user's signed on areas; no
signed on area is ever removed, and the user cannot remove it as long as the user is signed on to
cover the area. For details on the MA command, see Monitoring Areas on page 144.

Types of Status Monitors

Following is a list of the status monitors that are available in PremierOne. The status monitors that
display and the information that displays in the status monitor depends upon your system configuration.

• Pending status monitor – Displays information about incidents awaiting dispatch.

NOTE
NOTE:
When the command line is clear, pressing F9 displays the next highest/oldest pending incident
in the work area without updating the command line. When an incident is displayed in the work
area, the Next/Previous keys cycle through the Pending Status monitor based on the current
sort order.

• Incident status monitor – Displays information about incidents that have had units dispatched to
them.

Your system may also be configured to display units that are on associated incidents.

• Calltaker – Displays information about pending calls waiting for dispatch and calls that are
dispatched and currently active. The calltaker monitor is the only status monitor that can display both
pending and active incidents.

• Unit status monitor – Displays unit status and unit information.

The following fields on the Unit Status monitor may require additional explanation. These values
come in to play after a move up command (for example, MU.U;UNIT1.ST;ST2 or
MU.U;UNIT1.A;AR3).

• Unit Cover Station – Displays the station ID when a unit is moved up to cover a station (for
example, UNIT1 is assigned to ST1 and is then moved up to ST2. This field displays ST2 while
UNIT1 is in ST2).

• Unit Cover Area – Displays the area when a unit is moved up to cover an area (for example,
UNIT1 is assigned to AR1 and is then moved up to cover AR3. This field displays AR3 while
UNIT1 is in AR3).

• Unit Comments – If this field is provisioned, it displays the comments from the last 24 hours.

• Station Cover – Displays either TRUE or FALSE depending on whether the unit is covering its
assigned station/area (FALSE) or currently covering another station/area (TRUE).

• The Unit Is Stacked – displays whether a unit is stacked to an incident. The Unit Is Stacked
column is related to the unit’s assignment and not the incident. The Unit Is Stacked field is set to
Y when the unit is stacked to an incident. Note that a unit can be stacked to multiple incidents at
one time.

• Supervisor status monitor – Displays the activities in the call center by area. The Supervisor status
monitor can potentially display the total number of nonpending and pending incidents, number of
available units, total number of incidents per dispatcher, overdue pending incidents, dispatched
incidents awaiting arrival, and logged on dispatchers.

446 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 17: Using Status Monitors

• Interface status monitor– Displays the current status of interfaces being used with PremierOne.

• PTT – Push to talk status monitor – Displays information each time a radio transmission (group call /
emergency only) is broadcast.

The maximum number of radio transactions that display is 30. The most recent radio transactions
display on top of the list. If the number of transactions reaches more than 30, then the older
transactions drop off the monitor.

Attributes display using the following hierarchy: unit ID, vehicle ID, personnel ID, RIN, or EID.

If the unit keys the emergency, the emergency status is indicated on the PTT status monitor. The text
color changes to Red and Bold, and a red asterisk (*) is added in front of the ID field.

Displaying Status Monitors

When you sign in, your status monitors may be configured so that they open automatically, or they may
be configured to open minimized.

To display minimized status monitors:

Double-click the title bar of the status monitor you want to display.

The status monitor displays in full size. The title displays at the top of the window.

Incident Status Monitor Excess Records Warning

If the Incident status monitor contains too many records to display, a warning icon ( ) appears at the
top-right corner of the screen. Click the icon to view details of the warning message.

Figure 240: Incident Status Monitor Warning Message

Send Feedback 447

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 17: Using Status Monitors

Pending Alert Warning

In the rare situation where a pending incident does not display in the appropriate status monitor, the
Pending Incident Alert Notification dialog box displays on all workstations with the incident number
indicating the incident should be checked to ensure it is being handled properly.

Figure 241: Pending Incident Alert Dialog Box

The Pending Incident Alert dialog box can display in two circumstances:

• If there are no users logged in to CAD who are covering or monitoring the area in which a pending
incident was created.

In this case, the system recognizes that the pending incident has not displayed on any user status
monitor. There may be an unintended condition within the system where all areas are not being
covered. The correction to such a condition is to review the provisioning of CAD Status Monitor
Display sets to ensure that all areas are always accounted for when displaying pending incidents.
This action eliminates the possibility of a pending incident not being displayed.

• If there was an unforeseen communication failure within the system.

In this event, Motorola Solutions Support should be notified to research what has caused such a
failure and take corrective action.

Regardless of why the Pending Alert dialog box displays, corrective action should be taken to resolve
the issue. If there is a reason for a pending incident to be created and not be displayed within any CAD
Status Monitor display, this alert can be disabled through a configuration change enabled by Motorola
Solutions. Disabling the display of the Pending Incident Alert dialog box would be highly irregular,
however, and the ability to permanently disable the alert is not available through Provisioning.

GPS Not Reporting Indicators

The Unit Status monitor displays an icon or text to indicate when a GPS-equipped unit fails to update its
position within a specified time. This situation can occur when the unit experiences communication
difficulties, or the GPS in the unit has lost the satellite signal.

448 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 17: Using Status Monitors

When the unit fails to report its location, an indicator displays in the GPS Equipped column of the Unit
Status Monitor.
Table 45: GPS Not Reporting Indicators

Indicator Description

NR Not reporting. Your agency can configure the NR text.

The unit GPS has stopped reporting. The indicator shows that communications from the unit to
the CAD server has stopped.

The unit GPS has lost the signal from the satellite. Lost signal causes can include: the person
(unit) has gone inside a building, or the GPS device is shielded from the satellite for some
reason. In this scenario, the unit location may not be correct because the location information
is old.

Displaying Incident Details From Status Monitors

You can display the Incident Management form for an incident in a status monitor so you can quickly
access the incident details and dispatch units when needed.

To display incident details from a status monitor:

Double-click the incident in the status monitor.

The Incident Management form displays for the incident. For pending incidents, the Dispatch tab is
active. For incidents with assigned units, the Summary tab is active.

Displaying Unit Details From Status Monitors

You can display the Unit Status form for a unit in a status monitor so you can quickly access unit details.

To display unit details from a status monitor:

Double-click the unit in the status monitor.

The Unit Status form displays for the unit with the Status tab active.

Displaying a Different Status Monitor Configuration

You may have access to more than one configuration of status monitors depending on your signon role.

To display a different status monitor configuration:

1 From the PremierOne Utilities menu, select Status Monitors.

2 Select the monitor from the list that displays.

Send Feedback 449

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 17: Using Status Monitors

Resizing Status Monitors

You can open, close, and resize status monitors to suit your work environment preferences.

To resize status monitors:

After the status monitors are opened, you can do the following:

• Click the minimize button to minimize each status monitor window to the bottom of the window.

• Click the maximize button to maximize the status monitor window.

• Click the close button ( X ) to close the status monitor.

Figure 242: Unit Status Monitor Window

Bringing All Status Monitors to the Front

You can bring all open status monitors to the front of your display with a single keystroke.

To bring all status monitors to the front:

Click Ctrl+` (accent symbol on key to left of 1).

450 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 17: Using Status Monitors

Refreshing Status Monitors

You can refresh status monitors at any time from the Utilities menu in PremierOne.

To refresh status monitors:

1 From the Utilities menu, select Status Monitors.

2 Select the appropriate configuration for your position and agency, such as Boulder/Dispatcher.

PremierOne refreshes the status monitors and minimizes all of them to the bottom of the
PremierOne window.

Displaying Status Monitor Data in Multiple Columns

Some status monitor windows can be provisioned to display items from top to bottom, and then
horizontally across the width of the window. This display method reduces the amount of vertical scrolling
that may be necessary to view all of the information contained within a status monitor window. The width
of a single column set and the total width of the status monitor window determines the number of column
sets displayed horizontally. A horizontal scroll bar appears if the width of the window is less than the
width of a single column set.

Additionally, the display can be configured to include or exclude the wrapping of group labels. When
group label wrapping is included, the group labels wrap along with the set of columns. Only the first set
of columns is sortable, but it controls the sorting of all column sets. Resizing any column automatically
resizes that same column equally in each column set.

Send Feedback 451

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 17: Using Status Monitors

Example of Group Label Wrapping Included

Figure 243: Status Monitor With Group Label Wrapping Included

When group label wrapping is excluded, the system displays all rows within the first area grouping in a
left-to-right fashion until all rows within the area are displayed. Then the system displays all of the rows
in the next area in a left-to-right fashion until all rows are displayed, and so on.

452 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 17: Using Status Monitors

Example of Group Label Wrapping Excluded

Figure 244: Status Monitor With Group Label Wrapping Excluded

Sorting Information In Status Monitors

You can sort the information appearing in status monitors by each column to suit your individual
preference or agency mandate.

To sort information in status monitors:

Click a column heading to sort information by that column.

NOTE:
If your status monitor is provisioned to display date in multiple columns, you can only sort data by
clicking the headings in the first column of information.

Understanding Status Monitor Colors

Colors in PremierOne status monitors are used to help you recognize the status of units and incidents.
The PremierOne system administrator configures the foreground and background colors, based on
incident priority timeouts and unit status timeouts. For details on the colors that are used, see your
system administrator.

Send Feedback 453

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 17: Using Status Monitors

Status Monitor Toolbar Overview

PremierOne status monitors have a toolbar with some basic commands that you can execute within the
status monitors. When displayed, the toolbar includes buttons for CMD, Copy, Default Sort, Print,
Refresh, and Switch To commands. To display the toolbar, see Displaying the Status Monitor Toolbar on
page 454.

The status monitor title bar includes the name of the status monitor, such as Unit Status Monitor, an
Alerts box if your system administrator has configured the status monitor to have one, and the minimize,
maximize, and close buttons.

Figure 245: Status Monitor Title Bar and Toolbar

Displaying the Status Monitor Toolbar

At any time, you can show or hide the status monitor toolbar.

To display the status monitor toolbar:

1 At the top of the vertical scroll bar in any status monitor window, click the Show/Hide Toolbar
button.

Figure 246: Status Monitor Toolbar Button

The status monitor toolbar appears.

Figure 247: Status Monitor Toolbar Command Line

2 To hide the toolbar, click the Show/Hide Toolbar button again.

454 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 17: Using Status Monitors

Displaying the Status Monitor Toolbar Command Line

You can display or hide a command line from the status monitor toolbar.

To display the status monitor command line:

1 Display the status monitor toolbar.

For instructions, see Displaying the Status Monitor Toolbar on page 454.

2 On the status monitor toolbar, click CMD Line.

Figure 248: CMD Line Button

The command line appears below the status monitor toolbar.

Copying Status Monitor Details From the Status Monitor Toolbar

Command Line
You can copy selected items or all items in a status monitor using the Copy button on the toolbar. Use
the Copy command to copy status details from PremierOne into another application.

To copy status monitor details from the Status Monitor Toolbar command line:

1 Display the status monitor toolbar.

For instructions, see Displaying the Status Monitor Toolbar on page 454.

2 On the status monitor toolbar, click the arrow on the Copy button and choose Selected Items or All
Items from the list.

Figure 249: Copy Button Menu

The selection you made applies the next time you click the Copy button.

3 Do one of the following:

• If you chose Selected Items, select the items you want to copy, then click Copy.

• If you chose All Items, click Copy.

PremierOne copies the item or items you selected to the clipboard.

Send Feedback 455

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 17: Using Status Monitors

Sorting Status Monitor Details From the Status Monitor Toolbar

Command Line
Use Default Sort to sort status monitor details in PremierOne according to the default configuration
established by your system administrator.

To sort status monitor details from the Status Monitor Toolbar command line:

1 Display the status monitor toolbar.

For instructions, see Displaying the Status Monitor Toolbar on page 454.

2 On the status monitor toolbar, click Default Sort.

PremierOne sorts the status monitor details according to the default configuration established by
your system administrator.

Printing Status Monitor Details From the Status Monitor Toolbar

Command Line
Use the print command to print PremierOne status monitor details. You can print the contents of one
status monitor or the contents of all status monitors using the Print button on the toolbar.

To print status monitor details from the Status Monitor Toolbar command line:

1 Display the status monitor toolbar.

For instructions, see Displaying the Status Monitor Toolbar on page 454.

2 On the status monitor toolbar, click the arrow on the Print button and choose Entire Window or All
Windows from the list.

The selection you make applies the next time you click Print.

3 Select Print.

Depending on your selection, the contents of the active status monitor or all status monitors prints on
your default printer.

Switching Status Monitor Displays From the Status Monitor Toolbar

Command Line
If your agency has multiple displays, and if you have the proper privileges to see them, use the Switch
To command to alternate views between multiple status monitor displays.

To switch between status monitor displays from the Status Monitor Toolbar command line:

1 Display the status monitor toolbar.

For instructions, see Displaying the Status Monitor Toolbar on page 454.

2 On the status monitor toolbar, click the arrow on the Switch To button and choose the display you
want to open.

PremierOne applies your selection.

456 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 17: Using Status Monitors

Status Monitor Right-Click Options Overview

You can access a set of commands in the PremierOne status monitors using the right-click button on the
mouse. Available on the Unit status monitor, Pending Incident status monitor, and Incident status
monitors, you can acknowledge alerts, view incident detail information, dispatch an incident, view unit
detail information, and update the status of units using the right-click mouse button.

Acknowledging Alerts Using the Status Monitor Right-Click Option

If configured, you can acknowledge alerts using the right-click button on your mouse in the Incident
status monitor.

To acknowledge an alert using the Status monitor right-click option:

1 Open the Incident or unit status monitor.

2 Right-click the incident or unit associated with the alert.

3 Select Acknowledge Alert from the list that displays.

Acknowledging Alerts From the Command Line

You can acknowledge alerts that are active in a status monitor using the Incident Update (IU) or Unit
Update (US) command from the command line. Issuing the command displays the incident or unit in the
Primary Work Area and acknowledges the alert.

NOTE:
“CAD command line” refers to the command line on the CAD client, as well as the “CMD Line”
available on any CAD status monitor window.

Send Feedback 457

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 17: Using Status Monitors

Viewing Incident Information Using the Status Monitor Right-Click

Option
If configured, you can view incident detail information using the right-click button on your mouse in either
the Incident or Pending Incident status monitors.

To view incident detail information using the status monitor right-click button:

1 Open the Incident or Pending Incident status monitor.

2 Right-click the incident.

Figure 250: Incident Status Monitor Window – Right-Click List

3 Select View Incident Detail Information from the list.

458 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 17: Using Status Monitors

The Incident Summary screen appears.

Figure 251: Incident Summary Screen

Selecting Right-Click Commands in Incident Status Monitors

If configured by your agency, commands may be available when you right-click an incident in the
Incident or Pending status monitor. For help on any of the commands, see the appropriate section of this
guide

To select a right-click command in an Incident status monitor:

1 Open the Incident or Pending Incident status monitor.

2 Right-click the incident.

A list displays with the available commands.

3 Select the command you want from the list.

The command is executed.

Selecting Right-Click Commands in Unit Status Monitors

If configured by your agency, commands are available when you right-click a unit in the Unit status
monitor. For help on any of the commands, see the appropriate section of this guide.

To select a right-click command in a Unit status monitor:

1 Open the Unit status monitor.

2 Right-click the unit.

A list displays with the available commands.

Send Feedback 459

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 17: Using Status Monitors

3 Select the command you want from the list.

The command is executed.

Status Monitor Drag-and-Drop Overview

Depending on your system configuration, PremierOne status monitors include a drag-and-drop feature
that you can use to dispatch units to specific incidents from the Unit status monitor, Pending Incident
status monitor, and Incident status monitors. You can also obtain more information about units and
incidents using this feature.

In the Unit status monitor, you can do the following:

• To dispatch a unit to an incident, drag the unit onto an incident in either the Pending Incident status
monitor or the Incident status monitor

• To dispatch a unit to an incident, drag a unit onto an incident displayed on the map

• To dispatch a selected unit as a secondary unit to the primary unit incident, drag the unit onto a
primary unit in the Unit status monitor

From the Incident and Pending Incident status monitors, you can do the following:

• To dispatch a unit to an incident, drag an incident onto a unit.

460 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Using Mapping

Chapter 18

Using Mapping 18

The map display in PremierOne shows the location and status of incidents and units and includes other
map features. The map integrates your communications, the PremierOne dispatch system, and vehicle
tracking functions into a complete system.

For ARL-equipped vehicles, the map provides a real-time display of the current location of the vehicle
and the location of the event to which the driver is responding.

Viewing the Map Display (MC)

Use the map display to see the location of incidents and units, the status of each incident; and the unit
number, capability, status, incident number, and incident location for each unit.

To view the map display:

If the Mapping window is not already open, type MC in the command line and then press Enter or
F10.

Send Feedback 461

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

The Mapping window appears. If the Location pane on the right side of the window is not currently
displaying, click the Expander on the right edge of the map (see Figure 253).

Figure 252: Mapping Window

The Mapping window is a separate window from the PremierOne window. When you log in to
PremierOne, both the PremierOne window and mapping window open.

Using Command Identifiers With the Map Command (MC)

You can use command identifiers with the Map Command (MC) to perform mapping functions from the
command line, such as displaying cross streets, zooming, panning, displaying overlay grids, layers,
distances, and following units.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

MC.I.U.L.ZM.PA.FU.LU.LUP.LP
To perform mapping functions from the command line:

1 On the command line, type MC followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
MC.I;<incident id or active unit id>

462 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

3 Press Enter or F10.

Table 46: Map Command Identifiers

Identifier Explanation

I or U Centers the map on an incident or unit ID. For details, see Centering Incidents, Units,
and Locations Using the MC command on page 463.

L Centers the map on a location. For details, see Centering Incidents, Units, and
Locations Using the MC command on page 463.

ZM Zooms <+ or -> in or out from the area. For details, see Zooming the Map using the MC
Command on page 463.

PA Pans the map in the specified direction. For details, see Panning the Map Using the MC
Command on page 464.

FU Follows the unit. For details, see Following Units on the Map Using the MC Command
on page 464.

LU Updates a unit location using an incident or unit ID. For details, see Performing Location
Updates Using the MC Command on page 464.

LUP Updates a location update for unit and person locations using incident or unit ID. For
details, see Performing Location Updates Using the MC Command on page 464.

LP Updates the location for a person using user ID. For details, see Performing Location
Updates Using the MC Command on page 464.

Centering Incidents, Units, and Locations Using the MC command

You can use the MC command to center the map on an incident, unit, location, or intersection. The
location can be a street address or common place name.

To center incidents, units, and locations using the MC command:

On the command line, type the MC command with the following command identifiers:

MC.U;<unit ID or active unit ID or location>

Zooming the Map using the MC Command

You can use the MC command to zoom the map in or out.

To zoom the map using the MC command:

On the command line, type the MC command with the following command identifiers:

MC.ZM;<+ or ->

Send Feedback 463

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Panning the Map Using the MC Command

You can use the MC command to pan the map.

To pan the map using the MC command:

MC.PA;<N|S|E|W|SE|NE|SW|NW>
The map is panned 25% in the specified direction.

Following Units on the Map Using the MC Command

The MC command can be used to have the main map window follow the location of specified units.
Using this command causes the map to pan and zoom to keep the units centered on the map.

To follow units on the map using the MC command:

On the command line, type the MC command with the following command identifiers:

MC.U;<unit ID or active unit ID>.FU;Y

Performing Location Updates Using the MC Command

Command identifiers are provided with the MC command so that you can perform a location update for
units with a portable or mobile radio and persons that are out of vehicle.

To perform location updates using the MC command:

• To update all unit locations associated with an incident ID or unit ID, enter the following:

MC.LU;<incident # or unit ID>

The location of the units is updated and the map auto-centers on all the associated units.

• To update all unit and person locations associated with an incident ID or unit ID, enter the following:

MC.LUP;<incident # or unit ID>

The locations of the all units and persons assigned to the incident are updated and the map
auto-centers on all associated unit and person icons.

• To update a person location by user ID, enter the following:

MC.LP;<user ID>
The location of the person is updated and the map auto-centers on the person icon.

NOTE:
Separate multiple entries with a comma.

464 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Overview of the Mapping Display

The map display has the following components: map area, map scale, expander, panning tools, zoom
tools, tool bar, scale, multiple map tools, task area, and message area.

Figure 253: Mapping Display

Table 47: Mapping Display Components

Map Key Function Description

Map Area Provides a real-time map display of the locations of units and incidents.

Map Scale Displays the current map scale showing the distance represented by a short
line segment.

Expander Hides and displays the Task area so you can maximize the area covered by
the map. Click the Expander to hide the Task area. Select the Expander
again to redisplay the Task area.

Panning Tools Buttons for moving the map in the window.

• N (North) moves the map view to the north (scrolls the map down).

• S (South) moves the map view to the south (scrolls the map up).

• W (West) moves the map view to the west (scrolls the map to the right).

• E (East) moves the map view to the east (scrolls the map to the left).

Send Feedback 465

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Table 47: Mapping Display Components

Map Key Function Description

Zoom Tools

Zoom In – Magnifies a map area for a closer view of the map.

Zoom Out – Reduces the magnification of an area to display a wider aerial

view of the map

Zoom Level – Zooms the map in and out by levels. There are nine levels of
zoom. The highlighted indicator shows the current zoom level.

Map Tab The Default Map is the map associated with the PremierOne dispatch form.
Other maps display on additional tabs.

You can move any additional saved maps to another monitor.

You can rename any map by double-clicking the name of the map to enable
the editor.

466 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Table 47: Mapping Display Components

Map Key Function Description

Toolbar

Pan – Pans the map. Changes the cursor to the pan cursor. Press the left
mouse button and drag the map to a new location.

Zoom In – Changes the cursor to the zoom in cursor. Magnifies the map and
centers the map on the spot where you click.

Zoom Out – Changes the cursor to the zoom out cursor. Reduces the
magnification of the map and centers the map on the spot where you click.

Pointer – Changes the cursor to the normal pointer cursor.

Rotate Counterclockwise – Rotates the map counterclockwise 20 degrees

with each click.

Rotate Clockwise – Rotates the map clockwise 20 degrees with each click.

Map Extent – Resizes the active map window so that the entire bounds of
the map display.

Previous View – Returns map to your previous view.

Feature Info – Changes the cursor so you can point to a feature on the map
and get information about that feature.

Oblique Image Viewer – Opens a third-party Oblique image viewing tool that
displays areas on the map as images from various angles.

Scale Shows the current map scale.

Click the arrow to select a different scale from the list.

Multiple map tools:

Arrow – Docks or undocks the active map window.

X – Closes the active map.

Message Area Shows mapping-related messages.

Send Feedback 467

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Table 47: Mapping Display Components

Map Key Function Description

Task Area Contains areas that expand for searching, finding directions, locating
positions on maps, displaying road closure information, unit
communications, and location tracking.

Search – Locates addresses, jurisdictions, incidents, resources, common

places, and additional features on the map.

Find Directions – Displays directions from the present location to a new

location, or from points you select on the map.

Locate on Map – Displays a list of features you can search for on the map.

Road Closures – Displays road closures within a selected map area. Also
displays scheduled road closures within a selected map area.

Unit Communications – Locates units on the map, and allows you to

communicate with the units based on incident location, unit IDs, capabilities,
agency, areas, sectors, and beats.

Location Tracking – Displays a history of unit locations.

Icons for Incidents and Units on the Map

By default, icons for incidents and units display on the map and text labels identify the agency and
incident or unit ID. The colors the labels display in are the same as the colors configured for the agency
default status monitor display.

Figure 254: Illustration Showing Incident And Unit Icons And Labels

468 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

To disable the display of icons:

From the Tools menu, select Icons.

To disable the display of labels:

From the Tools – Icon Labels menu, select from the following:

• To disable the display of incident icons, select Incident Icon Label.

• To disable the display of unit icons, select Unit Icon Label.

• To disable the display of Person icons, select Person Icon Label. Person icons only display if
your system is configured for out of vehicle status.

To redisplay the labels, select the command again.

Icons for Units on Associated Incidents on the Map Display

Your agency may be configured to show units assigned to associated incidents. In this case, the ID of
the primary unit displays below the ID for your agency unit.

Unit IDs of units assigned to

associated incidents

Figure 255: Map Display Showing IDs Of Primary Units Assigned to Associated Incidents

Icons for Persons Out of Vehicle on the Map Display

Your agency may have Person Location icons display on the map when a first responder moves away
from the unit. The displayed location is determined by using GPS information provided by the portable
radio. When a person is in or near their unit, the Unit and Person Location icons appear adjacent to one
another. As they move away from the unit, the icons separate.

Out of Vehicle location is intended for use only in outdoor locations and not in buildings or structures. In
certain situations, due to the limitations of the GPS technology, a user can be outside and does not have
GPS coverage. For example, GPS does not work well in building.

Send Feedback 469

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Icons for NG9-1-1 Calls on the Map Display

When PremierOne is integrated with Call Control, wireless, VOIP (Voice Over IP), and SMS (short
message service) calls can be plotted on the CAD map, similar to units and incidents. The following
types of calls display on the CAD map:

• Incoming landline and wireless 9-1-1 voice calls that have associated ALI where the ALI can be
successfully plotted to a location on the CAD map.

If the person calling is moving, you can track a new location using a manual rebid or auto-rebid
which automatically rebids the call ALI every 36 seconds.

• Abandoned notifications that have associated ALI where the ALI can be successfully plotted to a
location on the CAD map.

• SMS Texts that have an incident started where the incident has a geo-valid location that can be
successfully plotted to a location on the CAD map.

Outgoing voice calls are not displayed on the map.

When an incoming call with an ALI is received, the icon provisioned for the 9-1-1 call displays on the
map with the label and colors defined in Provisioning for a RINGing call. When the call is answered, the
map on the calltaker workstation zooms to the call location and the answered call icon displays the label
and colors defined in Provisioning for a call in TALK status.

Different icons can be provisioned for landline and E911 ANI/ALI calls, and for NG-9-1-1 wireless, VOIP,
and SMS calls. Similar to icons for incidents and units, NG 9-1-1 icons can be provisioned to have labels
and display mouse hover information. NG 9-1-1 icons also cascade when there are multiple calls at an
identical location. Labels and colors that are used on the map for icons are the same as the colors
configured for the Call Control Status monitor and cascade when there are multiple items at the same
location.

Se

Figure 256: NG 9-1-1 Call Icon In Ring State

470 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Icons for Cell Tower Locations on the Map Display

For Phase I wireless calls, the cell tower and cell sector facing the location can display on the CAD map.
The icon that displays for cell towers is configurable.

NOTE:
Wireless Phase I and II information only display on the map when PremierOne Call Control is
enabled, and only functions with NG9-1-1 and not with the E9-1-1 interface.

Figure 257: Cell Tower And Cell Sector For Answered Phase I Call

For Phase II wireless calls (latitude and longitude of caller is known), the call location and confidence
factor display on the CAD map when the wireless service provider supplies these values within the call
ALI. The caller location displays as an icon while concentric circles display for factors of confidence and
uncertainty.

Confidence measures the likelihood the value is true and uncertainty is an estimate of the amount of
position error present. Confidence displays in the inner circle and the outer circle indicates uncertainty.
Confidence and uncertainly only display

Send Feedback 471

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

The inner circle shows the confidence level and the outer circle shows the uncertainty factor. The colors
and transparency of the colors is configured by your system administrator.

Figure 258: Wireless Phase II Call With Confidence And Uncertainty Levels

You can also display the Cell Tower Layer by selecting the appropriate layer for display on the Map
Layers tab. For details on selecting layers, see Configuring the Display of Map Layers on page 501.
Contact your system administrator for the names of the layers.

Icons for Persons Out of Vehicle on the Map Display

Your agency may have Person Location icons display on the map when a first responder moves away
from the unit. The displayed location is determined by using GPS information provided by the portable
radio. When a person is in or near their unit, the Unit and Person Location icons appear adjacent to one
another. As they move away from the unit, the icons separate.

NOTE:
Out of Vehicle location is intended for use only in outdoor locations and not in buildings or
structures. In certain situations, due to the limitations of the GPS technology, a user can be
outside and does not have GPS coverage. For example, GPS does not work well in buildings,
tunnels, parking garages, and heavy tree coverage.

The text that displays with the icon or when your agency configures the mouse-over capability for the
icon.

The Person Location icon is configured to display for the following conditions:

• When there is a certain unit status. Your agency configures the unit statuses that cause the Person
Location icon to display.

• When the person selects the Out of Vehicle unit status.

472 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

• When the person selects the Emergency button on the Mobile client or their portable radio.

Figure 259: Person Location Icon

Icons for GPS Reporting Failures on the Map Display

Your agency may display a symbol on a unit or person icon when a GPS device is not reporting its
location due to network problems or when the GPS position is not current due to losing the satellite
signal.

When reporting is lost due to network or device issues, a flag (small red circle with an arrow) displays on
top of the unit or person icon. When the satellite signal is lost, a similar yellow flag displays on top of the
unit or person icon. The arrow points to the last known travel direction.

Person and unit icons are configurable by your agency.

Unit Icon Unit Icon
Not Reporting Overlay Stale Overlay

Figure 260: GPS Reporting Overlays

Send Feedback 473

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Refreshing the Location for Units and Persons Out of

Vehicle on the Map Display
If your agency is configured to track persons out of vehicle, you can refresh the location for persons out
of vehicle or units with a portable or mobile radio using the MC command, by using a right-click option,
or using the Search Person feature. For details on the MC command, see Performing Location Updates
Using the MC Command on page 464 and for details on the Search Person feature, see Locating
Persons on the Map Display on page 495.

To refresh the location for units and persons out of vehicle on the map display:

1 Right-click a person, unit, or incident icon.

2 Select one of the following:

• To update the unit location, select Unit Loc Update.

• To update the person location, select Person(s) Loc Update.

If you select a person icon, only the Person(s) Loc Update option displays.

Figure 261: Right-Click Menu Options For Location Refresh

474 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Using Multiple Map Displays

You can have multiple map displays open simultaneously, allowing you to have different views at the
same time. For example, you can have one view that covers an area, and another view zoomed to a
single incident.

Additional maps open as tabs on the Main map display, but can be moved to their own window.

To use multiple map displays:

1 On the Map display, select the Open menu.

The New Map dialog box appears.

Figure 262: New Map Dialog Box

2 In the Name field, enter a name for the map.

3 From the Type list, select one of the following:

• If you want the map to be continually updated with new unit and incident information, select
Dynamic.

• If you do not want to update the map with new unit and incident information, select Static.

4 To allow the map to be dragged into its own separate window, select Dockable.

5 Click the Browse button and navigate to and select the map.mxd file.

6 Click Submit.

The new map tab is added. Icons display in the upper-right corner of the map. The up-facing arrow
icon undocks the map so that the map is in its own separate window. After being undocked, the
arrow changes to point downward; select the downward-facing arrow icon to return the map to the
main Map as a tab. Clicking the X closes the map.

Send Feedback 475

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Attaching Map Images to Emails and Incidents

You can attach an image or snapshot of the map to an email (including BOLOs and notifications) or
incident. The image is attached as a .png file.

To attach a map image to an email or incident:

1 From the Attach to menu select one of the following:

• Incident

• Mail

The lower part of the dialog box refreshes to show all the current incidents or all the current mail
messages in your Inbox.

The Attach to dialog box appears.

Figure 263: Attach To Dialog Box

2 Select the item you want to attach the map image to.

The item displays in the blank box below the Attach To list.

3 Click Attach.

The dialog box closes and the image is attached to the incident or email you selected. Continue
processing the email to send it.

476 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Setting the Map Scale Manually

You can set the map scale manually from the toolbar icon or from the Tools menu.

To set the map scale manually:

Do one of the following:

• Click a level on the Zoom Level bar that is above or below the highlighted level to zoom in (higher
on the bar) or out (lower on the bar).

Highlighted Zoom Level

Figure 264: Zoom Level Bar

• Click the arrow on the scale list on the toolbar to show the scale choices and select the new scale
for your map.

Figure 265: Map Scale Choices

Send Feedback 477

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Zooming In and Out of the Map Display

Zooming in and out allows you to see more or less of the map. You can zoom in to a specific point or a
specific area when you want to focus on a location or a few blocks or a specific service boundary. You
can also zoom out from a specific point to widen your view but maintain the point as the center of the
map.

Zooming In With the Zoom In Button

The Zoom In tool magnifies the map to produce a closer view.

To zoom in with the Zoom In button:

1 On the Map toolbar, click the Zoom In button.

PremierOne magnifies the map by a factor of two and highlights a different bar on the zoom level
tool.

2 Repeat the procedure until you obtain the level of zoom you need.

Zooming In on a Specific Area

You can zoom in to a specific area on the map. Zooming in to a specific area is effective in dispatch
situations when you want to focus on a few blocks or a specific service boundary.

To zoom in on a specific area:

1 Do one of the following:

• From the toolbar, select Zoom In.

• From the Mapping menu, select Tools, and then select Zoom In.

The cursor changes to the Zoom In cursor.

2 Using the Zoom In cursor, press and hold the left mouse button and draw a box around the area you
want to zoom in to, and then release the mouse button.

PremierOne magnifies the area you selected to fill the Mapping window.

3 Repeat the procedure until you obtain the level of zoom you need.

Zooming In to a Specific Point

You can zoom in to a specific point on the map. Zooming in to a specific point is effective in dispatch
situations when you want to focus only on the specified map point or location.

To zoom in to a specific point:

1 Do one of the following:

• From the toolbar, select Zoom In.

• From the Mapping menu, select Tools, and then select Zoom In.

The cursor changes to the Zoom In cursor.

478 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

2 Place the Zoom In cursor over the point on the map you want to zoom in to and then press the left
mouse button.

PremierOne magnifies the map by a factor of two and highlights a different bar on the zoom level
tool. The point you selected is now the center of the map.

3 Repeat the procedure until you obtain the level of zoom you need.

Zooming Out From a Specified Area

You can zoom out from a specific area on the map. Zooming out from a specific area is effective in
dispatch situations when you want to see more of the map but maintain the area as the center of the
map.

To zoom out from a specified area:

1 Do one of the following:

• From the toolbar, select Zoom Out.

• From the Mapping menu, select Tools, and then select Zoom Out.

The cursor changes to the Zoom Out cursor.

2 Using the Zoom Out cursor, press and hold the left mouse button and draw a box around the area
you want to zoom out from, and then release the mouse button.

PremierOne increases the visible area of the map and highlights a different bar on the zoom level
tool. The area you selected is the center of the map.

Zooming Out From a Specific Point

You can zoom out from a specific point on the map. Zooming out from a specific point is effective in
dispatch situations when you want to see more of the map but maintain the point as the center of the
map.

To zoom out from a specific point:

1 Do one of the following:

• From the toolbar, select Zoom Out.

• From the Mapping menu, select Tools, and then select Zoom Out.

The cursor changes to the Zoom Out cursor.

2 Place the Zoom Out cursor over the point on the map you want to zoom out from, and then press the
left mouse button.

PremierOne increases the visible area of the map by a factor of two and highlights a different bar on
the zoom level tool. The point you selected is now the center of the map.

3 Repeat the procedure until you obtain the level of zoom you need.

Send Feedback 479

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Rotating the Map Display

You can rotate the map display clockwise or counterclockwise, by set increments or manually.

To rotate the map display:

1 To rotate the map 20 degrees to the left or right, do either of the following:

• On the Map toolbar, select the Rotate Clockwise or Rotate Counterclockwise buttons.

• From the Tools menu, select Rotate, and then select Left or Right.

2 To rotate the map manually, from the Tools menu, select Rotate, and then select Free Rotate. Then
move the cursor in the direction you want the map rotated.

The amount of rotation displays.

3 To reset the map, you can either use the tools on the toolbar to return to the original setting, or from
the Tools menu, select Rotate, and then select Reset.

Displaying the Map Grid

Use the Grid tool to display latitude and longitude lines on the map.

To display the map grid:

From the Tools menu, select Grid.

480 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

PremierOne displays the grid lines on the map.

Figure 266: Map Showing Latitude And Longitude Grid Lines

To remove the grid, select the menu option again.

Panning the Map Display

Panning allows you to display areas of the map not in the current map view without changing the map
scale. Panning can be useful to see a street label or another feature that may be slightly off the screen.

To pan the map display:

1 Do one of the following:

• On the Mapping toolbar, click the Pan button.

• From the Tools menu, select Pan.

• On the map, click the panning tool in the upper left corner of the map.

2 Click the map, press and hold the left mouse button down, and move the Pan cursor in the direction
you want the map to move, and then release the mouse button.

Send Feedback 481

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

PremierOne re-centers the map in the new location.

Measuring the Distance Between Points on the Map Display

You can measure the distance between two or more points on the map. Zoom in on the map far enough
to easily see the area you want to measure. For more information, see Zooming In and Out of the Map
Display on page 478.

To measure the distance between points on the Map Display:

1 From the Tools menu, select Measure, and then select Free Measure.

2 Select a point on the map to start measuring.

The Measure window displays on the map. The window initially displays 0.0 miles or meters for the
segment and total length.

Figure 267: Measuring Distance – Starting Point

3 Click the end of the first segment. If the distance you are measuring is a straight line, you only have
one segment.

The length of your segment displays in the window.

Figure 268: Measuring Distance – First Segment

4 Continue clicking points to obtain the total distance desired.

482 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

5 To end the measurement, double-click the mouse.

The Segment value changes to 0 and the total distance displays as the Length. PremierOne
removes the line or lines from the map.

Figure 269: Measuring Distance – Final Segment

6 To close the Measure window, click the X in the upper right corner of the window.

Send Feedback 483

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Viewing Incident Information on the Map Display

You can view detailed information about incidents on the map. Labels for icons match the colors as set
in the status monitor.

To view incident information on the map display:

Hover your cursor over an incident icon on the map or right-click the incident icon.

The incident number, status, and location for that incident display in a small box next to the incident
icon.

Figure 270: Map Showing Incident Information

484 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Viewing a Map Location on an Oblique Image Viewer

When an Oblique Image Viewer is installed on your workstation, you can select a location on the CAD
map, and view and manipulate oblique views at that location using a third-party viewing tool.

To view a map location on an Oblique Image Viewer:

1 Access the CAD map, and select a location on the map.

2 From the CAD map toolbar, click the Oblique Image Viewer button.

The Oblique Image Viewer opens to the location you selected on the CAD map in a separate
window, and the focus moves to the Oblique Image Viewer application.

Figure 271: Oblique View From Third-Party Application

For instructions on using the viewer, see the Oblique Image Viewer documentation.

If you select a different location on the CAD map, the Oblique Image Viewer synchronizes its view to
the location you chose on the CAD map.

3 To cancel Oblique mode, click the Pointer icon on the CAD Map.

Send Feedback 485

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Viewing Multiple Unit and Incident Icons at the Same

Location
When multiple units or incidents are at an identical location, the map displays a bullseye icon at the
location and connects the unit and incident icons with lines to the bullseye icon. The multiple icon
location can also be shown in the collapsed state, where a single multiple objects icon displays. Clicking
that icon expands it so multiple icons are shown.

Example
If incident 0021 has units 3 and 4 assigned to it and on scene, the following icons appear on the map at
that address.

Figure 272: Expanded Multiple Icons

The bullseye icon is the actual location of the incident, and the incident icon and the unit icons are
connected to the bullseye icon.

486 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

If an additional incident is opened at the same location, another incident icon displays with a line
connected to the bullseye icon, and any units assigned to the second incident are connected to that
incident and to the bullseye.

Figure 273: Additional Incident And Unit Icons (Expanded)

NOTE:
Click the bullseye icon to collapse the set of icons.

Printing the Map Display

You can print the current map display.

To print the map display:

1 Zoom the map to the size that you want

2 From the Tools menu, select Print.

3 Select the printer and click Print.

Send Feedback 487

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Displaying Non-GPS Units on the Map Display

Your agency has configured whether non-GPS units display on your map. However, you can turn the
feature on or off to override this setting. You can set the display to always show non-GPS units, use the
defaults your agency has set, or never show the non-GPS units on the map.

To display non-GPS units on the map display:

1 Open the Mapping application.

2 On the Tools menu, click Non-GPS Units, and then select the setting that you want.

Figure 274: Non-GPS Units Menu

Locating Features on the Map

You can search for locations (addresses), incidents, units, persons, and common places and display
them on the map.

Searching for Locations on the Map Display

You can find a specific location or address on the map.

To search for a location on the map display:

1 From the mapping Task area, click Search.

For details, see Overview of the Mapping Display on page 465.

488 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

2 Select the Location tab if it is not already active.

The Search Location form appears.

Figure 275: Search Location Form

3 Enter the address, city, building, and apartment information, or the intersection information in the
designated fields.

You can use a percent sign ( % ) in the address as a wildcard value; for example, type Main% to find
Main, Mainland, and any other streets that start with Main.

You can type partial street and city information; for example, type 1300 Algon for 1300
Algonquin St.

You can use & or / to separate the first and second streets in the intersection; for example, type
Colfax & Broadway or Colfax/Broadway for the intersection of Colfax and Broadway.

4 Enter as much information as you can in the rest of the fields.

5 Select the Soundex box to use a “sounds like” search to find locations that sound like the one you
typed in the Address field.

6 Select Search or Jurisdiction.

If you click Search, potential address matches appear below the Search form. If PremierOne finds
only one match, PremierOne shows the match on the map with a red push pin.

If you click Jurisdiction, jurisdiction information including the jurisdiction, response class,
intersection Compass, the map boundaries, the agency ID, and the beats appear below the Search
form.

Send Feedback 489

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

7 Select the address you want from the potential matches, and then click Show On Map.

PremierOne shows the location on the map with a red push pin icon.

8 Hover your mouse over the push pin to see information about the location, such as the address, city,
low house number, high house number, high cross street, low cross street, latitude, longitude, real
name, and description.

The low and high house numbers refer to house numbers for the street segment; the low and high
cross streets refer to the block number and street name of the street segments that intersect a street
at its low house number and high house number, respectively.

If you clicked Search, location information appears on the map next to the push pin.

Figure 276: Map Showing Location Information

If you clicked Jurisdiction, location information appears with jurisdiction information superimposed
on it.

Figure 277: Map Showing Jurisdiction Information

9 Select Clear All to remove the push pin from the map.

490 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Searching Incidents on the Map Display

You can find a specific incident on the map display.

To locate incidents on the map display:

1 In the Mapping Task area, click Search.

For details, see Overview of the Mapping Display on page 465.

2 Select the Incident tab.

The Search Incident form appears.

Figure 278: Search Incident Form

3 In the Incident # field, type enough of the incident number to ensure that PremierOne recognizes it.

4 Enter as much information as you can in the rest of the fields.

5 Select Search.

Potential incident matches appear below the Search form. If PremierOne finds only one match, that
match displays on the map.

6 Select the incident you want from the potential matches.

Send Feedback 491

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

7 Do one of the following:

• Select Action, and then select one of the following:

Center – Find the incident and center the map on the incident.

Add to View – Add the selected incident to the map view.

Hide icon – Clear the selected incident from the map view.

Hide all icons – Clear all incidents from the map view.

Person Loc Update – Update the locations of persons outside of the vehicle.

Unit Loc Update – Update the location of the selected unit.

• Select Disable Icons or Enable Icons to hide or show the icons on the map.

• Select Show Call Loc or Hide Call Loc to show or hide the caller location on the map.

492 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

8 Hover your mouse over the incident icon to see information about the incident, including the incident
type, incident number, status, and the address of the incident.

Figure 279: Map Showing Incident Information With The Map Centered On The Incident

Locating Units on the Map Display

You can locate a specific unit on the map as long as it is on duty or is a temporary unit.

To locate a unit on the map display:

1 In the Mapping Task area, click Search.

For details, see Overview of the Mapping Display on page 465.

Send Feedback 493

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

2 Select the Unit tab.

The Search Units form appears.

Figure 280: Search Unit Form

3 Enter information in the search fields such as User ID, Agency, or Unit ID. Enter as much
information as you can. The more search criteria you provide, the faster the search.
NOTE
NOTE:
You can search for temporary units. A temporary unit may be a result of activating the
Emergency button of an off-duty unit. These units are normally defined with EMX at the start of
the Unit ID name.

4 Select Search.

Unit matches appear below the Search form. If PremierOne finds only one match, that unit displays
on the map.

5 Select the units you want to display from the potential matches.

6 Do any of the following:

• Select Action, and then select one of the following options.

Center – Find the unit and center the map on the incident.

Add to View – Add the selected unit to the map view.

Hide icon – Clear the selected unit from the map view.

494 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Hide all icons – Clear all units from the map view.

Person Loc Update – Update the locations of persons outside of the vehicle.

Unit Loc Update – Update the location of the selected unit.

• Select Disable Icons or Enable Icons to hide or show the icons on the map.

• Select Communicate, and then select one of the following options:

Add to Add Bk – Open the Address Book in Messaging where you can add this unit to an address
book.

Send Message – Open Messaging and send a message to the unit.

Create Group – Open the Address Book in Messaging where you can create a group including
this unit.

Follow Unit – Request AVL location updates.

• Hover your mouse over the unit icon to display information about the unit including the unit ID,
capability, status, and incident address, if assigned.

Locating Persons on the Map Display

If your system is enabled for persons out of vehicle, you can locate a specific person on the map.

To locate a person on the map display:

1 In the Mapping Task area, click Search.

For details, see Overview of the Mapping Display on page 465.

Send Feedback 495

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

2 Select the Person tab.

The Search Person form appears.

Figure 281: Person Search Form

3 Enter information in the search fields such as User ID, Radio ID, or Unit ID. Enter as much
information as you can. The more search criteria you provide, the faster the search.

4 Select Search.

Person matches appear below the Search form.

5 Select the persons you want to display from the potential matches.

6 Do any of the following:

• Select Action, and then select one of the following options.

Center – Find the person and center the map on the resource.

Add to View – Add the selected person to the map view. Depending on your zoom level, you may
not be able to see the person icon.

Hide icon– Clear the selected person from the map view.

Hide all icons – Clear all persons from the map view.

496 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Person Loc Update – Update the locations of persons outside of their vehicles.

Unit Loc Update – Update the locations of units.

• Select Disable Icons or Enable Icons to hide or show the icons on the map.

• Select Communicate, and then select one of the following options:

Add to Add Bk – Open the Address Book in Messaging where you can add this person to an
address book.

Send Message – Open Messaging and send a message to the person.

Create Group – Open the Address Book in Messaging where you can create a group including
this person.

Follow Unit – Request AVL location updates.

• Hover your mouse over the person icon to display information about the person including the unit
ID, status, and incident address, if assigned.

Creating Incidents on the Map Display

You can initiate incidents directly from the map display.

To create incidents on the map display:

1 Click the location where you want to create an incident.

2 From the Tools menu, select Create Incident.

The Create Incident dialog box displays.

Figure 282: Create Incident Dialog Box

3 Do one of the following:

• To create an incident that is not field-initiated, select Initiate Incident.

• To create a field-initiated incident, select Field Initiate.

4 Click OK.

The II or FI form displays with the location information.

Send Feedback 497

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

5 Continue entering the incident information and press F12.

For details on incident initiation, see Initiating Incidents on page 209.

Finding Directions on the Map Display

You can find directions between two or more points on the map display.

To find directions on the map display:

1 From the mapping Task area, click Find Directions.

For details, see Overview of the Mapping Display on page 465.

The Find Directions form appears.

Figure 283: Find Directions Form

2 Do one of the following:

• If you know the address, type the address where you want to start in the A field, and then press
the Tab key to create a B field.

• If you do not know the address, click in the A field. The cursor changes to a plus ( + ) symbol
when you move it onto the map. Click the map at the starting location.

Latitude/longitude coordinates for your selected point appear in the A field.

A blue push pin appears on the map to indicate your starting point.

498 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

3 Do one of the following:

• In the next field, type the address that is the next destination. If you have more destinations or
points on your route, press the Tab key and enter the addresses in the additional fields.

• Click the map at the location that is the next destination or point on your route.

4 Repeat the previous step until you have entered your final destination.

Green push pins appear on the map to indicate intermediate points, and a red push pin indicates
your end point.

5 To delete a point on the route, click the delete button to the right of the field.

6 Select the Map It button.

PremierOne traces the route you specified on the map.

7 Do any of the following:

• To clear the map path and directions, click Clear All.

• To reverse directions, click Reverse.

PremierOne reverses the order of the directions in the box.

• To email the directions to someone, click Email.

• To print the directions, click Print.

Viewing Premise/Hazard Information on the Map Display

You can view premise/hazard location information that is associated with an incident.

To view premise/hazard information on the map display:

1 In the II or IM form for an incident, select the Premise Hazard location in the Haz tab in the WAA and
click Map It.

The Map centers on the location and the associated premise hazard location is listed on the Prem/
Haz tab in the Map view.

Premise/hazard records that are a direct hit or fall within the inner proximity distance are indicated
with a red push pin. Premise/hazard records that fall between the inner and outer proximity distances
are indicated with a blue push pin.

Send Feedback 499

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

An address followed by (AP) indicates that the address is an Address Point rather than a Street
Centerline location. The Address Point layer is separate from the Street Centerline layer and
contains more accurate information for specific addresses.

Figure 284: Premise/Haz Tab

2 To view additional information about the record, do one of the following:

• Click the plus sign to the left of the premise hazard name to expand it.

• Hover your mouse over the push-pin icon.

Locating Feature Information on the Map Display

From the CAD map window, you can view feature information to obtain detailed information about a
selected point or area on the map. For example, you may need access codes for a gated community or
an airport gate, or premise hazard areas.

Features contain points on the map as well as areas on the map, and can contain items such as
buildings, parks, airports, gated communities.

To locate feature information on the map display:

1 From the mapping Task area, click Locate on Map.

For details, see Overview of the Mapping Display on page 465.

The Locate on Map form appears.

500 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

2 On the mapping toolbar, click the Feature Info button.

The cursor changes to the Feature Info cursor.

3 Place the mouse cursor over the feature about which you want more information, and then click the
map.

The map zooms in to show your feature, the feature flashes briefly, and feature information appears
on the Feature Info tab.

Figure 285: Feature Info Cursor and Tab

4 To center the map on the feature, click the feature in the Feature Info tab.

5 View information from your GIS database in the bottom box of the Feature Info tab.

6 Click the Pointer button to return to the normal cursor.

Configuring the Display of Map Layers

You can select which map layers display on the map, such as road closures, Premise Hazard Areas,
Cell Towers, Police and Fire Response.

To configure the display of map layers:

1 From the mapping Task area, click Locate on Map.

For details, see Overview of the Mapping Display on page 465.

Send Feedback 501

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

The Locate on Map form appears.

2 Click the Map Layers tab.

Click the plus ( + ) to the left of Legend to display the list of map layers.

Figure 286: Map Layers

3 To hide the display of one of the map layers, clear the check box to the left of the layer.

Working With Cameras on the Map Display

If the optional integration is enabled, selecting the camera icon on the PremierOne map sends video
feed from the selected camera to your workstation using a supported third-party video management
system.

The video workstation configured for a PremierOne client may be a workstation for that individual user or
an alternative workstation (for example, a workstation used to drive a large screen display at the front of
the communications center). The video management client may also allow you to control the available
camera functions, such as zooming and panning.

502 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Displaying Camera Icons on the Map Display

You can show or hide the location of cameras on the map. The icon used for cameras is configurable by
your system administrator.

To display camera icons on the map display:

1 From the Tools menu, select Cameras.

2 Select Display Cameras.

The camera icons appear on the map at all camera locations. Different icons may be used to show
the camera types, such as a still camera, a fixed or pan-tilt camera, or a video camera.

Hover the mouse over the camera icon to view information such as the device name, status, and
time.

Figure 287: Camera Icon

3 To hide camera icons, select Display Cameras again until the check mark is cleared.

Playing Live Video Streams From the Map Display

You can play a live video stream in the associated video player directly from the map.

To play a live video stream from the map display:

Double-click the camera icon.

The camera feed displays in the associated video player.

Send Feedback 503

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Updating Camera Statuses on the Map Display

You can update the status of all the cameras on the map or a single camera on the map.

To update the camera statuses on the map display:

Do one of the following:

• To update the display status for all cameras on the map, select the Tools menu, select Cameras,
and then select Update status on all cameras.

• To update the status of a single camera, right-click a camera icon on the map, and then select
Update Status.

If there are multiple cameras present where you right-click the map, a dialog box appears
displaying the cameras at that location. Select the camera you want to update.

Working With RTVI

The Real-Time Video Intelligence (RTVI) Standalone Player can be integrated with the CAD map. When
integrated, you can view video streaming with zoom, pan, and tilt controls, and use messaging to send
clips (segments of a live video stream), links (live camera stream), and snapshots as attachments to
other CAD and Mobile users. You can open multiple video streams at the same time in different
Standalone Players.

You can either open the CAD Messaging window first, or RTVI automatically opens the window when
you select Snapshot, Send Link, or Send Clip in the RTVI Standalone Player.

When the recipient receives and opens a message containing a link to an RTVI live camera stream or
video clip, the RTVI Standalone Player automatically opens and plays the link.

For additional details on using the RTVI Standalone Player, see the Real-Time Video Intelligence Player
User Guide and the Real-Time Video Intelligence Standalone Player User Guide.

504 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

If you have multiple/separate RTVI systems, each CAD workstation or Mobile device can only interface
with one RTVI server at a time.

Figure 288: RTVI Standalone Player Window

Creating Road Closures on the Map Display

From the map window, you can create road closures, view a list of road closures, update existing road
closures, and cancel existing road closures.

To create road closures on the map display:

1 From the mapping Task area, click Road Closure.

For details, see Overview of the Mapping Display on page 465.

Send Feedback 505

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

The Road Closure form appears.

Figure 289: Road Closures Form

2 Select the Road Closure tab.

3 Zoom to a level on the map where you can see street details.

For details, see Zooming In and Out of the Map Display on page 478.

4 Click Start, and then, on the map, click the start point of the road closure.

5 Continue clicking along the segments you want to close until the entire route you need to close is
painted in light blue.

506 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

A light blue path appears on the segment where your mouse cursor clicked.

Figure 290: Road Closure In Progress – Closure Path

6 Click End.

The segments you selected appear in the Selected Segments list.

Send Feedback 507

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

7 Determine whether to include the intersections.

a Select a segment in the list.

The segment displays on the map in dark blue with a numeral 1 at intersection 1 and a numeral 2
at intersection 2.

Figure 291: Road Closure Intersections

b On the Road Closure tab, click in the Int 1 or Int 2 check boxes to include or exclude the
intersection from the closure. A check mark indicates that the intersection is included.

8 Do one of the following:

• From the Selected Segments list, choose the segments you want to close, and then click Close
Selected.

• Select all of the segments by selecting the check box at the top of the column.

• To clear the list, click Clear.

508 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

9 To show the list of existing road closures, click the List of Road Closures tab.

The road closures appear on the map in red.

Figure 292: List Of Road Closures And Road Closure Shown On The Map

10 Do any of the following:

• To show a specific road closure on the map, select the road closure from the list.

The road closure appears on the map in blue between push pins.

• To update an existing road closure, from the List of Road Closures tab, select the closure to
update, and then click Update.

• To cancel an existing road closure, from the List of Road Closures tab, select the closure, and
then click Cancel Closure.

Send Feedback 509

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Displaying Railroad Gates or Bridge Gate Statuses on the

Map Display
You can display a visual indicator on the map of railroad gates or bridge statuses to help determine
whether a railroad or bridge gate adversely affects estimated arrival time. While you can see the status
of the gates, you cannot be certain of the status when the gate icon is in a Status Unknown state. The
Status Unknown icon displays when there is a communication failure within the gate status system.

The Icons are only a visual indicator of gate status and have no effect on the shortest path route
solving or AVL-based “Estimated Time of Arrival” calculations. Gate status is not available on Mobile
maps.

The status of the gates is represented on the map with the icons in the following table.
Table 48: Gate Status Icons

Icon Status

Vehicle travel is not impeded

Vehicle travel is impeded

Status unknown – When the gate status is not changed within a preset timeout value, the gate
status changes to status unknown, and then after an additional time, the gate icon is
removed from the map. The icon can also display when there is a malfunction in the system.
Your system administrator sets the times for these changes are set.

The gate icons are contained in their own map layer which can be enabled/disabled at any time.

When enabled, there may be no icons shown. The icons are only shown when a gate changes status.
As the gate status changes, the icons appear on the map.

Your system administrator can configure the icons so the map always displays the last status for each
gate. Therefore, the icons may never disappear from the map when there are no status changes over a
long time.

510 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

To display railroad gates or bridge gate statuses on the map display:

From the mapping Tools menu, click Gates, and then Display Gates.

As the gate status changes, the gate icons display the status of the gates. You can use the
information to help route units to an incident.

Figure 293: Gate Icons

Displaying Location History on the Map Display

You can use the ARL (Automatic Resource Locater) history feature to play back the location history of
units to display where each unit was during specified time periods. ARL uses GPS (Global Positioning
System) data saved on the PremierOne server for each unit or vehicle.

Two types of GPS tracking are available: Direct GPS tracking and PremierOne Mobile/Premier MDC
client tracking. If your agency uses Direct GPS tracking, data transfers from the GPS device directly to
the PremierOne server. If you do not use Direct GPS tracking, data goes through the Mobile client
application to the PremierOne server. Going through the Mobile client can be a disadvantage when the
Mobile client is not running, or the laptop is removed from the vehicle.

To display location history on the map display:

1 From the mapping Task area, click Location Tracking.

For details, see Overview of the Mapping Display on page 465.

Send Feedback 511

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

The Location Tracking form appears.

Figure 294: Location Tracking Form

2 Select the ARL History tab.

The ARL History tab shows Automatic Resource Location information, if available, for the criteria you
select on the tab, such as a specific incident, vehicle, or unit.

To search the ARL history of a Direct GPS device during a time when it was not associated with an
on-duty unit, enter the Device ID of the Direct GPS device into the Unit ID field.

Your system administrator configures the maximum number of units you can add to your search, and
the maximum time period for the search. If you exceed either limit, an error message appears.

a Enter as much information as you can in the fields on the ARL tab, and then click Search.

The results of your search appear in the area below the search form.

b Select an item from the search results.

PremierOne plots the location points on the map.

c To export the playback information, click the Export button.

The following fields are exported to a .csv file: UnitId, AgencyId, DeviceId, IncidentNumber,
VehicleId, TimeStamp, Longitude, Latitude, Speed, Heading, StreetBlock.

512 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

A PremierOne report includes the ARL playback information for all units; the retention time
depends on several different variables.

d Click the playback tools to plot the icons on the map one-by-one.

The playback tools function like standard audio and video playback equipment.

Figure 295: Play Back Tools

Creating Location-Based Message Groups and Notifications

Using GeoFences
Use the GeoFencing feature of PremierOne to draw a virtual fence around a specific area. After you
define the area, you can:

• Have a GPS-equipped unit that enters a geofence automatically added to the messaging group
created by the geofence or you can be prompted with an option to join the message group.

• Create custom notifications to alert GPS-equipped units when they enter or leave a geofence.
Example:
At least one of the businesses in a local strip mall gets robbed on a regular basis. Your officers want to
stake out the area undercover and do not want any marked units entering the area that could scare the
perpetrators away. Therefore, you draw a geofence around the watched area and created a custom
notification telling units to stay out of the area and why.

Send Feedback 513

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

To create a location-based message group or notification using a geofence:

1 From the mapping Task area, click GeoFence.

For details, see Overview of the Mapping Display on page 465.

The Define GeoFence tab appears.

Figure 296: GeoFencing – Define GeoFence Tab

2 Click a color to use for your geofence.

The color you select appears in the Drawing Tool field.

3 From the Drawing Tool list, select either Polygon or Circle.

If you select Circle, in the Radius field, type the radius, in feet, for the circle.

The Name and Description fields populate automatically when you create your geofence. You can
edit these fields after creation. If you enter information for them before creation, PremierOne
overwrites your entries.

4 From the Message Group list, select one of the following options:

• None – A message group is not created.

• Static – A message group is created. Only those units within the geofence at the time it was
created are added to the message group. Members that leave the geofence are not prompted to
leave the message group.

514 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

• Prompt on entry – A message group is created. Units within the geofence at the time it was
created are added to the message group. Any unit that enters the geofence after the group was
created is prompted and given the option to join the message group. Any member that leaves the
geofence is prompted and given the option to leave the message group.

• Auto-add on entry – A message group is created. Units within the geofence at the time it was
created are added to the message group. Any unit that enters the geofence after it was created is
automatically added to the message group. Any member that leaves the geofence is prompted
and given the option to leave the message group.

After the GeoFence feature creates a message group, you can use the message group like any
other message group. The message group remains active even after the geofence is deleted.
NOTE
NOTE:
Adding units to the geofence logic depends on the Mobile client. The Mobile client sends the
request to add the GPS-equipped units to the geofence group. The GPS-equipped units must
be reporting their locations.

5 Click Create.
NOTE
NOTE:
If you activate any other map client tool button or action while drawing a geofence shape,
PremierOne cancels your geofence creation.

• If you select Circle:

Click in the center of where you want your circle.

PremierOne draws the circle around your point with the radius you selected. If needed, you can
click-and-drag the center point to a new location. You can also change the value of the radius in
the Radius field and the circle on the map reflects that change.

• If you select Polygon:

1) Click the map where you want to start your polygon.

2) Move your mouse to the next point on your polygon, and click again.

3) Repeat until your polygon is finished, and then double-click. You do not have to close your
polygon; PremierOne closes it for you as long as you have at least three points on the map.

After you finish defining the polygon, you can change the shape by clicking anywhere on any of the
sides and dragging the side. Repeat this operation until your polygon is exactly the way you want it.

Send Feedback 515

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

6 To control notifications:

a Select the Notifications tab.

Figure 297: GeoFencing – Notifications Tab

b Do any of the following:

- To notify units as they enter the area bounded by the geofence, ensure the Notify units as
they enter the area check box is selected. To cancel notification, clear the check box by
clicking it.

- To customize the notification message the units receive as they enter the area bounded by
the geofence, type a new message in the box below the Notify units as they enter the area
field.

- To notify units as they leave the area bounded by the geofence, ensure the Notify units as
they leave the area check box is checked. To cancel notification, clear the check box by
clicking it.

- To customize the notification message the units receive as they leave the area bounded by
the geofence, type a new message in the box below the Notify units as they leave the area
field.

7 Click Submit.

Your geofence disappears from the screen. This “disappearance” is normal behavior. After the
server accepts the geofence transaction and the information is propagated to the map clients, the
geofence boundary shows in its defined location on all map clients.

516 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

Editing or Deleting Geofences

You can edit or delete any existing geofence.

To edit or delete a geofence:

1 From the mapping Task area, click GeoFence.

For details, see Overview of the Mapping Display on page 465.

The Define GeoFence tab appears.

Figure 298: Existing Geofence Ready To Edit

Send Feedback 517

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 18: Using Mapping

2 Click Edit at the bottom of the tab.

The Select GeoFence to Edit dialog box appears showing a list of all existing geofences by name.

Figure 299: Select GeoFence To Edit Dialog Box

3 Select the geofence to edit or delete, and then click OK.

The cursor changes to four arrows, indicating that you are in edit mode, and the map zooms in (if
needed) centering on your selected geofence.

The Submit, Erase, Cancel, and Delete buttons are now enabled.

4 To edit the geofence, do any of the following:

• Use your cursor to change its shape, change its radius in the Radius field if it is a circle, drag it to
a different location, change its name, description, message group information, or change its
notification information.

• To redraw the shape, click Erase, and start the shape again.

Click Submit when you are finished with your edits.

5 To delete the geofence, click Delete.

518 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Using Queries

Chapter 19

Using Queries 19

As you complete your day-to-day tasks, many of the functions you perform requires that you search
local and external databases to find information that may be relevant to incidents that you are managing.

You can send queries to local, state, and national information systems, including the PremierOne
Records system, the National Law Enforcement Telecommunications System (NLETS), and the
National Crime Information Center (NCIC). This way you can obtain information such as location
information, criminal history, article and gun registrations, motor vehicle registrations, outstanding
warrants, and drivers license information. You can then view the responses those systems send back.

Because each agency has different queries, this chapter shows how to submit three common queries:
vehicle, person, and gun. Also included is how to submit queries from the command line and how to
view the responses you receive from your queries.

PremierOne can also be configured to automatically query locations, persons, or vehicles from the
Incident Initiation or Incident Update screens.

NOTE:
Consult your system administrator to get the full list of queries designed specifically for use at
your site.

Understanding Records Queries

If your system is integrated with PremierOne Records, you may have access to Records queries. You
submit Records queries and view the responses in the same manner that you would another query.
From CAD, you can query Records by Person, Vehicle, Location, Property, Entity, and Case Number.

NOTE:
The wildcard character % can be used in Records queries. You cannot use it in date fields or
fields with lists.

Access to a Records system can provide you with additional incident information, such as the following:

• Case information added to Records that is not in CAD, such as an informant providing information to
a detective in the station about a crime.

• Information regarding weapons permits, or permits at an address for a dangerous reptile.

Send Feedback 519

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

• Follow up information regarding an incident, such as the real name of a person being identified.

• Older information. PremierOne generally only keeps incident information for a year or two;
information can stay in Records for fifteen or twenty years.

Figure 300: Examples of Records Queries

Submitting Queries From the Incident Management Screens

Queries can be initiated from the Query form or from Incident Management screens. Your system may
be configured to automatically initiate queries of Locations, Persons, or Vehicles from the Incident
Initiation General tab or the Incident Update Summary screen. For locations, the automatic query is
initiated upon address verification. For Persons or Vehicles, the automatic query occurs upon
submission of the incident. Query results appear in the Work Assist area. See your system administrator
for more information about your system configuration.

You can also perform these queries manually using the Query button on the Incident Initiation or Incident
Update Summary screen.

The originating agency (ORI) for such queries is determined according to whether the query is submitted
before or after the incident is created. If the query is submitted before the incident is created, the working
agency ORI of the dispatcher is associated to the query. If the query is submitted after the incident is
created, the incident agency ORI is used.

For more information, see Initiating Incidents on page 209 and Entering Locations in CAD on page 163.

520 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

Understanding Distributed Query Responses

Your system administrator can configure PremierOne so that you can automatically associate query
responses with an active incident, and also distribute those responses to all other units assigned to the
incident.

If Display all (and only) associated query responses when viewing an incident record is
configured for your agency in Provisioning, CAD displays only the query responses associated with your
active incident. The Delete button on the Incident Management Query tab is hidden, and the counter on
the Query tab shows the total number of associated responses, both read and unread. Additionally, if
Distribute associated query responses to all assigned units is provisioned, responses from a query
that you initiate are distributed to all other units assigned to the incident. In the same way, your list of
query responses also includes responses to queries initiated by any other units assigned to the active
incident. Associated responses also appear in the Incident History for the incident for a provisioned time.

NOTE:
Your role permissions filter Performing queries and viewing responses. If you do not have
permission to perform a particular query, you cannot view responses from that type of request.

For details on provisioning Distributed Query Responses, see “Configuring Queries at the Agency Level”
in the PremierOne CAD/Mobile Provisioning Guide.

Submitting Queries From the Queries Form

Submit a query any time you need new information from your local, state, or national information
systems. The Queries form uses the Primary Work Area for your input, and the Work Assist Area for
additional information.

NOTE:
Query types and templates are agency configurable. Also, your role determines the queries to
which you have access. Therefore, your list and templates may be different.

To submit a query from the Queries form:

1 On the command line, type QY and then press Enter or F10.

The Queries form appears in the Primary Work Area with the list of query types in the Work Assist
Area.

Send Feedback 521

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

If your CAD system integrates with PremierOne Records, records queries may also be available.

CAUTION:
If you delete a query request before all the responses return, CAD does not display the
responses. Deleting before all responses return can cause you to miss some query
responses.

Figure 301: Queries Form

2 In the Inc or Unit field, type an incident number or unit ID to determine the originating agency (ORI)
that is associated with the query, and to add the query and query results to an incident or unit history.

• If you enter a unit ID (format {Unit-ID}):

- Both the submitter and the requester agency ORIs are associated with the query request.
See Associating Query Submitter and Requester ORIs to Queries on page 525.

- If the Unit ID is assigned to an incident, the request is logged to the Incident and Unit History.

- If the Unit ID is not assigned to an incident, the request is logged only to the Unit History. This
feature allows you to associate a unit with a license plate in the Unit History record before the
incident is created.

• If you enter an incident number (format #{IncidentID}):

- The Incident agency ORI is associated with the query request.

- The request is logged only to the Incident History.

• If you submit the query with the Inc or Unit field blank:

- The submitter ORI is associated with the query request

3 To send a copy of the query/query response, enter the address in the Send To field.

522 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

4 Select the query from the list of query templates in the Work Assist Area.

The template appears in the Queries form.

Figure 302: Queries Form – Vehicle Template

Send Feedback 523

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

Figure 303: Queries Form Showing Records Query Types

5 In the template, enter required information in the fields with red asterisks.

For Records queries, select the owning organization from the Owning Organization list.

If you know more about the person or thing you are searching for, enter the information in the
additional fields.

For vehicles, you can use a space character in the VIN field if you do not know the Vehicle
Identification Number.

6 Press F12.

If you receive an error message stating that a field value is invalid or required and you do not have
information for that field, enter a space character in the field, and then press F12 again.

The Query is submitted.

524 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

Associating Query Submitter and Requester ORIs to Queries

Dispatchers or calltakers can run a query request on behalf of another user, for example, a mobile officer
on patrol. In such cases, the ORI (Originating Agency Identifier) of both the submitter (dispatcher/
calltaker) and the requester (mobile officer) are associated with the query. Queries can be requested
from the Query (QY), Incident Initiation (II), Incident Management (IM), or Field Initiate (FI) forms. The
following table shows the rules for determining the ORIs associated with a query. If the first listed option
is unavailable, the system moves to the second option, and so on.
Table 49: ORI Query Association Rules

Form Submitter ORI Requester ORI

Query (QY) 1. Device ORI 1. Unit user Role ORI

2. Logged-in user Role ORI 2. Unit device ORI

3. Device Agency ORI 3. Unit user Agency ORI

Incident Initiation (II) – Person or Vehicle
tab
1. Device ORI Before incident creation:
CAD user working agency ORI
2. Logged-in user Role ORI
After incident creation:
3. Device Agency ORI Incident agency ORI

Incident Management (IM) – Person or 1. Device ORI 1. Unit user Role ORI
Vehicle tab
2. Logged-in user Role ORI 2. Unit device ORI

3. Devices Agency ORI 3.Unit user Agency ORI

Field Initiate (FI) 1. Device ORI 1. Unit user Role ORI

2. Logged-in user Role ORI 2. Unit device ORI

3. Device Agency ORI 3. Unit user Agency ORI

Work Assist Area – Templates Tab

The Templates tab in the Work Assist Area displays a list of the query templates that were configured by
your system administrator. Each template has different query fields associated with it.

The upper part of the Work Assist Area contains a list of the various templates. Select the template you
want to use and the fields display in the Primary Work Area.

Send Feedback 525

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

The lower part of the Work Assist Area lists the databases available for querying. Select the check
boxes of the databases you want to query.

Figure 304: Queries Form – Templates Tab In Work Assist Area

Do the following:

• From the list of query types, select the query template.

• From the list of databases, select the databases you want to query.

526 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

Work Assist Area – Sent Tab

The Sent tab displays any queries you have already submitted.

Figure 305: Queries Form – Sent Tab In Work Assist Area

Do any of the following:

• To see additional information about all of the records in the list, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of
Summary at the top of the column for that list.

• To see additional information about a record, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of the record.

• To sort the queries in the list, select any of the column headers.

Send Feedback 527

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

Work Assist Area – Drafts Tab

The Drafts tab displays any queries that you started but did not complete or submit.

Figure 306: Queries Form – Drafts Tab In Work Assist Area

Do any of the following:

• To see additional information about all of the records in the list, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of
Summary at the top of the column for that list.

• To see additional information about a record, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of the record.

• To sort the queries in the list, click any of the column headers.

• To view the query and, if needed, edit it and resubmit, select the query, and then select the View
button.

• To delete a query, select the query and select the Delete button.

• To attach the query to an incident, select the query and then select the Attach button.

In the Attach Log dialog box that displays, enter any comments and select To Incident or To Unit.
Then select Attach.

528 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

Submitting Queries From the Command Line (QY)

Submit a query from the command line when you know exactly which query type you need, which
database you want to query, and which parameters to use.

NOTE:
If you run a query via the command line and associate a Unit ID to the query, the associated Unit
Agency ORI is associated to the query.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

QY.TQ.DB.P1.P2.P3....P50
To submit a query from the command line:

1 On the command line, type QY followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
QY.TQ;<QueryType>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the value for the query type, followed by the period separator.

3 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

4 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne submits the query to the specified database.

Example:
To query the NCIC database for a gun registered to John Smith:

qy.TQ.gun.NCIC;Registered owner.John Smith

Viewing Query Responses

Use the View Query Responses (VQ) command to see the responses to your queries.

To view query responses:

1 On the command line, do one of the following:

• Type VQ and then press Enter or F10.

• Press F2 and then press Enter or F10.

Send Feedback 529

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

The Query Responses tab displays in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 307: Queries Form – Query Responses Tab

2 From the Responses tab in the Work Assist Area, select the response you want to view.

The response appears in the Primary Work Area. The formatted response displays on the Formatted
tab. To view the raw text, click the Raw tab.
NOTE
NOTE:
To open the response in a separate window, double-click the item in the Work Assist Area. You
can also do open the response by selecting the Orphan button at the bottom of the Primary
Work Area.

530 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

If multiple responses of the same query type are received as a result of single query request, they
are displayed as a single response with multiple records.

Figure 308: Query Response Form

Your agency may be configured to display the query return in special formatting.

Figure 309: Query Response Form – Formatted Tab

Send Feedback 531

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

3 To make more room for the information below the Query Header, select Less to show less of the
header.

The Less button changes to a More button and less of the header is visible. To make more of the
header visible, select More.

4 To view “drill down” information, click the hyperlinked text within brackets, such as a person name.

The query is automatically run for the item and the results display in the Query Response area.

NOTES:
When you work with Vehicle queries for vehicles with more than one color, the colors of the vehicle
are returned as follows:

- When describing a vehicle of two colors, colors are listed from top to bottom or front to
rear. For example, <state database>/WHI/BLU

- When describing a vehicle of more than two colors, the multicolored code MUL/COL is
entered and the actual colors are listed in the MIS field. For example, <state
database>/MUL/COL and MIS;<state database>/WHI/BLU.

When you work with Records and SmartCopy to transfer the color values from the query
response to a vehicle on the corresponding incident form, PremierOne first tries to match the
entire color value in the response against the set of Vehicle Color values provisioned for the
target agency.

- If the entire color value in the response matches a Vehicle Color value provisioned for the
target agency, the entire value is placed into the Color 1 field for the vehicle.

- If the color value from the query response does not match a color value provisioned for
the target agency, PremierOne breaks the query response color value into Color 1/Color 2
and tries to match each color against the provisioned colors and place them into the
Color 1 and Color 2 fields for the vehicle.

5 Do any of the following:

• To print the query, select Print at the bottom of the Primary Work Area.

• To forward the query as an email, select Forward.

The query response is included as an attachment to the email.

• To create an incident related to this query, select New Incident.

The Incident Initiation form displays. The query response is added to the incident history.

• To attach specific text from the query to the incident history, unit history, booking, or case report,
highlight the text, select Attach at the bottom of the Primary Work Area, and then select Log to
History.

If you enter a unit ID assigned to an incident, the request is logged to the Incident and Unit
History.

If you enter a unit ID not assigned to an incident, the request is logged only to the Unit History.

If you enter an incident number, the request is logged only to the Incident History.

532 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

• To import a query response to an existing incident, or create an incident from a query response,
select Attach at the bottom of the Primary Work Area, and then select the desired import option.
For details on importing query responses, see Importing Query Responses to Incidents on
page 533.

• To display the Hot Hit notification dialog box when query responses include a hot hit, select Hot
Hit. Your agency may be configured to display the Hot Hit dialog box automatically when a hot hit
response is received, but if not, or if you have closed the notification, you can open it using this
button.

• To orphan a query response from the CAD client into its own window, select Orphan. You can
also orphan a query response into its own window by double-clicking a query response in the list
view. You can move this screen to wherever you like, and you can perform all query response
related functions.

Importing Query Responses to Incidents

You can import information from a person or vehicle query response directly into an incident, without
having to manually fill in fields on the Incident Management Person or Vehicle tab. With this import
feature, you can create a person or vehicle record, or replace or update an existing record with the query
response data. You can also create an incident, with response data automatically populating the Incident
Initiation Person or Vehicle tabs.

Your system administrator can map specific fields from person or vehicle query responses (called “key
fields”) to be available for import to corresponding fields in the Incident Management Person or Vehicle
tabs (for example, Name, Address, Age, and Gender, or Make, Model, Color, and Plate Number). When
one or more of these mapped values is present on a query response, you can directly import the
information to the appropriate IM Person or Vehicle fields.

For details on response field mapping, see “Response Fields Mapping” in the PremierOne Provisioning
User Guide.

Importing Query Responses From the II, IU, or QY Screens

You can import query response information directly to an incident when working in the Incident Initiation
(II), Incident Update (IU), or Query (QY) screens.

Use the Attach button at the bottom of either the Query tab of the Work Assist Area (WAA), or, if you
have selected a query response to view, use the Attach button at the bottom of the query overlay in the
Primary Work Area (PWA). From the WAA, you can import one or more responses to an incident (with
multiple responses selected). From the PWA, you can import details from the specific query response
you are viewing.

Send Feedback 533

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

To import a query response from the II, IU, or VQ screen:

1 From the Incident Initiation or Incident Update screen, on the Query tab in the WAA, select one or
more query responses containing a person or vehicle record, or select a single query response
containing person or vehicle information to display in the PWA, and click View.

2 Click the Attach button at the bottom of the screen.

The following list of import options appears:

• Log to History (for details, see step 5 in “Viewing Query Responses.”)

• Import as New

• Import: Update Existing

• Import: Replace Existing

• Import to Incident #...

• Create New Incident

NOTE
NOTE:
When accessed from the VQ screen, the Attach list options Import As New, Import Update
Existing, and Import Replace Existing are not available.

3 Perform one of the following import options:

Import as New
a From the Attach list, select Import as New.

- If you have only one incident open, and there is only one person or vehicle record included in
each selected query response, the query response information is imported as a new record to
the Person or Vehicle tab of the current incident, and the new record is displayed on the
Person or Vehicle tab.

- If multiple query responses are selected on the WAA Query tab, a new Person or Vehicle
record is created for each response.

- If you have multiple incidents open, or if your working agency is configured to allow users to
specify an incident number to import to, then the Import to Incident dialog box appears. The
incidents that are currently open in your work areas are listed.

Figure 310: Import to Incident Dialog Box

534 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

NOTE:
The Incident # text field only appears if your working agency is provisioned to allow users
to specify an incident number to import to. The field accepts an incident number or the Unit ID
of an active unit on the incident being referenced. You can preface the incident number or
Unit ID value with an Agency ID.

b Select the incident that you want to add the query response information to, and then select Add
as New.

- If there is only one person or vehicle record included in each selected query response, the
query response information is imported as a new record to the Person or Vehicle tab of the
selected incident.

- If there are multiple person or vehicle records in the selected query responses, the Add,
Update, or Replace dialog box appears. The top table displays person or vehicle information
included in the query response.

Figure 311: Add, Update, or Replace Dialog Box

c Select the query response information you want to import, and then select Add as New.

The query response information is imported as a new record to the Person or Vehicle tab of the
selected incident, and the new record is displayed.

Import: Update Existing

a From the Attach list, select Import: Update Existing.

The Import to Incident dialog box appears. The incidents that are currently open in your work
areas are listed. (See Figure 310.)

NOTE:
The Incident # text field only appears if your working agency is provisioned to allow users
to specify an incident number to import to. The field accepts an incident number or the Unit ID
of an active unit on the incident being referenced. You can preface the incident number or
Unit ID value with an Agency ID.

Send Feedback 535

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

b Select the incident whose Person or Vehicle record you want to update, and then select Update.

- If the query response contains only one person or vehicle record, and the incident you select
contains only one Person or Vehicle record, the query response record is imported to the
Person or Vehicle tab. The existing record is updated; any missing fields in the existing
Person or Vehicle record are populated from the imported query response. The updated
record is displayed.

- If there are multiple records in the query response, or if there are multiple existing records
already associated to the selected incident, the Add, Update, or Replace dialog box
appears.(See Figure 311.)

The top table displays person or vehicle information included in the query response. The
bottom table displays Person or Vehicle records that are already associated to the incident.

c If there are multiple records in the query response (top table), select the records you want to
import.

If there is only one record on the query response, it is selected by default.

d If there are multiple records already associated with the incident, select the record you want to
update, and then select Update.

The selected record is updated; any missing fields in the existing Person or Vehicle record are
populated from the imported query response. The updated record is displayed.

Import: Replace Existing

a From the Attach list, select Import: Replace Existing.

The Import to Incident dialog box appears. The incidents that are currently open in your work
areas are listed. (See Figure 310.)

b Select the incident whose person or vehicle record you want to replace, and then select
Replace.

NOTE:
The Incident # text field only appears if your working agency is provisioned to allow users
to specify an incident number to import to. The field accepts an incident number or the Unit ID
of an active unit on the incident being referenced. You can preface the incident number or
Unit ID value with an Agency ID.

- If the query response contains only one person or vehicle record, and the incident you select
contains only one Person or Vehicle record, the query response record is imported to the
Person or Vehicle tab. The existing record is replaced; all values for the fields in the existing
Person or Vehicle record are overwritten from the imported query response. The replaced
record is displayed.

- If there are multiple person or vehicle records in the query response, or if there are multiple
existing records already associated to the selected incident, the Add, Update, or Replace
dialog box appears. (See Figure 311.)

The top table displays person or vehicle information included in the query response. The
bottom table displays Person or Vehicle records that are already associated to the incident.

c If there are multiple records in the query response (top table), select the records you want to
import.

If there is only one record in the query response, it is selected by default.

536 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

d If there are multiple records already associated with the incident, select the record you want to
update, and then select Replace.

The selected existing record is replaced; all values for the fields in the existing Person or Vehicle
record are overwritten from the imported query response. The replaced record is displayed.

Import to Incident #...

NOTE
NOTE:
The Import to Incident # menu option only appears on the Attach list if you have incidents
open in other work areas, or if your working agency is provisioned to allow users to specify an
incident number to import to.

a From the Attach list, select Import to Incident #.

The Import to Incident dialog box appears. (See Figure 310.) The incidents that are currently
open in your work areas are listed, along with the Incident # text field.

NOTE:
The Incident # text field only appears if your working agency is provisioned to allow users
to specify an incident number to import to. The field accepts an incident number or the Unit ID
of an active unit on the incident being referenced. You can preface the incident number or
Unit ID value with an Agency ID.

b In the Incident # field, type the incident number or the unit ID of the incident you want to import
the query response to.

c Select Add as New to add the query response to the incident as a new record, or select Update
or Replace to import the query response to an existing record.

If there are multiple records in the query response, or if there are multiple existing records
already associated to the selected incident, the Add, Update, or Replace dialog box appears.
(See Figure 311.)

The top table displays person or vehicle information included in the query response. The bottom
table displays Person or Vehicle records that are already associated to the incident.

d If there are multiple records in the query response (top table), select the records you want to
import.

If there is only one record on the query response, it is selected by default.

e Select Add as New to add the query response to the specified incident as a new record, or, if you
want to import the query response to an existing Person or Vehicle record, select the record you
want to update or replace from the lower table, and then select Update or Replace.

Send Feedback 537

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

Create New Incident

a From the Attach list, select Create New Incident.

- If the query response contains only one person or vehicle record, a new incident is created,
and the information from the query response is automatically added to the new incident
Person or Vehicle tab. The Incident Initiation form appears, with the Person or Vehicle tab in
focus, and the imported record selected.

- If there are multiple person or vehicle records in the query response, the Add, Update, or
Replace dialog box appears. (See Figure 311.)

The top table displays person or vehicle information included in the query response. The
bottom table displays Person or Vehicle records that are already associated to the incident.

b If there are multiple records in the query response (top table), select the record you want to
import to the new incident, and then select Add as New.

The Incident Initiation screen appears, with the Persons or Vehicles tab in focus and the imported
record selected.

4 When finished, press F12.

Managing Hot Hits

If the response is a potential hot hit, the hot hit displays with an icon in the Query Header and
PremierOne maybe be configured to send you an alert showing the hot hit. The message counter W on
the Info panel also increases by one (for details on the message counters, see Using the Information
Panel on page 56).

For details, see Understanding Hot Hit Notifications on page 205.

538 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

Work Assist Area – Responses Tab

The Work Assist Area for the Query Responses tab displays a list of the responses for your queries. The
total number of query responses/hot hits is listed in the #/H column, the query text is listed in the Query
column, and the Unit ID entered in the original query is listed in the Unit column.

Figure 312: Queries Form – Responses Tab In The Work Assist Area

Do any of the following:

• To see additional information about all of the records in the list, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of
#/H at the top of the column for that list. The priority, response summary, and response type
displays.

• To expand the response information for a single query, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of the
response. The priority, response summary, and response type for all responses to the query
displays.

• To sort the responses in the list, click any of the column headers.

• To view a response, select the response you want to see and then select View.

• To print the query response list, select Print. To print a single response, select the response, and
then select Print.

• To delete a response, select the response you want to see, and then select Delete.

Send Feedback 539

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

Work Assist Area – Pending Tab

The Pending tab displays a list of queries that were submitted but for which you have not yet received a
response.

Figure 313: Queries Form – Pending Tab In The Work Assist Area

• To see additional information about all of the records in the list, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of
Summary at the top of the column for that list.

• To expand the response information, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of the response.

• To sort the responses in the list, click any of the column headers.

540 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

Work Assist Area – Sent Queries Tab

The Sent Queries tab displays a list of responses that were sent.

Figure 314: Queries Window – Sent Tab In The Work Assist Area

Do any of the following:

• To see additional information about all of the records in the list, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of
Summary at the top of the column for that list.

• To see additional information about a response, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of the record.

• To sort the responses in the list, click any of the column headers.

• To delete a response, select the response and then select Delete.

Send Feedback 541

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 19: Using Queries

Work Assist Area – Trash Tab

The Trash tab displays the responses you have deleted.

Figure 315: Queries Form – Trash Tab In The Work Assist Area

Do any of the following:

• To see additional information about all of the records in the list, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of
Summary at the top of the list.

• To see additional information about a response, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of the record.

• To sort the responses in the list, click any of the column headers.

• To restore a deleted response, select the query and then select Restore.

• To permanently delete a response, select the response and then select Purge.

542 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Using Toning, Paging, and Tear and Run

Chapter 20

Using Toning, Paging, and Tear and Run 20

PremierOne supports toning of stations, sending messages via pages, and sending information using
printers configured for tear and run.

Sending Tones and Tear and Run Alerts From the TN Form
You can send tones and tear and run alerts using the TN form or from the command line. For information
about sending tones and pages from the command line, see Sending Tones and Pages From the
Command Line (TN).

To send pages (alerts) from the TN form:

1 On the command line, type TN and then press Enter or F10.

The TN form displays, with the Page tab in focus.

Figure 316: TN Form – Page Tab

NOTE
NOTE:
Only one tab, Page, Tone, or Print can be used at a time. After finishing with each tab, be sure
to press F12 before moving on to another tab.

Send Feedback 543

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 20: Using Toning, Paging, and Tear and Run

2 In the Pager/Group Name(s) field, type the name for the pagers or the pager group to which this
pager or these pagers belong. Separate multiple names with commas (or your provisioned
separator) like this: Pager1,Pager2,Pager3.

3 In the Unit ID(s) for Associated Pagers field, type the IDs for the units that have devices to which
you want to send pages. Separate multiple units with commas but no spaces, like this:
Unit1,Unit2,Unit3.

You can send pages to both pagers/pager groups and to unit IDs at the same time. If pager names
and pager groups are both defined in PremierOne, the names must be unique.

After you send a message, use the Clear Devices button to erase the Unit ID(s) for Associated
Pagers and the Pager/Group Name(s) fields, if needed.

4 To send a pre-provisioned message, in the Canned Message For Agency field, select the user sign-
on agency. By using the sign-on agency, the user sees only what they are authorized to send via the
TN command.

5 Select one paging message type to send: canned, free form, or incident field data:

a To send a canned message (a pre-provisioned message), in the Select Message field, select the
pre-provisioned message to use.

You can type in the field to filter the messages.

After you select a canned message, PremierOne disables the Enter Message and Send
Incident Info fields.

b To send a free form message or open text message, in the Enter Message field, type a message
to send to the pagers and/or unit devices you identified.

c To send incident information, in the Send Incident Info field, type the incident ID or the active
Unit ID.

You can enter only one incident ID or a unit ID of a unit that is active on the incident.

6 Use the Clear Message button to clear the selected message or entered text.

PremierOne enables all fields so you can start over.

7 Press F12.

Sending Incident and Unit-Based Alerts From the TN Form

You can send incident and unit alerts from the TN form. The form allows a user to build an alerting list for
all provisioned alerting devices (pagers, toning equipment, and tear and run printers). Manual alerts are
generated for all associated devices and alert types when there is sufficient information to generate
them.

Pagers and tear and run printers require a defined incident for these types of alerts to be sent. Sending
alerts to toning equipment does not typically require an incident reference. Therefore, if only the Unit
field is used (without filling in Add Incident Info), then the only alert that can be generated is a Toning
event to the associated toning equipment for the unit defined. You can verify this scenario by selecting
View Alerts. An Alerting List is displayed with all alerts associated with the unit; however, the only
selected alert is the associated toning equipment.

If you fill in Add Incident info along with the unit ID, then all associated alerts are populated in the
alerting list and selected for message transmission. You can verify this scenario by selecting View
Alerts.

544 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 20: Using Toning, Paging, and Tear and Run

The Incident alerting field, Incident ID, is used to generate all alerts associated with all the units
assigned to the incident. All alerts are selected for transmission because incident information is
available by definition.

To send incident and unit-based alerts from the TN form:

1 On the command line, type TN and then press Enter or F10.

The TN form displays, with the Page tab in focus.

2 Click the Tone tab.

Figure 317: TN Form – Tone Tab

3 To send a unit-based alert:

a In the Unit ID field, type the ID of the units to alert.

Separate multiple unit IDs with commas.

b Do one of the following:

- To alert all units assigned to an incident and include the incident information in the alert, type
the incident number in the Include Info from Inc# field.

- To alert all units assigned to an incident with only the incident number, enter the incident
number in the Incident Inc # field.

If you leave these fields empty, PremierOne simply returns a toning event (alert) to the toning
equipment.

These fields may behave differently or not work at all depending on the alerting system.

Send Feedback 545

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 20: Using Toning, Paging, and Tear and Run

If you populate this field, PremierOne creates the Unit Alerting List, a list of printers, toning
equipment, and pager devices associated with the unit, vehicle, or personnel who are associated
with the unit. PremierOne then alerts devices for all selected messages in the alerting list. You
can view the list by selecting View Alerts.

Figure 318: Unit Alerting List in Work Assist Area

In the Unit Alerting List, you can toggle between the Unit View (shown in Figure 318) and the
Type View which sorts by the specific Alert Types of Toning, Paging, Tear N Run, Two-Tone
Paging, FAX, and so on.

You can use unit-based alerts when you want to alert only a specific unit, rather than all units
assigned to an incident.

Examples:
Ambulance1 (AMB1), AMB2, Engine1 (ENG1), ENG2, and a Tanker are all assigned to incident
#002. AMB1 is set up to be alerted with pager MED1, toning system Z25/0011, and printer
PRINTS01. AMB2 is set up to be alerted with pager MED2, toning system Z25/0021, and printer
PRINTS02. ENG1 is set up to be alerted with toning system Z25/0012 and printer PRINTS01,
ENG2 is set up to be alerted with toning system Z25/0022 and printer PRINTS02, and the tanker
is set up to be alerted with the same toning system as ENG2 but printer PRINTS03, a printer in
the tanker bay. All of these items appear checked in the Unit Alerting List/Unit View.

A unit is assigned to a station that is provisioned for a “by station” toning scheme and a list of
printers is associated with that station for Tear ‘N Run printing. All printers for that station would
be identified when an alert is sent to that unit.

546 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 20: Using Toning, Paging, and Tear and Run

4 To send or resend an incident-based alert, in the Incident ID field, type the ID of the incident.

PremierOne uses the incident ID to build the associated alerting (toning) actions for the incident
based on the units assigned to the incident. If pagers are assigned to units, vehicles, or pagers that
are associated with the units that are dispatched on the incident, then all associated pages are
placed on the Alerting List. Any printers or toning equipment associated with dispatched units are
placed on the Alerting list. When using a By Station alerting scheme, use stations, and the units,
printers, and toning equipment are then assigned to a station. All printers and toning equipment
associated with a dispatched unit are placed on the Alerting List.

5 To view existing alerts, type a unit ID in the Unit ID field, and then click View Alerts.

The Unit Alerting List appears in the Work Assist Area.

Figure 319: Toning Alerts

PremierOne checks the items to be alerted. All Unit Alerting List items that are selected (checked)
generate and transmit alert messages. If an alert can be built for that device, Manual Alerting does
not use in-station/out-of-station unit status; therefore, all manual alerts are selected. Auto-alerting
checks in-station, out-of-station, unit status, and override records to ensure the alerting is done as
provisioned.

Printers, Pagers, and Toning Devices are all listed, showing specific details including the unit IDs and
device names for pagers, the printer names and whether the associated unit is out-of-station for
printers, and the toning device names for toning devices.

6 Expand the items to be alerted by clicking the plus symbol.

7 To force unit alerts, enter the unit ID in the Unit ID field, and then click View Alerts. Select any or all
of the alerts you want to send. Press F12.

PremierOne looks for an active incident for the specified unit. If it finds an active incident, all alerts
are sent.

Send Feedback 547

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 20: Using Toning, Paging, and Tear and Run

8 Optionally, click Cancel in the bottom right corner to close the Alerting List.

If you change the Alerting List and click Cancel before pressing F12, your changes are lost and the
original Alerting List is sent.

9 To send the alerts, press F12.

Using Two-Tone Alerting

Two-tone alerting is a method of sending tones out to a group of pagers. The tones alert the person
carrying the pager.

You send two-tone alerts to pagers or pager groups the same way you send unit-based and incident-
based alerts. (For more information, see Sending Incident and Unit-Based Alerts From the TN Form on
page 544.)

Examples of Two-Tone Alerting

In the following example, a unit-based alert was sent. The Type View shows two pager groups were
alerted.

Figure 320: Type View in Work Assist Area – Showing Two Tone Pager Groups

548 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 20: Using Toning, Paging, and Tear and Run

In the following example, an Incident alert can be used. The two-tone alert was found from the unit
assigned to that incident. The correct alerting records were found for the station assignment of that unit
and the correct two-tone alert was correctly posted to the Unit Alerting List.

Figure 321: Unit View in Work Assist Area – Showing Incident Alert

Printing Alerts
You can print an alert related to a specific incident.

To print alerts:

1 On the command line, type TN and then press Enter or F10.

The TN form displays, with the Page tab in focus.

Send Feedback 549

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 20: Using Toning, Paging, and Tear and Run

2 Click the Print tab.

Figure 322: TN Form – Print Tab

3 In the Incident ID field, type the ID of the pertinent incident; for example, #0012.

4 In the Send Incident Info To Printer field, type or select the printer name.

5 Press F12.

Sending Tones and Pages From the Command Line (TN)

Use the Toning (TN) command to tone one or more stations or units, or to send pager messages.

There are no required identifiers. For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command
Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

TN.P.U.I.MG.PM.SP.TN.STC

550 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 20: Using Toning, Paging, and Tear and Run

Sending Pages From the Command Line

You can send a page from the command line.

To send a page from the command line:

1 On the command line, type TN followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
TN.P;<pager friendly name(s)>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 To send a page, type one or more pager friendly names. Separate multiple names with commas.

3 Press Enter or F10.

Toning a Unit From the Command Line

You can tone a unit from the command line.

To tone a unit from the command line:

1 On the command line, type TN followed by two period separators.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
TN.P;.U;<agency or unit ID(s)>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 Type a value for the unit, followed by the period separator.

If the unit is provisioned for alerting, when you press Enter or F10, PremierOne checks the alerting
record for all of the unit alerts for this unit. Then, it checks the In-Station unit status flag to see if the
alerts are selected or not.

If alerting by default is not set, or if the alerting record parameters are set to block alerts, you can still
send alerts by using the TN identifier:
TN.P;.U;1A12.TN;y<toning override {y|n}>
This action forces all alerts to be selected and sent. PremierOne looks for an active incident on the
unit and uses that incident to build the alert message for all of the alerts.

If you are alerting multiple units and using the TN override, PremierOne looks for an active incident
on each of the units.

3 Press Enter or F10.

Send Feedback 551

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 20: Using Toning, Paging, and Tear and Run

Toning an Incident From the Command Line

You can tone an incident from the command line.

To tone an incident from the command line:

1 On the command line, type TN followed by three period separators.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
TN.P;.U;.I;<incident id or active unit id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 Type a value for the incident ID.

When toning an incident, all the alerts for the units assigned to that incident are sent.

3 Press Enter or F10.

Adding Messages and Requesting Printing From the Command Line

Use the TN command to manually request the printing of a tear and run message.

To add messages and request printers from the command line:

1 Follow the instructions for sending a page, toning a unit, or toning an incident with the exception of
pressing F10 or Enter.

For more information, see Sending Pages From the Command Line on page 551, Toning a Unit
From the Command Line on page 551, or Toning an Incident From the Command Line on page 552.

2 Type the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the MG (message) identifier appears on the command line.

3 Type the message followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the PM (message subject) identifier appears on the command
line.

4 Type the subject for the message followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the SP (agency or station printer ID) identifier appears on the
command line.

5 Type the ID for the agency or station printer, followed by the period separator.

6 Press Enter or F10.

Sending Station Events From CAD

Use the TN command to send station events from CAD, such as turning on lights in a station or closing
a door. Events must be provisioned by your system administrator.

You can send station events from the TN form or from the command line.

552 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 20: Using Toning, Paging, and Tear and Run

Sending Station Events From the TN Form

You can send a station event from the TN form or the command line. For details on sending a station
event from the command line, see Sending Station Events From the Command Line (TN) on page 553.

To send a station event from the TN form:

1 On the command line, type TN and then press Enter or F10.

The TN form displays, with the Page tab in focus.

2 Click the Tone tab.

Figure 323: TN Form – Tone Tab

3 In the Station Event section, select the agency from the Agency list.

4 From the Station Command(s) list, select the commands to issue.

You can select multiple commands. The name of the commands are configured in Provisioning.

5 Press F12 to issue the command.

Sending Station Events From the Command Line (TN)

You can send a station event from the TN form or the command line. For details on sending a station
event from the TN form, see Sending Station Events From the TN Form on page 553.

To send a station event from the command line:

1 On the command line, type the following:

TN.U;Agency.STC;StationCommandCode

Separate multiple station command codes with commas.

Send Feedback 553

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 20: Using Toning, Paging, and Tear and Run

If you do not enter an agency, the working agency is used. You can enter multiple station command
codes.

2 Press Enter or F10.

Example:
TN.U;DC.STC;Station1, Station2

554 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Using Radios

Chapter 21

Using Radios 21

PremierOne can be interfaced to a radio system that manages the communications among the agency
radios. This interfacing allows for efficient operation and monitoring of these radios from PremierOne
forms and commands. The MCC 7500 is the supported radio system.

Working with Talkgroups

Talkgroups are radio frequencies used by radio operators to communicate on a trunk radio system. Use
the CT command to activate and deactivate talkgroups monitored by the console.

Managing Talkgroups From the Console Talkgroups Form

You can manage talkgroups from the Console Talkgroup form or from the command line. For details on
managing talkgroups from the command line, see Managing Talkgroups From the Command Line (CT)
on page 556.

To manage talkgroups from the Console Talkgroups form:

1 On the command line, type CT and press Enter or F10.

The Console Talkgroup window appears. The window contains a list of all available talkgroups,
whether monitored by the console, the description, and the system ID. A check mark displays to the
left of the groups being monitored.

Send Feedback 555

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 21: Using Radios

Any groups that are currently being monitored display at the top of the form and are highlighted in
yellow.

Figure 324: Console Talkgroups Form

2 Do any of the following:

• To add a talkgroup to the list of the talkgroups you are monitoring, select the check box to the left
of the talkgroup in the Monitored column.

• To stop monitoring a talkgroup, clear the check box to the left of the talkgroup in the Monitored
column.

3 Press F12.

Managing Talkgroups From the Command Line (CT)

You can manage talkgroups from the command line or from the talkgroups form. For details on
managing talkgroups from the form, see Managing Talkgroups From the Console Talkgroups Form on
page 555.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

CT.TG.TY

556 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 21: Using Radios

To manage talkgroups from the command line:

1 On the command line, type CT followed by a period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
CT.TG;<talkgroup>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type a value for the talkgroup ID followed by the period separator.

To enter multiple talkgroup IDs, separate them with commas. You can enter up to five talkgroup IDs.

3 Type one of the following:

• To activate the talkgroup, type A.

• To deactivate the talkgroup, type D.

4 Press Enter or F10.

Examples:
To activate talkgroup1:
CT.talkgroup1.A
To activate talkgroups 2 and 3:
CT.talkgroup1, talkgroup2.A
To deactivate talkgroup2:
CT.talkgroup2.D

Resetting Unit Emergency Indicators

Use the Reset Unit Emergency Indicator (RE) command to disable the emergency indicators of units
activated through unit radios and MDTs to normal after the emergency is acknowledged. When a unit is
in an emergency status, the unit ID may flash on the Unit status monitor and the EMG (emergency)
indicator displays on the status line.

NOTE:
Only one unit can be reset at a time.

To reset a unit emergency indicator from the command line:

1 On the command line, type RE followed by a period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
RE;<unit id>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the unit ID.

Send Feedback 557

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 21: Using Radios

3 Press Enter or F10.

The unit is cleared from Emergency status and is placed in the status it was in before the emergency
status.

558 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Using Messaging

Chapter 22

Using Messaging 22

PremierOne can send and receive email messages to and from other PremierOne and Mobile users as
well as send and receive email messages to and from external email systems. In addition, you can save
and modify drafts, delete messages, and create folders for messages you want to keep. Messaging also
is used to work with BOLO messages and notification messages.

Depending on how your agency has configured messaging, some of the features described in this
chapter, such as creating new messages, replying to messages, and forwarding messages, may not be
available.

NOTES:
Messaging-related commands AB, MR, SM, and WH can only be performed in one work area tab at a
time. If one of these commands is executed in a work area and the work area is not cleared or populated
with a different command, the next messaging-related command executes in the same work area,
regardless of the work area in which it was submitted.

When you type a command related to messaging, the system executes the command in the Messaging
Work Area instead of the current work area.

Accessing Messaging
To access Messaging, use the SM command.

To access Messaging:

Do one of the following:

• On the command line, type SM and press Enter or F10.

• On the command line, press F6 and press Enter or F10.

Send Feedback 559

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

The Messaging form opens with the Messages tab active.

Figure 325: Messaging – Messages Tab

Work Assist Area – All Tabs

The Messaging Work Assist Area has the following tabs:

• Inbox – Messages sent to you automatically go to the Inbox.

The Inbox tab displays the total number of unread messages in the Inbox folder on the client/the
total number of unread messages on the server.

For example, 1/20 means there is one unread message on the client and 20 unread messages on
the server.

The total number of read and unread messages in a folder can be displayed by selecting the check
box at the top of the column of the list of messages. The number displays above the Work Assist
Area. This feature can be used to determine how many messages are in the folder and if any need to
be deleted.

For messages to be downloaded, no folder can have more than 300 unread and read messages. If
the message count of unread and read messages in any folder is greater than or equal to 300, the
next synchronization cycle will NOT download the next set of messages. For a user to receive all
latest unread messages, users should delete old messages from their folders to make room for
newer messages.
NOTE
NOTE:
Be sure to keep the message count for unread and read messages below 300 for every folder
or additional messages are not downloaded. Deleting a message moves it to the Trash folder;
messages must be deleted from the Trash folder to be deleted from the system.

560 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

A folder can have more than 300 read and unread messages in some circumstances. For example,
assume there are 100 unread messages on the server awaiting download. The user has an Inbox
folder with 300 messages and deletes two messages from the Inbox folder. At the next
synchronization, 100 messages will be downloaded into the Inbox folder for a total of 398.

• Outbox – Messages waiting to be sent stay in the Outbox until sent.

• Sent – Messages you have sent to others automatically appear on the Sent Items tab.

• Drafts – Messages you are still working on appear on the Drafts tab.

• Trash – Messages you delete from the other tabs appear on the Trash tab. If you delete any personal
folders from the Folder tab, the deleted folders also appear on the Trash tab.

• Folders – Messages stored in folders you created.

• Saved – Messages you choose to save but do not place in a folder.

Columns
Most of the Message tabs have the following columns. You can sort the messages by clicking the
column header or title. Use the expand and collapse buttons on the Folder tab to see more or less
information in individual folders or messages.

• Check box – Select the box next to the message on which you want to act. Select the box in the
heading to select all the messages on the tab.

• Expand/Collapse – Click the plus and minus in the header to expand or collapse all the messages in
the list. Click the plus next to a message to view more of the message. Click the minus next to a
message to see less of the message.

• P – Priority. Shows the priority that was set when the message was created.

• T – Type. Shows the type of message; for example, No for Normal or Re for Recurring.

• From/To – Shows who the message is from in the Inbox. Shows who the message is to on the other
tabs.

• Subject – Shows the subject of the message.

• Date – Shows the date the message was sent.

Buttons
Each tab also contains buttons at the bottom of the Work Assist Area. Not all of these buttons are on
each tab:

• Move – Used to move the selected message or messages to a message folder you have created.

• Compose – Provides options so you can compose a new message, reply to the sender of a
message, reply to all recipients of a message, forward a message, or download messages to your
client.

• View – Displays the selected message.

• Tools – Provides options to attach a file to a message, manage your folders, manage labels, save
any changes made to a message, and search messages for specific words or phrases.

• Delete – Deletes the message.

Send Feedback 561

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

• Restore – Sends the selected message or messages back to your Inbox. Sends the selected folder
or folders back to the Folder tab.

• Purge – Permanently deletes the selected messages or folders.

• Folder – Shows the folders you have created and lists the messages in each folder.

Watch List Messages

A watch is a specific type of query where one or more defined queries are run a specific number of times
during a set time frame. PremierOne sends an alert by email to defined users when the criteria are met.
The title of the Watch List message reads WatchList Evaluation Message.

Opening Messaging From a Specific Folder

When you want to open the contents of either the Inbox or a specified mailbox, use the Mail Read (MR)
command. Use the Mail Read command with identifiers to open a specific mailbox, or you can use this
command without any identifiers to open the Inbox.

NOTE:
When you type a command related to messaging, the system executes the command in the
Messaging Work Area instead of the current work area.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

MR.MF
To open Messaging from a specific folder:

1 On the command line, type MR followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
MR.MF;<message folder>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the name of the message folder you want to open.

3 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne opens the Messages form and the message folder you specified.

562 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Reading and Replying to Messages

Depending on your system configuration, you can view mail messages in several different ways. After
you have viewed a message, you can reply to the message, forward the message, or close the
message.

When you receive a message, the message counter for messages in the Information Panel on the lower
left of the CAD Client window increments (M = Messages). For details on the message counter, see
Using the Information Panel on page 56.

Reading Messages
You can read your messages in several ways, depending on which delivery options the sender used.
For more information, see Setting Display and Delivery Options on page 570.

To read messages:

1 Access the Messaging window.

For more information, see Accessing Messaging on page 559.

2 In the Work Assist Area, select the Inbox tab if it is not already selected, and select the check box to
the left of the message you want to read.

You can select more than one message.

The message appears in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 326: Messaging With A Message In The Primary Work Area

Send Feedback 563

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Field descriptions are as follows:

• Originator – If the sender (originator) is from your agency, the sender ID displays. If the sender
is from your agency and is online, a person icon appears to the right of the sender ID. If the
sender is from a different agency, the sender full email address displays.

• Sent – Shows the date and time when the message was sent.

• To – Shows the ID of the person or the name of the group the message was sent to.

• Cc and Bcc – Shows the ID of the person or groups to whom copies of the message were sent. If
the person is online, a person icon appears to the right of the person ID. If the message was
copied to a group, a group icon appears to the right of the group name.

The Cc (carbon copy) option sends a copy of the mail to the person in the Cc list.

The Bcc (blind carbon copy) option sends a copy of the mail to the person in the Bcc list, but
does not inform the recipient that the copy was sent to that person.

• Priority – Shows the priority that was set when the message was sent.

• Subject – Shows the subject of the message. If the message was forwarded, the subject starts
with Fwd:. If the message was a reply, the subject starts with RE:.

• Attachments – Shows any viewed attachment files in regular text; the attachments that have not
yet been viewed are in bold text. Click an attachment file name to open it. You can either open
the attachment with its default application or save the attachment.

When you have read your message, you can do one or more of the following:

• If you select multiple messages to view, use the up and down arrows above the Work Assist Area
to view each message.

• Delete the message by clicking Delete at the bottom of the Primary Work Area.

• Save your message to a location of your choosing on your computer by clicking Save.

• Save the message as a draft on the Drafts tab by clicking Tools at the bottom of the Work Assist
Area, and then selecting Save.

• Reply to the message by clicking Reply at the bottom of the Primary Work Area.

You can then choose to reply only to the sender, reply to all recipients, or forward the message to
someone else. When you reply to or forward a message, you have all the options and attachment
capabilities that you do when sending a message.

For more information, see Using the Address Book on page 569, Setting Display and Delivery
Options on page 570, and Working With Address Books on page 576.
NOTE
NOTE:
You can also reply only to the sender, reply to all recipients, or forward the message to
someone else without first viewing the message. Select the message in the Work Assist Area
and clicking Compose at the bottom of the Work Assist Area. Then you can select the option
you want.

564 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Replying To and Forwarding Messages

You can reply to the sender of a message, reply to all recipients and the sender, or forward a message
to someone else.

To reply to or forward a message:

1 Access the Messaging window.

For more information, see Accessing Messaging on page 559.

2 Do one of the following:

• If the message is in a separate window on your computer screen, click the down arrow.

• In the Work Assist Area, select the tab where the message is stored, such as the Inbox, and then
select the small box to the left of the message you want to read.

3 Select Reply at the bottom of the Primary Work Area.

A list of choices appears.

4 Do one of the following:

• To reply to the sender only, select Reply.

A message header appears with the To field and the subject already filled in and with Re: at the
beginning of the subject. Type your reply above the original message and press F12.

• To reply to the sender and all recipients, select Reply All.

A message header appears with the To and, if appropriate, Cc and Bcc fields and the subject
already filled in and with Re: at the beginning of the subject. Type your reply above the original
message and press F12.

• To forward the message to another recipient, select Forward.

A blank message header appears with the subject already filled in and with Fwd: at the
beginning of the subject. Type the name and address of the person or group to whom you want
to forward the message. Type any text you want to add above the original message and press
F12.

Creating and Sending Email and Pager Messages

During the course of your day-to-day activities, you may send messages to other users on PremierOne,
and to external users, such as email.

You can create and send email and pager messages. You can use the address book to get the
addresses of people or groups, set display and delivery options, add attachments to your messages,
and save drafts of your messages.

Send Feedback 565

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Creating Email Messages

You can send a message to a person or group that is using either the PremierOne or Mobile application,
or to someone on another type of mail server.

To create an email message:

1 Access the Messaging window.

For more information, see Accessing Messaging on page 559.

2 At the bottom of the Work Assist Area, select the arrow to the right of the Compose button.

A list of options appears.

3 Select Compose.

The Message Header information appears in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 327: Message Header Information In The Primary Work Area

4 In the Send as field, indicate whether you want the message to come from your user ID or from your
Workstation ID.

Specify Workstation ID when you want any replies to your message to be available to anyone
logged on to your console or to all officers in a multi-person vehicle.

Your agency can configure the Send as options. Therefore, your options may be different.

566 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

5 In the To field, do one of the following:

• If you know the address of the recipient or group, type the address. If an alias exists, you can use
the alias.
NOTE
NOTE:
Separate multiple entries with semicolons ( ; )

- For a user, use the format UserID@agency (example: NUser41@DC).

- For a unit, use the format UnitID@Unit.agency (example: Unit1@Unit.DC).

- For a device, use the format device@ Device.agency (example: MDT21@Device.DC).

- For a group, use the format Group@ DGroup.agency (example: AllUnits@DGroup.DC).

- You can address Radio users by User ID, Unit ID, Device, or Group.

• If you do not know the address, do one of the following:

- For groups or individuals, select To to open the address book. For more information, see
Using the Address Book on page 569.

- For groups, select the main Address Book tab. In the Primary Work Area, select the Groups
tab. Select the group name, and then select Contact at the bottom of the Primary Work Area.
Then select Send Message.

Groups are usually a collection of users, units, workstations, users signed on to certain
geographic areas, users in the same roles, and so on.
NOTE
NOTE:
You can send a message to all users assigned to an incident by entering I:NNN where NNN is
the last digits of the incident number. You can also send a message to all users assigned to an
area by typing A:area, where area is the name of the Area.

6 In the Cc field, type the address of any person or group to whom you want a copy of your message to
be sent. If you do not know the address, select Cc to open the address book.

7 In the Bcc field, type the address of any person to whom you want a blind copy of your message to
be sent. A blind copy means the other recipients do not know you sent the message to this person. If
you do not know the address, select Bcc to open the address book, and then select the name.

8 In the Inc # field, type the incident number (or active unit on the incident) to associate with the
message.

When you type the incident number (or active unit), PremierOne displays the incident number as a
hyperlink in the Messaging window in CAD when the message is read and include the incident
information as read-only text in the message body. Clicking the hyperlink displays the incident record
as an overlay in the active work area.

9 From the Priority list, select a priority level for your message. In a situation where messages are
waiting for delivery, those messages with a higher priority are delivered first.
NOTE
NOTE:
Your agency can determine whether the Priority field is available. Therefore, you may not see
the Priority field. In addition, your agency determines whether 0 (zero) is the highest priority
or the lowest. If you are not sure of your agency priority settings, check with a supervisor.

Send Feedback 567

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

10 From the Send Only To list, select the device types to send the message to: AstroRadio, MDT,
workstation, radio, pager, PDA, or cell.

The message is sent only to the device types that you select. Device types depend on your system
configuration.

11 In the Subject field, type a short phrase that describes the subject of your message. This phrase
displays in the Inbox and other areas and helps the recipients to better organize their messages.

12 In the box below the Subject field, type the body of your message.
NOTE
NOTE:
Your agency can configure the fields in the message form. Therefore, the information below
the Subject field may look different and have different fields than the default message template
described here.

13 Do any of the following:

• Save your message to a computer location of your choice by clicking Save.

• Save the message as a draft on the Drafts tab by clicking Tools at the bottom of the Work Assist
Area, and then select Save.

• Add an attachment to your message by clicking Attach. Browse to and select the attachment.
Attachments are limited to 5 Mb.

• Select delivery and display options for your message by clicking Options. For more information,
see Setting Display and Delivery Options on page 570.

14 To send your message, press F12.

Sending Messages From the Command Line (SM)

To send a message from the command line to the Inbox of specified recipients, use the Send Messages
(SM) command.

NOTE:
When you type a command related to messaging, the system executes the command in the
Messaging Work Area instead of the current work area.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

SM.SJ.RE.CR.BC.I.PR.MG.SFC.DNT
To enter addresses that have a period in them, enclose the address in quotes, such as
“bob.jones@company.com”. To send a message to multiple external recipients on the command
line, enclose each recipient in quotes.

To send a message from the command line:

1 On the command line, type SM followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
SM.SJ;<subject>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

568 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

2 At the cursor, type a subject for the message followed by the period separator.

3 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

Separate multiple recipients with commas.

The I parameter associates a message or notification to an incident. This action causes the incident
number hyperlink to be displayed on the SM Message screen in the Inc # field and included as read-
only text in the message body. Including an incident number or active unit ID inserts the configured
incident fields into the message body.

The DNT parameter determines the type of destination for all IDs entered with the RE (to recipients),
CR (cc recipients), and BC (Bcc recipients) parameters.

4 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne sends the message to the recipients you specified, and a success message appears in
the message box.

Using the Address Book

The address book in PremierOne is the place where all the recipients for messaging are stored. Use the
Address Book to address a message to a person or group when you do not know their email address.

To use the Address Book:

1 From the Messaging form, select the To, Cc, or Bcc field label.

The Address Book appears in the Work Assist Area.

Figure 328: Messaging Showing Address Book In The Work Assist Area

Send Feedback 569

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

2 Do any of the following:

• To change the agency you want to search, select the new agency from the Agency list.

• To change the Address Book you want to search, select the new address book from the Book list.

• To filter the list of users, select the Type list, and then select Group, Internal User, Device, Unit,
or External Address. You can make multiple selections.

The icon of a person with a red line through it indicates an Offline user.

• To find a specific group, user, device, unit, or address, type the ID to the right of the Type list.

You can use wildcards in the search. For details on wildcards, see Using Wildcards in Searches
on page 68.

• To only display logged on users, select the Only Show Logged on Users check box at the
bottom of the window.

To return all users in the address book, leave the field blank.
NOTE
NOTE:
The list automatically filters when you make a selection.

3 Select the users you want to send the message to. Use Ctrl+Click to select multiple users.

4 Move the recipients to the To, Cc, or Bcc field by selecting the right-facing arrow next to the list of
users.

To remove a name from the To, Cc, or Bcc field, select the name and click the left-facing arrow next
to the field.

5 When you have all of selections make, click Close.

The selections display in the To field.

Setting Display and Delivery Options

Use Message Options to specify delivery and display options for your messages. You can request
delivery and read receipts, send a message on a recurring schedule, and control how a message is
displayed.

To set delivery and display options:

1 Access the Messaging window.

For more information, see Accessing Messaging on page 559.

2 When your message is ready to send, select Options at the bottom of the Primary Work Area.

570 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

The Message Options form appears in the Work Assist Area.

Figure 329: Message Options In Work Assist Area Expanded To Show All Options

3 Make your text format choices by selecting one or more of the following:

• Font – In the first list, select the font face. In the second list, select the font size.

• Style – Select the style of the text.

For bold, select the Bold button.

For italics, select the Italics button.

For underline, select the Underline button.

NOTE:
Your entire message is formatted in the style you select.

• Color – Select a font color.

NOTE:
Lighter colors may be difficult to read.

Send Feedback 571

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

4 Make your delivery choices by selecting one or more delivery options.

• Request a delivery receipt for this message – PremierOne sends you a notice indicating your
message arrived in the recipient mailbox. A delivery receipt does not mean the recipient viewed
or read your message, only that the message was delivered to the recipient Inbox or other
appropriate mail box.

• Request a read receipt for this message – PremierOne sends you a notice indicating the
recipient viewed or read your message when they open the message. The recipient cannot
override the ending of the read receipt.

• Request Delayed Delivery Notification – When sending a message to a portable radio or

mobile, you receive a delivery failure or delayed notification for a message that fails or is delayed.

• Send immediately – PremierOne sends your message right away.

• Send at recipient’s next login – PremierOne sends your message the next time your recipient
logs in.

• Recur at every login – PremierOne sends your message every time the recipient logs in.

• Schedule a message – PremierOne sends the message according to the schedule you define in
the Recur every fields.

- Indicate the frequency for sending the message by selecting a number in the first field and a
time period, such as minutes or hours, in the second field; for example: 4 Hours.

- Select the day or days of the week you want PremierOne to send your message; for example,
recur every 2 hours on Wednesday.

Your agency configures the values in the second field (time period, such as weeks) and the
options shown below the time fields (such as days of the week).

- Start at – The date when you want your schedule to start. This value is the date your first
message is delivered.

- Select when you want your schedule to end: No end date, End after <a specified number of>
occurrences, or End by <a specified date>.

• Expire after – The date and time when your delivery choices expire. The message is deleted
from user mailboxes and from the central mailbox on this date.

• Post-Expiration – Reserved for future development.

NOTE
NOTE:
Depending on how your agency has configured your system, if the original recipient is not
available, your message may automatically be sent to an alternate destination.

572 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

General Notification Messages

NOTE:
The procedures in this section are only for agencies using the DEH external system.

PremierOne allows users to send and receive general notification messages to and from participating
agencies on an external system in the same manner as any other message within PremierOne.

Therefore:

• When sending a general notification message from PremierOne to the other participating agencies,
the message is composed within the PremierOne messaging system. The PremierOne messaging
system transfers these types of messages to the CAD-to-CAD interface. The CAD-to-CAD interface
forwards the message to the external system.

• When receiving a general notification message from the external system, the CAD-to-CAD interface
transfers the message to the PremierOne messaging system so it can be delivered to the
appropriate recipients as a standard PremierOne message.

Figure 330: External Systems – Sending and Receiving General Notification Messages

See:
• Receiving General Notification Messages on page 573

• Sending General Notification Messages on page 575

Receiving General Notification Messages

When the CAD-to-CAD interface receives a general notification message, it converts the message to a
standard PremierOne message and transfers the message to the PremierOne messaging system.

Because a general notification message is not addressed to a specific person or group (it is a general
notification message), the CAD-to-CAD interface addresses the message based on your provisioned
Role.

Send Feedback 573

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

When you receive a message, the message counter for messages in the Information Panel on the CAD
client window increments (M = Messages).

To receive a general notification message:

1 Access the Messages window. From PremierOne CAD, on the command line, type SM. Press Enter.

2 In the Work Assist Area, select the Inbox tab if it is not already selected. Select the check box to the
left of the message you want to read.

You can select more than one message.

The message appears in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 331: PremierOne CAD Messages Screen

Notice these fields:

• Originator: All messages from the DEH have a value of

Notification@ExternalSystem.DEH.

“DEH” is an example of an external agency. The external agency name can be any provisioned
external agency.

• To: All messages from the DEH have a value of

<Agency ID>_<Role>_RoleGroup@DGroup.<Agency ID>;
for example, FD_Dispatcher_RoleGroup@DGroup.FD.

• Subject: All messages from the DEH have a value of

CAD-to-CAD message received from <Organization Name>;
for example, CAD-to-CAD Message received from Charlie Delta.

574 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Sending General Notification Messages

You send a general notification message the same way you send an email message with the exception
of the To field.

To send a general notification message:

1 Access the Messaging window. From PremierOne CAD, on the command line, type SM. Press Enter.

2 At the bottom of the Work Assist Area, select the arrow to the right of the Compose button.

A list of options appears.

3 Select Compose.

Figure 332: Compose a Message

4 In the To field, type Notification@ExternalSystem.DEH.

“DEH” is an example of an external agency. The external agency name can be any provisioned
external agency.

The term Notification is reserved to indicate that this is a general notification message.

The term ExternalSystem is reserved to indicate that this message is to be transferred to the CAD-
to-CAD interface which processes the message into the format the participating agencies can read.
NOTE
NOTE:
You can enter a value in the Subject field. However, the DEH ignores this information.

Send Feedback 575

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Working With Address Books

Use address books to find information about a person or group or to locate ready reference information.
Ready reference information is site-specific, agency-defined information, such as pager lists and
telephone number lists.

PremierOne automatically creates address books based on the information populated in Provisioning.
You cannot modify these entries.

You can access address books from the Messaging form or from the command line.

Accessing Address Books From the Messages Form

You can access the address books while you are working with Messages, Notifications, or BOLO.

You can only open a specific address book in one workspace.

To access address books from the Messages form:

1 Click the Address Book tab, or type AB on the command line, and then press Enter or F10.

The Address Book Search Criteria form appears in the Primary Work Area. The Public Address Book
tab is active in the Work Assist Area.

Figure 333: Address Book Search Criteria Form – Expanded To Show All Fields

2 To display the details for a user, select the user from the list in the Work Assist Area.

Details display in the Primary work area.

576 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

You can filter and search the list of users. For details, see Work Assist Area – Books Tab on
page 577 and Work Assist Area – Search Tab on page 579.

Work Assist Area – Books Tab

The Books tab displays a list of Public and Personal address books.

Figure 334: Address Books – Books Tab

To search an address book from the Books tab:

1 Select the Public or Personal tab.

2 Do any of the following:

• From the Agency list, select the agency you want to search.

• From the Book list, select the address book you want to search.

• From the Type list, select the address type or types you want to search.

Types include system created groups, user created groups, P1 users, units, devices (such as
radios, MDTs, Smart Client, and workstations), external users, and unroutable addresses (ready
reference information).

Send Feedback 577

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

By default, all of the types are selected.

NOTE:
Types are saved from your previous search. Ensure you select the types you want for this
search.

• From the Filter by list, type the information on which to filter. As you type, the results appear in
the box below the field.

3 To add one or more entries to a new book, select the entries and then select New.

4 To add one or more entries to a book, select the entries and then select Add to.

5 To send a message, send a page, or locate the person on the map, select the person, select
Contact, and then select the action.

6 To set options for a single address book, all address books, or the table select Settings and then
select the option.

7 To delete an entry, select the address book containing the entry you want to delete, select the entry,
and then select Del.

578 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Work Assist Area – Search Tab

The Search tab displays the results of searches you initiated from the Search Criteria form in the
Primary or Work Assist Area. You can initiate and filter your saved searches from here.

Figure 335: Address Books – Search Tab

When initiating a search from the Search tab, by default there are no results. Use the filters (Agency,
Book, Type, and Filter By) to obtain the results you are looking for.

To search address books from the Search tab:

1 From the Saved Search list, select one of your saved searches.

2 From the Agency list, select the agency in which to search.

3 From the Book list, select the address book from which to search.

4 From the Type list, select the Address book type.

PremierOne sets address book types. Types include system created groups, user created groups,
P1 users, units, devices (such as radios, MDTs, Smart Client, and workstations), external users, and
unroutable addresses (ready reference information).

Send Feedback 579

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

By default, the P1 User, Unit, Workstation, and External User types are selected.
NOTE
NOTE:
Types are saved from your previous search. Ensure you select the types you want for this
search.

5 From the Filter by list, choose the field on which to filter.

6 In the for field, type the value to filter for.

The results appear in the table below the Filter by field.

7 To use additional search criteria or to save a search, select the Search button.

Figure 336: Search Criteria Dialog Box

8 In the Search in box, select the agency and address books you want searched.

If you only want to search for logged on users, select the Logged On Only check box.

9 From the Search by group list, select the types of groups to search, Active, or Deleted And Expired.

The groups that match the criteria display in the box below the Search by group option.

10 Select the Find Common Results check box.

580 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

11 From the Where lists, select the following:

a The item you want searched for, such as phone numbers, mail, aliases, roles, pagers,
addresses, and skills. The options that display depend on the type of address book you are
search.

b The operator, such as equals or not equals.

c The value, such as the agency, the skill, or the contact keyword.

12 To enter additional search criteria, click the X icon and enter the values in the next row.

13 In the Workload Transfer Search Options, set any of the following values to Yes, if applicable:

• Users whose incidents were added via workload transfer.

• Users whose incidents were removed via workload transfer.

14 Enter the search criteria and click Search.

The results display in the Work Assist Area.

15 To save the search, select Save As and enter a name for the search. You can then select the Search
in the future in the Work Assist Area.

Accessing Address Books From the Command Line (AB)

You can access the address books from the command line, where you can enter the address book you
want to use and a significant number of search criteria before opening the form.

NOTE:
When you type a command related to messaging, the system executes the command in the
Messaging Work Area instead of the current work area.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

AB.BN.KW.UN.UD.AT.AD.AS.GT.NP
To access address books from the command line:

1 On the command line, type AB followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
AB.BN;<book name(s) or keyword(s)>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the name of the address book you want to search followed by the period
separator.

If you do not know the name of the address book, see Accessing Address Books From the
Messages Form on page 576.

3 Continue adding separators, identifiers, and values.

Send Feedback 581

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

4 Press Enter or F10.

The Address Book View Entry form appears with the General tab active and the criteria you identified
on the command line showing on the form.

For more information about using the form, see Accessing Address Books From the Messages Form
on page 576.

Editing Address Book Entries

When you select an address book entry from the Work Assist Area, the entry displays in the View Entry
tab. To edit the entry, select the Edit Entry tab.

To edit an address book entry:

1 Access the address book whose entry you want to edit.

For more information, see Accessing Address Books From the Messages Form on page 576.

2 In the Primary Work Area, select the Edit Entry tab.

The Identification form appears. Different tabs display for each different address type. Fields that are
shaded cannot be modified.

Figure 337: Edit Entry – General Tab

582 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

3 Edit any necessary fields on the General tab, and then select Save Entry.

4 Select the Addresses tab to view the address.

Figure 338: Edit Entry – Addresses Tab

5 Select the Status tab to view the Online and Location status of the selected entry.

6 Select the Notes tab to view any notes.

Figure 339: Edit Entry – Notes Tab

Send Feedback 583

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

7 Select the Groups tab to view information about the group memberships for the selected entry.

Figure 340: Edit Entry – View Entry Tab

8 Select the Attachments tab.

Figure 341: Edit Entry – Attachments Tab

9 Edit the Type of attachment, if necessary.

10 Press F12.

584 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Working with Address Book Entries

After you access an address book entry, there are many actions you can perform on the address book
entry. From the buttons at the bottom of the Primary Work Area and Work Assist Area, you can access
the following tasks:

• Adding Entries to an Existing Address Book or Group on page 585

• Adding Entries to a New Address Book on page 586

• Adding Entries to a New Group on page 587

• Sending Messages to Entries on page 587

• Sending Messages to Entries on page 587

• Showing Entries on a Map on page 588

• Creating Entries on page 588

• Creating Personal Address Books on page 591

• Cloning Address Books on page 592

• Configuring Address Book Settings on page 592

• Deleting Entries, Address Books, or Groups on page 594

Adding Entries to an Existing Address Book or Group

You can add entries to an address book or group from either the Primary Work Area or the Work Assist
Area.

NOTE:
You can only add external users to address books. Internal users are added and configured in
Provisioning.

To add entries to an existing address book or group:

1 Select the entries you want to add from the table in the Work Assist Area, or view the entry you want
to add in the Primary Work Area.

2 Select Add To at the bottom of either the Primary Work Area or the Work Assist Area, and then
select Book or Group.

The Add Entries to Existing Address Book or Existing Group dialog box appears.

Figure 342: Add Entries To Existing Address Book Dialog Box

Send Feedback 585

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

3 Select the address book or group to which you want to add your entries, and then select Add
Entries.

Adding Entries to a New Address Book

You can add one or more entries to a new address book from either the Primary Work Area or the Work
Assist Area.

To add entries to a new address book:

1 Select the entry or entries you want to add from the table in the Work Assist Area or view the entry
you want to add in the Primary Work Area.

2 Select Add To at the bottom of either the Primary Work Area or the Work Assist Area and then select
New Book.

The Address Book information appears in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 343: Address Book – New Book Information

3 Type or select the information for the fields, and then select Save.

For details, on the address book fields, see Creating Personal Address Books on page 591.

586 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Adding Entries to a New Group

You can add one or more entries to a group from either the Primary Work Area or the Work Assist Area.

To add an entry to a new group:

1 Select the entry or entries you want to add from the table in the Work Assist Area, or view the entry
you want to add in the Primary Work Area.

2 Select Add To at the bottom of either the Primary Work Area or the Work Assist Area, and then
select New Group.

The Group Settings form appears.

Figure 344: Group Settings Form

3 Enter information for the new group on the Settings, Permissions, and Notify Recipients tabs.

4 Select Create.

Sending Messages to Entries

You can send a message to one or more entries from either the Primary Work Area or the Work Assist
Area.

To send a message to an entries:

1 Select the entry or entries to whom you want to send a message from the table in the Work Assist
Area, or view the entry you want to add in the Primary Work Area.

2 Select Contact at the bottom of either the Primary Work Area or the Work Assist Area, and then
select Send Message.

The Messages tab appears. For more information about sending messages, see Creating Email
Messages on page 566.

Send Feedback 587

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Showing Entries on a Map

You can show the location of a user on a map.

To show an entry on the map:

1 Select the entry table in the Work Assist Area or view the entry you want to show in the Primary Work
Area.

2 Select Map It at the bottom of the Primary Work Area.

PremierOne plots the location on the map. The location displays at a scale provisioned by your
system administrator. If you selected a user, the user must be at a known location.

Creating Entries
From the New button in the Work Assist Area, you can do any of the following:

• Create an entry

• Copy an entry from an existing address book

• Create a new group entry

• Select an entry from a map

To create an entry:

1 From the Work Assist Area, select New, then select Entry, and then select Entry.

The Address Book Identification form appears with the General tab showing.

Figure 345: Edit Entry – General Tab

2 Complete the tabs as described in Editing Address Book Entries on page 582.

588 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

To copy an entry from a book:

1 In the Work Assist Area, use the Book field to select the address book into which you want to copy.

2 Select New, then select Entry, and then select Copy From Book.

The New Entry – Copy From Book form appears.

Figure 346: New Entry – Copy From Book

3 In the Find field, type the keyword, User ID, or other information you want to find. To return all
results, leave the field blank.

4 From the In Agency list, select the agency.

5 From the In Address Book list, select the address book from which you want to copy the
information.

6 Press F12.

The contacts from the criteria you entered appear in the Contacts box.
Example:
Assume you have a Rescue group to which you want to add to another address book. Select the
address book that contains the Rescue group; type Rescue in the Find field; fill in the agency and
address book information; and press F12. The contacts from your Rescue group appear in the
Contacts list. You can then select the contacts you want to copy or you can copy all of the contacts
from the Rescue group.

7 Select the contacts you want to copy and select Add.

8 When you have selected all your entries, select Add Entry.

Send Feedback 589

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

To create a group entry:

1 From the Work Assist Area, select New, then select Entry, and then select Group.

The Group Settings form appears.

Figure 347: Group Settings Form

2 Enter information for the new group on the Settings, Permissions, and Notify Recipients tabs.

3 Select Create.

To select an entry from a map:

From the Work Assist Area, select New, then select Entry, and then select Select From Map.

The Map appears where you can select the entry you want.

590 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Creating Personal Address Books

You can create an address book for your own use from the Work Assist Area.

To create a personal address book:

1 From the Work Assist Area, select New, and then select Book.

The New Book information form appears.

Figure 348: New Book Information Form

2 In the Address book name field, enter a name for the address book.

In the Keywords field, enter any words to you want to be associated with the address book. When
users include the keyword in a search, the address book is retrieved. Separate multiple keywords
with commas.

3 From the Update dynamic association information, select one of the following:

• To have any address book changes continually sent from the server, select the Enabled option.

• To disable dynamic updates, select the Disabled option.

4 From the Address book type field, select one of the following:

• To create an address book that only you have access to, select Private.

• To make the address book available to all personnel, select Shared.

5 In the Max Contact # field, type the maximum number of entries allowed in this address book.

6 In the Custom Fields section, enter a field name, default value, attribute type, and book section for
the field.

The field then displays in the custom list.

Send Feedback 591

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

7 In the Synchronization section, do the following:

• To use the settings for synchronization set in Provisioning, select the Global Settings check box.

• If you do not want to use Global Settings, select one of the following:

To synchronize the user address books with new address book information when the user selects
their own synchronize button, select the When prompted (using synchronize button).

To synchronize the user address books with new address book information when the user opens
their own address book, select the When user opens address book check box.

8 Click Save.

Editing Personal Address Books

You can edit an address book after creating it.

To edit a personal address book:

1 From the Work Assist Area, in the Book field, select the book you want to edit.

2 From the Settings menu in the Work Assist Area, select Book.

The address book properties display in the Main work area.

3 Make your modifications and click Save.

Cloning Address Books

You can clone an address book from the Work Assist Area.

To clone an address book:

1 From the Work Assist Area, in the Book field, select the book you want to clone.

2 Select New, and then select Clone.

The Clone Address Book form appears (see Figure 348).

3 Enter the information for your new address book and click Save.

Configuring Address Book Settings

From the Settings button in the Work Assist Area, you can configure any of the following: a single
address book, all address books, the table display, and import and export options.

To configure address book settings:

1 In the Work Assist Area, select the book you want to configure from the Book list.

2 Select Settings, and then select Book.

The Settings form appears (see Figure 348). The form is exactly like the New Book Information form
and the Clone form with the exception that the information for the book you selected appears in the
appropriate fields.

3 Make any necessary edits to the field values, and then select Save.

592 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

To configure all address books:

1 From the Work Assist Area, select Settings, and then select All Books.

The Settings – All Books form appears (see Figure 348).

2 Enter information that applies to all address books, and then select Save.

To configure the table display:

1 From the Work Assist Area, select Settings, and then select Table Display.

The Settings – Table Display form appears.

Figure 349: Settings – Table Display Form

2 From the column on the left, select the fields you want to display in the tables in the Work Assist
Area, and then select Add.

3 From the column on the right, change the order of the columns by selecting a field name, and then
clicking Move up or Move down.

4 In the Sort Order section, choose how you want the fields in your tables sorted.

5 Select Save.

Send Feedback 593

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

To configure import and export:

1 In the Work Assist Area, select the book you want to import or export from the Book field.

2 Select Settings, and then select Import/Export.

The Import/Export Address Book dialog box appears.

Figure 350: Import/Export Dialog Box

a From the Action list, select Import or Export.

b In the Path field, type or browse to the path.

If you are importing, enter the location where the file you are importing is located.

If you are exporting, enter the location where you want your exported file to be stored. Your exported
file is saved in .xml format.

3 Select OK.

PremierOne imports or exports your file as directed.

Deleting Entries, Address Books, or Groups

You can delete entries, a public address book, or a group from the Work Assist Area.

To delete an entry, address book, or group:

1 From the Work Assist Area, select the address book containing the entry you want to delete, and
then select the entry.

2 Do one of the following:

• Select Del, and then select Entry.

• Select Del, and then select Group.

• Select Del, and then select Book.

The Delete Entry dialog box appears, showing the address book and the entry you selected.

3 If everything is correct, select Delete entries.

594 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Working With BOLO Messages

Be On the Lookout (BOLO) messages are high-priority messages, such as a missing or wanted person
or a missing vehicle. BOLO messages are sometimes called Broadcast messages because they are
sent, or broadcast, to groups and radio talkgroups. BOLO messages are sent only to users who are
logged in; however, your agency may be configured to hold BOLO messages for you until you log in.

Reading BOLO Messages

When you receive a BOLO message, the message counter for BOLO messages increments (B =
BOLO), and a window may appear with the message, depending on how your system is configured. For
details on the message counter, see Description of the Information Panel on page 56.

NOTE:
Depending on your system configuration, a popup notification may appear when you receive a
high-priority message. If you click the popup to view the message, the Message tab opens in
place of your current work area. To prevent loss of data, you are prompted to confirm that you
want to open the high-priority message.

You can retrieve and read BOLO messages in two ways:

• Reading BOLO Messages on page 595

• Opening Messaging From a Specific Folder on page 562

Reading BOLO Messages From the Messaging Form

You can retrieve and read BOLO messages from Messaging or from the command line. For more
information, see Opening Messaging From a Specific Folder on page 562.

To read BOLO messages from the Messaging form:

1 If your system is configured to do so, a small window appears on your screen when a BOLO
message arrives.

Figure 351: BOLO Message Window

2 Click the collapse button to close the window, or click the down arrow to view the message.

3 If the message does not appear on your screen, access Messaging.

For more information, see Accessing Messaging on page 559.

Send Feedback 595

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

4 In the Work Assist Area, select the Inbox tab if the tab is not selected, and click in the small box to
the left of the message you want to read.
NOTE
NOTE:
You can select more than one BOLO message.

5 At the bottom of the Work Assist Area, select View.

The message appears in the Primary Work Area.

Read BOLO Messages From the Command Line (BR)

To retrieve BOLO messages, use the BOLO Read command. Use the BOLO Read command with
identifiers to retrieve specific BOLO messages, or you can use this command without any identifiers to
view the BOLO Retrieve Messages form.

NOTE:
When you type a command related to messaging, the system executes the command in the
Messaging Work Area instead of the current work area.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

BR.SJ.CNT
BR.SJ.CNT is the BOLO read command.

SJ is the subject line of the BOLO you want to retrieve. CNT is the identifier for a piece of information you
know the BOLO contains. CNT is used to help you narrow the search.

To read BOLO messages from the command line:

1 On the command line, type BR followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
BR.SJ;<subject>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type a value for the subject of an existing BOLO on the command line.

3 If you want to enter a phrase in the BOLO, type the period separator and then type the word or
phrase that you know is contained in the BOLO.

4 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne retrieves the BOLO message you specified and displays the message in the Primary
Work Area. If more than one BOLO has the subject you specified and, if provided, the BOLOs
contain the same word or phrase, a list of matching BOLO messages appears in the Work Assist
Area.

596 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Sending BOLO Messages

Create and send a BOLO message when you need others to be aware of a situation quickly.

To send a BOLO message:

1 Access the Messaging window.

For more information, see Accessing Messaging on page 559.

2 Select the BOLO tab.

Figure 352: BOLO Form

Send Feedback 597

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

3 To fill out the To field, do one of the following:

• Type the email address of each recipient. Separate each recipient with a semicolon.

• Select the To label to open the Address Book

Figure 353: Address Book In BOLO – Accessed From The To Field

4 Select the appropriate address books for the users you want to send the BOLO to.

5 Select Unit, User, Device, or Group for lists of names in those categories.

Select the Update Data button at the bottom of the Address Book to refresh the data in the selected
list.

6 Use the arrow buttons to move the users to whom you want to send the BOLO to the Contacts panel.

For details on using the address book, see Using the Address Book on page 569.

7 Select Close at the bottom of the Address Book to return to the Notifications form. PremierOne
places your recipients in the To field.

8 From the Status list, select the status of the BOLO, such as Active or Scheduled.

9 In the Subject field, type the subject of the BOLO message.

Make the subject descriptive but succinct so others can understand what this BOLO is about by
simply reading the subject.

10 From the Priority list, select the priority for the BOLO message.

11 In the Expires field, indicate when the BOLO expires.

598 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

12 If this BOLO is scheduled BOLO (Status field = Scheduled), indicate the starting time, the interval,
and the number of retries.

PremierOne attempts to send your BOLO message at your starting time, and continues to try at the
specified time intervals.

13 On the General tab, type any information, other than information about the Subjects and Vehicles, to
add details about your BOLO message.

14 On the Subject tab, add information about the subject or subjects.

15 To submit your BOLO message, press F12.

PremierOne sends your BOLO message to your specified recipients.

Updating BOLO Messages

After you receive or send a BOLO message, you can update the message.

To update a BOLO message:

1 Open the BOLO message you want to update. For more information, see Reading BOLO Messages
on page 595.

2 In the Work Assist Area, select the tab where the message you want to update is located.

3 Select the BOLO message you want to update.

4 At the bottom of the Work Assist Area, select Update.

PremierOne opens the BOLO message in the Primary Work Area.

5 Make the updates, and then press F12.

PremierOne updates the BOLO message.

Closing BOLO Messages

After you have created or received a BOLO message, you can close the message.

To close a BOLO message:

1 Access the Messaging window.

For more information, see Accessing Messaging on page 559.

2 Select the BOLO tab.

3 In the Work Assist Area, select the tab where the message you want to close is located.

4 Select the BOLO message you want to close by clicking the box to the left of the message.

5 At the bottom of the Work Assist Area, select Close.

Send Feedback 599

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

The Send Email Notification form appears in the Work Assist Area.

Figure 354: Send Email Notification Form In The Work Assist Area

6 In the Comments field, type any comments about the BOLO message you are closing.

7 Search for the person or group you want to notify.

For details on using address books, see Using the Address Book on page 569.

8 Select Send at the bottom of the Send Email Notification form.

PremierOne closes the window and sends your message to the selected recipients.

Working With Notification Messages

PremierOne can send a predefined or user-created notification message to a list of personnel and
groups that must be notified as part of an incident response. If provisioned to do so, PremierOne can
also send text messages to mobile phones and PDAs and messages to external email accounts.
Examples:
• A plane crashes. PremierOne automatically sends the predefined notification message to all users
monitoring the incident jurisdictional area when the incident is initiated. The message contains
information regarding procedures for plane crashes.

• A bank gets robbed. The calltaker or dispatcher creates a notification message that is associated
with the incident. The message indicates that the gunman threatened the customers and a teller.
Information about the subject and the subject vehicle are also included in the message. The calltaker
or dispatcher then sends the message to the appropriate users or groups.

600 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Your system administrator creates the predefined message and determines when and to whom they are
sent.

Reading Notification Messages

When you receive a Notification message, the message counter for Notification messages increments
(N = Notification). For details on the message counter, see Description of the Information Panel on
page 56.

Reading Notification Messages from the Messaging Form

You can read notification messages from the Messaging form or from the command line. For more
information about the command line, see Reading Notification Messages From the Command Line (NR)
on page 602.

To read a notification message from the Messaging form:

1 Access Messaging.

For details, see Accessing Messaging on page 559.

2 Select the Notifications tab.

3 In the Work Assist Area, select the folder where the message you want to read is located: Received
or Sent.

The folder contains a list of messages, showing the subject of the message, the status, and the date
and time the message. Click the plus symbol to see additional details.

Figure 355: Notifications – Work Assist Area, Received Folder

Send Feedback 601

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

4 In the Work Assist Area, select the message you want to read in the Received or Sent folder.

The message appears in the Primary Work area. The incident number is a link that you can click to
display complete incident summary information.

Click the Subject, Vehicle, and/or Contacts tabs for more information if available. (Subject and
Vehicle information is not available for system-generated messages).

To contact someone, select the Contact tab. Click the name of the contact to display contact
information. Select the status of the contact: No Attempt to Contact made, Attempt to contact in
progress, Failed to notify, and Notified, and submit the form. Your User ID displays in the Contacted
by field.

Figure 356: Notifications – Primary Work Area, Incident Number Link

Reading Notification Messages From the Command Line (NR)

.You can read notification messages from the Messaging form or from the command line. For more
information about the from, see Reading Notification Messages from the Messaging Form on page 601.

To read a notification message from the command line:

1 Type NR on the command line followed by the period separator.

The following hint appears on the command line:

NR.NF;<notification folder {received|sent}

602 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

2 At the cursor, type the letter of the folder where the message you want to read is located: r for
received or s for sent, followed by the period separator.

The following hint appears on the command line:

NR.NF;ALL.F;<filter {OPEN|closed|all}>
3 At the cursor, type the letter of the filter you want to use: o for open, c for closed, or a for all, and
press Enter or F10.

PremierOne opens Messaging at the Notifications tab. The folder contains a list of Notification
messages, showing the subject of the message, the status, and the date and time the message was
sent. When you click the plus symbol, you can also see the originator of the message, the incident
number, and the incident type.

Work Assist Area – Received and Sent Tabs

The Received tab in the Notifications Work Assist Area contains a list of the notification messages that
you have received. The Sent tab contains a list of notification messages that you have sent.

Do any of the following:

• To sort the messages, click the appropriate column header.

• To see additional information about a message, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of the record.

• To see additional information about all of the records in the list, select the plus sign ( + ) to the left of
Subject at the top of the column for that list.

• To search for a notification message, select the Search button and enter the search criteria in the
Primary Work Area.

• To create a message, select the New button.

• To delete a message, select the message and then select Delete.

Sending Notification Messages

You can create and send notification messages in two ways, from the Messaging form and from the
command line.

Sending Notification Messages From the Messaging Form

You can create and send user-defined notification messages from the Messaging form.

To send a notification from the Messaging form:

1 Access the Messaging window.

For more information, see Accessing Messaging on page 559.

2 Select the Notifications tab.

A blank Notifications form appears in the Primary Work Area.

Send Feedback 603

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

3 At the bottom of the Work Assist Area, select New.

The Notifications form appears in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 357: Notifications Form In The Primary Work Area And New Button In The Work Assist Area

4 To fill out the To field, do one of the following:

• Type the email address of each recipient. Separate each recipient with a semicolon.

• Click the To label to open the Address Book in the Work Assist Area and search for the
recipients. When finished, select Close at the bottom of the Address Book to return to the
Notifications form.

For details on using the address book, see Using the Address Book on page 569.

5 From the Status list, select the status of the notification message.

6 In the Include users fields, select the box or boxes to indicate which users you want to receive your
message.

7 In the Incident # field, type the incident number of the incident to which this notification applies. Use
the format Agency/IncNumber.

If the agency is configured to use # for incident numbers, then # must be used (in addition to any
required fields) for the notification to be sent successfully. The same is true for a unit ID active on the
incident. If a # sign is required to use the unit ID, then # must precede the Unit ID.

This field acts just like the command line with regard to the incident number or unit ID.

PremierOne fills in the Incident Type, the Agency Type, the Alarm Level, and the Modifying
Circumstances fields based on your incident number.

604 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

8 Enter information on the General tab.

The information you type in the Subject field shows as the subject of the notification message. Try to
make the information descriptive and short.

The information you type in the Comments field is additional information about the incident that is
not related to the subjects, vehicles, or contacts.

9 Enter information on the Subject tab.

To enter height, use three digits with a zero separating the feet from the inches; do not use the zero
for 10 inches and 11 inches. For example, 5’7” would be 507, 6’2” would be 602, and 5’1” inches
would be 511.

Figure 358: Notifications Form – Subject Tab

10 Select Add Vehicle.

Send Feedback 605

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

11 Enter information on the Vehicle tab.

Figure 359: Notifications Form – Vehicle Tab

12 Select Add Contacts.

606 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

13 Enter information on the Contacts tab.

Figure 360: Notifications Form – Contacts Tab

You can use the address book to add contacts. Click Address Book at the bottom of the Primary
Work Area.

Send Feedback 607

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

The Address Book appears.

Figure 361: Notifications Form – Contacts Tab And Address Book

NOTE:
When you have a contact in the list, you can right-click the link in the Contact column to open a
list of available phone numbers.

Sending Notification Messages From the Command Line (NT)

You can send a notification message from the command line using the NT command. For more
information, see Sending Notification Messages From the Messaging Form on page 603.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

NT.SJ.RE.I.NS.CM
To send a notification message from the command line:

1 On the command line, type NT followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
NT.SJ;<subject>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the subject of your notification, followed by the period separator.

This value is the text that shows on your Received or Sent tabs.

608 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Including an incident number or active unit ID inserts configured incident fields into the Message
body.

3 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values as needed.

4 Press Enter or F10.

PremierOne opens the Notification form with all of the information you specified. You can then add
Subject, Vehicle, and Contact information. (At least one contact is required.)

Sending Predefined Notification Messages

Your system can be set up to automatically send notification messages based on the Incident Response
Factors for specific incident types. (See your system administrator to confirm which incident types at
your site are set up to send notification messages, if any). When the incident is created, notification
messages are automatically sent to the pre-defined recipients.

For example, a hostage situation may be set up to automatically notify the Tactical Response Group of
the incident.

Forwarding Notification Messages

After you receive a notification message, you can forward the message to another person or group.

To forward a notification message:

1 View the message you want to forward.

For more information, see Reading Notification Messages on page 601.

2 From the Work Assist Area, select the tab where the message you want to forward is located:
Received or Sent.

3 Choose the message by selecting the box at the far left of the row in which the message is located.

4 At the bottom of the Work Assist Area, select View.

The Notification message opens in the Primary Work Area.

5 Select Update at the bottom of the Primary Work Area.

The To field becomes blank. You can now enter new recipients in the To field or use the Address
Book. For more information, see Sending Notification Messages From the Messaging Form on
page 603.

Updating Notification Messages

After you receive or send a notification message, you can update the message.

To update a notification message:

1 Open the notification message you want to update.

For more information, see Reading Notification Messages on page 601.

2 In the Primary Work Area, select the tab you want to update: General, Subject, Vehicle, or Contacts.

Send Feedback 609

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

3 Select Update at the bottom of the tab.

• General tab – You cannot change previous comments, but you can add comments. Your new
comments appear above the original comments.

• Contacts tab – A new row is added to the contacts table. You can delete existing rows by clicking
the delete icon X at the far right of each row.

Searching Notification Messages

You can search for specific text in messages you have already received.

To search notification messages:

1 Access the Messaging window.

For more information, see Accessing Messaging on page 559.

2 Select the Notifications tab.

3 Select one of the tabs in the Work Assist Area: Received or Sent.

4 At the bottom of the Work Assist Area, select Search.

The Search form opens in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 362: Notifications Search Form

5 From the Status list select the status you want to search for: Open or Closed.

6 Select the dates, times, and incident response factor information. If you do not know the incident #,
you can leave the field blank.

The Time Range field has a choice of Inclusive or Exclusive. Select Inclusive to include the To and
From dates you selected. Select Exclusive to exclude those dates.

610 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

7 Select Search.

PremierOne performs the search and displays the results in the Results table in the Search form.

8 To view any of the results, select the result you want to view by selecting the box to the left of the row
and then clicking View at the bottom of the Search form.

To sort the results, click the header columns.

Deleting Notification Messages

You can delete a notification message after you receive the message.

To delete a notification message:

1 Access the Messaging window.

For more information, see Accessing Messaging on page 559.

2 Select the Notifications tab.

3 In the Work Assist Area, select the tab that contains the message you want to delete: Received or
Sent.

4 Select the message you want to delete, and then select Delete at the bottom of the Work Assist
Area.

PremierOne deletes the notification message you selected.

Send Feedback 611

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Managing Messages
You have several options for managing the messages you receive. Your system administrator sets up
some of these functions before you use PremierOne. These include send and receive options, and
others. Your system administrator can provide you with information on how your messaging works with
regard to these settings.

Managing Message Settings

Message settings include whether messages are held, whether to enable away mode, whether to
include original messages in replies, how lists are sorted, and whether messages are deleted when you
log off.

To manage message settings:

1 From the Console menu, select Settings and then select Messaging.

The Message Settings dialog box appears.

Figure 363: Message Settings Dialog Box

2 In the Hold Settings section, select whether to hold messages.

If you are not going to log on for some time period and want your messages held on the server, you
might want to use this field. Held messages are not delivered to your mailbox.

3 In the Away Mode section, select whether to turn off or turn on the away mode. If you are turning on
the away mode, type the message you want other people to receive while you are away and indicate
whether to send the message only the first time a person sends you a message or every time.

4 In the Reply Settings section, select whether to include the original message with the reply.

612 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

5 In the Sorting Lists Default section, select how you want your lists sorted.

6 In the Purge Messages on Log Off section, select whether you want messages deleted from your
Inbox, Sent, and Trash folders.

Printing Email Messages

You can print your email messages.

To print an email message:

1 Access the Messaging window.

For more information, see Accessing Messaging on page 559.

2 Select the message or messages you want to print.

3 From the Tools button at the bottom of the Work Assist Area, select Print.

A message box appears asking if you are sure you want to print the message.

• Select Message Details to print the entire message. Detail includes the message body, who the
message was from, who the message was to, who was copied on the message, the priority of the
message, the subject of the message, and a list of any attachments.

• Select Print Message List to print a summary of the message. You can either print all the list
items or selected list items.

When the Print dialog box appears, select your printer and then select Print.

PremierOne prints your message or messages. If you selected multiple messages, they appear one
after another on a single sheet of paper (or as many sheets of paper as required).

Deleting Messages
When you delete a message, the message is moved to the Trash tab. The message is not permanently
deleted and can be restored, if necessary.

To delete a message

1 If the message you want to delete is in the Primary Work Area, select Delete at the bottom of the
Primary Work Area.

2 If the message you want to delete is on one of the message tabs in the Work Assist Area, locate the
message and choose message by selecting the box at the far left of the message.

3 Select Delete at the bottom of the Work Assist Area.

Send Feedback 613

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Searching Messages for Text

You can search your messages for a word or phrase. You can refine your search by selecting additional
information to look for or to exclude. The more information you select, the more refined your search
becomes.

To search messages for text:

1 Access the Messaging window.

For more information, see Accessing Messaging on page 559.

2 From the Tools button at the bottom of the Work Assist Area, select Search Messages.

The Search form appears in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 364: Messaging Showing The Search Form In The Primary Work Area

3 In the Search In field, do one of the following:

• To search the messages from all of the message tabs, select Select All.

• Select the message tab you want to search, such as the messages in the Inbox.

4 In the From Date field, select the earliest date for your search from the calendar icon.

5 In the To Date field, from the calendar icon, select the latest date for your search.

6 From the Time Range list, select one of the following:

• Inclusive – Includes the start and end days and everything in between.

• Exclusive – Excludes the start and end days but searches everything in between.

614 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

7 To include attachments in your search, select the Include Attachments field.

8 In the Look for: field, type the word or phrase you want to find. Type the word or phrase exactly the
way the word or phrase appears in the message.

9 In the fields below the Look for: field, you can narrow your search by specifying a value.

a In the first field, select either AND or Or. AND searches for the word or phrase in the Look for:
field and what you enter in the rest of this row. Or searches for the word or phrase in the Look
for: field or what you enter in the rest of this row.

b In the next field select the category you want to filter by: Subject, FromAddress, ToAddress,
Cc, Bcc, or ReplyTo.

c In the third field, select either equal or not equal.

d In the final field in the row, type the value.

Example:
To look for all messages that contain the word “server” and a Workstation ID that equals Admin1, do
the following:

1) In the Look for: field, type server.

2) In the first field of the next row, select And.

3) In the second field, select workstation ID.

4) In the third field, select =.

5) In the final field of the row, type Admin1.

All messages sent from the Admin1 Workstation ID that have the word “server” in the subject or
body appear in the Results list.

10 Select Search.

The results of your search appear in the Results table. To sort the results, click the header of the
column you want to search by.

11 To view a message in the Results list, do one of the following:

• Click the expand button next to the message to see a preview of the message or all of a short
message. Click Close at the bottom of the Primary Work Area when you are finished with your
search.

• Select the message and then select View at the bottom of the Primary Work Area.

Send Feedback 615

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Searching BOLOS for Text

You can search BOLO messages for a word or phrase and text and subject information. You can refine
your search by selecting additional information to look for or to exclude. You can also search for records
with ranges in age, height, and weight. The more information you select, the more refined your search
becomes. Searching occurs across all agencies.

To search BOLOS for text:

1 Access the Messaging window.

For more information, see Accessing Messaging on page 559.

2 Click the BOLO tab.

3 From the Tools menu at the bottom of the Work Assist Area, select Search.

The Search window appears in the Primary Work Area. The search criteria from the previous search
displays.

Figure 365: Search BOLOs Window

4 To search for free text, enter the text in the Look For field.

This text box performs an OR search for BOLOs that have matching values in their Subject or
Comments fields.

5 To only search active BOLOs, select the Active only check box.

6 To search for other values, do the following:

a From the first list box, select And or Or.

AND searches for the word or phrase in the Look for: field and what you enter in the rest of this
row. Or searches for the word or phrase in the Look for: field or what you enter in the rest of this
row.

616 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

b From the second list box, select the field you want to search on.

c From the third list box, select the operator, such as equals or greater than.

d In the last field, enter the value.

What displays for standard values such as vehicle make and model depend on what is
provisioned for your system

e For multiple criteria, continue selecting values in the following rows, selecting AND or Or for each
row or criteria.

The following table lists the BOLO fields you can search and the allowed operators.
Table 50: BOLO Search Fields

BOLO Field Operators Allowed Notes

Sent To Contains, Not Contains

Subject Contains

Current Status Equals, Not Equals Active, Expired, Closed

Comments Contains This value is a text string match and not a “full text indexed
search”

Priority Equals High, Medium, Low

Attachment Contains Attachments are searched for matching Text Strings.

Subject First Begins With, Sounds

Name Like

Subject Middle Begins With, Sounds

Name Like

Subject Last Begins With, Sounds

Name Like

Subject Height Equals, Greater Than, To enter height, use three digits with a zero separating the
Less Than feet from the inches; do not use the zero for 10 inches and
11 inches. For example, 5’7” would be 507, 6’2” would be
602, and 5’1” inches would be 511.

Subject Weight Equals, Greater Than,

Less Than

Subject Build Equals

Subject Age Equals, Greater Than,

Less Than

Subject DOB Equals, Greater Than,

Less Than

Subject Eye Color Equals

Subject Hair Color Equals

Subject Race Equals

Subject Gender Equals

Send Feedback 617

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Table 50: BOLO Search Fields (Cont.)

BOLO Field Operators Allowed Notes

Vehicle License Contains, Equals Allows ‘wild card’ replacement characters. For example,
Plate Search for A*C123 would match ABC123, ADC123,
A4C123.

Vehicle License Equals

Type

Vehicle License Equals

State

Vehicle Color Equals

Vehicle Year Equals, Greater Than,

Less Than

Vehicle Make Equals

Vehicle Model Equals

Vehicle Style Equals

7 To search for BOLOs during a specific date and time, select the Date check box, and then select the
Date and Times.

8 Select Search.

The results of your search appear in the Work Assist Area on the Search Results tab. To sort the
results, click the header of the column you want to search by.

9 To view a message in the Results list, do one of the following:

• Select the message and then select View at the bottom of the Primary Work Area.

• Click the expand button next to the message to see a preview of the message or all of a short
message.

Managing Labels for Messages

Another way to help organize your messages is to use personal labels. When you read a message and
select one of your labels, the label is attached to the mail message. You can attach labels to related
emails so that you can easily identify them.

Creating Labels for Messages

You must first create labels before you can attach them to messages.

To create a label for messages:

1 Access the Messaging window.

For more information, see Accessing Messaging on page 559.

2 Select Tools at the bottom of the Work Assist Area, and then select Manage Labels.

618 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

The Manage Labels information appears in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 366: Messaging Showing Manage Labels Information

3 In the Create new label field, type a name for your personal label.

4 Select Create.

The new label appears in the list of labels and is now available for use. For more information, see
Using Labels for Messages on page 619.

5 Select Save.

Using Labels for Messages

Use personal labels to help you organize your messages. Create labels first so you can assign them to
a message. For instructions, see Creating Labels for Messages on page 618.

NOTE:
Labels are personal and are not sent when messages are forwarded.

To use labels for messages:

1 Access the Messaging window.

For more information, see Accessing Messaging on page 559.

2 From any of the Message folders, select a message you want to label, and then select View.

The message appears in the Primary Work Area.

Send Feedback 619

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

3 From the Label list, select a label to apply to the message.

Figure 367: Message Showing A Personal Label

4 Save the label and message by pressing F12.

Now, anytime you view that message, the Label field shows the label you applied.

Managing Messaging Folders

You can organize your messages by creating message folders to contain similar messages. You can
rename or delete your message folders, restore deleted folders, and purge folders.

Creating Message Folders

Message folders help you organize the messages you receive. Emails you receive can be moved to and
stored in message folders. You can create folders for messages from the sergeant, Terror Alerts, and so
on.

You can rename and delete message folders by clicking the associated button to the right of the folder
list.

To create a message folder:

1 Access the Messaging window.

For more information, see Accessing Messaging on page 559.

2 From any of the tabs in the Work Assist Area (Inbox, Outbox, Sent Items, Drafts, and Trash), select
Tools at the bottom of the Work Assist Area, and then select Manage Folders.

620 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

The Manage Folders information appears in the Primary Work Area.

Figure 368: Messaging Showing The Manage Folders Information

3 In the Folder Name field, type the name of your new folder.

4 Select Create.

5 Select Save.

The new folder appears in the Folders list in the Primary Work Area and on the Folder tab in the
Work Assist Area.

Using Message Folders

Use message folders to organize your messages. For example, you could place all your messages from
the sergeant in a “From Sergeant” folder. Before you begin, create the folder you want to use. For more
information, see Creating Message Folders on page 620.

You can rename and delete folders using the buttons to the right of the folder list. The folder that you
deleted appears on the Trash tab. Deleted folders are moved to the Trash folder. You can permanently
delete a message from the Trash folder by selecting the message and clicking Purge. For more
information, see Purging Messages and Personal Folders on page 622.

To use message folders:

1 Access the Messaging window.

For more information, see Accessing Messaging on page 559.

2 Select the message from one of the tabs in the Work Assist Area.

3 From the Move to list at the bottom of the Work Assist Area, select the folder where you want to
store the message.

Send Feedback 621

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

4 Select Move.

Your message appears below the new folder on the Folders tab.

Restoring Deleted Messages and Personal Folders

If you deleted a message or a personal folder but have not purged the message from the Trash tab, you
can restore the message to the Inbox or the personal folder to the Folder tab.

To restore deleted messages and personal folders:

1 From the Trash tab in the Work Assist Area, select the messages and personal folders you want to
restore by selecting the check box to the left of the line.

2 At the bottom of the Work Assist Area, select Restore.

Restored messages return to the Inbox. Restored personal folders return to the Folder tab.

Purging Messages and Personal Folders

Purging a message or a folder deletes the message or folder permanently. After a message or folder has
been deleted, it cannot be restored.

Before you can purge messages or folders, delete them so they appear on your Trash tab. For more
information, see Deleting Messages on page 613.

To purge messages or personal folders:

1 From the Trash tab in the Work Assist Area, select the messages and personal folders you want to
purge by selecting the check box to the left of the line.

2 Select Purge.

The messages or folders are now permanently deleted.

Accessing Ready Reference Information

Ready reference information is site-specific, agency-defined information, such as pager lists, telephone
number lists, agency contacts, and skill sets. You can access ready reference information from the form
and from the command line.

NOTE:
Address Books and Ready Reference information do not display on multiple work area tabs. You
can only work with Address Books or Ready Reference information.

622 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Accessing Ready Reference Information From the Ready Reference

Form
To search for ready reference information, you can use the Ready Reference form. For details on
searching for Ready Reference information from the command line, see Accessing Ready Reference
Information From the Command Line (RR) on page 624.

To access ready reference information from the Ready Reference form:

1 On the command line, type RR and then press Enter or F10.

The Search Criteria form appears in the Primary Work Area. The Address Book tab is selected.

Figure 369: Search Criteria For Ready Reference

2 In the Search in box in the Primary Work Area, select the agency and address books you want
searched.

If you only want to search for logged on users, select the Logged On Only check box.

3 From the Search by group list, select the types of groups to search, Active, or Deleted And Expired.

The groups that match the criteria display in the box below the Search by group option.

4 Select the Find Common Results check box.

Send Feedback 623

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

5 From the Where lists, select the following:

a The item you want searched for, such as phone numbers, mail, aliases, roles, pagers,
addresses, and skills. The options that display depend on the type of address book you are
search.

b The operator, such as equals or not equals.

c The value, such as the agency, the skill, or the contact keyword.

6 To enter additional search criteria, enter the values in the next row.

7 In the Workload Transfer Search Options, set any of the following values to Yes, if applicable:

• Users whose areas were changed since login or workload transfer.

• Users whose incidents were added via workload transfer.

• Users whose incidents were removed via workload transfer.

8 To save your search, select Save As, and then give the search a unique name.

9 Select Search.

The results of your search appear on the Search tab in the Work Assist Area.

Accessing Ready Reference Information From the Command Line

(RR)
To search for ready reference information, you can use the Ready Reference command. For details on
searching for Ready Reference information from the command line, see Accessing Ready Reference
Information From the Ready Reference Form on page 623.

For descriptions of identifiers, see Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers.

Command identifiers default order:

RR.BN.KW.GT.NP
To access ready reference information from the command line:

1 On the command line, type RR followed by the period separator.

If command line hints are enabled, the following hint appears on the command line:
RR.BN;<book name(s) or keyword(s)>
For details on using command line hints, see Using Command Line Hints on page 78.

2 At the cursor, type the value for the address book name or keyword, followed by another period
separator.

3 Continue with additional separators, identifiers, and values to filter your lists.

4 Press Enter or F10.

The results display on the Search tab. The Search Criteria form appears in the Primary Work Area
where you can enter additional search criteria. For details, see the steps in Accessing Ready
Reference Information From the Ready Reference Form on page 623.

624 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

Searching for Personnel Skills

To search for personnel skills, use the Ready Reference form. In the Where fields of the search form,
select Skill and then the other operators. For details on searching for Ready Reference information, see
Accessing Ready Reference Information From the Ready Reference Form on page 623.

Send Feedback 625

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 22: Using Messaging

626 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Recovering From an Extended Offline Period

Chapter 23

Recovering From an Extended Offline

Period 23

Use the Incident Update tool when you have been offline and want to enter incident data into
PremierOne to record what happened while you were offline.

Accessing the Incident Update Tool (IT)

Access the Incident Update Tool (IT) command when you are in offline mode or when you return to
online status.

To access the Incident Update Tool command:

1 On the command line, type IT and press Enter or F10.

A blank Incident Update Tools form appears.

Figure 370: Working Offline

Send Feedback 627

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 23: Recovering From an Extended Offline Period

2 To minimize the spreadsheet area, click the Down arrow just above the Location field. Click the Up
arrow to maximize the spreadsheet.

3 To increase or decrease the size of the spreadsheet, place your mouse over the line separating the
spreadsheet area from the Primary Work Area until the cursor becomes a double-headed arrow .
Then drag the line up or down as needed.

Creating Incidents in Offline Mode

To create incidents in offline mode, you first perform setup where you select the number of incidents and
report numbers to create. Then you enter the incident information for each incident.

To create incidents in offline mode:

1 Access the Incident Update Tool.

For more information, see Accessing the Incident Update Tool (IT) on page 627.

2 Select Setup.

The Incident Tool Setup dialog box appears with a blank row.

Figure 371: Incident Tool Setup Showing Fields

3 From the Agency list, select your Agency ID or the ID of the agency for which you want to create
incidents.

4 In the Incidents field, type the number of incidents to create.

5 In the Reports field, type number of reports you want to create for each incident.

6 Click OK.

628 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 23: Recovering From an Extended Offline Period

The Incident Initiation /Incident Update form appears in the Primary Work Area for the first incident,
and the Incident Dispatch/Incident Close form appears in the Work Assist Area.

Figure 372: Incident Initiation Fields

7 Enter the incident initiation information.

Use the mm/dd/yyyy format for the Entry date and Closed date fields.

Use your agency time format for the Entry time and Closed time fields.

Enter the location, incident type, caller name, and area, sector, and beat for the incident.

8 Scroll down to add Caller, Person, Vehicle, and User information.

Send Feedback 629

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 23: Recovering From an Extended Offline Period

Use the arrow buttons to expand or collapse the Person and Vehicle sections.

Figure 373: Caller, Person, Vehicle, and User Information Fields

9 To save the incident without dispatching it, select Save.

PremierOne saves the incident to a place you designate on your computer or network.

10 To dispatch the incident, continue with Dispatching Incidents in Offline Mode on page 631.

630 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 23: Recovering From an Extended Offline Period

Dispatching Incidents in Offline Mode

If you dispatched an incident while you were offline, dispatch it in the Incident Update tool so
PremierOne has a record of the incident.

To dispatch an incident in offline mode:

1 Create the incident. For more information on creating incidents for recovery, see Creating Incidents
in Offline Mode on page 628.

2 In the Work Assist Area, enter all the appropriate dispatch information.

Figure 374: Dispatch Information Fields In The Work Assist Area

3 To add the unit, select Add.

4 Select Save above the Primary Work Area.

Send Feedback 631

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 23: Recovering From an Extended Offline Period

The information for the saved incident appears in the spreadsheet.

Figure 375: Spreadsheet Area Showing Two Saved Incidents

Uploading Saved Files to PremierOne

After you create and save the incidents that you created while you were offline, upload them to
PremierOne.

To upload saved files to PremierOne:

1 Access the Incident Update tool.

For more information, see Accessing the Incident Update Tool (IT) on page 627.

2 At the top of the Work Assist Area, select Upload.

PremierOne uploads your saved incidents to the PremierOne database.

Browsing Saved Incidents

After you have saved incidents you initiated while you were offline, you can browse for them while you
are in offline mode.

To browse saved incidents:

1 Access the Incident Update tool.

For more information, see Accessing the Incident Update Tool (IT) on page 627.

632 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Chapter 23: Recovering From an Extended Offline Period

2 Select Browse.

The standard Windows Open dialog box appears showing the location where you saved your
incidents.

3 Select the incident you want to view, and then select Open.

The incident appears in the Incident Update Tool spreadsheet.

4 Double-click the incident number to open the incident.

The incident appears in the Primary Work Area and the Work Assist Area.

Searching for Saved Incidents

After you have created and saved incidents you initiated while you were offline, if you know their incident
numbers, you can search for them.

To search for a saved incident:

1 Access the Incident Update tool.

For more information, see Accessing the Incident Update Tool (IT) on page 627.

2 Select Find.

The Find Incident dialog box appears.

Figure 376: Find Incident Dialog Box

In the Incident ID field, type the incident number of the incident you want to find.

3 To find only an exact match, select the Exact match only check box.

4 Select Find.

A dialog box displays with your exact match or a list of matching incident numbers. Select the
incident you want and select OK to open it.

Send Feedback 633

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Chapter 23: Recovering From an Extended Offline Period

634 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Default Command Identifiers

Appendix A

Default Command Identifiers A

The following table describes the meanings of the default identifiers and lists the commands in which
they are used.

NOTE:
For information on commands and identifiers used with internationalized (UK) versions of CAD,
see Internationalization for PremierOne CAD - UK User Guide.
Table 51: Default Command Identifiers

Identifier Meaning Commands Used With

A area(s) CI,CC,CS,DS,II,IR,IS,IU,LL,MA,MU,ON,RM,SC,UA,
UC,WH

AC action code CC,CS,RC,RP,UG

ACT activity code ON,RC,US

AD address AB,IR,IU

ADS auto-dispatch stack override ID

{yes | NO}

AG agency id AP,AS,CI,CR,II,IR,SW,WH

AGE age IU

AGT agency type CI,II,LD

AL alarm level ID,IR,IU,LD

AM alarm id IR

AO associate to original { no| YES} CI

AP apt/unit (incident) II,IR,IU,LD

AS alias AB

AT address type AB

AU automobile club CR

B agency/beat(s) CI,CR,II,IR,IS,IU,LL,ON,RM,UA,UC,WH

BC Bcc recipient(s) SM

BL bldg number (incident) FI,II,IR,IU,LD,US

BN book name(s) or keyword(s) AB, RR

C close dispo/comment CI,II,IU

CA caller address II

CB capability CR

Send Feedback 635

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers

Table 51: Default Command Identifiers (Cont.)

Identifier Meaning Commands Used With

CC caller contact {yes| no| MAY} II,IU

CCT caller city II

CG agency/login coverage group(s) CC,CS,DS,LL,MA,RM,SC,UC,WH

CI agency/console id(s) WH

CID contractor id CR,IR

CL close incident IU

CLN caller last name II

CM comments CI,DI,FI,FR,IA,II,IO,IU,NT,RA,US,UX

CMA comments to all associated IU

CMH unit comments to unit history US

only

CNT contains BR

CPN location (common place) name II,IR,IU

CR CC recipient(s) SM

CT city FI,II,IR,LD,IU

CTP contractor type CR,IR

D dispo/comment(s) CS,IR,IU,PU,RA,US

DB database(s) QY

DE description II,IU

DF from date IR,UH

DN direction II,IU,LD

DOB date of birth IU

DS default shift id RC

DT to date IR

DTF details to follow {yes | NO} II,IU

DV device id IU

F filter {_OPEN|_closed|_all} IH,NR

FA false alarm disposition {yes | IR

NO}

FC from console id SC,WT

FL floor IR

FM display form {yes | NO} CI,ON

636 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers

Table 51: Default Command Identifiers (Cont.)

Identifier Meaning Commands Used With

FN first name of the person IR,IU

FU follow unit MC

GP geographical placement II,FI,IU

GT general text AB,RR

I incident id or active unit id CI,CR,CS,CU,DI,FR,ID,IF,IH,IO,IR,IU,MC,NT,

PU,RI,RP,TN,UH,WT

IC include comments {yes | NO} CI

I1 incident id1 or active unit id IA

I2 incident id2 or active unit id IA

IH include incident history {yes | CI

NO}

IN initiating id IR

IP include person info {yes | NO} CI

IS incident status IR,IS

IV include vehicle info {yes | NO} CI

JA junction1 II,IU,LD

JB junction2 II,IU,LD

KW keyword(s) AB,RR

L location FI,II,IR,IU,LD,MC

LN last name of the person IR,IU

LP update person location by user MC

ID

LS location search type {_length of IR

street |100 _block range |_AS
ENTERED}

LU update all unit(s) locations MC

associated with incident ID or
unit ID

LUP update all unit(s) AND MC

person(s) locations associated
with incident ID or unit ID

MA vehicle make IR

MC modifying circumstance CI,FI,II,IR,IU,LD

MF message folder MR

MG message body SM,TN

MN middle name IU

Send Feedback 637

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers

Table 51: Default Command Identifiers (Cont.)

Identifier Meaning Commands Used With

MO vehicle model IR

MS minimum staffing ST

MW motorway name II,IU,LD

N number of cloned incidents; CI,II,RP,UH

incident numbers, report
numbers, days

NF notification folder {_received NR

|_sent}

NP personal notes AB,RR

NS notification status NT

OF agency/officer id IR

OLN operator license number IU

OLS operator license state IU

OM odometer ON,UF,US

OP operator id IR

OV override {yes | NO} IF

P pager friendly name TN

P1 parameter1 QY

P2 parameter2 QY

P3 parameter3 QY

P50 parameter50 QY

PA pan {N|S|E|W|SE|NE|SW|NW} MC

PC payment code CR

PE preempt {yes | NO} FI,ID,II

PH phone number II,IR,IU

PL plan id AP

PM provisioned message subject TN

PN plate number FI,II,IR,IU

PR priority II,IU,SM

PRS person state {out | reset} US

PS plate state FI,II,IR,IU

PSD proximity search distance IR

PT plate type FI,II,IU

638 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers

Table 51: Default Command Identifiers (Cont.)

Identifier Meaning Commands Used With

PY plate year FI,IR,IU

QY query {yes | NO} IU

RC agency/roll call name RC

RD response descriptor ID

RE To recipient(s) NT,SM

RI rider name(s) ON

RL number of vehicles{– ID
}capability(s)

RM response mode {reset} RM

RN report number IR,RP

RO role name WH

RP role of the person IR,IU

RQ contract request number CU

RV role of the vehicle II,IU

S agency/sector(s) II,IR,IS,IU,LL,ON,RM,UC,UA,WH

SB subdivision (incident) FI,II,IR,IU,LD,US

SC call source code II,IR,IU

SD search date criteria IR

{CREATION|_first
dispatch|_disposition
assigned|_closed}

SE station staffing exempt UA

SJ subject BR,NT,SM

SOF show off duty {yes | NO} UC

SP agency or station printer ID TN

SPT service provider type NG

SS shift id suffix AS

ST agency/station ID(s) CS,LL,MU,ON,UC,UA

STC station command code TN

SY print style IU
{_detailed|_summary}

T incident type CI,FI,II,IR,IU,LD

TC to console id SC,WT

Send Feedback 639

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Appendix A: Default Command Identifiers

Table 51: Default Command Identifiers (Cont.)

Identifier Meaning Commands Used With

TF from time IR,UH

TG talk group ID CT

TI time range IR,UH

{INCLUSIVE|restrictive}

TN alerting {yes | NO} FI,ID,II,MU,TN,UX

TO new timeout value RI,UO

TP template name SM

TQ request type QY

TT to time IR,UH

TY type CT

U unit id(s) CI,CS,FI,ID,II,IR,MC,MU,ON,PU,RA,RE,RP,TN,

UA,UC,UF,UG,UH,UO,US,WH

U1 unit id UX

U2 unit id UX

UC show only clear units {_yes | CS

_NO}

UD agency/user id(s) AB,ON,UH,WH

UG agency/unit group name UG

UL updated location of unit US

ULD updated location description of US

unit

UN agency/user name AB,WH

UP <use personnel assignment ON

{{yes | NO}>

UR reassigned to unit id CS

US unit status FI,ID,RA,RC,US

V agency/vehicle id ON,UC,WH

VN vin IR,IU

WA work area {all|1-n} CW

WC capability/quantity(s) US

WS workstation id IR

ZM zoom {+|-} MC

ZP zip code FI,II,IR,IU,LD,US

640 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Understanding Address Verification

Appendix B

Understanding Address Verification B

The address verification behaviors of PremierOne are complex. Without a complete understanding of
those behaviors and why they were implemented, address verification can prove frustrating. This
section provides a basic description of Address Validation, and recommendations from Motorola
Solution for the feature.

Basic Premise Types

There are three basic premise types supported by PremierOne for address verification:

• Street Addresses – Consist of a house number and street name and are used most often for
residences. Street addresses do not have a Location Name associated with them. A street address
may or may not have an apartment number and/or building number associated with it.

• Street Intersections – Represent the junction of two roadways.

• Common Places – Locations that are more widely known by a name rather than an address. In fact,
a common place may not have a street address associated with it at all (such as mile markers).

GIS Data Requirements

Following is a description of the GIS data that is imported to support the basic premise types:

• Street Centerlines – Represent a “block” of addresses for a particular street name. A centerline
feature is typically bound on one or both sides by a junction shared with an intersecting street. All
addresses serviced by a PremierOne system should have a matching street centerline record,
regardless of the existence of an Address Point and/or Common Place with the same address.
Importing street centerlines automatically generates Street Intersection records.

• Address Points – Represent a precise map location for a particular address and/or “sub-address”
(for example, locations that have the same street address, but also an apartment and/or building
number to distinguish between them).

The primary function of Address Points is to provide more accurate geocoding (converting the
location text information into a map coordinate) for specific address locations when the standard
method of geocoding (interpolating a location based on the matching street centerline feature) is not
accurate enough. Primary examples are rural areas (where residences are not evenly distributed
across long-running street centerlines) and residential/business properties that consist of several
detached structures having the same street address but unique apartment/building numbers. The
use of Address Points is not intended to indicate whether a particular apartment/building value is
valid for an address. Additionally, “overuse” of address points can increase the likelihood of incorrect
shortest path routing behavior.

Motorola Solutions recommends that Address Points only be used for addresses in which the street
centerline geocoding presents a potential public/officer safety issue.

• Common Places – Represents a precise map location for a location that is more widely known by its
name rather than its address. Common Places are typically used businesses, government buildings,
and landmarks.

Send Feedback 641

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Appendix B: Understanding Address Verification

Basic Behavior of Location Fields

The following topics contain descriptions of the Location fields and their functionality.

See:
• Location

• City and Subdivision

• Apartment and Building

• Location Name

• Description

• Floor

Location
The Location field supports a street address, common place name, or street intersection. For street
names, entering the prefix direction is optional and PremierOne returns any location that “begins” with
the street name or common place name entered.

For example, entering 123 MAIN may return the following results:

• 123 MAIN AVE

• 123 W MAIN ST

• 123 MAINLAND RD

Entering MAIN & BROAD may return the following results:

• W MAIN ST & BROADWAY AVE

• MAINLAND RD & BROAD ST

• MAIN ST & N BROADWAY PL

If you do not provide a Prefix Direction as part of the street name, the results are limited to locations that
match the prefix direction provided.

You can also type “free text” within parentheses at the end of the value. The free text does not affect the
match candidate results (for example, 123 MAIN ST (DUPLEX)).

City and Subdivision

Entering city and/or subdivision values is optional. If values are not entered in these fields, all candidates
that match the Location value are returned regardless of their City and/or Subdiv value. If values are
entered into one or both of these fields, the match candidates must have city/subdivision values that
“begin with” the respective values that you provide. The City and Subdiv values may be used
interchangeably.

If you are unsure whether the information given by a caller is a subdivision name or a city name, you can
enter it in either field and still get a match even if you enter the value in the field opposite to where it is
stored in the GIS.

642 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Appendix B: Understanding Address Verification

Apartment and Building

Entering an apartment and/or building value is optional. If, however, a matching Address Point is found
(and, subsequently, hits on Premise Hazards and Duplicate Incidents), the presence of an apartment/
building value may change the map coordinate of a location.

A blank value in the Building and Apt/Unit fields is treated as a unique value – just like a non-blank
value. If you enter 123 MAIN ST without specifying an apartment or building value, and an Address
Point does not exist for 123 MAIN ST with a blank apartment and building value, the location does not
geocode to any other Address Point at 123 MAIN ST that does have an apartment or Building or Apt/
Unit value. Similarly, if you enter 47 in the Apt/Unit field and an address point does not exist for that
apartment number, the location does not geocode to any other Address Point at 123 MAIN ST.

A broader discussion of apartment/building behavior can be found in How Street Addresses Are
Validated on page 643.

Location Name
Entering a Loc Name value is optional. However, if a value is entered, there must be a Common Place
record having that name for the location to be verified. The presence of a value in Loc Name
automatically limits the match candidates to Common Places. A broader discussion of Location Name
behavior can be found in How Street Addresses Are Validated on page 643.

Description
The Description field is meant for descriptive and un-verifiable information about the location (such as
“around the back”).

Floor
You can enter any value in the Floor field and it does not affect validation. Floor values are currently not
represented in the GIS.

How Street Addresses Are Validated

When validating a street address (and no Loc Name), PremierOne performs a hierarchical search:
Address Points first, followed by Street Centerlines. For example, if you only enter 123 MAIN ST,
PremierOne first looks for an Address Point with a street address of 123 MAIN ST and blank Building
and Apt/Unit values. If a matching Address Point record cannot be found, PremierOne then attempts to
locate a street centerline having a name that begins with MAIN ST (regardless of its prefix direction), a
Low House value that is less than 123 and a High House value that is greater than 123.

If you enter 123 MAIN ST in the Location field and 2A in the Apt/Unit field, PremierOne first looks for
an Address Point with a street address of 123 MAIN ST, an Apt/Unit value of 2A, and a blank
Building value. If an Address Point matching these three values cannot be found, PremierOne attempts
to locate a street centerline match as described and retains the 2A value in the Apt/Unit field even
though there was no matching Address Point for that apartment number.

This hierarchy is the reason why it is critical for every address to be represented in the street centerline
data. Additionally, street centerline data is used to populate the Cross Strs field for Address Point and
Common Place (with address) matches. Even if an address returns an Address Point match, if the
address is not also represented by a street centerline record, there is no cross street information
provided.

Send Feedback 643

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Appendix B: Understanding Address Verification

Subdiv, City, and Zip Code values do not need to be entered before validation. If the match candidate
selected contains this information, it automatically populates in the appropriate fields. If you enter a
value in any of these fields, the values entered must match the values in the GIS exactly.

If you decide to capture Zip Codes, for example, the zip codes must exist in your GIS and Zip Codes
should be imported universally for Street Centerlines, Address Points, and Common Places. If an
Address Point at 123 MAIN ST has a Zip Code value of 80621, but the Street Centerline record
containing 123 MAIN ST does not have a Zip Code value, PremierOne displays two separate choices
for 123 MAIN ST in the pick list (one for the Address Point and one for the Street Centerline).
PremierOne is unable to determine the cross streets for the Address Point because the Zip Code values
do not match.

PremierOne invalidates a previously selected location when you add/modify a value in the Apt/Unit,
Building, Subdiv, Loc Name, and/or Zip Code field. This action is necessary to determine that the new
information does not change the map coordinate of the incident location. If you want to change this
behavior, Motorola Solutions recommends one of the following options:

• Disable Automatic Address Verification in the Incident Management Service Settings in Provisioning.
This action gives you the opportunity to enter all of the location information you have before
performing a verification request (which you trigger with the Alt-V hot key combination).

• If users know that they have additional location information to enter, train them to understand that
they do not need to select an address from the pick-list. After they enter the additional information,
the pick list disappears and, when they finish entering location information, they can trigger the
verification by using the Alt-V combination.

• Through CAD screen tailoring, move the Building and the Apt/Unit fields ahead of the City field
(which triggers automatic verification). This action reduces the number of revalidations of addresses
with apartment numbers that come through ANI/ALI.

Validating Addresses By Location and City Only

CAD can be configured to validate addresses by location and city only. When configured in this way,
CAD invalidates a verified address when you add/modify information only in the Location or City fields.
CAD does not invalidate the address when other location information is added or changed. The Verify
button is active, but the Valid Address icon does not change and you are not forced to re-validate the
address to continue. However, re-validate the information to update address and Premise Hazard
information as they may not be valid unless the information is verified again. If there is no match in the
GIS database, fields other than Location and City may also contain non-validated information even
after the address is re-validated. Anytime an address is re-validated, CAD checks and displays Premise
Hazard information using the location information.

How Common Places Are Validated

Anytime a value exists in the Loc Name field, the location is always validated as a Common Place. Even
if the common place has an address associated with it, the location is only validated against data
imported from a common place source and never against street centerline or address point data.

There is no hierarchy in place for Common Place validation like there is for street addresses. Building
numbers, and all other location-related fields, must match exactly with what is in the GIS for a particular
common place. Do not use the Loc Name field for user-entered data that cannot be validated in the GIS.

The current recommendation from Motorola Solutions for common places is to perform one or both of
the following:

644 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Appendix B: Understanding Address Verification

• Ensure that all imported common places contain all of the values included in the ANI/ALI feed for
each common place.

• If the ANI/ALI feed contains values not found in the GIS (such as in the Building field), do not map
those ANI/ALI fields to a field on the Incident Summary form. Instead, manually type this information
into Description or as free text in the Location field.

CAD-to-CAD and Address Verification

This section applies to the address verification process for locations that contain a common place.

When PremierOne receives a request for resources with incident information from the CAD-to-CAD
interface, it uses a two-pass process to provide an address match for unknown common places.

There are three possible scenarios for address verification with common places:

• Two Pass Verification With One Matched Common Place Record on page 645

• Zero, or Multiple Matching Common Place Records on page 646

• Common Place and City With No Address on page 646

NOTE:
If a common place was not included in the CAD-to-CAD data, PremierOne ignores all common
places in GIS and uses the street centerline to validate the address.

Two Pass Verification With One Matched Common Place Record

When you create an incident via the CAD-to-CAD interface for a location that contains address, city, and
common place values, PremierOne passes only the following information to GIS:

• Address

• City

PremierOne omits the common place from the initial address verification process, then GIS returns the
following information for a geoverified location that may need to be used later in the process:

• Matching street centerline information

• All common places defined at that location

If PremierOne cannot verify the address plus city values, it bypasses the incident to the default area that
is provisioned for the agency of the incident.

If PremierOne can verify the address plus city values, it compares the common places returned from
GIS against the common place that was included in the CAD-to-CAD message and continues with the
second pass.

If there is only a single common place record that is an exact match between the CAD-to-CAD data and
GIS, PremierOne passes the following information back to GIS for a second pass at address verification:

• Address

• City

• Location

Send Feedback 645

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Appendix B: Understanding Address Verification

PremierOne uses the GIS information returned from this second pass to create the corresponding
incident.

Zero, or Multiple Matching Common Place Records

If, during the first pass, there is no matching common place record or if there are multiple common place
records between the CAD-to-CAD data and GIS, PremierOne performs the following actions when it
creates the incident:

• PremierOne moves the common place value specified in the CAD-to-CAD message into the
Location Description field. The Location Name field remains blank in the new incident.

• PremierOne uses the matching street centerline information from the initial pass for the new incident.

Common Place and City With No Address

If there is a common place and a city but no address in the CAD-to-CAD data, PremierOne continues to
verify the location.
Example:
Common places without addresses are so common that everyone knows where they are located, such
as CENTRAL PARK, or WHITE HOUSE.

Address Verification Cascading Options

In Provisioning, you can select between three options for address verification “cascading.” Cascading
provides a way to create an incident at a less accurate location based on the level at which the user-
entered information can be validated.

The levels at which location information can be validated (from most accurate to least accurate) is as
follows:

• Premise Location (for example, address, common place, intersection, lat/long).

• Block level (for example, You enter 100 BLK MAIN ST, or 123 MAIN ST and although MAIN ST
exists in the GIS, there is no street centerline of MAIN ST that contains house number 123).

• Subdivision and City

There are three options for address verification search behavior:

• Never Cascade

• Only Cascade if No Rows Found (Default)

• Always Cascade to the Next Level

Assume that your GIS contains a single street centerline record for MAIN ST with a low house number
of 200, a high address of 299, and a city of ANYTOWN.

If Never Cascade is selected, and you enter 234 MAIN ST in the Location field, PremierOne responds
with No Records Found.

646 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Appendix B: Understanding Address Verification

If Only Cascade if No Rows Found is selected, PremierOne returns a Block Level match of 200-299
MAIN ST in the city of ANYTOWN. This value represents the block range of the street centerline record
having a street name of MAIN ST and an address range nearest to the house number entered. If you
proceed to create the incident at this location, the Location value is modified to 200(234) BLK MAIN
ST (assuming the Retain the Entered Premise Number provisioning option is selected). This action
indicates that the location was geocoded to the 200 block of Main St (with a map coordinate
representing either the start of the segment, middle of the segment, or end of the segment – also a
provisionable setting), but that the caller reported a house number of 234. If you ever intend to perform
block number searches for example, 200 BLK MAIN ST – either explicitly or in the case of using a
house number not contained by a street, select the Only Cascade or Always Cascade option.

If Always Cascade is selected and you enter 234 MAIN ST in the Location field and ANYTOWN in the
City field, PremierOne returns a premise level match of 234 MAIN ST in the city of ANYTOWN, a Block
Level match of 200-299 MAIN ST in the city of ANYTOWN, as well as a District/Town match of ANYTOWN.

Send Feedback 647

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Appendix B: Understanding Address Verification

648 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Using Interfaces

Appendix C

Using Interfaces C

PremierOne supports the following interfaces:

• ProQ/ProQA Paramount – A third-party application used to gather information during the initiation of
medical and fire incidents.

• TDD – A third-party application used to communicate with the deaf.

• CryWolf – A third-party application used for false alarm tracking.

Using ProQA and ProQA Paramount

ProQA™, a third-party software application by Priority Dispatch Corporation, is used to gather
information during the initiation of incidents. ProQA is used by dispatchers who have been trained and
certified in the use of the Medical Priority Dispatch System (MPDS). ProQA can be used for medical and
fire incidents on the same system.

ProQA Paramount™ is an updated version of ProQA that includes police in addition to fire and medical.
Your system may be configured to use either the ProQA interface or the ProQA Paramount interface, but
not both.

NOTES:
The term “ProQA” in this document refers to both ProQA and ProQA Paramount.

For details about ProQA, see the separate ProQA documentation by Priority Dispatch Corporation.

ProQA Paramount™ is integrated with NG 9-1-1 Text Messaging. The SMS window displays the prefix
[Q&A] before questions sent by ProQA to differentiate the questions.

After you create a ProQA case, it is linked to the Initiate Incident or Incident Management form from
which it was created.

The following functions are available with ProQA:

• Initiating Incidents Using ProQA

• Reconfiguring Transmitted Cases to Reflect New Conditions

• Placing Cases On Hold

• Taking Cases Off Hold

• Adding ProQA Case Numbers to Existing Incidents

Send Feedback 649

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Appendix C: Using Interfaces

Starting ProQA
To start ProQA, use the following procedure:

To start ProQA:

1 From the Windows Start menu, select Programs, and then select Priority Dispatch.

2 Select ProQA EMD Case Entry.

Accessing ProQA
After you start ProQA, you can access it in several ways:

To access ProQA:

Do one of the following:

• From the PremierOne Utilities menu, select Q&A and then select ProQA Fire, ProQA Police,
or ProQA Medical.

• Press Ctrl+Alt+M (medical), Ctrl+Alt+F (fire), or Ctrl+Alt+P (police).

The ProQA window appears.

Initiating Incidents Using ProQA

If ProQA is not already running, start it as described in Starting ProQA on page 650.

To initiate an incident using ProQA:

1 Receive the call.

2 Display a blank Initiate Incident form.

3 Populate ANI/ALI data, if available, by pressing Shift+F11.

4 Open ProQA.

For instructions, see Accessing ProQA on page 650. A case number displays in the lower left corner
of the window. The new ProQA case number is automatically retrieved and stored within the Initiate
Incident form.

5 Use the fields in the case record to enter or select the answers to the questions for the incident. (See
the ProQA user documentation for more information).

The questions are grouped into the Entry tab and the Key Questions (KQ) tab. Enter answers to all
the questions on the Entry tab before you move on to the KQ tab.

650 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Appendix C: Using Interfaces

To send questions or clarifications to the Call Control SMS window, right-click the question in ProQA
and select Send Key Question or Send Clarification. The SMS window displays the prefix [Q&A]
before questions sent by ProQA to differentiate information sent from ProQA.

Figure 377: ProQA Question Showing SMS Options

ProQA uses your responses to build a specific three- to five-character incident type code. The
sequence of questions that occurs for a single incident varies, depending on the answer to each
question.

If a more critical emergency comes in while you are in the question/answer session, you can put the
current case on hold. For details, see Placing Cases On Hold on page 655.

If enabled for your system, the Paramount Multiple Discipline Launcher (MDL) may recommend
launching a second incident for another ProQA discipline. For example, a call for a shooting with
injuries will require an incident for the police and another incident for medical. In such cases, a dialog
box appears, alerting you to the recommendation for the second incident.

Figure 378: ProQA Paramount – Create Second Incident Dialog

Click OK to continue and create a second incident, or click Cancel to decline the creation of the
second incident.

NOTES:
– The Cancel button may not appear in the dialog box if it is not configured to do so. If not, clicking
the OK button to create the second incident is your only option.

– You must have an available (clear) work area for the second incident to be created.

When you have answered all of the applicable questions, a Send button displays at the top right of
the case record window.

6 Click the Send button to export the current ProQA case information to PremierOne. (Your system
may also be provisioned to automatically send the ProQA Paramount data to the CAD server.)

Depending on how your system is configured, the ProQA application becomes minimized (reduced
to a background icon) and PremierOne becomes the active application.

7 If PremierOne is not the active application, press Alt+Tab until PremierOne is selected.

Send Feedback 651

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Appendix C: Using Interfaces

8 Do one of the following:

• If the ProQA case information appears in the Initiate Incident form, skip to the next step.

• If the ProQA case information does not appear, populate the fields in the active Initiate Incident
form by pressing Ctrl+Alt+P, or select ProQA Case Manager from the Utilities menu.

Your system administrator controls whether the case information appears automatically.

9 Verify the ProQA case information.

• The Location field should contain the address of the incident.

• The Incid Type field should contain a 3-character to 6-character ProQA incident type code.

• The Caller Name field should contain the name of the caller (fire agencies only).

• The Caller Phone field should contain the phone number of the caller.

• The Comments field should contain ProQA incident information.

NOTE
NOTE:
The default values and order of the information that is populated into the Comments field can
be changed. The entire responder script is included by default. For details, contact your
system administrator.

10 Complete any remaining applicable fields of the Initiate Incident form, as necessary.

If the circumstances of the emergency change (for example, the victim loses or regains
consciousness or stops/starts breathing) after you export the ProQA information to PremierOne by
pressing the Send button, but before you submit the Initiate Incident form (F12), you can return to
the ProQA question/answer session to generate an updated response. See The incident has not
been submitted from the II form on page 653.

To send post-dispatch instructions or clarifications to the Call Control SMS window, right-click the
item in the Post-Dispatch Instructions tab, and select Send PDI/PAI (post dispatch instructions/
prearrival instructions) or Send Clarification.

Figure 379: SMS Commands

652 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Appendix C: Using Interfaces

11 Transmit the Initiate Incident form by pressing the Submit Form (F12) key.

If the circumstances of the emergency change (for example, the victim loses or regains
consciousness or stops/starts creating) after you export the ProQA information to PremierOne by
pressing the Send button, and after you submit the Initiate Incident form (F12), you can return to the
ProQA question/answer session to generate an updated response. See The incident has already
been submitted from the II form on page 654.

12 Return to ProQA by pressing Alt+Tab or by clicking the appropriate item in the Windows Taskbar.

Close a case by selecting the Close case command from the ProQA File menu or by clicking the
Close Case button ( - ) on the left side of the ProQA toolbar.

Either close a case or put it on hold before you can process a new call.

Managing Incidents That Later Require ProQA

If you have already initiated an incident without using ProQA, but the incident changes to require a
medical/fire response, you can still manage the incident with ProQA.

To manage an incident that requires a ProQA response:

1 Create an incident in PremierOne.

2 When the Potential Duplicate Events Exist form appears, select Update Existing.

3 Return to ProQA by pressing Alt+Tab or by clicking the appropriate item in the Windows Taskbar.

4 Answer the questions as appropriate.

5 Close the case in ProQA.

Reconfiguring Transmitted Cases to Reflect New Conditions

You may need to reconfigure a transmitted case when the following conditions exist:

• A case was not closed in ProQA but was transmitted to PremierOne by pressing the Send button.

• The conditions of the case have changed in some way so that a new ProQA incident type code is
necessary to more accurately reflect the new conditions.

The procedure is different depending on whether you submitted the incident from the Initiate Incident
form by pressing F12.
The incident has not been submitted from the II form
If the circumstances of the emergency change (for example, the victim loses or regains consciousness
or stops/starts creating) after you export the ProQA information to PremierOne by pressing the Send
button, but before you submit the Initiate Incident form (F12), you can return to the ProQA question/
answer session to generate an updated response.

1 Display the active Initiate Incident form for the incident.

2 Return to ProQA by pressing Alt+Tab or by clicking the appropriate item in the Windows Taskbar.

3 Click the KQ tab.

The Key Questions menu appears.

Send Feedback 653

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Appendix C: Using Interfaces

4 Click the red arrow button until the initial information entry window appears.

5 Change the appropriate incident information to reflect the new conditions.

6 Press the Reconfigure response button on the ProQA toolbar or select Reconfigure response
from the Options menu.

The Send button is now available.

7 Click Send to export the reconfigured ProQA case information to PremierOne.

8 If PremierOne is not the active application, press Alt+Tab until PremierOne is selected.

ProQA can be configured to automatically minimize (reduce to a background icon) when you click
the Send button so PremierOne becomes the active application.

9 From the active Initiate Incident form, press Ctrl+Alt+P or select Import ProQA from the Utilities
menu.

A new comment line appears in the Comments field.

10 Verify the ProQA case information.

11 To initiate the incident, press F12.

12 Return to ProQA by pressing Alt+Tab or by clicking the appropriate item in the Windows Taskbar.

13 Close the current case.

Close a case by selecting the Close case command from the ProQA File menu or by clicking the
Close Case button ( - ) on the left side of the ProQA toolbar. The incident has already been
submitted from the II form.
The incident has already been submitted from the II form
If the circumstances of the emergency change (for example, the victim loses or regains consciousness
or stops/starts creating) after you export the ProQA information to PremierOne by pressing the Send
button, and after you submit the Initiate Incident form (F12), you can return to the ProQA question/
answer session to generate an updated response.

1 Open an Incident Management form with the incident number of the incident whose circumstances
have changed.

2 Return to ProQA by pressing Alt+Tab or by clicking the appropriate item in the Windows Taskbar.

3 Click the KQ tab.

The Key Questions menu appears.

4 Click the red arrow button until the initial information entry window appears.

5 Change the appropriate incident information to reflect the new conditions.

6 Press the Reconfigure response button on the ProQA toolbar or select Reconfigure response
from the Options menu.

The Send button is now available.

7 Click Send to export the reconfigured ProQA case information to PremierOne.

654 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Appendix C: Using Interfaces

8 If PremierOne is not the active application, press Alt+Tab until PremierOne is selected.

ProQA can be configured to automatically minimize (reduce to a background icon) when you click
the Send button so PremierOne becomes the active application, thus eliminating this step.

9 From the active Incident Management form, press Ctrl+Alt+P or select Utilities–Send ProQA to
import the current ProQA case information.

A new comment line appears in the Comments field.

10 To update the incident, press F12.

11 Return to ProQA by pressing Alt+Tab or by clicking the appropriate item in the Windows Taskbar.

12 Close the current case.

Close a case by selecting the Close case command from the ProQA File menu or by clicking the
Close Case button ( - ) on the left side of the ProQA toolbar.

Placing Cases On Hold

You cannot process another case in ProQA until the current case is closed or put on hold. If you receive
a new, more urgent call that must be processed before the current call can be closed, place the current
case on hold.

To place a case on hold:

1 Return to ProQA by pressing Alt+Tab or by clicking the appropriate item in the Windows Taskbar.

2 From the ProQA File menu, select the Hold case command, or click the Hold case button on the
ProQA toolbar.

NOTE:
Both the Hold case and Pick up case buttons look like phone icons, but when the mouse is
moved over each of the buttons, different descriptions appear.

3 Follow the procedures in Initiating Incidents Using ProQA on page 650 starting with step 2 to
process the new case.

After you process the new case and initiate it in PremierOne, you can return to the case that is on
hold. More than one case can be on hold at the same time.

Taking Cases Off Hold

If a previous case is on hold, take it off hold so you can complete its processing.

To take a case off hold:

1 Do one of the following:

• Press Alt+Tab until PremierOne is selected and the focus is on the active Initiate Incident form
that contains the ProQA case you want to take off hold.

• Display a blank Initiate Incident form.

Send Feedback 655

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Appendix C: Using Interfaces

2 Do one of the following:

• If the Initiate Incident form that you are working from is already linked to a ProQA case number,
return to ProQA by pressing Ctrl+Alt+M or Ctrl+Alt+F.

• If the Initiate Incident form that you are working from is not already linked to a ProQA case
number, open the ProQA Case manager by pressing Ctrl+Alt+C or selecting Utilities–Q&A, and
then selecting ProQA Case Manager. Select the case and click Unpend Case. For more
information on unpending cases in the ProQA Case Manager, see Displaying the ProQA Case
Manager on page 657.

Adding ProQA Case Numbers to Existing Incidents

You can add a ProQA case number to an existing PremierOne incident.

To add a ProQA case number to an existing incident:

1 Display an existing incident using the Incident Management form.

2 To access ProQA, press Ctrl+Alt+M.

The ProQA window appears and contains a new ProQA case number. The new ProQA case number
is automatically retrieved and stored in the Initiate Incident form.

3 Use the fields in the ProQA case form to answer the appropriate questions for the incident. (See your
ProQA user documentation for more information.)

ProQA uses your responses to build a specific three- to six-character incident type code.

The sequence of questions that occurs for a single incident varies, depending on how you answer
each question. You can change previous answers by clicking Return to prior.

When you have answered all of the applicable questions, a Send button appears in the lower portion
of the case record window.

4 Click the Send button to export the current ProQA case information to a location where PremierOne
can access it.

5 If PremierOne is not the active application, press Alt+Tab until PremierOne is selected.

ProQA can be configured to automatically minimize (reduce to a background icon) when you click
the Send button so PremierOne becomes the active application, thus eliminating this step.

6 Do one of the following:

• If the ProQA case information appears in the Initiate Incident form, skip to the next step.

• If the ProQA case information does not appear, manually populate the fields by pressing
Ctrl+Alt+P, or select Utilities–Send ProQA.

Your system administrator sets whether the case information appears.

7 Verify the ProQA case information.

The newly created ProQA case information should display in the Comments field.

656 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Appendix C: Using Interfaces

The first character is T;<ProQA incident type> followed by the configurable ProQA information
as described in Initiating Incidents Using ProQA on page 650.

NOTE:
The default values and order of the information that is populated into the Comments field can be
changed. The entire responder script can be included. Contact your system administrator.

8 Complete any remaining applicable fields of the Initiate Incident form, as necessary.

9 Transmit the Incident Management form by pressing the Submit Form (F12) key.

10 Press Alt+Tab until ProQA is selected.

11 Close the current case.

Close a case by selecting the Close case command from the ProQA File menu or by clicking the
Close Case button ( - ) on the left side of the ProQA toolbar.

Displaying the ProQA Case Manager

From the Case Manager, you can view the list of ProQA cases that were processed at your console, or
the ProQA cases processed by all consoles.

To display the ProQA Case Manager form:

Press Ctrl+Alt+C from an Initiate Incident form or an Incident Management form when a ProQA
case number was not previously linked to the form.

You can perform the following functions in the ProQA Case Manager:

• Reopen a closed ProQA case (Alt+R)

• Unpend a held ProQA case (take off a case hold) (Alt+U)

• View closed ProQA case summary information (Alt+S)

• Open a new ProQA case (Alt+N)

• Transfer a ProQA case to another PremierOne console (Alt+T)

NOTE:
If you press a ProQA Case Manager function button and the ProQA application does not display,
Alt+Tab to the ProQA application and check to see if the ProQA application still has a previous
ProQA case open. If it does, close the open case. Redisplay PremierOne and press Ctrl+Alt+C
(this scenario unpends the case). You should then be able to continue working in the Case
Manager.

The ProQA cases are displayed by ProQA case number; the most recent case displays first.

NOTE:
After you display the ProQA Case Manager form, you cannot access any other function in
PremierOne until you close this form.

Send Feedback 657

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Appendix C: Using Interfaces

Field Descriptions
The following table describes each field and button on the ProQA Case Manager form.
Table 52: ProQA Case Manager Form Field and Button Descriptions

Field or
Description
Button

ProQA_Case The newly created ProQA case number.

Incident# The PremierOne incident number.

NOTE: This field is populated after you create the incident.

Status ProQA case status at the last database update.

Console The PremierOne console that processed the ProQA case.

Location The PremierOne incident address if one was entered, or ProQA case address if the
PremierOne is not available.

Date The date the ProQA case was created.

Time The time the ProQA case was created.

Transfer To If you want to transfer a case, select the case. Then select the agency and console that you
want to transfer the case to and then select the Transfer button.

A High Priority Message displays on the workstation of the receiving console.

Re-open Click this button to reopen a closed case or to take a case off hold (Unpend).
Case/ Unpend
Case (The text on this button varies depending on whether the selected case is held or closed. If you
(button) select a held ProQA case, the text on the button next to the ProQA Case ID field changes to
Unpend Case. If you select a closed case, the text on the button changes to Re-open Case)

Case Click this button to review the case history of the selected case.
Summary
(button)

New Case Click this button to create a case.

(button)

Cancel Click this button to close the ProQA Case Manager form without making any changes.
(button)

Troubleshooting the PremierOne to ProQA Interface

Problem: Nothing happens when I press Ctrl+Alt+M from the Initiate Incident or Incident Management
form.

Solution: It is likely that there is still a ProQA case open with the ProQA application. Alt+Tab to the
ProQA application and close the open ProQA case.

Problem: The ProQA information does not import.

Solution: Process the current call without the use of ProQA. Inform your system administrator about
this problem as soon as possible.

658 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Appendix C: Using Interfaces

Using TDD
Your system may be configured to use TDD, the Telecommunication Device for the Deaf. The TDD
application uses third-party applications called VESTA and Sentinel Patriot, provided by PlantCML. TDD
provides a way for dispatchers to communicate with callers who use a TDD.

Calltakers are notified that a call is a TDD call by a special beeping sound.

For details on using TDD, see the PREMIER TDD User Guide.

To use TDD:

1 From the PremierOne Utilities menu, select TDD.

The Attach Conversation dialog box appears.

2 In the Incident Number field, type the incident number, such as #0087, or FD/#0087.

3 To attach the conversation to associated incidents, select the Attach to Associated incidents
check box.

4 Click Attach.

The conversation is added to the incident history for the incident. The transaction type is listed as
TDD. For more details on incident history, see Viewing Incident History From the Incident
Management Form on page 302.

Using CryWolf
The CryWolf® False Alarm Reduction application is a false alarm tracking system. PremierOne
interfaces with CryWolf to gauge the appropriate response to an incoming Alarm incident reported to the
calltaker or dispatcher by an alarm monitoring company.

Initiating an alarm incident using CryWolf is much like initiating any other incident, with the addition of an
extra step to notify the CryWolf system.

To initiate an alarm incident using CryWolf:

1 When the alarm call comes in from the alarm company, check to see whether the alarm ID is known,
and then continue with step 2 or 3.

2 If the alarm ID is not known, do the following:

a Type the location of the alarm in the Location field of the II form.

b Validate the address/location.

c To notify the CryWolf system and find the corresponding alarm ID at this location, press
Ctrl+Alt+W.

d Select the correct address. You can click display the details of one or more records to identify the
exact record for the current incident.

CryWolf returns the alarm ID for that location.

Send Feedback 659

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Appendix C: Using Interfaces

e Press F12.

PremierOne reads the alarm ID from the CryWolf file and looks up the alarm record in the alarm
database.

f Continue with steps 4 and 5.

3 If the alarm ID is known, do the following:

a Type the pound sign and the alarm ID in the Location field of the II form, for example (#12345).

b Press F12.

If you enter an alarm number generated by the CryWolf interface that has a status of Inactive, the
following occurs:

- The Incident Initiation form appears, with the corresponding incident information (Location,
Incident Response Factor, Priority, and Jurisdiction) from the alarm.

- The following message displays in the Status Message area:

Alarm ID {Alarm ID} is currently Inactive

- On the Incident Initiation form, the following text appears as the first line of comments within
the Comments box: *** ALARM STATUS: INACTIVE ***

A carriage return is added to the end of the Alarm Status text so that you can begin entering
text on the second line of comments. Since the incident is not yet created, you have the
option of deleting this comment.

- You then have the option to:

• Continue creating the alarm incident as provisioned by submitting the form and allowing the
system to process the alarm transaction based on existing functionality.

Incident History records the alarm status whenever an incident for an inactive alarm is
created

• Create the alarm incident as a Closed incident (by specifying a Disposition before
submitting the form) in order to log the event.

• Cancel creating any incident for this alarm.

4 When CryWolf finds chronic alarm conditions, the alarm record is updated to show that this incident
and future incidents will not be created.

5 If the alarm is not a chronic alarm, PremierOne creates the incident.

The alarm record values, such as the alarm company, the alarm contact, the address of the alarm,
and the IRF details are added to the incident.

The officer on-scene may ask you to contact the responsible person for the location of the alarm.
The PremierOne Location Detail command displays alarm permit information associated with the
location of the incident.

After officers have responded to the alarm incident, they will indicate in their closing disposition
whether the incident was a false alarm. If the incident was a false alarm, the information is
transferred to CryWolf.

660 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Troubleshooting

Appendix D

Troubleshooting D

This appendix contains troubleshooting information including how to use the PremierOne Error
Reporting Tool, plus a list of potential error messages and their likely causes.

Using the CAD Error Reporting Tool

As part of system monitoring, the PremierOne Error Report Tool (PremierOneErrRptTool.exe) is
able to collect data from each workstation in the background. The tool collects the data in files and
stores them in a dedicated folder.

To use the CAD Error Reporting Tool:

1 When PremierOne is accessible, start the tool by doing the following:

Have the user at the workstation where the error(s) occurred go to the PremierOne Help menu, and
then select Create Error Report or press Ctrl+Alt+i.

The PremierOne Error Report icon appears on the taskbar and remains there until the data collection
process is complete.

Figure 380: PremierOne Error Report Icon

2 When PremierOne is not accessible, do the following:

a On the desktop, click the PremierOne Error Report icon.

Figure 381: Create PremierOne Error Report Desktop Icon

b From the Start menu, select Motorola Solutions > PremierOne CAD Client > Create
PremierOne Error Report Tool.

The data collection process begins.

The tool zips and collects the two files here:

C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\CAD Client\
PremierOneErrRpt

Figure 382: Saved Zip File for PremierOne Error Report

Send Feedback 661

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Appendix D: Troubleshooting

• Of the two files, one is the log file. It contains text logs, a screen shot of the error report, and a
[Content_Types].xml file showing information similar to the following:

Figure 383: [Content_Types].xml File

The ConsoleInfo.txt file contains information similar to the following:

Figure 384: ConsoleInfo.txt File

• The other file is the Dump file. The file also contains a [Content_Types].xml file and a
ConsoleInfo.txt file. In addition, it contains a dump file with information similar to the
following:

Figure 385: Minidump File Summary

662 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 0060190214-A
Appendix D: Troubleshooting

3 Review the files to diagnose the error(s).

Manually Uploading the Error Report

You can manually upload the PremierOne Error Report rather than waiting for it to be uploaded at the
configured interval.

To manually upload the error report:

From the PremierOne Help menu, select Upload Error Report.

The error report is uploaded to the server.

Error Messages
This section contains a list of potential error messages and their likely causes.

Log In Error Messages

Error messages may appear when you are logging in to PremierOne, usually as a result of a failed log
in.

The following table shows messages that may appear.

Table 53: Login Error Messages

Error Message Cause

Caps Lock is on. The Caps Lock key on the keyboard is on. Press
Caps Lock again to turn it off.

Failed attempt, please try again. You have reached the maximum number of failed login
attempts. Contact your supervisor.
Login is prohibited at this time.

Login is prohibited at this time. Your agency has a login restriction that prohibits you
from logging in. Contact your supervisor.

Failed attempt, please try again. You did not enter your password in the Password field.

Please enter the password.

<User ID>’s account has expired. Your account has expired. Contact your supervisor.

Login is prohibited until Role start
date.
Please see administrator to change the
role start date.
The role you tried to log in with has not yet been
activated. Contact your supervisor or system
administrator.

Failed attempt, please try again. You did not enter an agency in the Agency field.

Please enter the agency.

Failed attempt. You did not enter a valid agency in the Agency field.

Agency is invalid.

Send Feedback 663

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Appendix D: Troubleshooting
Table 53: Login Error Messages (Cont.)
Error Message
Network unavailable.
Would you like to Log in offline with
limited privileges?
<User ID> is logged into another
console.
Log Out Error Messages
Error messages may appear when you are logging out of PremierOne, usually because you have not
reassigned your coverage areas to another person.
The following table shows messages that may appear.
Table 54: Log Out Error Messages
Error Message
The following areas will be left
uncovered when you log out.
Logout is prohibited at this time
Logout is prohibited at this time.
<User ID> is the last dispatcher for
<Agency ID>.
<User Name> has unsaved and/or unsent
messages.
You do not have permission to perform
the following operation on the form:
Change agency name
664
Motorola Solutions Confidential
Cause
The network is unavailable. You can work offline until
the network is again available; however, you cannot
access any features that require a network connection.
You are currently logged in at another console. You
can choose to log off the other console and lose any
unsaved work or to remain logged on at the other
console.
Cause/Solution
You have not transferred all of your workload to
another person.
Click the Transfer Workload button. For more
information, see Modifying Coverage Responsibilities
From the Command Line (WT) on page 149.
You have not transferred your workload to another
person.
Click the Transfer Workload button. For more
information, see Modifying Coverage Responsibilities
From the Command Line (WT) on page 149.
You cannot log out because there would be no
dispatchers covering your agency and you have
dispatched units on a call.
Either continue with your session or transfer your
workload to another dispatcher.
Save or send your messages.
You tried to perform an operation that you are not
permitted to complete.
Send Feedback
 0060190214-A
Appendix D: Troubleshooting

Change Password Error Messages

Error messages may appear when you are changing passwords, usually as a result of a typographical
error.

The following table shows messages that may appear.

Table 55: Change Password Error Messages

Error Message Cause

Failed attempt, please try again. You did not type anything in the User Name field.

User name cannot be null.

Failed attempt, please try again. You did not type anything in the Agency field.

Agency cannot be null.

Failed attempt, please try again. You did not type anything in one or more of the
Password fields.
Password cannot be null.

New Password field does not match the You did not type the same information in both the New
Verify Password field. Password and the Verify Password fields.

Transfer Session Error Messages

Error messages may appear when you are transferring sessions.

The following table shows messages that may appear.

Table 56: Transfer Session Error Messages

Error Message Cause

<User ID>’s Session will be terminated Your session time expires in the stated amount of time.
after 4 hours.
Your agency configures the amount of time.

<User ID>’s Session will be locked after The session time expires in the stated amount of time.
4 hours.
You can reset the timer so the session does not time
out so soon.

Your agency configures the amount of time.

Session time has expired. <User ID> will The session time has expired.
be logged off current session.
You can cancel the logoff.

<User ID>’s session is locked Enter your user ID and password, and then click Log
In.
Enter user ID and password to unlock
session.

Network connection unavailable. The network is unavailable. You can work offline until
the network is available again.
Do you want to continue transfer in
offline mode?

Send Feedback 665

Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Appendix D: Troubleshooting
Table 56: Transfer Session Error Messages (Cont.)
Error Message
<User ID> has unsaved and/or unsent
messages.
Transfer was denied by <User ID>.
Transfer was denied by <User ID>. Would
you like to transfer to another user?
Incident Initiation Error Messages
Error messages may appear when you are initiating an incident.
The following table shows messages that may appear.
Table 57: Incident Initiation Error Messages
Error Message
Error opening incident. You do not have
sufficient security to open this
incident.
Location is not valid for the specified
incident agency.
Unit recommendations are undefined for
this location.
Unit Recommendations are Incomplete.
666
Motorola Solutions Confidential
Cause
Save or send your messages.
The person you selected to transfer your session to did
not accept the transfer.
Either the person you selected to transfer your session
to did not accept the transfer, or the session for that
person reached the timeout limit. Return to the
Transfer Session dialog box and select a different
person.
Cause
You do not have the correct security privileges to open
the incident.
Discuss this situation with your supervisor.
A newly specified location identifies an agency other
than the current agency for the incident.
One or more of the following are true:
• A recommendation response record does not exist
where the Response Mode = Normal.
• A recommendation response record exists but the
Response Factor contains no value.
• A recommendation response record cannot be
found.
• A unit response requirement record does not exist at
the Agency Type level.
Contact your supervisor.
One or more of the following are true:
• Some of the required resources have not been
recommended.
• Some of the units that were identified as part of the
fixed unit responses for the run card have not been
recommended.
Send Feedback

Table 57: Incident Initiation Error Messages (Cont.)
Error Message
The alarm is a chronic alarm violator.
No incident will be created.
System cannot verify <latitude/longitude
value>.
Messaging Error Messages
Error messages may appear when you are using Messaging. The following table describes the
messages.
Table 58: Messaging Error Messages
Error Message
Are you sure that you want to move the
selected message from the Outbox?
Moving the message from the Outbox will
prevent it from being sent.
You have entered text that does not
match the field format.
The folder you have chosen to delete
contains messages.
Are you sure that you want to delete
this folder?
This transaction cannot be completed.
This folder has reached its maximum
storage capacity.
This message was not successfully
delivered to <user ID> because <reason>.
This message has been re-routed To:
<list of addresses> Cc: <list of
addresses>.
The recipient <name> has placed their
messages on hold.
This message will be delivered at a
later time.
The message contains attachments that
are not supported at the destination
device.
Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Appendix D: Troubleshooting
Cause
Your agency is configured so an incident is not created
for chronic alarm violators.
PremierOne could not verify the latitude/longitude
value.
Cause
The message you want to move is in the Outbox and
has not been sent yet.
You entered data that does not fit with the message
template or is not in the correct format for the field.
The folder still contains messages. If you select OK,
the folder and the messages are deleted. If you want
to keep the messages, move them to another folder
before you delete this folder.
Your agency has set a maximum size for folders and
you have reached that maximum in this folder.
Either create a folder for some of the messages in this
folder, or transfer them to an existing folder.
You specified a delivery receipt or guaranteed delivery
and the person you sent the message to was not
available for the reason stated.
A preconfigured rule caused your message to be sent
to the addresses listed.
You specified a delivery receipt or guaranteed delivery
and the person to whom you sent a message has their
mail on hold. Your message is delivered when the hold
is removed.
The person or group to whom you sent the message
and attachments is using a mail server that does not
allow attachments or does not allow the type of
attachments you sent.
667
0060190214-A
Appendix D: Troubleshooting
Table 58: Messaging Error Messages (Cont.)
Error Message
The message contains attachments that
exceed the configurable upper limit for
the destination device.
You are not authorized to send messages.
The size of this message exceeds the
upper limit for messages sent from your
device.
The size of the attachment exceeds the
upper limit for messages sent from your
device.
The message you are attempting to send
does not have a subject line.
The message you are attempting to send
must have at least one recipient
specified.
Address Book Errors
Name exists, please try again.
A group named <group name> already
exists in the <agency name> agency.
Please use another name.
The following groups cannot be added to
<group name> because <group name> is
already a member of these groups.
The selected members exceeds the maximum
number allowed. Please choose the
members to add to <group name>
These entries already exist in <address
book name>. Would you like to create a
second, duplicate entry for any of these
entries?
668
Motorola Solutions Confidential
Cause
The person or group to whom you sent the message
and attachments is using a mail server that sets a limit
on the size of attachments. Your attachments are
larger than allowed.
Send your attachments in multiple messages, breaking
the attachments into smaller files.
You do not have the proper level of security to send
messages.
If you feel your security level is incorrect, contact your
supervisor.
Your message was too large.
If possible, break your message into multiple
messages.
Your attachment was too large.
If possible, break your attachment into smaller files
and send each small file in a separate message.
You did not type a subject for your message.
You can send the message without a subject; however,
using a subject helps the person receiving your
message to be able to organize their messages.
You did not indicate the person or group to whom you
want to send the message.
In the To: field, enter the user ID and address of the
recipient.
You entered a name that exists for your saved search.
Type a different name.
You entered a name that exists for your new group
name. Type a different name.
You tried to add a group to another group. However,
the group you want to add is already a member of the
group.
Groups have limits on the number of members they
can have. You tried to add members to a group, and by
doing so, exceeded the maximum number of members
in one or more of these categories: members, mobile
members, or groups.
The entries listed create duplicates in the named
address book. Choose whether you want to create the
duplicates or not create the duplicates.
Send Feedback

Table 58: Messaging Error Messages (Cont.)
Error Message
Adding all entries exceeds the maximum
number allowed. Please select the
entries to add to <address book name>.
Adding all entries exceeds the maximum
number allowed. Some of these entries
already exist.
Please select the entries to add to
<address book name>. Selecting existing
entries will create a duplicate.
Offline Recovery Error Messages
While you are recovering from an extended offline period, one or more error messages may appear.
The following table shows messages that may appear.
Table 59: Offline Recovery Error Messages
Error Message
You do not have permission to view the
incidents.
You do not have permission to modify
incidents.
You do not have permission to create
incidents.
You are attempting to modify an incident
that is currently being modified by
<name>, Device ID: <number>. To ensure
consistent date input, multiple users
are not allowed to modify data on an
incident at the same time.
Send Feedback
Motorola Solutions Confidential
0060190214-A
Appendix D: Troubleshooting
Cause
Address books have limits on the number of entries
they can have. If you were to add all the entries you
selected, you would be over the limit. Select the
entries you want to add so you can stay within the limit.
Address books have limits on the number of entries
they can have. If you were to add all the entries you
selected, you would be over the limit. You may be able
to stay within the limit by eliminating duplicates. Select
the entries you want to add so you can stay within the
limit.
Cause
You do not have the proper permissions for this task.
Talk to your supervisor.
You do not have the proper permissions for this task.
Talk to your supervisor.
You do not have the proper permissions for this task.
Talk to your supervisor.
Someone else is modifying the incident. Coordinate
with that person.
669
0060190214-A
Appendix D: Troubleshooting

670 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 Glossary of Terms

Glossary of Terms
A
Active Incident – An incident that has a unit assigned to it.

Activity Code – Codes used to categorize activity and time spent by units other than the time tracked by
unit status codes, such as special DUI patrols.

Ad Hoc – The ability to customize the criteria and output view of a report or query.

Address Book – A collection of contacts. Address books can contain common address books shared
by multiple users and a private address book. See also Contact and Global Address Book.

Address Point – A GIS feature table containing point geometries with complete addresses; for
example, a single house number and street name information. More accurate than Street Centerline
when used for geocoding.

Administration – A collection of functions within the system used to manipulate values responsible for
setup and operation of the system, such as code table values.

Administrative User – Users who can perform administrative functions, such as maintenance of
Groups.

Agency – A logical root of an organization.

A.K.A – Also known as; alias. See also Alias.

Alarm Level – Numeric rating describing the scope of an incident. The alarm level controls the type of
vehicles that respond to the incident; a single alarm is usually the lowest level. Alarm level, along with
incident type, and modifying circumstance, are the three factors that make up the Incident Response
Factor (IRF). See also IRF.

Alarm Level Response – Defines the number of vehicles of each capability that CAD should
recommend to respond to an incident with a specific alarm level.

Alerting – The process of sending all types of alerts. See also Toning.

ALI – Automatic Location Identification. The automatic display at the PSAP of the caller’s telephone
number, the address/location of the telephone, and supplementary emergency services information.
See also PSAP.

Alias – A different name, different spelling, common misspelling, or nickname for a street, intersection,
common place, or person.

ANI – Automatic Number Identification. A feature that permits subscribers to display or capture the
telephone number of calling parties. The telephone line type can also be captured (such as pay phone,
motel, wireless or cellular, operator-handled, and so on).

Archive – A long-term storage area, often on magnetic tape, for backup copies of files.

Area – The largest geographical component of an agency, composed of teams, districts, and/or beats.
In the context of recommendations, the area describes the geographical piece that a unit is often
assigned to patrol.

ARL – Automatic Resource Location. ARL displays the location of resources equipped with GPS units
on workstations equipped with map displays.

Send Feedback 671

Motorola Solutions Confidential
Glossary of Terms

Associated Incident – When multiple agencies are required to fulfill the needs of an incident, CAD
creates an incident for each agency that provides a response. The multiple incidents created to track the
response to a single event are all known as associated incidents.

Associated Incident Type – Incident type in CAD automatically created from a separate, related
incident.

ATL – Attempt to locate.

Auditing – Recording of transaction information when the transaction results in a change (such as when
a database record is created, updated, or deleted).

AVL – Automatic Vehicle Location. AVL displays the location of vehicles equipped with GPS units on
workstations equipped with map displays.

B
Beat – The smallest geographical area within an agency. In the context of recommendations, the beat is
the smallest geographic piece to which a unit could be assigned.

BOLO – Be On Look Out. Acronym used by public safety agencies to request that personnel keep
watch for persons, property, or vehicles. For example, a missing person can have a BOLO issued for
them.

Broadcast Group – Same as Dynamic Group and Static Group. Messages are sent to the group
members using the broadcast mode when possible. See also Dynamic Group and Static Group.

C
CAD – Computer Aided Dispatch.

Call Sign – Alphanumeric string used to identify a unit, such as 1A12.

Call Stacking – Assigning multiple calls to an on-duty unit to be handled at a later time.

Capability – Function or equipment on a vehicle, such as fire engine, truck, or K9 unit.

Chronic Alarm Violator – Alarm location that was responded to and exceeded the maximum count of
false alarms for a specified time period.

CLI – Caller Line Identification. Displays the phone number of the person who is calling.

Cloned incident – New incidents created from another incident.

Common Place – A name for a commonly-known place, such as a business, church, school, landmark,
or topographic feature. You can use common place names during incident initiation.

Complainant – Person calling an emergency communication center to request police, fire, or EMS
assistance.

Contact – An entry in an address book. Contact information consists of the user name, other personnel
information, and contact information such as phone, email, or chat address. In public safety, contact also
refers to information about an individual that has come in contact with a public safety agency. See also
Address Book.

Coverage group – Sets of areas within one or more agencies.

672 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 Glossary of Terms

D
Disposition – Values used to close an incident and clear a primary unit from a call; incidents cannot be
closed without a disposition. Also, an action taken as the result of an arrest, such as released by law
enforcement, referred to another jurisdiction, and misdemeanor or felony complaint sought.

Dynamic Group – A temporary group that is created for a specific condition, such as a complex
incident. Users can create dynamic groups by drawing areas on a map. Members of address books or
individual members can be assigned to a dynamic group. See also Static Group.

Dynamic Membership – A membership to a group that a user is not pre-assigned to. For example, a
user is added to the group only when the user logs in or is within a specific area. See also Static
Membership.

E
EMS – Emergency Medical Service. This acronym refers to any agency that is responsible for providing
emergency medical care at the scene of an event.

ERS – Emergency Roadside Service.

ESN – Emergency Service Number. A number assigned to a specific geographic area within which all 9-
1-1 calls are routed to one specific PSAP and the residents of the area are served by the same police,
fire, and emergency medical agencies. See also PSAP.

ESRI – Environmental Systems Research Institute.

ETA – Estimated Time of Arrival.

Event – An occurrence that requires a report by law enforcement, fire, or EMS agencies, to record the
details of the activities performed and the items involved. Examples of events are incidents, arrests,
citations, civil processes, gun registrations, and pawn tickets.

F
False Alarm – Any alarm condition that is registered or recorded by the dispatch center that is not a
result of criminal activity for which the alarm was intended.

Field-initiated Incident – A traffic stop or other event called in by an officer in the field.

FBR – Field Based Reporting.

G
Geocoding – The translation of a street address to a map coordinate.

GIM – Generic External Data Source Interface Module.

GIS – Geographic Information System. Software mapping application that collects, manages, analyzes,
and displays information associated with a specific location.

Global Address Book – Collection of contacts that has global scope (for example, contains contact
information for all employees). See also Address Book.

GPS – Global Positioning System. Method of location based on reception of multiple satellite signals by
a device on the ground or in an airplane. The GPS satellite system is run by the U.S. government.

Send Feedback 673

Motorola Solutions Confidential
Glossary of Terms

Group – Collection of users that can be collectively addressed using the group name, such as officers
assigned to a shift or sergeants assigned to a precinct.

H
Hot Sheet – A report that displays a listing of all stolen vehicles.

I
IBR – Incident Based Reporting. A form of detailed reporting capturing specific data elements of criminal
activity. States either use IBRS or UCR to report crime statistics. IBRS uses more offense categories
and offenses and is far more comprehensive than UCR. See also UCR.

Incident – An occurrence or event that interrupts normal procedure or precipitates a crisis. A physical
world occurrence requiring the completion of a report by law enforcement to record the details of the
activities performed and items involved. See also Event.

Incident’s agency – Agency that the incident was created under (not necessarily the agency creating
the incident).

IRF – Incident Response Factor. The Incident Response Factor determines what equipment and
personnel are needed at any incident. Every incident in CAD is assigned an IRF. The IRF is comprised
of the incident type, the modifying circumstance, and the alarm level.

J
Juvenile – A person under the age of adulthood. The age of juveniles varies between states.

K
No entries

L
LAN – Local Area Network. High-speed, low-error data network covering a relatively small geographic
area (up to a few thousand meters).

Location – Business name or additional information about an address.

Logging – Recording of transaction information when the transaction does not result in a change in the
overall system state.

M
MDC – Mobile Data Computer.

Mobile User – Users that are mobile and utilize the radio network for communication.

Modifying Circumstance – A component, along with incident type and alarm level of the incident
response factor (IRF). A modifying circumstance changes or modifies the circumstances of the incident.
For example, in a robbery, modifying circumstances could be “in progress + no injuries” or “not in
progress + injuries”.

674 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 Glossary of Terms

MSAG – Master Street Addressing Guide. Database containing all street information in an E9-1-1
service area.

N
NAD – North American Datum.

NENA – National Emergency Number Association. NENA fosters technological advancement,

availability, and implementation of a universal emergency telephone number system.

NIBRS (or NIBR) – National Incident Based Reporting System. See also IBRS.

O
Offense – The crime for which the defendant was arrested or filed on by the district attorney.

Offline (state or storage) – Data that removed from the online state and from the near-line accessible
state. Offline data is archived data that must be reloaded to the system. See also Near-line and Online.

Online (state or storage) – Data that is active and available to users for the purposes of searching and
editing. Online data is the active production data set. See also Near-line and Offline.

Operations Console – The screen associated with the operational functions such as CAD dispatch,
mobile data terminal screens, and so on.

ORI Number – Originating Agency Identifier Number. A number assigned by the FBI that serves as an
agency’s identifier. The first two letters are the state abbreviation, the next three numbers are your
county’s code, and the final two numbers identify the jurisdiction within the county.

OS – Operating System.

Owning agency – Agency used to sign on.

P
Pending – Incident that was initiated but does not yet have a unit assigned to it.

Plan – The highest geographical grouping in Infotrak. Plans define the teams, districts, and areas for
each agency.

Pre-empt – Remove a unit from an incident.

Priority – Determines where the call is positioned in the pending queue and whether a priority message
is sent by CAD to all consoles.

Private Address Book – Collection of addresses for a particular user. Addresses in the private address
books are available only for a particular user. See also Shared Address Book.

PSAP – Public Safety Answering Point. The designated agency that receives 9-1-1 calls and alerts the
proper emergency response agencies (such as fire, police, and ambulance). Saps are also known as 9-
1-1 call centers.

PTT – Push-To-Talk. A two-way communication service that works like a “walkie talkie.” PTT requires
the person speaking to press a button while talking and then release it when he or she is done. The
listener then presses his or her button to respond.

PTTID – Push-To-Talk ID. ID for a PTT radio.

Send Feedback 675

Motorola Solutions Confidential
Glossary of Terms

Public chat room – Chat room that is visible to all users.

Private chat room – Chat room that is only visible to invitees.

Purge – To delete records no longer considered to be active in use.

Q
Query – A set of criteria for extracting specific data.

R
Resource – The personnel, vehicles, and equipment of the agencies you might manage on an incident.
For a single law agency, resources might simply be police cruisers, mounted or foot patrols, equipment,
and officers, together known as “units.” In a multiple agency environment, resources could also include
fire and ambulance vehicles, equipment, and personnel.

Response class – Response classes alter the standard unit recommendation made to a specific
location, such as a hospital or a school. Response classes are permanent.

Response ID – Response IDs allow Incident Response Factors (IRFs) to be grouped by common
response requirements. By grouping IRFs that have the same response requirements, your agency only
has to provision the single response ID to get the same recommendations for all of the IRFs in the
group.

Response mode – Response modes temporarily alter the standard unit recommendations made to a
specified set of beats. This can be due to an unavoidable but definable situation such as a flood or a
high winds. Response modes are removed when the situation no longer exists.

Roll Call – Preconfigured grouping of police units set to go on duty at the same time, usually
corresponding to an agency shift.

RMS – Records Management System.

S
Search Criteria – The information used to retrieve a particular file or specific data. A search is carried
out by a program through comparison or calculation to determine whether a match to some pattern
exists or whether some other criteria have been met.

Services – Various functions provided by CAD, such as address books, chat, GIS mapping, messaging,
query, provisioning, and so on.

Shared Address Book – Collection of addresses shared between a select set of users. See also
Private Address Book.

SID – State Identification Number. A unique number for each arrested individual.

SMTI – Scars, Marks, Tattoos, and Identifying characteristics. Distinctive physical characteristics that
help to identify an individual.

SMTP – Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. An internet standard for electronic mail (email) transmission
across Internet Protocol (IP) networks.

676 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 Glossary of Terms

SMS – Short Message Service. The text communication service component of phone or mobile
communication systems, using standardized communications protocols that allow the exchange of short
text messages between fixed line or mobile phone devices. SMS text messaging is the most widely
known usage.

Split Crew – A crew within a fire department that mans more than one piece of equipment. When one
vehicle leaves the station, the other vehicle becomes unavailable and therefore not recommendable.

SQL – Structured Query Language. A language used to create, maintain, and query relational
databases. SQL is the standard computer language used by all relational databases.

Static Group – An organizational hierarchy, role, or other defined group, such as area, precinct, or beat.
See also Dynamic Group.

Static Membership – Membership where users are pre-assigned to an existing group.

State Plane Coordinate System – A system established by the federal government and based on X,Y
coordinates defined by the U.S. Geological Survey for each state. Locations are based on the distance
from an origin point defined for each state.

Status – Condition of a unit or event.

Status Code – Code defining a unit status. Status codes are usually a maximum of two characters, such
as EN for enroute or TS for traffic stop.

Street Centerline – A GIS feature table containing line geometries, street name information, and
address ranges. Not as accurate as Address Point when used for geocoding.

Suite – Refers to the combination of CAD, records, and mobile data systems. It encapsulates all
features including cross system, federated, integrated justice and stand-alone system functions.

T
TAIP – Trimble ASCII Interface Protocol. A trimble-specified digital communication interface based on
printable ASCII characters over a serial data link. TAIP was designed specifically for vehicle tracking
applications.

TDD – Telecommunication Device for the Deaf.

Tear-and-Run Message – Messages for fire/EMS that are automatically printed at fire stations when
fire/EMS incidents are dispatched. The information that prints in dispatch messages for the tear-and-run
feature varies, depending on the current system configuration.

Timeout – The timeout period is the number of minutes an incident or unit can remain in a specific
status before timing out. When an incident or unit times out, the calltaker or dispatcher is usually notified
in some manner so they can address the issue.

Toning – The process of sending a specific type of alert through toning equipment (fire station alerting).

U
UCR – Uniform Crime Reporting. A collection of crime tally reports dictated by the FBI. States either use
IBRS or UCR to report crime statistics. See also IBRS.

Unit – See resource.

Unit’s agency – Agency that the unit belongs to when unit is placed on duty.

Send Feedback 677

Motorola Solutions Confidential
Glossary of Terms

V
Vehicle ID – An alphanumeric code for physical vehicles such as police units, fire equipment, and EMS
units.

VIN – Vehicle Identification Number.

VRM – Vehicular Radio Modem.

W
WAN – Wide Area Network. Data communications network that serves users across a broad
geographic area and often uses transmission devices provided by common carriers.

Working agency – Logical representation of an agency that is used as the default if the user does not
specify an agency with an incident number or unit ID (for example, IU.unit1 or IU.#39). If a user
signs on with coverage group, the default agency provisioned with the coverage group is used as the
working agency. If the user signs on to cover a single agency (not with coverage group), the working
agency is set to the single agency. If a user signs on to cover multiple agencies, the working agency is
set to the owning agency.

X
No entries.

Y
No entries.

Z
No entries.

678 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 Index

Index

Symbols GIS data requirements 641

Location fields behavior 642
{Multi} value 175 overview 171, 641
* asterisk 343 street address validation 643
address verification with commonplace 645
A multiple matching commonplace records 646
no matching commonplace records 646
AB command 581 two pass verification with one matched common-
ABANDONED call status 85 place record 645
abandoned calls addresses
managing 126 alarm number 170
releasing 126 alias name 168
accessing alphanumeric 164
CAD client 31 common place name 167
incident management 245 entering street names without premise numbers
information panel 58 165
ready reference information from command line 624 finding street block ranges 166
ACD with forced presentation, defined 86 hyphenated 164
ACD, defined 86 intersection name 168
acknowledging alerts invalid premise number 167
from command line 457 latitude and longitude 168
right-click option 457 street address, partial 164
acknowledging alerts from status monitors 457 street address, whole 164
action codes, contractor request 273 using parentheses 164
activating roll calls 362 agencies
ACTIVE call status 86 incident 141
active shift 157 owning 141
changing 157 unit 141
viewing 157 working 141
activity codes 314 agency
adding changing signon agency 148
attachments to incidents 189 plans, changing using Activate Plan form 156
notes to voice calls 124 plans, changing using command line 156
person information to incident 220 plans, defined 155
units to unit groups 368 working 149
vehicle information to incident 223 agency type 148
address book command 581 agent ID, changing 100
address books alarm, as location 170
accessing from command line 581 alerting
accessing from messaging 576 using pagers with 419
editing 592 using with move up command 418
using 569 alerts
using from command line 581 printing 549
using from messaging 576 sending from the TN form 543
address point 500 sending incident alerts from the TN form 544
address validation bypass sending unit-based alerts from the TN form 544
duplicate incidents 180 Unit Alert List 544
overview 180 ALI information, looking up 111
previous incidents 180 ALI, definition 85
address verification alias, as location 168
basic premise types 641 ANI, definition 85
by location and city only 644 ANI/ALI data, call control window 106, 109
cascading options 646 AP command 156
common places validation 644 appending information to duplicate incidents 183

Send Feedback 679

Motorola Solutions Confidential
Index

area, default 147 C

areas
changing signed on area on any console 158 C counter 56
clearing work areas 142 CAD client
monitoring 144 accessing 31
setting monitored 144 information panel 56
signed on, modifying 147 menus 48
ARL window overview 46
history playback 512 CAD commands, list of 79
history tab 512 CAD-to-CAD
maximum unit history 512 dispatching units 403
AS command 157 call control command 135
associated calls, voice calls 133 call control function keys 136
associated incidents Call Control window
adding priority comments 199 abandoned calls tab 96
creating with initial incident 231, 287 active calls tab 95
disassociating from command line 289 adjust volume 105
disassociating in the Incident Management form call action buttons 94
288 call history tab 96
displaying units on map 469 call status bar 94
Attach tab 189, 240 caller information area 90
attaching map images 476 conference information 110
attachments dial area 92
adding to incidents 189 flagging incorrect ALI records 108
adding to messages 576 list area tabs 95
audit trail looking up ALI information 111
incidents 304 menu bar 88
unit history 337 orphaning panels 105
auto-dial 153 overview 87
position monitor tab 97
queue buttons 92
B setting console status 105
B counter 56 SMS tab 97
backdating unit status timestamps 396 SMS window 98
incident dispatch 401 status bar 88
incident history 400 TDD conversation window 99
RDW 399 telephony area 92
unit history 399 transfer area 100
barging in on voice calls 123 viewing ANI/ALI data 106, 109
beats, multiple in an intersection 175 call notes
blind transfer 120 adding to voice calls 124
block range 165 viewing 126
block ranges, finding 166 call stacking 343
blue screens 55 exceed stack 404
BOLO max in queue 404
closing 599 parameters 404
creating 597 placing incident into queue 406
message retrieve command 596 preempt 404
sending 597 calling RSPs 113
updating 599 calls
BOLOs definition 85
searching 616 cameras
BR command 596 displaying icons on map 503
brackets around text 198 playing streams from the map 503
bridge gate status 510 updating from the map 504
BUSY call 85 canceling report numbers 306
bypass address validation 180 canceling, road closures 505
capabilities
recommending user-specified from command line

680 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 Index

394 user supplied values 76

viewing and updating information for units 331 whitespace 75
cascading icons 486 commands
case manager, keyboard shortcuts 68 AB 581
cautions 28 AP 156
CC command 147 AS 157
centering incidents 463 BR 596
centering map CC 147
on incident 463 CI 283
on location 463 CR 274
on unit 463 CS 407
centering map on incident 463 CT 556
changing CU 278
active shift 157 CW 142
agency plans using Activate Plan form 156 DC 159
agency plans using command line 156 DI 289
agent ID 100 DS 143
console display configuration 159 FI 234
password 38, 665 FR 413
primary unit 412 IA 287
signed on areas 147 ID 393
signed on areas on any console 158 IF 80, 307
signon 148 IH 304
signon agency 148 II 230
signon agency type 148 IO 430
changing headers IR 300
TDD calls 132 IS 292
text calls 129 IT 627
chat IU 266
error messages 669 IU, to close an incident 427
CI command 283 LD 435
clear work areas command 142 LL 341
cloning incidents MA 146
from command line 286 MC 461, 462
from form 283 MR 562
closing MU 416
BOLO messages 599 NG 135
incidents from command line 427 NR 601, 602
incidents from form 426 NT 608
information panel 59 OL 154
colors, in status monitors 453 ON 316
command IDs 73 PH 439
command line PU 412
closing incidents 427 QY 529
entering in order 76 RA 414
entering out of order 77 RC 362
hints 78 RE 369, 557
skipping identifiers 77 RI 282
using to open a form 71 RM 415
command line elements RP 306
command IDs 73 RR 624
identifiers 73 RT 307
user-supplied values 73 SB 396
command line punctuation 74 SC 158
commas 75 SF 37
forward slash 75 SM 568
periods 74 ST 376
semi-colons 74 SW 148
semicolons 74 TN 550

Send Feedback 681

Motorola Solutions Confidential
Index

UA 324, 333 new message 566

UC 82, 338 notification messages from command line 608
UF 318 premise hazards records 441
UG 366 road closures 505
UH 337 roll calls 346
UO 368 traffic stops 236
US 323 traffic stops from cmd line 239
UX 411 unit groups from command line 366
VQ 529 unit groups from form 364
WH 152 cross streets 490
WT 149 CryWolf
commands, list of 79 defined 659
commas 75 CS command 407
comments CT command 556
updating 267 Ctrl+Alt+Z 217
viewing 267 Ctrl+F12 219
common places CU command 278
as locations 167 customer support
defined 167 Motorola Online 30
conference information, Call Control window 110 CW command 142
conferencing voice calls
nohold 118
standard 119
D
console menu commands 48 DC command 159
consoles, synchronizing 49 deactivating roll calls 362
contacting technical support 29 default area 147
contractor request deleting
action codes 273 geofences 517
default rotation 269 messages 613
definition 268 messages permanently 622
from command line 274 notification messages 611
from the Contractor Request form 269 persons 220
rotation frequency 269 premise hazard records 444
updating 275 deleting report numbers 306
conventions 28 depleted resources 416
keyboard 27 details to follow flag
notes 28 clearing 219
typographic 28 Ctrl+F12 219
copy status monitor details 455 setting 219
counters determining
B 56 location detail from command line 435
C 56 location detail from form 431
M 56 who is signed on 152
N 56 devices, messaging 567
Q 56 DI command 289
W 56 direct GPS tracking 511
coverage groups, defined 33 directions, finding on maps 498
CR command 274 disassociating incidents 255
create time for incidents 163 from command line 289
creating in Incident Management form 288
associated incidents with initial incident 231, 287 dispatching 394
BOLO messages 597 incidents from status monitor 459
field-initiated incidents from cmd line 239 incidents using F9 key 396
field-initiated incidents from form 236 managing incident timeout value 281
geofences 513 placing incident in stacking queue 406
incidents 209 single-shot 214
labels for messages 618 units to an incident 385
location-based message groups 513 display configuration command 159
message from command line 568

682 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 Index

display status command 143 defined 234

displaying finding
duplicating incidents 182 directions on maps 498
hazard information 185 hot hits on maps 499
incidents 293 premise/hazards on maps 499
location detail from the form 431 FINISHED call status 85
location details 435 first pass traffic stops 234
premise and hazard information 185 flags, details to follow 219
premise hazard records 443 folders
premise information 185 creating for messages 620
reports menu 307 renaming 622
status monitor toolbar 454 restoring deleted personal 622
version information 29 using message folders 621
distributed query responses 521 following units using the MC command 464
DS command 143 foreign units 235
duplicate incidents format for height 221, 605
adding callers 183 forms, opening with command line 71
appending information to 183 forward slash 75
viewing 183 forwarding
duplicate incidents, displaying 182 messages 565
duty information, updating 325 notification messages 609
FR command 413
freeing units from incident
E using command line 413
edit menu 49 using Incident Management Summary form 413
editing full crew, defined 371
geofences 517 function keys
premise hazard records 443 call control 136
emergency indicator, resetting 369 F11 322
emergency notifications F2 529
example 205 F3 262
resetting 205 F4 302
units 205 F6 559
entering commands F7 240
in command entry order 76 F8 231
out of command entry order 77 F9 396, 446
equipment information keys for forms 65
updating 330 keys for menus 64
viewing 330 keys for moving between areas of CAD client 66
error messages keys for text 66
chat 669 reference 60
incident initiation 666
logging in 663 G
logging off 664
messaging 667 gate, status 510
offline recovery 669 general notification messages 573
transferring sessions 665 receiving 573
errors, fixing roll call transactions 360 sending 575
exceed stack queue 404 geofences
exchanging unit assignments 411 creating 513
defined 513
deleting 517
F editing 517
features on a map, locating 500 getting started 45
FI command 234 global tabs 54
field-initiated incidents GPS
creating from cmd line 239 direct tracking 511
creating from form 236 location tracking 511

Send Feedback 683

Motorola Solutions Confidential
Index

reporting failure icon 473 adding persons 220

grid, displaying in mapping 480 Attach tab 189, 240
groups. See unit groups cloning incidents from command line 283
GSP not reporting indicators 448 closing incidents 426
guns, submitting queries 521 Haz tab 185
Prev tab 189, 240
Query tab 187
H Incident Management History form 302
Haz tab 185 Incident Management Summary form 245
hazard information incident numbers
displaying 185 from other agencies 173
locating on maps 499 including zero 173
height, entering 221, 605 overview 173
help menu 51 partial 173
hiding status monitor toolbar 454, 456 reset interval 173
high cross street 490 using # 173
high house number 490 Incident Search form 293
hints on command line 78 incident summary list
history, viewing 302 creating from command line 292
HOLD call 85 creating from form 290
holding voice calls 116 search criteria 290
hook flash 113 incident update command 266
hot hits, locating on maps 499 Incident Update tool, accessing 627
incidents
alerts and tones, sending from TN form 544
I browsing incidents saved for offline recovery 632
IA command 287 cloning 283
icon closing using command line 427
GPS reporting failure 473 closing using Incident Management Summary form
icons 426
auto-dial 153 create time 163
cascading 486 creating for offline recovery 628
incident 468 defined 209
persons out of vehicle 469, 472 disassociating 255
unit 468 disassociating from command line 289
units on associated incidents 469 disassociating in Incident Management form 288
ICS, voice calls 138 dispatching 393
ID command 393 dispatching for offline recovery 631
identifiers dispatching from status monitors 459
default 73 displaying 293
defined 73 displaying from status monitors 449
out of order 73 dragging and dropping from status monitors 460
IF command 80, 307 finding incidents saved for offline recovery 633
IH command 304 freeing a unit using command line 413
iHOLD call status 85 freeing units from form 413
iHOLD-C call 85 generating report numbers for 306
II command 230 initiating 230
incident agency 141 IRF 194
incident dispatch managing 245, 281
backdating unit status timestamps 401 previous persons 222
command 393 previous vehicles 225
incident history recovering from offline 627
backdated unit status timestamps 400 releasing all but specified unit from 414
backdating unit status timestamps 400 reopening from command line 430
command 304 reopening from Incident Management form 428
F4 key 302 searching for 293
incident management 220 searching for on maps 491
accessing 245 start time 163
status reference 174

684 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 Index

transferring 287 IT command 627

uploading for offline recovery 632 IU command 266
viewing details 458 IU command, to close an incident 427
viewing history 304
viewing information on map 484
viewing units dispatched to 394
J
indicators, GPS not reporting 448 jurisdiction information
information panel 56 updating for units 327
accessing 58 viewing for units 327
closing 59
description 56
minimizing 59 K
moving 58 keyboard conventions 27
Infotrak command 307 keyboard shortcuts 60
Infotrak, sending data to 307 case manager 68
initiate incident command 230 interfaces 67
initiating calls on ringdown lines 113 menus 64
initiating incidents 183, 209 priority notification window 67
adding attachments 189 status monitors 67
adding callers to duplicate incidents 183
adding person information 220
adding vehicle information 223 L
creating associated incidents 231
labels
creating associated incidents with initial incident
creating for messages 618
287
using for messages 619
duplicate incidents 182
last known location 322
error messages 666
latitude and longitude, as location 168
F8 key 231
LD command 435
field initiated 234
lineup lists
field-initiated from form 236
viewing from command line 342
from the map display 497, 498
viewing from form 341
incident status reference 174
listening and joining voice calls 122
premise and hazard information 185
LL command 341
using ProQA 650
location detail
scheduling incidents 228
command 435
TDD calls 130
determining recommendations 433
text calls 129
determining using form 431
traffic stops 234
displaying recommended units 433
traffic stops from cmd line 239
location-based message groups, creating 513
traffic stops from form 236
locations
understanding the process 161
alarm number 170
update on demand 216
alias name 168
verifying an address 171
alphanumeric 164
viewing duplicate incidents 183
block ranges from command line 166
initiating voice calls 111
common place name 167
interfaces, keyboard shortcuts 67
displaying on map from Location detail form 432
intersections
entering street names without premise numbers
as a location 168
165
entering 168
finding street block ranges 166
multiple beats 175
hyphenated 164
syntax 168
intersection name 168
Invalid Location dialog box 178
invalid premise number 167
IO command 430
last known 322
IR command 300
latitude and longitude 168
iREDIALED call status 86
searching for on maps 488
IRF
street address, partial 164
defined 194
street address, whole 164
overview 194
tracking on a map 511
IS command 292

Send Feedback 685

Motorola Solutions Confidential
Index

unit history tracking 511 searching for units 493

updating 247 setting the scale 477
updating from command line 249 showing video cameras 502
updating in multi-beat situation 249 tracking locations 511
using parentheses 164 turning off labels 468
locking your session 40 units on associated incidents 469
log in error messages 663 updating cameras 504
log off error messages 664 using command identifiers 462
logging in 31 viewing incident information 484
password 32 viewing map display 461
user name 32 zooming in to a specific area 478
logging off 37 zooming in to a specific point 478
low cross street 490 zooming in with Zoom In button 478
low house number 490 zooming out from a specific area 479
zooming out from a specific point 479
mapping zooming with the MC command 463
M maps, attaching 476
M counter 56 maximum in stack queue 404
MA command 146 MC command 461, 462, 463
Mail Read command 562 centering incidents 463
mail read command 562 centering locations 463
managing centering map on location 463
incident timeout value 281 centering map on unit 463
incidents 245, 281 centering units 463
managing incidents panning 464
update on demand 216 person location 464
map labels, disabling 468 unit location 464
map layers using identifiers with 462
displaying 501 zooming 463
hiding 501 measuring, distance on map 482
mapping 463 menus
attaching maps 476 console 48
centering locations 463 edit 49
centering units 463 help 51
displaying camera icons 503 reference 48
displaying map layers 501 utilities 50
displaying non-GPS units 488 work area 49
displaying the map grid 480 message folders, using 621
finding directions 498 messages
following units 464 closing BOLO 599
hiding map layers 501 creating BOLO 597
hot hits, locating 499 creating from command line 608
icons 468 deleting notification 611
initiating incidents 497 forwarding notification 609
locating feature information 500 notification, deleting 611
measuring distance between points 482 notification, reading 601
oblique viewer 485 notification, sending predefined 609
overview 465 notification, updating 609
panning 481 notifications, defined 600
panning using the MC command 464 printing 613
persons out of vehicle 469, 472 receiving general notification 573
playing video streams 503 restoring deleted 622
premise/hazard, locating 499 searching, notification 610
road closures 505 sending BOLO 597
rotating 480 sending general notification 575
searching for incidents 491 updating BOLO 599
searching for locations 488 messages, general notification 573
searching for persons 495 messaging
about 559

686 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 Index

adding attachment 576 notifications

addressing devices 567 defined 600
addressing users 567 searching 610
creating new folders 620 NR command 601, 602
creating new message 566 NT command 608
creating personal labels 618
deleting messages 613
delivery options 570
O
display options 570 oblique viewer, using 485
error messages 667 off duty
F6 key 559 command 318
forwarding 565 units 318
identifying email recipients 569 offline
managing settings 612 browsing saved incidents 632
opening to a specific mail folder 562 creating incidents for recovery 628
permanently deleting messages 622 dispatching incidents for recovery 631
purging messages 622 finding specifics saved incidents 633
reading messages 563 recovering from 627
renaming folders 622 uploading incidents for recovery 632
replying to 565 offline recovery
saving messages to folders 620 accessing Incident Update tool 627
scheduling messages 570 error messages 669
searching for text 614 OL command 154
sending from command line 608 ON command 316
using message folders 621 online mode
using personal labels 619 command 154
using the address book 569 switching to 154
minimizing, information panel 59 opening
modifying messaging to specified mail folder 562
next occurrence of 355 status monitors 446
signed on areas 147 options
monitoring, areas 144 message delivery, setting 570
Motorola Online, using 30 message display, setting 570
move ups out of vehicle icon 469, 472
alerts and 418 overlays, using 55
overview 416 overview, mapping window 465
reassigning a unit to another station or area 416 owning agency 83, 141
returning moved up units 417
moving, information panel 58
MR command 562 P
MU command 416 pagers, using with move up command 419
Multi button 175 paging
multi-beat intersections from the command line 550
defined 175 from the TN form 543
selecting beat 175 panning map display 481
muting voice calls 115 panning using the MC command 464
parentheses in addresses 164
N PARK call 86
parking voice calls 117
N counter 56 partial crew, defined 372
NG command 135 partial incident numbers 173
nohold conference 118 partial or whole street address, as location 164
nohold transfer 119 password, changing 38, 665
non-GPS units, displaying on map 488 passwords
notes 28 restrictions 32
notification messages user names 32
forwarding 609 periods 74
updating 609 person

Send Feedback 687

Motorola Solutions Confidential
Index

information, adding to incident 220 add to associated incidents 199

updating information 263 commands to use with 198
viewing information 263 formatting 198
person location forms 198
MC command 464 overview 197
personnel information unviewed 198
updating for units 328 viewed 198
viewing for units 328 Work Assist Area 199
persons priority notifications
searching for on maps 495 keyboard shortcuts 67
PH command 439 overview 197
phone, auto-dial icon 153 priority updates
pink unit 386 defined 199
placing units on duty formatting 199
from the command line 316 ProQA
from the form 312 initiating incidents 650
ON 316 placing a case on hold 655
summary 312 reconfiguring a transmitted case 653
placing units on duty before placing them in service 357 taking a case off hold 655
plans pseudo-units, See radio pseudo-units
agency, changing using Activate Plan form 156 PU command 412
agency, changing using command line 156 punctuation
agency, defined 155 command line entry 74
position periods 74
definition 85 semi-colons 74
preassigned incident 406 purging, messages 622
predefined notification messages, sending 609
preempt, defined 404
premise hazard records
Q
adding incident locations 186, 257 Q counter 56
creating 441 queries
deleting 444 about 519
editing 443 automatic 520
for areas 436 distributed query responses 521
overview 436 from Incident Management screens 520
searching for 439 gun, submitting 521
types 436 importing responses to incidents 533
viewing 443 records 519
premises information submitting 521
displaying 185 submitting from command line 529
locating on maps 499 vehicle, submitting 521
PRESENTED call status 86 viewing responses 529
Prev tab 189, 240 query responses
previous persons, checking for 222 F2 529
previous vehicles, checking 225 Query tab 187
primary units QY command 529
changing 412
command 412
defined 411 R
indicator 246 RA command 414
Primary Work Area radio pseudo-units
defined 54 commands 266
global tabs 54 in Dptch List 386
printing placing on duty 312
alerts 549 viewing 266
from status monitor toolbar 456 radio systems
messages 613 reset unit emergency indicator command 557
status monitor details 456 radio talkgroups 555
priority comments

688 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 Index

radios keys for forms 65

resetting emergency indicators 557 keys for menus 64
talkgroups 555 keys for moving between areas of CAD client 66
RC command 362 keys for text 66
RDW, backdated unit status timestamps 399 refreshing
RE command 369, 557 map displays 143
reading status monitors 143, 456
BOLO messages 596 Release All Except command 414
messages 563 releasing voice calls 116
notification messages 601 releasing, all except specified unit 414
ready reference command 624 removing
ready reference information units from unit groups 368
accessing from command line 624 renaming message folders 622
accessing from form 623 reopening
defined 622 incident from command line 430
recalling incidents incident from form 428
from command line 300 replaying voice calls 121
from Incident Search form 293 replenishing areas 416
recommendations replenishing stations 416
Add’l Capab field 388 replying, to messages 565
adding or removing units from dispatch list 387 report numbers
All Statuses button 392 canceling 306
based on response card and run card 390 deleting 306
based on response card, run card, and ARL 389 reporting feature for voice calls 138
changing 415 reporting numbers, searching for incidents by 294
clear 389 reports
colors 386 displaying the reports menu 307
Default Sort button 392 generating report numbers for incidents 306
display Unit Management form for selected unit 392 Reports Menu command 307
displaying in Location Details form 433 request for resources with incident information 403
Missing from Inc field 387 reserved, defined 372
Missing from Recommendations field 386 resetting
preempt 389 emergency indicators 557
recommending additional units 388 incident timeout value from command line 282
redisplay list of all dispatched units 392 incident timeout value from status monitor 281
reset 389 unit emergency indicator 557
show all unit status changes and transactions 392 unit status timer 368
stacking units 389 unit’s emergency indicator 369
temporary units 392 resources
Unit Rspns field 387 defined 309
units recommended (fixed) table 386 dispatching 385
units recommended (preferred) table 386 resources. See units
use of asterisk ( * ) 388 response mode
View Unit button 392 command 415
records queries 519 defined 415
recovering from offline resetting to default response 415
about 627 restoring
browsing saved incidents 632 deleted messages 622
creating incidents 628 deleted personal folders 622
dispatching incidents 631 retrieving
finding specific saved incidents 633 BOLO messages 596
uploading incidents 632 roll calls from form 359
red RI command 282
field labels 199 right-click options in status monitors 457
tabs 199 RING call status 86
text 198 RM command 415
REDIALED call 86 road closures
redialing voice calls 112 closing 509
reference creating 505

Send Feedback 689

Motorola Solutions Confidential
Index

creating a list of 505 by incident type 294

showing on map 505 by modifying circumstance 294
viewing list 509 by priority 294
roll calls by report number 294
activating 362 by status 294
creating 346 second pass traffic stops 234
deactivating 362 sector, defined 155
fixing transaction errors 360 security
managing units in 351 owning agency 83
modifying next occurrence of 355 trusted agency 83
retrieving existing from form 359 selecting for roll calls 348
scheduling units in 354 semicolons 74
selecting units 348 sending
updating 362 BOLO messages 597
updating the current roll call 357 data to Infotrak 307
updating the last roll call 357 messages from command line 568
viewing 362 notification messages from command line 608
rotating map display 480 predefined notification messages 609
RP command 306 sessions
RR command 624 defined 41
RT command 307 locking 40
RTVI 504 transferring 41
unlocking 40
setting
S details to follow flag 219
SB command 396 map scale 477
SC command 158 message delivery options 570
scale, setting map 477 message display options 570
scheduled incidents settings, managing message 612
creating 228 SF command 37
modifying 229 shift IDs 311
scheduling showing status monitor toolbar 454
incidents 228 sign off error messages 664
messages 570 signed on areas, changing on any console 158
searching signed on, determining who is 152
addresses 622 signing in 31
BOLOs 616 signing off 37, 663
for incidents 293 single-shot dispatch 214
for incidents from command line 300 sizing status monitors 450
for incidents from Incident Search form 293 skills, searching 581, 624
for incidents on maps 491 skipping identifiers on command line 77
for locations on maps 488 SM command 568
for persons on maps 495 SMS window 98
for units on maps 493 SMS, defined 86
messages for text 614 sorting status monitor information 453, 456
notification messages 610 ST command 376
pagers 622 Stacked Incident Summary, viewing 407
phone numbers 622 stacked incidents
premise hazard records 439 call stacking queue 407
roles 622 placing incident in stacking queue 406
skills 581, 624 staffing levels at station, changing or viewing 375
users 622 standard conference 119
wildcards 68 standard transfer 120
searching incidents start time for incidents 163
by alarm level 294 Station Cover field, Unit status monitor 446
by contractor ID 299 station staffing
by contractor type 299 and unit status monitor window 382
by disposition 294 full crew defined 371
partial crew defined 372

690 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 Index

reserved defined 372 changing signed on areas on any console 158

units and recommendations 380 Reports Menu command 307
station status command 376 support, contacting 29
station-staffing SW command 148
changing staffing level 375 switch agency default command 148
station status command 374 switching to
viewing staffing level 375 online mode 154
status toolbar 456
incident status reference 174 synchronize console 49
status monitor toolbar
copy 455
default sort 456
T
displaying 454 tabs
hiding 454 global 54, 55
printing 456 taking voice calls off hold 117
refreshing 456 TALK call status 86
showing 454 TALK-C call status 86
switching to 456 talkgroups
status monitors managing from command line 556
acknowledging alerts 457 managing from form 555
colors 453 overview 555
displaying different configurations 449 TDD
displaying incidents from 449 attaching conversation to CAD 659
displaying units 449 defined 659
dragging and dropping 460 starting 659
F9 446 TDD calls
fixed areas 445 answering 130
keyboard shortcuts 67 changing the header 132
monitored areas 445 conversation window 99
multi-column display 451 initiating incident 130
opening 446 working with 130
printing details 456 technical support, contacting 29
refreshing 143, 456 telephony
right-click options 457, 459 ACD 86
signed on and monitored areas 446 ACD with forced presentation 86
signed on coverage areas 445 call statuses 85
sizing 450 configurations 86
sorting information 453 UCD 86
toolbar, switching to 456 temporary units 343
types of 446 defined 343
Unit 557 designating 343
using 445 Incident Dispatch form 343
viewing incident details 458 indicator 343
viewing unit details 459 restrictions 343
statuses of telephony calls 85 transitioning to on duty 345
street centerline 500 valid commands 344
subject TERMINATED call status 86
information, adding to incident 220 text calls
updating information 263 answering 127
viewing information 263 changing header 129
submitting initiating an incident 129
gun queries 521 timeout value
queries 521 incident, managing 281
queries from command line 529 incident, resetting from command line 282
vehicle queries 521 incident, resetting from Incident Status monitor 281
supervisors timestamps
changing agency plans using Activate Plan form backdating 396
156 backdating and incident dispatch 401
changing agency plans using command line 156

Send Feedback 691

Motorola Solutions Confidential
Index

backdating and incident history 400 creating from command line 366
backdating and RDW 399 creating from form 364
backdating and unit history 399 defined 363
timestamps, backdating unit status 396 deleting 367
TN command 550 modifying from form 367
toning unit history
from the command line 550 backdated unit status timestamps 399
from the TN form 543 backdating unit status timestamps 399
sending alerts from TN form 544 searching for from form 335
tracking locations on a map 511 transaction types 337
traffic stops 235 viewing from command line 337
creating 236 viewing from form 335
creating from cmd line 239 unit IDs
defined 234 shift IDs 311
F7 key 240 understanding 311
first pass 234 unit location, MC command 464
second pass 234 unit management summary 309
transaction types unit recommendations
incident history 304 blue color 386
unit history 337 displaying for a location 433
transferring unstaffed indicator 386
incidents 287 white color 386
sessions 41 unit status
sessions, error messages 665 backdated timestamp 396
units 334 backdated timestamps in incident dispatch 401
transferring voice calls backdated timestamps in incident history 400
blind transfer 120 backdated timestamps in RDW 399
nohold 119 backdated timestamps in unit history 399
standard 120 backdating timestamps 396
to RSPs 120 command 323
transitioning temporary units to on duty 345 F11 322
trusted agency 83 monitor 557
security 83 monitor and station staffing 382
typographic conventions 28 pseudo-units 321
summary 320
updating from the form 321
U unit summary 338
UA command 324, 333 displaying from command line 340
UC command 338 displaying from form 338
UCD, defined 86 units 348
UF command 318 alerts and tones, sending from TN form 544
UG command 366 call stacking queue 407
UH command 337 creating unit groups from command line 366
unit activities creating unit groups from form 364
displaying from command line 340 dispatching 385
displaying from form 338 displaying current activities from command line 340
unit agency 141 displaying current activities from form 338
Unit Alerting List displaying details from status monitors 449
defined 546 dragging and dropping from status monitors 460
dispatch 391 duty information 325
toning 546 emergency notification 205
Unit Cover Area field, Unit status monitor 446 exchanging unit assignments 411
Unit Cover Station field, Unit status monitor 446 freeing from form 413
unit details, viewing from status monitors 459 freeing from incident using command line 413
unit equipment groups, creating from command line 366
updating 330 groups, creating from form 364
viewing 330 in stacking queue 406
unit groups managing in roll call 351
pink 386

692 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential
 Index

placing on duty 312 UX command 411

placing on duty from the form 312
primary unit indicator 246
releasing all except specified unit 414
V
resetting emergency indicator 369 valid commands for temporary units 344
resetting unit status timer 368 vehicle
scheduling in roll call 354 updating information 264
searching for on maps 493 viewing information 264
Stacked Incident Summary 407 vehicles
summary 338 adding information to an incident 223
taking off duty 318 adding/updating vehicle information for units 329
temporary, using 343 vehicles, submitting queries 521
transferring 334 verifying, addresses 171
unit groups, adding or removing units 368 version information 29
unit status command 323 viewing 157
updating assignments from command line 333 active shift 157
updating assignments from form 324 areas 144
updating capability information 331 email 563
updating equipment information 330 incident comments 267
updating jurisdiction information 327 incident details from status monitors 458
updating personnel information 328 incident history 304
updating vehicle information 329 incident history from form 302
viewing assignments 324 incident information on map 484
viewing capability information 331 incidents from command line 266
viewing equipment information 330 maps 461, 462
viewing jurisdiction information 327 messages 563
viewing lineup list 341 oblique viewer 485
viewing personnel information 328 person information 263
viewing units dispatched to incident 394 premise hazard records 443
viewing vehicle information 329 query responses 529
unlocking your session 40 roll call 362
unstaffed indicator 386 roll calls 346
UO command 368 unit details from status monitors 459
update on demand 216 units dispatched to incident 394
UPDATED call status 86 vehicle information 264
updating voice calls
BOLO messages 599 abandoned 126
current roll call 357 adding notes 124
incident comments 267 associated calls 133
incidents from command line 266 barging 123
incidents from the command line 266 blind transfer 120
incidents from the form 245 calling RSPs 113
last roll call 357 function keys 136
notification messages 609 holding 116
person information 263 ICS 138
roll call 362 initiating 111
unit status 323 initiating calls on ringdown line 113
vehicle information 264 initiating to another position 113
updating incidents, F3 key 262 listening and joining 122
US command 323 making outgoing calls 112
user console command 147 muting 115
user names, restrictions 32 nohold conference 118, 119
user supplied values, command line punctuation 76 parking 117
users, messaging 567 redialing numbers 112
using releasing 116
command line hints 78 replaying 121
Motorola Online 30 reporting 138
status monitors 445 standard conference 119
utilities menu 50

Send Feedback 693

Motorola Solutions Confidential
Index

standard transfer 120

taking off hold 117
TDD 130
telephony statuses 85
transferring to RSPs 120
viewing notes 126
volume
call control console 105
call control ringer 105
VQ command 529

W
W counter 56
WH command 152
whitespace in commands 75
who command 152
wildcards
examples 68
using in searches 68
work area menu 49
work areas
clearing 142
global tabs 54
Primary Work Area 54
Work Assist Area 55
Work Assist Area, defined 55
working agency 141, 149
workload
workload transfer command 149
WT command 149

Z
zooming in
to a specific area 478
to a specific point 478
with Zoom In button 478
zooming out
from a specific area 479
from a specific point 479
zooming the map using MC 463

694 Send Feedback

Motorola Solutions Confidential